AGCC-02 Vol-3 Functional ECS & TVS Specifications
AGCC-02 Vol-3 Functional ECS & TVS Specifications
end of Jama Masjid Metro station including three underground metro stations (viz. Taj Mahal, Agra Fort and Jama
Masjid) including Architectural finishes, E & M, TVS, ECS etc. on Corridor-1 of Agra MRTS Project at Agra, Uttar
Pradesh, India
Contract AGCC-02
SCOPE OF WORK
ECS
1. Introduction
This section of specification defines the objectives, guidelines and requirements for Detailed
Engineering, Manufacture, Supply, Installation, Testing and Commissioning of Environment Control
System (ECS) for underground stations and associated tunnel sections in phase-1 works of AGRA
METRO. The Contractor shall be responsible for the design verification of station environmental
control system together with layout, supply, installation, testing and commissioning of all equipment
including pipe work, valves, brackets, fittings, sleeves and insulation to complete the installation.
The works to be executed under the Contract include manufacture, verification of design, delivery to
site, installation, testing, including integrated testing and commissioning, technical support and
documentation for a complete integrated Environment Control System (ECS) including all control
centres, AHUs, ECS fans, Dampers, Ducts, Electric Panels, switchgears necessary to deliver the
requirements of this Specification. It shall also include all electrical panels required for operation of
the Tunnel Ventilation System (TVS) as per specification, SLD and BOQ provided including
termination of cables both side.
The Environment Control System is to be manufactured, supplied, installed, tested and commissioned
by the Contractor and shall meet all performance and functional requirements as defined in the
Specification, Scope, Drawings and BOQ. The Commissioning of the full Environment Control
System including all equipment’s e.g. Chillers, Pumps, Cooling Towers, AHUs, Fans, Electrical
Panels and associated cables etc. Any failure of the Environment Control System equipment will be
sole responsibility of the contractor.
The Contractor shall verify the equipment capacities and sizing and shall be responsible to obtain the
performance requirements mentioned in this scope of work. The Contractor shall also confirm the
general adequacy of the space requirements within voids or service ducts, openings, main routes etc.
Trackway exhaust systems will be installed by the contractor to enhance trackway temperature
control by removing a portion of train generated heat while the train is within the bounds of a station.
This system involves the use of fans to induce airflow across heat sources located beneath the transit
vehicle as well as from air conditioning units on top of the transit vehicle and exhaust the heated air.
During normal conditions, trackway exhaust fans shall operate continuously. When the station air
conditioning system is operating in closed environment, the air collected from the trackway exhaust
system shall be the return air feed to the station air handling units.
Station air conditioning systems shall maintain specific temperature and humidity conditions in
underground station concourse and platform public areas. During an emergency fire condition within
a station, the station air handling system shall be operable as a smoke removal system to supplement
the smoke extraction system.
The contractor should adopt the internationally proven technology to ensure reliable and economical
service. All equipment selected should occupy minimum space, energy efficient and having high
power to weight ratio as per International Standards.
The air handling units and associated equipments smoke extraction and ventilation fans with related
equipments shall be installed in the ECS plant rooms. The actual equipment positions, sizes and
arrangement shall be verified by the Contractor to suit each station. Actual equipment capacities and
selections shall be determined on an individual basis for each station and basis of selection to be
brought out in details.
Tunnel Ventilation and ECS systems are inter-related. This aspect must be taken into account while
designing the ECS system.
The station air conditioning systems shall also be operable as a smoke control system during
emergency conditions. The smoke control system shall be capable of providing a stream of fresh air
in station entrances; all exit routes and concourse area as well.
Performance requirements
Station air conditioning systems shall be designed to maintain specific design temperatures and
provide a minimum of 0.005 m3/s fresh air per person. 10% of the total circulation air shall be added
from the outside fresh air at the AHU inlet to pressurise the station.
The Services to be performed by the Contractor shall include, but not be limited to, the
following:
7. Manpower and all necessary tools for work execution and installation commissioning.
1.2.1 In a general manner, all works, facilities and services and other components as required whether or
not specified necessary to deliver the requirements of this Specification to ensure a perfect and
complete execution of ECS works under this scope and according to relevant code and standards
and to this Specification.
1.3 Scope of the work of supply
The Contractor shall supply all equipment and facilities necessary to meet the requirements of this
technical specification, including, but not limited to:
1. Chillers, Cooling Towers, Condenser & Chilled water pumps, Air Handling Units, Fan Coil
Units, Air Cooled chillers, ECS fans, Split A/c, different dampers required for ECS system,
Louvers, Grilles & Diffusers, piping, Duct work, cable trays, cabling and MCC’s along with
DBs etc. required for efficient working of ECS system.
2. All auxiliary equipment such as: conical fan inlets and outlets, sound attenuators, ducts and
inspection covers
3. All cable trays, cables and cabling necessary for the ECS and TVS Works;
4. All panels for the operation of the TVS and ECS works.
7. All equipment associated with any interfaces required to ensure operation within the
performance requirements;
8. All special test equipment and tools, including data configuration tools;
9. Maintenance tools;
10. All equipment necessary to carry out factory and on site testing and commissioning;
12. The contractor will be responsible for sealing with fire rated material of all openings left due
to Works Under this contract.
13. Provision of hook in the roof to facilitate lifting of the equipments for installation. These
hooks are to be left for future use by the maintenance branch.
The emphasis is to explain the requirements of work, for achieving an efficient & safe working
system commensurate to the best international standards and practices. Every effort has been made to
cite the design requirements very clearly, however the contractor shall follow acceptable standards &
design procedures akin to the best available in world Metros where this is not explicitly mentioned to
ensure a perfect and complete execution of ECS works
This Specification should be read in conjunction with the General Conditions of Contract (GCC), the
Special Conditions of Contract (SCC), the Employer’s Drawings and any other document forming
part of the Contract.
In the event of a conflict between this Specification and any other standards or specification quoted
herein, the requirements of this Specification shall prevail.
The order of precedence, with item (a) having the highest priority, is:
(a) BOQ
(b) Specification
(d) Drawings
Notwithstanding the precedence specified, the Contractor shall always immediately seek advice
from the Employer in the event of conflicts between Specifications.
Although responsibility for the design service of the Works lies with the Detailed Design Consultants
(DDC) the Contractor shall thoroughly satisfy himself that the tentative capacities, ratings and
quantities of equipment as specified herein meet the functional and operational requirements.
The contract price shall add any necessary equipment, equipment of higher capacities and higher
ratings for the systems and sub-systems necessary for the complete, safe, reliable and operable
Environment Control System providing all clarifications and justifications for the same.
The Contractor shall be responsible for design verification and detailed engineering, Manufacture,
Supply, Installation, Testing and Commissioning of ENVIRONMENT CONTROL SYSTEM for
underground stations, tunnel section covered in respective lot.
The detailed scope of work for ENVIRONMENT CONTROL SYSTEM (ECS) is described in the
specification.
failure history;
date installed; and
date(s) tested.
All equipment and software, down to the line replaceable unit, shall have a unique identification
number that is capable of being identified electronically and manually.
4. Interfaces
The design and construction of the underground stations is a complex multidisciplinary project,
requiring close interaction and co-ordination between the various designers and builders. With a view
to minimising, if not eliminating problems which could arise during construction, it is imperative that
the scope of work of different Agencies is defined as accurately as possible and also the
responsibilities and obligations of different designers/builders to reckon and provide for the works by
other related Agencies are clearly spelt out. The objective of the ‘Interfacing document’ is to address
the above requirement.
(i) To obtain from the Civil Contractor information reasonably required for enabling the
Contractor to meet the construction target dates.
(ii) The Civil Contractor will be the coordinating entity and play the major role in the interface
with Contractor; however the Contractor present on site will also be responsible for any delay
on the schedule as specified in his contract.
(iii) Contractor will make sure that he provides the updated valid documents, for the reference of
the Civil Contractor in time, where Contractor requires the Civil Contractor to execute his
work as per the requirement of the Contractor. These documents will be the reference
documents for the Interface Management being carried out by the Civil Contractor.
(iv) Where the execution of the Civil Contractor depends upon the Site Management or
information to be given by the Contractor, the Contractor shall provide correct and accurate
information in time so as to enable them to meet their respective programs.
(v) It is to be ensured that all provisions for access and delivery of plant is coordinated with and
reflected in the Contractors Delivery Route Drawings. The Contractor shall also ensure that all
plants are delivered at the time agreed to allow openings to be left in the structure for such
delivery in accordance with the Civil Contractor’s programme.
(vi) Contractor must ensure that the production of Working Drawings for Services to be provided
in the base slab, other slabs and structures (such as earthing, provision of ducting, conduiting,
cable routing, DB mounting, piping and other works included in the tender) is carried out in
time and approval obtained from the Employers Representative. A Copy of Drawings along
with schedule for execution of such works must be handed over to Civil Engineering
Contractor in time, to enable him to plan his activities. Further, Contractor shall ensure that
information required by Civil Contractor for any concreting / other works where ECS and
electrical works are involved is made available in time.
(vii) The Contractor shall conduct regular meetings with the Civil Contractor as necessary to clarify
particular aspects of the interfacing requirements of the works. He will also attend regular Co-
ordination meetings convened by the Engineer for interface.
(viii) The Contractor, shall in carrying out his co-ordination responsibilities, raise in good time and
provide sufficient information for the Engineer to decide on any disagreement with Civil
Contractor. If the Contractor despite having taken all reasonable efforts cannot resolve such
disagreement, then the decision of the Engineer shall be final.
(ix) The Contractor shall ensure the presence of his qualified and experienced Engineer during
Civil construction of station to enable proper interface with Civil Contractor so as to ensure
smooth completion of works.
(x) Access will be provided to the staff of the Contractor for carrying out their works and bringing
materials and Equipments at the site. However the security of material and Equipments
brought at the site, by the Contractor is Contractor’s responsibility.
5. Installation
The following paras provide general guidelines for the installation of ECS systems under this
Contract. The detailed installation requirements have been described in the technical specifications
for individual system / equipments.
The Employer, the Engineer and/or any of their staff shall have the facility to monitor all Tests and
have access to all Test records. All costs associated with Testing shall be borne by the Contractor,
unless otherwise specified, including the services of any specialised personnel or independent
assessors. The Contractor shall also bear any expenses incurred due to re-testing caused by defects or
failure of equipment to meet the requirements of the Contract in the first instance.
The Contractor is reminded that, at some point, the traction system will be energised and that
additional precautions for the safety of staff and co-ordination of activities after "power -on" shall be
anticipated in his installation, testing and commissioning programmes.
6.3 Installation Tests
A. Prerequisites for Installation
Prior to installation, the Contractor shall ensure that equipment delivered to Site has not been
damaged in transit and ensure for their dimensional accuracy.
Designs for the Sections under test shall be completed and submitted to the Engineer for review prior
to Installation.
B Inspection
The inspection shall verify that equipment has been installed to the procedures and design that have
been reviewed without objection by the Engineer and that equipment is correctly located and
labelled.
The Contractor shall maintain inspection records to demonstrate that each item of equipment has
been inspected and found to be satisfactory, and attach to this record a detailed list of any
discrepancies found and remedial work carried out.
C. Installation Tests
Installation tests shall be carried out by the Contractor for each subsystem following Installation but
before Functional Tests to demonstrate that the installation has been carried out correctly and
equipment is properly housed and fixed.
During and on completion of installation, the Contractor shall undertake testing of all cables, wiring
and equipment, instrumentation and protection devices, in a progressive sequence and in accordance
with the overall-testing programmes. These tests shall culminate in Functional Tests to verify the
correct operation of all apparatus and, where appropriate, correct response to the respective control
commands or monitored function.
D. Functional Tests
The functional tests shall be carried out on installed equipment before System Acceptance Tests
(SAT) to demonstrate that the Section of the Works operates correctly in accordance with the
Specification.
The functional tests shall sequence through all required operations to prove that the System performs
in accordance with the Specification and that the local configuration data (for example, control
tables) is correct.
G. System Acceptance Tests (SAT)
The Contractor shall prepare and organise comprehensive programmes of Tests to demonstrate to
the Engineer that all systems, sub-systems and apparatus defined under the Contract meet the
specified performance requirements in all respects.
The requirements that shall be satisfied before the commencement of the System Acceptance Tests
(SAT) are:
All documentation pertaining to the Test Report shall be submitted to the Engineer for review.
Facilities for the maintenance of the System shall be in place.
6.4 Integrated Testing
Prior to opening for Public Services, Employer will conduct Integrated System Tests in conjunction
with System wide Contractors to demonstrate that the complete system comprising the Project is fully
operational and meets the specified performance criteria. The conduct of these Integrated System
Tests shall include a period of Trial Running. The Contractor shall be in attendance as a requirement
during the Defects Liability Period.
The regular circulation of a full complement of trains as required for 24 hours of scheduled
service, including peak demand. Intentional disruption of the service shall be included (e.g.
extended dwell times, vehicle, power systems, ATP, ATO, point operation and train
detection failures) in order to check operational stability and safety of the system and the
effectiveness of the supervisory control software employed in reducing the effect of such
disruptions;
The determination of the actual headway achieved at station for all specified routes and
including intermediate reversing movements and movement into and out of the depot.
The Contractor shall allow for attendance over the whole of this period, which may be expected to
include maintenance and repair activities and also further opportunity for technical staff training.
place of testing;
The procedures shall be submitted for review by the Employer’s Representative; the following shall be
included as a minimum:
frequency of maintenance;
type of maintenance;
the equipment identification;
safety precautions to be observed;
step by step guide to the maintenance required; and
explanatory diagrams.
Also in each plant room maintenance schedule shall be displayed.
6.8 SPARE PARTS, SPECIAL TOOLS & TEST EQUIPMENT : GENERAL
During the Defects Liability Period, the Contractor shall provide free of cost all spares/materials
(excluding consumables required) for day to day operations. The provision of other spares Shall be
as defined in the BOQ. Before the commission of revenue services the contractor shall supply the
spares, jigs and fixtures materials not later than 6 weeks before the commissioning of revenue
services. A list of such spares and materials required for maintenance during the Defects Liability
Period to be provided free of cost by the Contractor and if list is found insufficient then the same
need to be augmemented for preventive and corrective maintenance of all the equipments supplied
under the contract without any extra cost.
If these spares are not consumed during the Defects Liability Period, these shall become the
property of the Employer at the end of Defects Liability Period.
6.9 - TRAINING
6.9.1 General
Training shall be provided for Employer's engineers and staff such that the Systems can be
operated and maintained in accordance with the Manufacturer’s requirements.
The Contractor shall submit for review by the Employer’s Representative a training plan 180 days
prior to the first testing and commissioning activity.
6.9.2 Scope Of Training
The Contractor shall conduct at least 1 course on the operations aspects of the Tunnel Ventilation
System. The courses will be attended by a minimum of 10 Employer's staff.
5 System Design and Configuration
The Contractor shall provide training to the Employer's engineers and staff in the design and
configuration of the System. This training shall include:
Systems overview;
Systems configuration and data preparation; and
Principles of operation.
6 Maintenance Training
Training shall be provided to the Employer's engineers and staff to undertake maintenance of the
System provided following substantial completion of the Works. This training shall include:
(1) principles of operation;
(2) preventative and corrective maintenance tasks and procedures;
(3) fault repair to the lowest level replaceable unit;
(4) use of test equipment, diagnostic and maintenance aids; and
(5) software maintenance including database structure, generation, modification and system
software organisation.
The Contractor shall conduct at least 2 courses on the maintenance aspects of the Tunnel
Ventilation System. The courses will be attended by about 20 Employer's staff.
6.10 - DOCUMENTATION
6.10.1 General Requirements
This section defines how submissions, including Design Documents and other material submitted
for review by the Employer’s Representative, shall be presented and controlled.
6.10.2 Submission Control
The Contractor shall submit a Submissions Programme in accordance with the Employer's
Requirements. In addition, the Submissions Programme shall:
(1) identify all design, manufacturing, testing, operations and maintenance contract deliverables,
required by the Specification; and
(2) assign reference numbers to all submissions.
All documentation shall be submitted to the format contained in the Employer’s Requirements.
Textual submittals, including reports, specifications, and calculations, shall also be submitted in
electronic form, wherever feasible.
All ‘As built’ final documentation, including drawings and support documentation, shall be
electronically stored on CD ROM media. The Contractor shall, not less than 90 days prior to the
substantial completion of the last Section of each Corridor, submit a first draft of the
documentation CD to the Employer’s Representative. A final version shall be submitted at the
time when the Contractor applies to the Employer’s Representative for a Substantial Completion
Certificate. Any updates due to design changes during testing or revenue service shall be at the
Contractor’s expense.
The Standard CD ROM format shall be as defined in ISO 9660. The Contractor shall demonstrate
that drawings reproduced from the CD-ROM are legible. Legibility will be determined by being
able to distinguish all dimensions, dimension lines, outlines and dashlines without use of
supplementary viewing aids.
The CD ROM format shall be consistent with the CAD system specified by the Authority at the
time of delivery.
Materials deliverables shall be identified by a clear and durable identification plate, which shall
include the following information:
(1) issue and revision status and date;
(2) Contract title and number;
(3) the names of the Contractor, subcontractor, supplier or manufacturer;
(4) identification of product by either description, model number, type number or serial number; and
(5) subject identification by Contract Drawing, Design Drawing or Specification reference.
6.10.5 Supplemental Modification Deliverables
Changes in submissions previously reviewed without objection will not be permitted unless those
changes are resubmitted in the same manner as the original deliverable and reviewed by the
Employer’s Representative.
SCOPE OF WORKS
(TUNNEL VENTILATION SYSTEM)
CONTRACT -AGCC02
The Works to be executed under the Contract include the design verification, manufacture, delivery,
installation, testing, commissioning, technical support and documentation for a complete, integrated
Tunnel Ventilation System, including all control centres, fans, dampers, ducts, necessary to deliver
the requirements of this Specification.
Although responsibility for the design service of the Works lies with the Detailed Design Consultants
(DDC) the Contractor shall thoroughly satisfy himself that the tentative capacities, ratings and
quantities of equipment as specified herein meet the functional and operational requirements.
The contractor shall add any necessary equipment, equipment of higher capacities and higher ratings
for the systems and sub-systems necessary for the complete, safe, reliable and operable TV system
providing all clarifications and justifications for the same. No Separate Payment will be made for the
same.
The Tunnel Ventilation System is to be designed manufactured, supplied, installed, tested and
commissioned by the Contractor and shall meet all performance and functional requirements as
defined in the Specification.
Local codes, regulations and standards shall take precedence where these standards or requirements
are more onerous than other international standards.
NFPA 130: Latest edition- Fixed Guideway Transit Systems: any non-compliance shall be approved
in writing by the AGRA METRO.
Ventilation and air conditioning systems for stations and tunnels are to be based on the current
"Handbook" series published by the American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air
Conditioning and the "Subway Environmental Design Handbook" published under the sponsorship of
the United States Department of Transportation, Urban Mass Transportation Administration.
Fans shall be rated in accordance with the "Standard Test Code for Air Moving Services" and the
"Test Code for Sound Rating Air Moving Devices" of the Air Moving and Conditioning Association
Inc., USA.
Noise criteria shall be as described herein and in the current four volume "Handbook" series
published by the American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Employer’s
Representatives (ASHRAE).
The standards to be followed during the design, construction, and installation of the Tunnel
Ventilation System shall be generally as listed, except where specific requirements are given in the
Specification, which shall take precedence. The Contractor may propose alternative or additional
standards for review by the Employer’s Representative at least 60 days before application.
All codes and standards shall be submitted in English language. The design of any one equipment
shall be to a single code or specification. The parallel use of different codes for particular items or
components shall not be allowed.
International Standards
Anti-Friction Bearings Manufacturers Association (AFBMA).
9, Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.
11, Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.
Air Moving and Control Association (AMCA):
210, Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating.
300 Test Code for Sound Rating of Air Moving Devices
301 Method for Publishing Sound Ratings
American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
S12.34 Survey Methods for Determination of Sound Power Levels of Noise
Sources.
B46.1 Surface Texture, Surface Roughness, Waviness and Lay, Part 1.
C1 Specification of General Requirements of a Quality Program
S12.36 Survey Methods for Determination of Sound Power Levels of Noise
Sources
Z49.1 Safety in Welding and Cutting
Z55.1 Grey Finishes for Industrial Apparatus and Equipment
American Welding Society (AWS):
D1.1, Structural Welding Code - Steel.
D1.3, Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel.
A 239, Locating the Thinnest Spot in Zinc (Galvanised) Coating on Iron or Steel
Articles by the Preece Test (Copper Sulphate Dip).
A 276 Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Bars and Shapes
A 525, Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Hot Galvanised) by the Hot-Dip Process.
A 588, High Strength Low Alloy Structural Steel with 50 ksi (345 MPa) Minimum
Yield Point to 4 Inch (100 mm) Thick.
A 666 Authentic Stainless Steel, Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar for Structural
Applications
B 247, Certification for Aluminium Alloy Die Forgings, Hand Forgings and
Rolled Ring Footing.
B 686, Aluminium Alloy Castings, High Strength
E 84 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
E 94, Radiographic Testing.
E 138, Wet Magnetic Particle Inspection.
E 155, Reference Radiographs for Inspection of Aluminium and Magnesium
Castings.
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Employer’s Representatives (IEEE):
85 Standard Test Procedure for Airborne Sound Measurements on Rotating
Electric Machinery
112, Test Procedure for Poly phase Induction Motors and Generators.
519, Recommended Practices and Requirements for Harmonic Control in
Electric Power Systems.
Military Specifications (Mil. Spec.):
MIL-P-24441/A, General Specification for (Ships), Paint, Epoxy Polyamide.
MIL-P-24441/1A, Paint, Epoxy Polyamide, Green Primer, Formula 150, Type 1.
MIL-P-24441/2A, Paint, Epoxy Polyamide, Exterior Top Coat, Haze Grey, Formula
151, Type 1.
training for the Employer's Engineers and Training Instructors, operations staff, maintenance
staff and Engineering staff;
Attenuators.
all equipment associated with any interfaces required to ensure operation within the
performance requirements;
all special test equipment and tools, including data configuration tools;
maintenance tools;
all equipment necessary to carry out factory and on site testing and commissioning;
In the event of a conflict between this Specification and any other standards or specification quoted
herein, the requirements of this Specification shall prevail.
The order of precedence, with item (a) having the highest priority, is:
(a) Specification
(b) International or Indian Standards referenced herein.
Notwithstanding the precedence specified, the Contractor shall always immediately seek advice
from the Employer in the event of conflicts between Specifications.
Section 1.2
1 The Contractor shall proceed with his detailed system design based on CRD’s developed by DDC
based on the results of computer simulation related to the air velocity operational scenarios under
normal, congested, emergency conditions and routine tunnel maintenance during Traffic block time
(non-revenue period).
2 The capacity of each tunnel ventilation fan shall be min of sizes as per BOQ each with a minimum
fan total pressure as suggested by DDC (need to be verified as per actual site requirement ) -.
3 The terminal air velocity from relief shafts located in areas where public would be exposed to the
airstream, shall not exceed 2.5 m/s, otherwise, the terminal air velocity from relief shafts shall not
exceed 5.0 m/s.
4 The design shall not exceed a tunnel air temperature of 46-degree C during congested and normal
conditions. The average platform air velocity should not exceed 3 m/s. The public should not be
exposed to platform peak velocities in excess of 5m/s. The design shall provide emergency mode air
velocity to be adequate to meet the emergency condition but shall not exceed 11m/s. Any reference
to an "average" velocity should be interpreted to mean an "average over train headway".
5 The Contractor shall verify the critical air velocity required to prevent back layering using his own
calculations, as per calculation procedure described in Section 9 of the Subway Environmental
Design Handbook, US Department of Transportation, Urban Mass Transit Administration.
1.2.2 Dampers
1 Bypass dampers shall be provided to allow airflow between the trackway and the surface during
periods for normal operation.
2 Isolation dampers shall prevent airflow between trackways during emergency operation.
Additionally, the use of a Closed System requires the installation of two dampers in the duct that
connects between the TES and AHUs. The damper closest to the TES is an isolation damper to be
designed, furnished, installed and tested using the specification.
1.2.3 Not Applicable
1.2.4 Noise Criteria
Noise level criteria will need to be developed for each station. Consideration will need to be given
to local noise criteria and the placement of shaft outlets. Recommended maximum noise level are
as follows:
Station’s concourse, platform areas 55 dBA
To boundary of nearest property 60 dBA (7am to 11pm)
To boundary of nearest property 55 dBA (11pm to 7 am)
Equipment noise 85 dBA within plantroom
These values should be considered applicable during normal operation of the railway. During
emergency or train congestion situations, which are considered special, the maximum noise level
in the stations’ concourse and platform areas should not exceed 75dBA.
Operation of one tunnel ventilation fan (per TV shaft) during Engineering maintenance hours after
normal operation hours will be anticipated. The maximum external noise level as stated above will
be complied with during this operation.
Section 1.3
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
1.3.1 General
The TVS includes the TVFs, the TEFs.
attenuators and dampers. Dampers are also used to control the path through which the air will
flow. When station air-conditioning plant is running the air collected by the TES may be
recirculated to the station AHUs. During temperate seasons, when the station air conditioning plant
is turned off, the TES may discharge directly to atmosphere. The contractor need to interface duct
connections with ECS contractor and shall inform the TES flow rate.
2. The TEFs may run continuously during normal and emergency conditions. The three track way
exhaust fans in the fan room shall be interconnected with air ducts and isolation dampers.
3. All ductwork and supports will be capable of withstanding temperatures of 250 degrees C for one
hour.
1 All the tests shall be carried out by the Contractor. The Employer’s Representative reserves the
right to carry out any additional tests he considers necessary to satisfy himself that the System
meets the requirements of the Specification.
2 The Contractor shall support the Employer’s Representative’s additional tests as necessary. The
Contractor’s support shall include, but not be limited to:
provision of test equipment;
attendance of competent staff; and
provision of test procedures.
3 The Contractor shall submit a Testing and Commissioning program for the Employer’s
Representative’s review within 12 months from the Date for Commencement of the Works.
4 The Contractor shall provide details of the testing activities as specified in the Specification in the
Testing and Commissioning program
A plan for performance and functional tests and demonstrations to be performed during pre-
revenue operations shall be submitted to the Employer’s Representative for review at least 120
days prior to the commencement of Pre-Revenue Operations.
A performance demonstration plan shall be submitted for review by the Employer’s Representative
at least 120 days prior to commencement of the DLP.
The Contractor shall be responsible for adding to all of the Combined Services Drawings with cable
installation details and the timely supply of these marked up drawings to the Employer’s
Representative for overall co-ordination.
4 Earthing
The Contractor shall coordinate at each equipment room earth bars that shall be connected to the
earthing system provided by others. Two separate earthing points shall be provided, one for chassis
and one for signal reference. The earth bars shall be used as common points for all earthing in that
location.
1.5.7 Asset Identification
The Contractor shall submit an asset database for review by the Employer’s Representative. The
database shall contain the complete asset listing for the Tunnel Ventilation System.
Section 1.6
Testing and Commissioning
1.6.1 General
The Contractor shall perform all forms of test procedures applicable to the system and shall conduct
factory, site installation and acceptance tests.
The commissioning activity shall include a period of Integrated System Testing followed by a period
of Trial Running for staff training and familiarisation and timetable proving purposes.
The regular circulation of a full complement of trains as required for 24 hours of scheduled service,
including peak demand. Intentional disruption of the service shall be included (e.g. extended dwell
times, vehicle, power systems, ATP, ATO, point operation and train detection failures) in order to
check operational stability and safety of the system and the effectiveness of the supervisory control
software employed in reducing the effect of such disruptions;
The determination of the actual headway achieved at each station for all specified routes and
including intermediate reversing movements and movement into and out of the depot.
The Contractor shall allow for attendance over the whole of this period, which may be expected to
include maintenance and repair activities and also further opportunity for technical staff training.
1.7.1 General
The Contractor shall ensure that the Tunnel Ventilation System is supportable throughout the service life of
the System to address, as a minimum, the following:
Routine and corrective maintenance procedures shall be supplied for all equipment. The format
shall be as follows: uniform format and layout irrespective of equipment supplier; colour coding
for each activity; cross referenced to the Operation and Maintenance Manuals; and document
control information.
The procedures shall be submitted for review by the Employer’s Representative; the following
shall be included as a minimum: frequency of maintenance; type of maintenance; the equipment
identification; safety precautions to be observed; step by step guide to the maintenance required;
and explanatory diagrams.
The Contractor shall provide free of cost six weeks before start of trial running special tools and
test equipment which are essential for day to day use in both corrective and preventative
maintenance and for workshop use in the overhaul of all modules and units likely to be required
over the full service life of the installation. The Contractor shall submit a schedule of all tools and
equipment with details of calibration and supplier along with the tender.
1.9.1 General
Training shall be provided for Employer's engineers and staff such that the Tunnel Ventilation System
can be operated and maintained in accordance with the Manufacturer’s requirements.
The Contractor shall submit for review by the Employer’s Representative a training plan 180 days
prior to the first testing and commissioning activity.
6 Maintenance Training
Training shall be provided to the Employer's engineers and staff to undertake maintenance of the
System provided following substantial completion of the Works. This training shall include:
(1) Principles of operation;
(2) Preventative and corrective maintenance tasks and procedures;
(3) Fault repair to the lowest level replaceable unit;
(4) Use of test equipment, diagnostic and maintenance aids; and
(5) Software maintenance including database structure, generation, modification and system
software organisation.
The Contractor shall conduct at least 2 courses on the maintenance aspects of the Tunnel
Ventilation System. The courses will be attended by about 20 Employer's staff.
(1) Identify all design, manufacturing, testing, operations and maintenance contract
deliverables, required by the Specification; and
(2) Assign reference numbers to all submissions.
All documentation shall be submitted to the format contained in the Employer’s Requirements or
as approved by the Employer.
All submittals, including reports, specifications, Vendor and Technical Submittal, Test formats,
drawings and calculations etc, shall also be submitted in electronic form..
All ‘As built’ final documentation, including drawings and support documentation, shall be
electronically stored on CD ROM media. The Contractor shall, not less than 90 days prior to the
substantial completion of the last Section of each Corridor, submit a first draft of the
documentation CD to the Employer’s Representative. A final version shall be submitted at the
time when the Contractor applies to the Employer’s Representative for a Substantial Completion
Certificate. Any updates due to design changes during testing or revenue service shall be at the
Contractor’s expense.
The Contractor shall demonstrate that drawings reproduced from the CD-ROM are legible.
Legibility will be determined by being able to distinguish all dimensions, dimension lines, outlines
and dashlines without use of supplementary viewing aids.
The CD ROM format shall be consistent with the CAD system specified by the Authority at the
time of delivery.
The Contractor shall provide supplemental information with each submission, in sufficient detail to
explain completely the equipment described and their intended manner of use.
SECTION 1
DESIGN CRITERIA
ATTACHMENT A - INTERFACES
The following interface tables are not to be considered a complete listing of required interfaces but read as
a guideline for typical TVS interfaces
1 Control signal and Receipt of control signal signalling Trackway and tunnel
communication from OCC equipment ventilation control
standard. Locations room/OCC/LCP according Signalling
of stopping trains at system
congestion and
emergency sent to
OCC
1 Supply cables and Locations of air jet TVS Shafts Avoid obstruction of
support to be routed nozzle openings and air flow by cables and
around shaft openings tunnel ventilation shaft supports
to tunnel openings to tunnel roof
END OF ATTACHMENT A
SCOPE OF WORK
BMS
1. Introduction
This specification defines the objectives, guidelines and requirements for Design and detailed
Engineering, Manufacture, Supply, Installation, Testing and Commissioning of BUILDING
MANAGEMENT SYSTEM for underground stations and associated tunnel sections on Phase-1
AGRA MRTS System.
The Works to be executed under the Contract include the design, development, manufacture,
verification, delivery to site, installation, testing, commissioning (including integrated testing and
commissioning) and technical support for a complete Building Management System (BMS)
(including TVS SCADA work) to fully integrate control, monitoring, and supervision Environmental
Control Systems, Low Voltage Power & Distribution System, Fire Alarm System, Hydraulic System
(Seepage, Sewage, Bore Well Pumps etc.), and other nominated Building Services Systems and
interface with Tunnel Ventilation System SCADA at the station level as well as at the OCC level,
including all PLC Equipment, CPU’s, Modules, Sub Modules, Power Supplies, Local Control Panels,
PC Work Stations, Printers, Local Area Network (LAN), Ethernet Hubs and Switches, Cable
containment and wiring systems, and other components as required whether or not specified
necessary to deliver the requirements of this Specification. The Contractor shall also interface for
control, monitoring, and supervision as required at the Operational Control Centre (OCC).
The ECS equipment shall be monitored and operable from the local ECS panel and in the station
control room and also monitoring of ECS plants working through some designated indications from
the OCC through SCADA. Necessary provisions to be made in the station control room and OCC to
enable monitoring and control. The communication line from SCR to OCC shall be provided by other
contractor.
The BMS is to be designed manufactured, supplied, installed, tested and commissioned by the
Contractor and shall meet all performance and functional requirements as defined in the
Specification.
The emphasis is to explain the requirements of work, interfaces with other contractors for achieving
an efficient & safe working system commensurate to the best international standards and practices &
contractor shall supplement it adequately for obtaining a satisfactory working Metro system akin to
the best standards available worldwide. Every effort has been made to cite the design requirements
very clearly, however in this contract, the contractor shall follow acceptable standards & design
procedures akin to the best available in world Metros where this is not explicitly mentioned. The item
descriptions are intended to briefly describe the work to be performed under that item and to identify
associated work. It is not a full and complete description of the work to be performed. The
Contractor shall carry out all the work necessary to meet the requirements of the Specification.
The Building Management System is to be manufactured, supplied, installed, tested and
commissioned by the Contractor and shall meet all performance and functional requirements as
defined in the Specification. The Commissioning of the full Building Management System including
all equipments remote control and monitoring and to implement the logics as desired by the Engineer
and defined in the specifications. Any failure of the BMS equipment will be sole responsibility of the
contractor. The contractor shall interface with the other designated contractors also for meeting the
all requirements.
Air conditioning system controls shall be arranged to maintain conditions as specified for different
seasons and varying modes of operation. Analysis for different modes of operations of the systems for
different seasons shall be carried out and furnished.
The following items related to safety and environment shall be automatically controlled to maintain
the desired station environmental conditions.
Station return air, trackway exhaust fans, air handling unit fans and associated dampers
External interface with the fire protection systems for activation of the trackway exhaust fans
for station platform level fires or shut down of respective TVS equipment.
Indications
Sufficient indications of plant state shall be provided and transmitted to the Station control centre
to permit a full analysis of plant running /fault conditions and also to provide adequate indication
in the operation control centre that all operational and safety related equipment are operating in
desired manner.
The following list identifies some, but not necessarily all items, which shall be monitored in the
SCR or OCC for which abnormal conditions shall be alarmed. It should be possible to carry out
necessary operations from SCR for controlling the equipment as corrective measures to deal with
the situations causing the alarm.
The status of the local control switch and starter power isolator switch shall be monitored to
ensure that fans are operable from the SCR.
Station return air fans/track way exhaust fans, air handling unit fans and associated dampers.
Individual chillers
The condition of the following points shall be monitored and measured, and coded values
transmitted.
Abnormal temperatures of the foregoing measured points shall be indicated in the station control
room.
The SCADA system will transmit the nominated signals from SCR to the operation control centre.
Air Flow switches shall be provided for Supply, exhaust and the station smoke removal fans to
provide a positive indication of the fan operation at the SCR as well as OCC
This document contains a general description of the system concepts and major components, and
sections covering definitions, requirements for interfaces with other contracts, general mechanical
and electrical installation design/performance requirements, and testing requirements.
The emphasis is to explain the requirements of work, interfaces with other contractors for
achieving an efficient & safe working system commensurate to the best international standards and
practices. Every effort has been made to cite the design requirements very clearly; however the
contractor shall follow acceptable standards & design procedures akin to the best available in
world Metros where this is not explicitly mentioned.
In this document the term “provide” shall mean “the detailed design covering specifications,
calculations, drawings for installations & maintenance, manufacture and factory testing or
procurement, delivery, off-loading, installation, testing, commissioning, handover to AGRA
METRO, AGRA METRO staff training including supply of O & M manuals & as-built drawings,
interface and co-ordination with other contractors or arising out of concurrent works and
warranties”.
Submittals shall be in the form of reports, drawings, calculation sheets & schedules both in hard
copy and on computer diskette. The contractor shall furnish backup materials such as codes /
Standards / software programs free of cost for the Employer’s Representative’s use in
understanding/evaluation of the submittals. The contractor will furnish a list and format of
submittals for each area of work to the Employer’s Representative for consent covering the
requirements given herein.
The design and supply of elements shall be to international specifications and standards, which
must be stated at the time of tendering. Approved local standards shall also be complied wherever
necessary. The designs shall be fully integrated with compatible components including where these
interface with other contractors’ works.
Unless approved otherwise, all equipment items shall be uniform throughout the Contract in order
to minimise maintenance spares and the number of manufacturer interfaces.
The Services to be performed by the Contractor shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
6.Manpower and all necessary tools for work execution and installation commissioning.
In a general manner, all works, facilities and services to ensure a perfect and complete execution of BMS
works under this scope and according to relevant code and standards and to this Specification.
The Contractor shall supply all equipment and facilities necessary to meet the requirements of this
technical specification, including, but not limited to:
2. All cable trays, cables and cabling necessary for the BMS Works;
6. All equipment associated with any interfaces required to ensure operation within the
performance requirements;
7. All special test equipment and tools, including data configuration tools;
8. Maintenance tools;
9. All equipment necessary to carry out factory and on site testing and commissioning;
11. The contractor will be responsible for sealing with fire rated material of all openings left due
to BMS works.
This Specification should be read in conjunction with the General Conditions of Contract (GCC), the
Special Conditions of Contract (SCC), the Employer’s Drawings and any other document forming
part of the Contract.
In the event of a conflict between this Specification and any other standards or specification quoted
herein, the requirements of this Specification shall prevail.
The order of precedence, with item (a) having the highest priority, is:
(a) Specification
Notwithstanding the precedence specified, the Contractor shall always immediately seek advice from
the Employer in the event of conflicts between Specifications.
Although responsibility for the design service of the Works lies with the Detailed Design Consultants
(DDC) the Contractor shall thoroughly satisfy himself that the logics defined or specified herein meet
the functional and operational requirements.
The contract price shall add any necessary equipment, equipment of higher capacities and higher
ratings for the systems and sub-systems necessary for the complete, safe, reliable and operable BMS
providing all clarifications and justifications for the same.
The Contractor shall be responsible for design verification and detailed engineering, Manufacture,
Supply, Installation, Testing and Commissioning of Building Management System for , underground
stations and associated tunnel sections on Phase-1 AGRA MRTS System.
The detailed scope of work for Building Management System is described in the specification.
3 Not used.
failure history;
date(s) tested.
All equipment and software, down to the line replaceable unit, shall have a unique identification
number that is capable of being identified electronically and manually.
4. Interfaces
The design and construction of the AGRA Metro Railway, is a complex multidisciplinary project,
requiring close interaction and co-ordination between the various designers and builders. With a view
to minimising, if not eliminating problems which could arise during construction, it is imperative that
the scope of work of different Agencies is defined as accurately as possible and also the
responsibilities and obligations of different designers/builders to reckon and provide for the works by
other related Agencies are clearly spelt out. Tunnel Ventilation and ECS systems are closely inter-
related. This aspect must be taken into account while designing the BMS system.
(xi) To obtain from the Civil Contractor information reasonably required for enabling the
Contractor to meet the construction target dates.
(xii) The Civil Contractor will be the coordinating entity and play the major role in the interface
with Contractor, however the Contractor present on site will also be responsible for any delay
on the schedule as specified in his contract.
(xiii) Contractor will make sure that he provides the updated valid documents, for the reference of
the Civil Contractor in time, where Contractor requires the Civil Contractor to execute his
work as per the requirement of the Contractor. These documents will be the reference
documents for the Interface Management being carried out by the Civil Contractor.
(xiv) Where the execution of the Civil Contractor depends upon the Site Management or
information to be given by the Contractor, the Contractor shall provide correct and accurate
information in time so as to enable them to meet their respective programs.
(xv) It is to be ensured that all provisions for access and delivery of plant is coordinated with and
reflected in the Contractors Delivery Route Drawings. The Contractor shall also ensure that all
plants are delivered at the time agreed to allow openings to be left in the structure for such
delivery in accordance with the Civil Contractor’s programme.
(xvi) Contractor must ensure that the production of Working Drawings for Services to be provided
in the base slab, other slabs and structures (such as earthing and other works included in the
tender) is carried out in time and approval obtained from the Employers Representative. A
Copy of Drawings along with schedule for execution of such works must be handed over to
Civil Engineering Contractor in time, to enable him to plan his activities. Further, Contractor
shall ensure that information required by Civil Contractor for any concreting / other works
where works are involved is made available in time.
(xvii) The Contractor shall conduct regular meetings with the Civil Contractor as necessary to clarify
particular aspects of the interfacing requirements of the works. He will also attend regular Co-
ordination meetings convened by the Engineer for interface.
(xviii) The Contractor, shall in carrying out his co-ordination responsibilities, raise in good time and
provide sufficient information for the Engineer to decide on any disagreement with Civil
Contractor. If the Contractor despite having taken all reasonable efforts cannot resolve such
disagreement, then the decision of the Engineer shall be final.
(xix) The Contractor shall ensure the presence of his qualified and experienced Engineer during
Civil construction of station to enable proper interface with Civil Contractor so as to ensure
smooth completion of works.
(xx) Access will be provided to the staff of the Contractor for carrying out their works and bringing
materials and Equipments at the site. However the security of material and Equipments
brought at the site, by the Contractor is Contractor’s responsibility.
5. Installation
The following paras provide general guidelines for the installation of BMS systems under this
Contract. The detailed installation requirements have been described in the technical specifications
for individual system / equipments.
5.1 Installation Plan and Programme
The Contractor shall prepare and submit the Installation Plan for review of the Engineer 30 days prior
to the start of Installation on Site. The Installation Plan shall show how the Contractor proposes to
organise and carry out the Installation and complete the whole of the Works by the given Key Dates.
The Contractor shall attend weekly planning meetings with the Engineer to finalise the work detail,
commencing 4 weeks prior to the start of Installation on Site.
unless otherwise specified, including the services of any specialised personnel or independent
assessors. The Contractor shall also bear any expenses incurred due to re-testing caused by defects or
failure of equipment to meet the requirements of the Contract in the first instance.
The Contractor is reminded that, at some point, the traction system will be energised and that
additional precautions for the safety of staff and co-ordination of activities after "power -on" shall be
anticipated in his installation, testing and commissioning programmes.
6.4 Installation Tests
A. Prerequisites for Installation
Prior to installation, the Contractor shall ensure that equipment delivered to Site has not been
damaged in transit and ensure for their dimensional accuracy.
Designs for the Sections under test shall be completed and submitted to the Engineer for review prior
to Installation.
B Inspection
The inspection shall verify that equipment has been installed to the procedures and design that have
been reviewed without objection by the Engineer and that equipment is correctly located and
labelled.
The Contractor shall maintain inspection records to demonstrate that each item of equipment has
been inspected and found to be satisfactory, and attach to this record a detailed list of any
discrepancies found and remedial work carried out.
C. Installation Tests
Installation tests shall be carried out by the Contractor for each subsystem following Installation
but before Functional Tests to demonstrate that the installation has been carried out correctly and
equipment is properly housed and fixed.
During and on completion of installation, the Contractor shall undertake testing of all cables,
wiring and equipment, instrumentation and protection devices, in a progressive sequence and in
accordance with the overall-testing programmes. These tests shall culminate in Functional Tests to
verify the correct operation of all apparatus and, where appropriate, correct response to the
respective control commands or monitored function.
D. Functional Tests
The functional tests shall be carried out on installed equipment before System Acceptance Tests
(SAT) to demonstrate that the Section of the Works operates correctly in accordance with the
Specification.
The functional tests shall sequence through all required operations to prove that the System
performs in accordance with the Specification and that the local configuration data (for example,
control tables) is correct.
G. System Acceptance Tests (SAT)
The Contractor shall prepare and organise comprehensive programmes of Tests to demonstrate to
the Engineer that all systems, sub-systems and apparatus defined under the Contract meet the
specified performance requirements in all respects.
The requirements that shall be satisfied before the commencement of the System Acceptance Tests
(SAT) are:
All documentation pertaining to the Test Report shall be submitted to the Engineer for review.
Facilities for the maintenance of the System shall be in place.
6.4 Integrated Testing
Prior to opening for Public Services, Employer will conduct Integrated System Tests in conjunction
with System wide Contractors to demonstrate that the complete system comprising the Project is fully
operational and meets the specified performance criteria. The conduct of these Integrated System
Tests shall include a period of Trial Running. The Contractor shall be in attendance as a requirement
during the Defects Liability Period.
The regular circulation of a full complement of trains as required for 24 hours of scheduled
service, including peak demand. Intentional disruption of the service shall be included (e.g.
extended dwell times, vehicle, power systems, ATP, ATO, point operation and train
detection failures) in order to check operational stability and safety of the system and the
effectiveness of the supervisory control software employed in reducing the effect of such
disruptions;
The determination of the actual headway achieved at each station for all specified routes and
including intermediate reversing movements and movement into and out of the depot.
The Contractor shall allow for attendance over the whole of this period, which may be expected to
include maintenance and repair activities and also further opportunity for technical staff training.
place of testing;
During the Defects Liability Period operation & maintenance will be conducted by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall ensure that in order to support the Employer during the DLP, personnel are available
with the relevant skills and level of competence.
The Contractor shall immediately inform the Employer upon it becoming apparent that the quality or
supply of materials and components is or is likely to be affected, and without delay submit to the
Employer’s Representative for review its proposals for alternative sources of supply.
6.9 - TRAINING
6.9.1 General
Training shall be provided for Employer's engineers and staff such that the Systems can be
operated and maintained in accordance with the Manufacturer’s requirements.
The Contractor shall submit for review by the Employer’s Representative a training plan 180 days
prior to the first testing and commissioning activity.
The Operations and Engineering staff shall also be trained to address efficiently and effectively
failures of equipment, software and operation of the Environment Control System in these
abnormal conditions. The Contractor shall, as a minimum, provide the following:
recovery to normal operations after a System failure and other incidents;
selection and deselecting of backup control functions;
data logging, retrieval and preservation;
contingency arrangements; and
6.10 - DOCUMENTATION
6.10.1 General Requirements
This section defines how submissions, including Design Documents and other material submitted for
review by the Employer’s Representative, shall be presented and controlled.
6.10.2 Submission Control
The Contractor shall submit a Submissions Programme in accordance with the Employer's Requirements.
In addition, the Submissions Programme shall:
(1) identify all design, manufacturing, testing, operations and maintenance contract deliverables,
required by the Specification; and
(2) assign reference numbers to all submissions.
All documentation shall be submitted to the format contained in the Employer’s Requirements.
Textual submittals, including reports, specifications, and calculations, shall also be submitted in electronic
form, wherever feasible.
All ‘As built’ final documentation, including drawings and support documentation, shall be electronically
stored on CD ROM media. The Contractor shall, not less than 90 days prior to the substantial completion
of the last Section of each Corridor, submit a first draft of the documentation CD to the Employer’s
Representative. A final version shall be submitted at the time when the Contractor applies to the
Employer’s Representative for a Substantial Completion Certificate. Any updates due to design changes
during testing or revenue service shall be at the Contractor’s expense.
The Standard CD ROM format shall be as defined in ISO 9660. The Contractor shall demonstrate that
drawings reproduced from the CD-ROM are legible. Legibility will be determined by being able to
distinguish all dimensions, dimension lines, outlines and dash lines without use of supplementary viewing
aids.
The CD ROM format shall be consistent with the CAD system specified by the Authority at the time of
delivery.
6.10.3 Contractor's Responsibilities
In addition to the requirements of the Employer's Requirements, the Contractor shall ensure that the
requirements contained herein are carried out.
The Contractor shall maintain a complete up-to-date, organised file of all past and current submissions
including an index and locating system, which identifies the status of each submission.
The index shall be available for the Employer’s Representative’s review, and shall be used to:
(1) assign sequential numbers to each contract deliverable; and
(2) assign new deliverable numbers to all resubmissions and cross-reference to previous submissions.
The Contractor shall provide supplemental information with each submission, in sufficient detail to explain
completely the equipment described and their intended manner of use.
6.10.4 Material Contract Deliverables
Materials deliverables shall be identified by a clear and durable identification plate, which shall include the
following information:
(1) issue and revision status and date;
SCOPE OF WORK
TVS SCADA
1. Introduction
The Works to be executed under the Contract include the detailed design, development, manufacture,
verification, delivery to site, installation, testing, commissioning (including integrated testing and
commissioning) and technical support for a complete Integrated Supervisory Control System (ISCS)
to fully integrate the control, monitoring, and supervision of Tunnel Ventilation System from OCC as
well from station level. The Equipment, CPU’s, Modules, Sub Modules, Power Supplies, Local
Control Panels, Servers, Work Stations, modems, Gateways, RTUs, Printers, Local Area Network
(LAN), Ethernet Hubs and Switches, Ventilation Control Panel (VCP), Cable containment and wiring
systems, and other components as required whether or not specified necessary to deliver the
requirements of this Specification to fully integrate the control, monitoring, and supervision of
Tunnel Ventilation System from OCC in future and at present from Station Control Room as well as
for control, monitoring, and supervision as required at the Operational Control Centre (OCC) in
future and at present from Station Control Room for the ECS and other E&M systems . The TVS
contractor shall interface with the requirements of control, monitoring, and supervision as required at
the Operational Control Centre (OCC) for the ECS and E&M systems. Communication channel
between station to OCC and stations will be provided by others.
The Integrated Supervisory Control System (ISCS) is to be designed manufactured, supplied,
installed, tested and commissioned by the Contractor and shall meet all performance and functional
requirements as defined in the Specification.
The Commissioning of the fully Integrated Supervisory Control System (ISCS) including all
equipments remote control and monitoring and to implement the logics as desired by the Engineer
and defined in the specifications. Any failure of the ISCS/TVS equipment will be sole responsibility
of the TVS contractor. The contractor shall interface with the ECS, E&M and S&T contractors for
meeting the all requirements.
This document contains a general description of the system concepts and major components, and
sections covering definitions, requirements for interfaces with other contracts, general mechanical
and electrical installation design/performance requirements, and testing requirements.
The emphasis is to explain the requirements of work, interfaces with other contractors for achieving
an efficient & safe working system commensurate to the best international standards and practices.
Every effort has been made to cite the design requirements very clearly, however the contractor shall
follow acceptable standards & design procedures akin to the best available in world Metros where
this is not explicitly mentioned.
In this document the term “provide” shall mean “the detailed design covering specifications,
calculations, drawings for installations & maintenance, manufacture and factory testing or
procurement, delivery, off-loading, installation, testing, commissioning, handover to AGRA
METRO, AGRA METRO staff training including supply of O & M manuals & as-built drawings,
interface and co-ordination with other contractors or arising out of concurrent works and warranties”.
Submittals shall be in the form of reports, drawings, calculation sheets & schedules both in hard copy
and on computer diskette. The contractor shall furnish backup materials such as codes / Standards /
software programs free of cost for the Employer’s Representative’s use in understanding/evaluation
of the submittals. The contractor will furnish a list and format of submittals for each area of work to
the Employer’s Representative for consent covering the requirements given herein.
The design and supply of elements shall be to international specifications and standards, which must
be stated at the time of tendering. Approved local standards shall also be complied wherever
necessary. The designs shall be fully integrated with compatible components including where these
interface with other contractors’ works.
Unless approved otherwise, all equipment items shall be uniform throughout the Contract in order to
minimise maintenance spares and the number of manufacturer interfaces.
The Services to be performed by the Contractor shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
Detail Design, manufacture, verification, delivery, installation, testing, commissioning and
technical support for a complete, Integrated Supervisory Control System (ISCS) to fully
integrate the Tunnel Ventilation System and to implement the control, monitoring, and
supervision as required at the Operational Control Centre (OCC) and station level for
underground stations and associated tunnel sections of Phase-1 works of AGRA MRTS .
to implement the control, monitoring, and supervision as required at the Operational Control
Centre (OCC) for ECS and E&M works for underground stations and associated tunnel
sections of Phase-1 works of AGRA MRTS.
training for the Employer's Engineers and Training Instructors, operations staff, maintenance staff
and Engineering staff;
All necessary equipments at OCC whether specified or not specified like servers, work station,
RTUs, Modems, Gateways, switches and other associated accessories including cables their
containment arrangement necessary to provide for control, monitoring, and supervision of
Tunnel Ventilation System from OCC as well as from station level and ECS, PS and BS
system from OCC.
Work Stations in all the stations, PLCs, VCP, LCPs, Ethernet switches, Printers, Pressure
Differential Switches, Temperature and Humidity Sensors, transducers and other equipment as
defined in the BOQ and required for efficient working of ISCS system.
Control equipment, including accessories / components,
All cable trays, cables and cabling necessary for the ISCS Works;
Enclosures and supporting brackets for housing and fixing equipment;
Earthing of all equipments as defined in the specifications;
All equipment associated with any interfaces required to ensure operation within the performance
requirements;
All equipment necessary to allow the introduction of future services without disruption to Phase I
services;
All special test equipment and tools, including data configuration tools;
Maintenance tools;
All equipment necessary to carry out factory and on site testing and commissioning;
All software, appropriately safety validated, verified and certified, to meet the requirements of the
Specification;
All software and hardware required for data logging;
The contractor will be responsible for sealing with fire rated material of all openings left due to
BMS / TVS SCADA works.
In a general manner, all works, facilities and services to ensure a perfect and complete execution of
Integrated Supervisory Control System works under this scope and according to relevant code
and standards and to this Specification.
The Contractor shall develop operating scenarios for normal, congested and emergency
situations and shall provide control sequencing to provide for safety of equipment and
passengers during emergency situations especially during evacuation of passengers.
The TVS shall be completed and equipped with provisions for automatic, manual, local
and remote controls so that the fans & motors can be operated from a Station Control
Room (SCR) or from the Operations Control Centre (OCC).
Upon loss of control power, TVS components shall automatically operate as described for
emergency conditions with the exception that trackway isolation dampers shall remain
open.
Temperature monitors will be installed by the Contractor in each running tunnel at a
suitable distance away from the stations / shafts.
2 Qualifications of Equipment Manufacturer and Providers:
The automatic control systems and equipment shall be furnished by manufacturers who
have manufactured similar control system equipment for a period of at least five years.
Control equipment shall be installed, tested, commissioned and adjusted under the direct
supervision of the manufacturer or his authorised agent.
Installation of controls shall be by experienced personnel under the direct supervision of
trained and qualified contractor’s personnel.
All items necessary to make the installation complete in every respect, safe and ready for
regular operation and use, and for easy maintenance shall be furnished by the Contractor.
In design and purchase of equipment, the interchangeability of items, subassemblies, parts,
motors, starters, relays, and transducers shall be considered.
3 Control System Interface
The control system for the TVS to be provided by the Contractor shall comprise of a Local
Control System that shall interface with the other systems to be provided by other
Designated Contractors
The TVS and ECS will normally be controlled and monitored from the OCC. At OCC, a
Supervisory Communications and Data Acquisition System (SCADA), will control and
monitor the TVS plant in each station building such that they are normally unattended
locally. AGRA METRO reserves right not to award/ execute the work of RTUs at the
station and other equipment at the OCC level.
The local control system for the TVS shall be designed to receive control commands from
OCC, to control the TVS equipment to the desired conditions and report equipment status,
including operation alarms, to the OCC via SCADA, Ventilation Control Panels (VCP).
TVS contractor shall also be responsible for communicating the data to OCC by the E&M
and ECS system BMS to provide the control and monitoring logics in OCC. AGRA
METRO reserves right not to award/ execute the work of RTUs at the station and other
equipment at the OCC level in that event provision to operate the systems from SCR shall
be fully functional.
4 System Components
The Local Control System components for the TVS shall comprise: External interface with the
SCADA to facilitate control & monitoring of the TVS equipment at OCC. External interface with
the fire protection systems for activation of the trackway exhaust fans for station platform level fires
or shut down of respective ECS equipment. Local Sequential Controllers (LSC) and LCPs and
work station. Interfacing with the Motor Control Centres (MCCs). Ventilation Control Panels
(VCP). Remote I/O units for interfacing with Electro/Pneumatic Panel for the compressed air
system for the automatic dampers. (If pneumatic damper actuators are opted for by the Contractor)
Sensors and field devices. Programming and Maintenance (PM) terminals.
The control and monitoring of the TVS equipment at the OCCs shall be via the RTU,
modems & gateways.
The Contractor shall utilize the data necessary so that the following functions can be
performed from the OCC:
To provide operating command modes and set points to the LSCs and VCP’s and LCPs.
To provide individual or group start/stop and indicate status of TVS equipment.
To provide centralised logging of selected TVS equipment including periodic reports on
usage as well as program maintenance guides.
To indicate and log alarms such as high temperatures, equipment fault/failure, etc.
To provide Daily Report, Weekly Report, Monthly Report of total energy consumption and
Operating Hours Report of all TVS equipment.
To indicate and log the operating status and alarm conditions of the TVFs, TBFs, UPEFs,
OTEFs and their associated dampers, tunnel ventilation system bypass and isolation
dampers, MCCs and emergency stop push button.
To provide remote control for the TVFs, TEFs and their associated dampers.
To provide the control , monitoring and report generation, log the operating status and alarm
conditions for ECS and E&M system.
6 The Contractor shall provide necessary hardware, software, data, etc., for station so that the
following control and monitoring functions for the TVS can be performed ( AGRA METRO
reserves right not to award/ execute the work of RTUs at the station and other equipment at the OCC
level ):
To Initiate operation of the tunnel ventilation system from the OCC in response to train
congestion operations resulting from a delay or operational problems which prevents the free
flow of trains through the system. When a train stops in a tunnel due to congestion on the
running line and when the tunnel temperature rises above a pre-set value, the relevant TVS
operation mode shall be activated by a command from the SCADA, which is referred to as
the “Demand Signal”. The Demand Signal will be provided by others through the SCADA.
To initiate operation of the TVS in response to emergency operations which generally result
from a malfunction of the train on track. An emergency may include major disruptions such
as a train on fire requiring passenger evacuation. The TVS control system shall enable the
OCC operator to quickly activate the appropriate operation mode of the TVS plant for
emergency ventilation of the tunnels or trackways, e.g. to direct smoke away from the
evacuation path during fire emergencies.
To initiate operation of the TVS to provide adequate ventilation in the tunnels during traffic
block period (non-revenue period).
7 TVS System Back-up
To provide back-up for the operation of the TVS in the event of failure of automatic control of the
SCADA, the following additional provisions shall be provided:
Manual activation of the congestion and emergency operation mode from the VCP in the
Station Control Room.
Manual operation of the individual TVFs and TEFs from the LCP.
8 Local Sequential Controller (LSC)
This is an electronic device located in the plant Rooms of station where the PLCs are located to
maintain the normal operation of the TVS at the stations. One LSC shall be provided in each ends of
station to control the associated TVS equipments. The Contractor shall provide the necessary
interfacing and redundant communication links between the LSCs at both ends of station to perform
the interlocking, control, operation and monitoring functions and requirements for the TVS
equipment.
Principal functions of the LSCs shall include but not limited to the following:
To receive commands from the SCADA/OCC and perform sequential starting of the equipment
with an adjustable pre-set time delays to avoid excessive surge on the power supply system during
starting of the equipment.
To monitor the status and alarm indications of all TVS equipment and provide automatic
changeover to the standby or idling equipment whilst retaining flashing indications for the
malfunctioned equipment at the Local Controls. The LSCs shall be able to activate or reset buzzers
at the associated Local Control Panel upon alarm condition.
To monitor the status and alarm indications of all TVS and associated equipment and report any
change of status to SCADA and the Programming and Maintenance (PM) terminals.
To perform automatic start-up of the TVS plant in the morning and shut down at night.
To receive from and send data to SCADA.
This Specification should be read in conjunction with the General Conditions of Contract (GCC), the
Special Conditions of Contract (SCC), the Employer’s Drawings and any other document forming
part of the Contract.
In the event of a conflict between this Specification and any other standards or specification quoted
herein, the requirements of this Specification shall prevail.
The order of precedence, with item (a) having the highest priority, is:
(a) Specification
Notwithstanding the precedence specified, the Contractor shall always immediately seek advice from
the Employer in the event of conflicts between Specifications.
Although responsibility for the design service of the Works lies with the Detailed Design Consultants
(DDC) the Contractor shall thoroughly satisfy himself that the logics defined or specified herein meet
the functional and operational requirements.
The contract price shall add any necessary equipment, equipment of higher capacities and higher
ratings for the systems and sub-systems necessary for the complete, safe, reliable and operable BMS
providing all clarifications and justifications for the same.
The TVS SCADA Contractor shall be responsible for design verification and detailed engineering,
Manufacture, Supply, Installation, Testing and Commissioning of TVS SCADA at stations and OCC
works as defined in the scope of work above.
The detailed scope of work for TVS SCADA (ISCS) System is described in the specification.
The contractor shall submit in English language, all the following drawings and documents according
to the time table defined below which may be modified according to the contractual planning of the
equipment supply:
3.2 Within one and half months after the Notice to Proceed
4. Interfaces
The design and construction of the AGRA Metro Railway, is a complex multidisciplinary project,
requiring close interaction and co-ordination between the various designers and builders. With a view
to minimising, if not eliminating problems which could arise during construction, it is imperative that
the scope of work of different Agencies is defined as accurately as possible and also the
responsibilities and obligations of different designers/builders to reckon and provide for the works by
other related Agencies are clearly spelt out. The objective of the ‘Interfacing document’ is to address
the above requirement.
4.3 Deleted
5. Installation
The following paras provide general guidelines for the installation of TVS SCADA systems under
this Contract. The detailed installation requirements have been described in the technical
specifications for individual system / equipments.
6.1 General
The Contractor shall perform all forms of test procedures applicable to the system and shall conduct
factory, site installation and acceptance tests.
The commissioning activity shall include a period of Integrated System Testing followed by a period
of Trial Running for staff training and familiarisation and timetable proving purposes.
The regular circulation of a full complement of trains as required for 24 hours of scheduled
service, including peak demand. Intentional disruption of the service shall be included (e.g.
extended dwell times, vehicle, power systems, ATP, ATO, point operation and train
detection failures) in order to check operational stability and safety of the system and the
effectiveness of the supervisory control software employed in reducing the effect of such
disruptions;
The determination of the actual headway achieved at each station for all specified routes and
including intermediate reversing movements and movement into and out of the depot.
The Contractor shall allow for attendance over the whole of this period, which may be expected to
include maintenance and repair activities and also further opportunity for technical staff training.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section A23
Electronic Anti Fouling System……………………………..1036
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A00.1. General
A00.1.1. Description
A00.1.1.1 This section specifies the requirements for furnishing, installing, testing and
commissioning of the Environmental Control System for AGRA Metro.
A00.2.1. The following standards shall be applicable in general to each equipment and
component of the ECS. Specific standards are indicated in the particular
specification of each equipment.
A 194 Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High-Pressure and
High-Temperature Service
A 588 High Strength Low Alloy Structural Steel with 345 MPa
Minimum Yield Point to 100 mm Thick.
A 666 Authentic Stainless Steel, Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar for
Structural Applications
ISO 281 Rolling bearings: dynamic load ratings and rating life
ISO 1680 Test code for the measurement of airborne noise emitted by
rotating electrical machinery: engineering method for free field
conditions over a reflecting plane
ISO 8821 Mechanical vibration: balance. Balancing shaft and fitment key
convention
machines
A00.4.1 The Contractor shall provide a list of tools and test equipment for the repair
Of any special apparatus and proposal for conducting system acceptance testing
and to support the extended period of trial running.
A00.5.2 The contractor shall explain to O&M personnel, in full and to their complete
understanding, all procedures necessary to operate and maintain all
equipment and systems on a continuing basis.
A00.5.3 The contractor shall Prepare and review the contents of the O&M Manuals
with O&M personnel in full detail to explain all aspects of the Manual and
the operation and maintenance of all equipment and systems.
1. Fabrication drawings
2. Interlock drawings
3. Erection drawings
4. Wiring drawing
6. As built drawings
A00.7. Maintenance
A00.7.1. A maintenance plan shall be provided which shall include the following:
A00.7.1.1 Operating and maintenance instructions which shall describe the procedures for
operating and maintaining each item, unit/equipment and which shall include all
technical data for its operation, routine inspection survey, routine maintenance,
procedures for removal and replacement of components and test running.
A00.7.1.2. Parts catalogue and recommended list of spares for one year operation and for
10 years operation
A00.7.1.3 Special tools, jigs or fixings required for dismantling and test/diagnostic
equipment performance monitoring.
A00.7.2 The documentation included within the various operation and maintenance
manuals being supplied shall include sections as appropriate to the specific
equipment and systems being provided:
A00.7.2.3 Software system manuals: Each software package and each piece of
equipment which incorporates programmable devices and for which bespoke
software has been prepared specifically for this application.
A00.7.2.4 Equipment room manuals: All wiring diagrams and circuits, equipment
layout, terminal and cable listing and including such external equipment as may
be necessary for completeness.
A00.7.2.6 The Operating/User Manuals shall be provided in both the English and Hindi
languages. Other technical manuals shall be supplied in the English language
only.
A00.7.3.1 All items of equipment shall have attached to it a rating plate or be indelibly
labelled or otherwise identified to show its type, serial number, version,
function, location, rating or limitation as appropriate.
A00.7.3.2 Removable modules shall have the same identification on the fixture to which
the module is attached. The identification plate or label on the fixture shall
be adjacent to the identification plate of the module such that it will not be
obscured when the module is in place.
A00.7.3.4. In general, all labels shall be in both English and Hindi languages.
A00.7.3.5. All equipment and software, down to the line replaceable units, shall have a
unique identification number that is capable of being identified electronically
and manually.
A00.7.4 Standardisation
A00.7.4.1 Where practical and as part of the general design philosophy to minimise the
number of efficient components used on the plant and equipment supplied
for the Contract, similar plant and equipment will be
replaceable/interchangeable, of modular design and adaptable and extendable.
Piping and cabling shall carry standard colour coding for identification and
categorisation for each kind of use/type. Similarly, a standard procedure
shall be followed for identification of each category of equipment while
marking and numbering each category of equipment.
A00.7.4.3 Test standards shall be framed such that all the plant and equipment meets
the same test criteria. To ensure that this will be the case the following shall
apply:
Type testing, routine testing and endurance tests shall be carried out under
similar conditions
A00.8.1.2 The AC system shall be a centralised chilled water air conditioning system.
Its central chilled water plant shall be located in the ancillary building
located over ground adjacent to the station. The chilled water pipes from the
AC plant to the station shall run in pipe trenches/tunnel.
A00.8.1.3 The cooling towers shall be located over the ancillary building or at ground.
A00.8.1.4 The central chilled water plant shall finally consist of 3 Screw / Centrifugal Water
Chilling units of capacity as per BOQ, 4 primary chilled water pumps (3
working + 1 stand-by), 4 horizontal split casing condenser water pumps (3
working + 1 stand-by) and 3 vertical induced draft cooling towers.
A00.8.1.5 The station shall be air-conditioned with the help of air handling units,
located in ECS plant room. The concourse and the platform will be served by
these AHUs. The fresh air for station shall be provided by axial fan located in
ECS plant room. The Back of House rooms shall be air conditioned with fan
coil units. Fresh air for these areas shall be provided through Ventilation
Supply fans.
A00.8.1.6 The AHU and FCU shall be supplied with chilled water through insulated
piping.
A00.8.1.8 The TES consists of Trackway Exhaust Fans (TEF) connected to ducts running
over the track and under the platform. This system under normal circumstances
functions as the return air system for the AHU again. In case of fire or
smoke these fans will also be utilised for extracting the smoke from Platform.
Smoke extraction from the concourse will be through the Smoke extract fans.
A00.8.1.9 The ECS plant room consists of axial fans for supply and axial fans for exhaust.
A00.8.1.10 All the fans mentioned under the ventilation system are located in the ECS plant
room.
A00.8.1.11 The wall-mounted exhaust fans are required to be provided for ventilation of the
pump rooms and other areas.
A00.9.1 Noise emanating from mechanical services installations shall not exceed the
following levels:
A00.9.2 The noise level from the ventilation system should not exceed 80 dBA in the
tunnel when used for applying ventilation under congested traffic conditions or
smoke control in an emergency.
A00.9.3 Noise emanating from the following equipment/service installations shall not
exceed 55dB for the static machines and 70dB for rotating machinery at a
distance of 1 metre to match or exceed the relevant international standards:
Air conditioners
Ceiling fan
Exhaust fans
Motors
A009.4 The allowable plant room noise criteria shall be 85db (A).
A00.10.1 Equipment producing vibrations shall be isolated from the structure by spring
or rubber-in-shear vibration isolators. All piping and ductwork connecting to this
equipment shall contain flexible connections
A00.11.2 In cases where units are ceiling suspended, the support system shall be
adequately braced to ensure stability during unit start up, operation and shut
down.
A00.12. Maintainability
A00.12.1 Items such as knock out panels, double doors, floor drains and access hatches
shall be provided by the other Contractors. The Contractor shall co-ordinate as
necessary.
A00.13.1 Equipment, control devices, valves and piping systems shall be permanently
labelled by the Contractor after installation. The labels shall conform to a
system-wide method. This method shall identify individual equipment items
and provide information regarding equipment type, equipment function, flow
direction and other such data as appropriate. Identification shall be keyed to the
control and piping schematics.
A00.14.1 The following shall apply to all plants in station air conditioning return
ducts:
A00.14.1.1 Local fan motor starters and related operating control devices shall be isolated
from the ventilation airflow by a separation having a fire resistance rating of at
least one hour.
A00.14.1.2 Thermal overload protection devices shall not be provided in fan motor
control circuits for high temperature rated fans.
A00.14.1.3 Wiring for all essential and safety plant shall consist of two separate
electrical feeders to an automatic transfer switch. The electrical rating for the
transfer switch shall fully accommodate the available short circuit level at the
outgoing terminals of the transfer switch. Each feeder shall originate from a
different source and shall be separated physically to the maximum extent
possible.
A00.14.2 Cables shall not be installed either exposed or surface mounted in air
plenums that may carry air at elevated temperatures during fire emergency
conditions.
A00.14.3 All conductors shall be enclosed in their entirety in armour sheaths, conduits,
cable tray, boxes and cabinets.
A00.15.1 Voltage for power equipment shall be 415V 3-phase or 240V 1-phase, as
required. Motors rated 0.37kW and larger shall be rated 415V, 3-phase, 50Hz.
Motors rated smaller than 0.37 kW shall be operated at 240V 1- phase
A00.16.1 All panel enclosures shall be of sturdy and robust construction to the best
standards and practice to accommodate and support all equipment mounted on
them without vibration or movement. Structural members shall not obstruct
access to equipment, units nor sub-assemblies. Access doors to cubicles shall be
equipped with integral locks.
A00.16.2 All underground electrical enclosures shall be furnished with a high standard
of resistance against moisture and dust penetration to ensure reliability of the
enclosures.
A00.16.3 All parts and pieces of the enclosures shall be free from sharp edges or burrs.
All holes in metalwork shall be protected by substantial grommets or bushes to
protect wiring passing through them.
A00.17.1 Adequate space shall be provided for working clearances and service
aisles, where required, and for removal or replacement of the equipment.
A00.20. Execution
A00.20.1. Examination
A00.20.1.1 Prior to installation of any equipment on site, the Contractor shall ensure that the
area where the plant or equipment is located is in a safe condition for installation
to commence.
A00.21.2.1 The preparation of all fixings and drilling of any holes required
A00.21.2.2 Cutting and forming of holes for services through walls, floors, ceilings,
partitions, roof, etc
A00.21.2.3 Cutting and forming of chases, recesses, in floors, walls for the services
A00.21.2.4 Formation of concrete bases, plinths, for plant and equipment
A00.22. Installation
A00.22.1 Any special requirements for the installation of the equipment will be
advised to the Engineer
A00.22.2 All components shall be sized to fit through all plant room access doorways
A00.23.1. General
A00.23.1.2 The Employer will be given the opportunity to witness all tests. A minimum of 6
weeks advance written notice of tests shall be given.
A00.23.1.4 The Contractor shall provide all instruments, and sufficient evidence of the
accuracy of the test instruments shall be provided. Test methods shall be
demonstrated to the Enginner where required.
A00.23.1.5 The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a schedule detailing the
equipment, which he proposes to use in the testing and commissioning of the
services and the test methods to be employed.
Ammeter, Tachometer
A00.23.2.1 The testing of chilled water systems will be carried out to ensure safe
operating conditions consistent with design performance. Site testing shall include
inspection and testing of welding and brazing, pressure testing for soundness of
hydraulic system and air leakage testing of ductwork systems.
A00.23.2.2 Unless otherwise indicated, water (other than treated water), and electricity
necessary for the operation of the plant during site testing shall be provided free
of cost to the Contractor.
A00.23.2.5 Wiring terminations to control equipment will be checked for compliance with
the wiring diagrams and for interlocking with other equipment. Any faults will
be rectified unless associated with wiring carried out under separate Contract
in which case they will be recorded and the details passed to the Engineer for
action.
A00.23.3. Cleaning
A00.23.3.1 Pre-commissioning cleaning and flushing shall be carried out prior to start-up.
Final cleaning of the chilled water system shall be carried out by circulation of a
chemical solution.
A00.23.3.2 All pipes, valves and fittings will be thoroughly cleaned of rust, scale and other
foreign matter before erection. All pipework systems will be washed through and
thoroughly cleaned as each section is completed with a final cleaning when the
whole pipework system is connected up and before being put into service.
After cleaning of completed systems, all strainers will be opened and cleaned.
Any damaged strainer screens shall be replaced.
A00.23.3.3 Ductwork systems will be cleaned by blowing out using the supply air fan.
No fan will be started until cleaning is to commence. Filters made dirty after
completion of cleaning will be cleaned or replaced if required.
A00.23.3.4 Cleaning will be completed before the connection of terminal units and
fittings.
A00.23.3.5 Duct spigots ends will be temporarily fitted with securely fixed fine mesh
covers to collect airborne particles for disposal as directed by the Engineer.
A00.23.4.1 All services will subject to a hydraulic pressure test at the pressure stated in the
particular specification for the service concerned. Where no pressure is
indicated, the pressure will be 1.5 times the maximum working pressure specified
or 1.5 times the working head where a maximum pressure is not specified. All
safety valves, pressure/altitude gauges will be effectively isolated or removed
prior to the test and subsequently refitted.
A00.23.4.2 For a satisfactory and acceptable hydraulic test, the pressure will be
maintained for a period of 24 hours without loss of pressure (taking into
account allowable expansion/contraction due to temperature change), after
dealing with any weak joints, defective fittings and pipes disclosed by the initial
application of the test. All sections of the work and joints will be accessible for
inspection and all welds will be hammer tested.
A00.23.4.3 Certificates for all hydraulic tests made on site will be forwarded to the
Engineer for approval and such approval must be obtained before any thermal
insulation is applied.
A00.23.4.4 All tests certificates will be signed by the Contractor and by the Engineer who
witnesses the tests.
A00.23.5.1 All ventilation systems will be commissioned in accordance with the procedures
recommended in ASHRAE/SMACNA/AABC.
A00.23.5.2 Records of commissioning results shall be provided to the Engineer which will
detail the recorded air volume and percentage deviation from design air volume,
for each supply and extract terminal. Wet and dry bulb temperature
measurements will be taken in all room served by air supply systems, and the
results indicated on the schedule of commissioning results, together with
external ambient wet and dry bulb temperature recorded at hourly intervals over
the measuring period.
A00.23.6.1 Smoke tests will be conducted on all air distribution systems to ensure
correct air diffusion from outlet terminals.
A00.23.6.2 After the air systems have been regulated, all dampers will be labelled and
quadrants indelibly marked to show the correct setting. Filters will be checked
and where necessary, changed or cleaned. The regulation of a system will be
A00.23.6.3 After all air systems have been regulated, the final settings are to be
recorded on the Commissioning Certificates provided.
A00.23.7.1 All systems will be fitted with the working fluid, vented as necessary and
brought to a state of complete readiness for the system balancing procedures.
A00.23.7.2 All water circuits will be balanced by means of the regulating valves provided
and flow rates will be determined on a temperature and pressure drop basis. Flow
through pumps will be measured by relating pressure drop across the pump to
the Manufacturers tests curves. A copy of the test curve indicating the final
operating point shall be provided. Water system will be balanced in accordance
with ASHRAE.
A00.23.8.1 If not already carried out at works, all refrigerant systems will be vacuumed
and charged with gas/oil in accordance with equipment supplier
recommendations.
A00.23.8.2 All electrical circuits (power and control) will be checked for correct functioning
of control of the refrigerant system. Similar checks will be carried out for
the control panel, local panel (dimensional and functional), etc.
A00.23.9.1 All chilled installations after an acceptable hydraulic test, be subjected to a chill
test at a minimum operating temperature conditions for a period of four hours,
and then allowed to heat up. No leaks will develop at any point in the system.
A00.23.9.2 For a satisfactory test all expansion/contraction devices and support/guide points
will be examined and seen to function correctly.
A00.23.10.1 All tanks and receiver vessels whether of the pressurised or unpressurised type
will be subjected to the site tests defined in the applicable ASME VIII division 1.
Where no site test is specified the vessel will be filled with the working fluid at
the maximum working pressure and temperature and held for a period of 24
hours.
A00.23.10.2 For a successful test, no leaks will develop nor will there by any visible
bulging of the vessel wall.
A00.23.11.1 All items of equipment that have a specified output (or throughout) will be tested
and the output or throughout recorded, the method of calculation and all
relevant test conditions indicated on the test certificate.
A00.23.11.2 Pump/compressor/motor speed and current tests will be tabulated for each
item as applicable.
A00.23.12.1 Reading will be taken to ensure that the required noise ratings are not exceed.
Representative areas will be selected by agreement with the Engineer.
A00.23.12.2 The acoustic performance of items of plant where limitations on permitted noise
levels are specified and the noise transmission from plant room areas will be
measured, recorded and the results assessed.
A00.23.12.3 Wherever necessary, when measuring room sound levels, normal continuous
background noise from sources other than the installation will be taken into
A00.23.12.4 Results of octave band analysis will be submitted on noise rating curve charts
for each individual space.
A00.23.13.2 The Contractor will submit his proposal for the performance tests to the
Employer for approval 6 weeks before start of commissioning. For the
duration of performance tests, the Contractor will ensure that all qualified
commissioning and other specialist personnel are present and available at all times
to make any necessary immediate adjustments and repairs.
A00.23.13.3 Specialised installations including technical rooms, switch rooms and safety
critical equipment rooms and computer rooms and other close- control
applications, will be required to achieve satisfactory system performance when
subjected to artificial internal and external loads in accordance with the
procedure laid down.
A00.23.13.4 Comfort and process air conditioning installations will be required to achieve
satisfactory system performance in accordance with the procedure indicated.
A00.23.13.5 The plant will be continuously operated for a minimum period of 24 hours before
tests are witnessed. The Contractor will confirm to the Employer, giving a
minimum period of 24 hours notice, that the installation is ready for witness of
performance testing.
A00.23.13.6 The Contractor will be responsible for the supply, fixing, connection and safe
operation of sufficient temporary artificial heat load equipment and any
instrumentation necessary to demonstrate system performance and for
subsequent disconnection and removal from site when the Employer is satisfied
that tests are complete.
A00.23.13.7 The Contractor will subject the entire plant to a total continuous run of the
duration agreed with the Engineer to ensure that all apparatus, materials and
systems are working properly. During the run tests will be carried out to ensure,
that all controls, safety devices, operating services and all units are properly
adjusted and operating correctly, that design temperatures in the piping system
and throughout the air system are established and that the system provide the
required internal conditions. The Contractor will assure himself that the design
intent is achieved before demonstration to the Engineer. The performance will
be evaluated during environmental conditions prevailing at that time.
A00.23.13.8 The Contractor will provide a temporary installation of portable recorders where
indicated and simultaneously record temperatures and humidifies for summer
and winter design conditions. The location of test instruments shall be approved
by the Engineer. The corresponding external conditions will also be recorded
whilst tests are in progress. The capacity of refrigeration plant, (including
components thereof such as condensers, evaporators, cooling towers), and
other air handling plant will also be demonstrated and recorded.
A00.23.13.10 Measurements and records of performance test results will be entered on the
Commissioning formats and handed to the Employer within a reasonable time
after the tests are completed. Copies of the results will be retained on site by the
Contractor and be available to other official representative as required.
TABLE OF CONTENT
A01.1. General .............................................................................................................................729
A01.2. Quality control ..................................................................................................................729
A01.3. Technical and installation requirement………………………………………..….732.
A01.1 General
A01.1.1 This Attachment specifies the requirements for furnishing air handling units
(AHUs) and appurtenances as specified herein. AHUs shall be the product of a
single manufacturer whose name shall appear on the AHUs
A 588 High Strength Low Alloy Structural Steel with 345 MPa
Minimum Yield Point to 100 mm Thick.
E 94 Radiographic Testing.
A01.2.1.7 The AHU manufacturer shall show at least five years of continuous and current
experience in the design, assembly, and testing of AHU’s as per data sheet and
BOQ. Unit Performance, coil performance and Mechanical Strength shall be
certified with Eurovent.
A01.2.3. Submittals
A01.2.3.1 Before providing the AHU manufacturer with Notice to Proceed the Contractor
shall submit to the Engineer for his review and consent, evidence of the
manufacturer's qualifications including, but not limited to the following data:
A01.2.3.2 Within 45 days after issue of a Notice from the Engineer, the Contractor shall
submit the following for the Engineer review and consent.
Certified shop drawings for AHUs, fans, motors, fan-motor unit bases,
installation drawings, installation instructions, dimensioned drawings for
anchor bolt locations, and any additional data required to demonstrate
compliance with Contract documents.
List of technical support items specified and list of any additional support
items required.
Procedures for separately removing and replacing motor, coil and filter, as
well as procedures for removing a complete fan-motor unit without
disassembly.
A01.2.3.3 Within 14 days after successful completion of tests specified herein and of any
additional tests conducted at the Contractor's own option, Contractor shall submit
the following:
Certified test results for all factory tests conducted. All test data shall be
bound in one report. The test report shall be indexed and
cross-referenced in an easily understood manner.
All records and results of non-destructive examinations made at
completion of each examination.
Field test results
A01.2.3.4 List of projects on which similar equipment for rail transit tunnel projects have
been supplied shall be furnished. List shall include:
Name of owner or user
Contract number
A01.3.1.1 The air handling units shall be of double skin construction, draw through type
and shall include separate return air plenum, filter section, fan and coil section.
A01.3.1.2 The units shall be insulated to prevent heat loss, to eliminate panel
sweating and to provide a moisture free unit.
A01.3.1.3 The units shall be provided with the access doors with look out glass for filter
removal and to facilitate easy access to internal components for maintenance
and repairs or replacement.
A01.3.1.4 The units shall be provided with drain pan of heavy gauge Stainless steel (SS-
316) completely rust and corrosion proof and thermally insulated.
A01.3.1.5 The units shall be of a penalised construction fabricated with heavy gauge steel
suitably welded and reinforced to provide a rigid assembly. The complete
units shall be absolutely rust free.
A01.3.1.6 Units ships in sections shall have a minimum of four points of lift. These lift
points shall be designed to accept standard rigging devices.
A01.3.2.1 The fan shall be with backward inclined aerofoil blades, double inlet double
width type. Fans shall be of non-overloading design. The wheel & housing shall
be fabricated from heavy gauge galvanised steel. The fan impeller shall be
mounted on a solid shaft supported on angle iron heavy- duty ball bearing. The
fan shall be selected for a speed not exceeding 1800 rpm. The impeller & fan
shaft shall be statically and dynamically balanced. The fan outlet velocity shall
not exceed 10 m/s. Fan housing with motor shall be mounted on a common
extruded aluminium base mounted inside the fan section on anti-vibration
springs mounts. The fan outlet shall be connected to casing with fire retardant
double canvass. The fan shall be complete with multi ‘V’ belt drive and
adjustable motor mounting base. The opening for the access of the fan section
shall be provided with micro-switch and galvanised iron mesh. The fan outlet
shall be provided with a motor operated damper (MOD).
A01.3.2.2 Coils shall be manufactured by the supplier of the AHU. Coils shall be
removable by unbolting the panels in the coils section. The cooling coil shall
be of seamless copper tubes, not less than 0.5 mm thick and mimimum 12 mm
O.D. The bends shall be ready made with solder rings on both ends. The coil
shall have continuous aluminium dual sine wave fins. Having minimum
thickness of 0.15 mm and having hydrophilic coating. The fins shall be spaced
by collars forming integral part of the fins. The tubes shall be staggered in the
direction of airflow. The fins shall be uniformly bonded to the tubes by
mechanical expansion of the tubes. The coils shall be designed to operate at
2
17.5 kg/cm working pressure and 150 C temperature and shall be tested
2
against leaks at a pressure not less than 23 kg/cm compressed air under water.
This pressure shall be maintained for a period of 2 hours. No drop should be
observed indicating any leaks. The water headers shall be of copper pipes,
to connect all the tubes. The headers shall be complete with water In/Out
connections, vent plug on top and drain at the bottom. Drainpipe should be of
SS-304. Coil tube water velocity shall not exceed 2.5 m/s. Where water
velocities of less than 0.60 m/s are encountered, a method of turbulation
shall be provided. The coil size shall be designed at an operating air velocity of
2.8 m/s. The coil frames should be of SS-304.
A01.3.3 Filtration
A01.3.3.1 Each AHU shall have one or two types of filters conforming to the
specifications given under:
High Efficiency filters of 90% efficiency down to 10 micron particle size For
detailed specification of filters see annexure-A to specifications
A01.3.4.1 The drain pan shall be construction of 18 Gauge stainless steel (SS-316) sheets,
externally insulated with 12 mm thick closed cell polyethylene foam
insulation with necessary slope to allow for proper condensate removal.
A01.3.5.1 The cooling coils, special and standard filters, etc., shall all be housed in a separate
enclosure of suitable size and length. The inspection doors shall have neoprene
rubber T-section, rubber seals, hinges and locking arrangements. The gaps
between filter frames and housing shall have synthetic rubber/EPDM packing,
to eliminate any air leakage. All filter frame shall of SS-304 and be epoxy
painted. The flat filter section shall be suitable for mounting filters vertically.
A01.3.6.3 Each section shall be provided with separate access panel of suitable size.
The access panel shall be hinged type with heavy-duty stainless steel hinges
and handles made of nylon. The handles shall be self- tightening type to ensure
leak proof closing. The access door should have provision of look out glass.
A01.3.6.4 The opening for access doors and gaps between sections shall be provided with
the neoprene rubber double ripped/T-gaskets fixed in grooves in the extruded
sections.
A01.3.6.5 The sandwich panels shall be bolted from inside on to the framework with soft
rubber gaskets in between to make the joints airtight. All fasteners used should
be of stainless steel.
A01.3.6.6 Details of AHU Access Door, Air Vent, Drain Plug for Coil Header, pulley, belts
and door guard to be provided.
A01.3.7.1 The fan shall be provided with a totally enclosed fan cooled squirrel cage motor,
which shall have a minimum rating as given under “Schedule of Equipment”.
The starter rating shall match the motor rating and will conform to specifications
under “motor and switch gears. The motor shall be of high efficiency class i.e.
EFF-1 or equivalent IEC standard.
A01.3.7.2 Motors shall be mounted inside the casing on a slide base to permit
adjustment of drive belt tension.
A01.3.8. Accessories
A01.3.8.1. Each air-handling unit shall be complete with the following accessories:
Stem type thermometers at coil inlet and outlet, with tubing and gauge cocks.
(Priced Separately)
Pressure gauge with cock s i p h o n at inlet of the coil, with tubing and
gauge cocks. (Priced Separately)
Butterfly valves at inlet of the coil and balancing valve at outlet of coil.
(Priced Separately)
Drain line from the unit upto floor trap. (Priced Separately)
Automatic air Vent Valves on pipes. (Priced Separately)
Fire retardant Flexible connection between the fan outlet and duct.
Vibration isolators of 90% efficiency between AHU and foundation.
A01.3.9.2 Unit casing exterior shall be provided with standard colour as approved by the
Engineer.
A01.3.10 Limitations
A01.3.10.1 The air velocity across the cooing coil shall not exceed 2.8 m/sec.
A01.3.10.2 The fan outlet velocity shall not exceed 10 m/sec.
A01.3.10.3 The air velocity across the filters shall not exceed 2.8 m/sec.
A01.3.11 Execution
A01.3.11.1 The air-handling unit shall be tested to measure air quantity and coil
performance by measuring temperature difference, water pressure drop across
coil and then calculating the capacity.
Dimensional check.
Testing should be done based on BSEN for the AHU, AMCA for the
fans and ARI for the coils.
A01.3.12.1 Test of sample filter elements as per BS-6540/BS EN 779 or latest International
governing specification as applicable to ascertain the material quality and
filtration efficiency up to the claimed microns size. The detailed testing
procedure shall be submitted to the Engineer for consent.
A01.3.14 Cooling capacity shall be computed from measurements of air flow and dry
and wet bulb temperature of air entering and leaving the coil. Flow
measurements shall be by accurate digital anemometer and temperature
measurements by accurately calibrated digital thermometer. Cross checks will be
carried out by measurement of water flow rate and temperature differential
across the coil with designed full water flow through the coil. The design should
be verified by the computed results.
A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
C. EQUIPMENT
1. Units shall be high output, HVAC type, and germicidal UVC light sources,
factory assembled and tested. Components shall include a housing,
reflector, high efficiency electronic power source, Emitter sockets and
Emitter tube, all constructed to withstand HVAC environments.
2. Double ended Unit housings shall be made of 304 stainless steel with
Units having electrical connectors on both ends to simplify gang wiring and
wiring to power. They shall include mounting holes to assist in securing the
fixtures.
4. The Emitters shall be designed to operate at 230 V ac/ 50 Hz with a high p.f.
They shall be UL listed to comply with UL Standard 1995 and capable of
igniting each Emitter at temperatures from 35 – 170 Deg.F in airflow
velocities to 1000 fpm. They shall be equipped with RF and line noise
suppression.
5. Emitter tube shall be of the high output, hot cathode, T5 (15mm) diameter, and
medium bi-pin type. They shall produce 95% of their energy at 254 mm and be
capable or producing the specified output at airflow velocities to 1000 fpm at
temperatures of 35 – 170 Deg. F. UVC Emitters shall not produce ozone or
other secondary contamination.
D. INSTALLATION
electrodes. The electrode set shall be placed in the cooling water sump to
discharge the copper – silver ions and to collect the calcareous at the electrode
set.
DC cabling – DC cables from the transformer rectifier to the junction box shall
be run in either rigid PVC conduit of galvanized conduit. The positive and
negative cable must have different colour for identification. From the junction
box to the electrodes, the cables shall be run in either rigid or flexible PVC
conduit. It is very important that the electrodes must be connected to the
transformer rectifier positive terminal and the DC current return must be
connected to the transformer rectifier negative terminal.
Electrodes – The electrode set shall be placed inside a plastic container and
positioned at the deep sump area to remain fully submerged at all times. The
electrodes shall be located away from the outlet of Cooling Tower.
One set of Digital TDS & pH meter must also be provided with each unit to
keep a close check on the TDS and pH level of make – up and Recirculation
Water.
TABLE OF CONTENT
A02.1. General .............................................................................................................................742
A02.2. Quality control ..................................................................................................................742
A02.3. Technical and installation requirements ...........................................................................744
A02.1. General
A02.1.1. This section specifies the requirements for manufacturing, furnishing, testing
and dommissioning fan coil units and appurtenances as specified herein. Fan coil
units shall be the product of a single Manufacturer whose name shall appear on
all the submittals.
BS 4856: Methods of Testing and Rating Fan Coil Units; Unit Heaters and
Unit Coolers
A02.2.1.6. National Fire Protection Association
The fan coil units Manufacturer shall show at least five years of continuous and current
experience in the design, assembly and testing of fan coil units.
A02.2.3. Submittals
A02.2.3.1. Submit the following to the Engineer for review and obtain a notice of no
objection:
Technical data sheet of FCU giving the sound level, air quantity and
power consumed at all the three speed at the stated static pressure and the
cooling capacity at the rated conditions indicated.
A02.3.1.1. The FCU shall be complete in all respects and shall generally comply with
the specifications as given hereunder.
A02.3.1.2. The FCU casing shall be of double skin construction concealed ceiling
mounting type complete with finned coil, fan section with motor, drain pans,
air filters, filter box, etc. Inner skin & Outer skin thickness should be 1.2 mm & 1
mm of Powder coated sheet steel.
A02.3.1.3. All fan coil units shall be demountable from the ceiling void for
maintenance purposes without causing damage to the associated ductwork
and insulation
A02.3.1.4 All fan coil units shall be selected to suit the limited space within the false ceiling
with due considerations to access for maintenance and servicing. Coordinate
with all involved parties on Site for the provision of maintenance access
panels for the units mounting inside false ceiling.
A02.3.1.5 The drain pan details, control details, installation details, operation &
maintenance manual shall be submitted along with the proposal.
A02.3.2.1 The coil shall be 4 rows deep, of seamless copper tubes not less than 10mm
O.D. and 0.5 mm thick encased in SS-304 frame and having copper headers.
A02.3.2.2 The coil shall have continuous aluminium fins having minimum thickness of
0.15 mm.
A02.3.2.3 The fins shall be spaced by collars forming integral part of the fins. The fins
shall be uniformly bonded to the tubes by hydraulic/Mechanical expansion of the
tubes.
A02.3.2.5 The coil circuit shall be sized for adequate water velocity but not exceeding
1.8m/s. The coils shall be tested against leaks at a hydraulic pressure of
21.0kg/cm². This pressure shall be maintained for a period of 2 hours. No drops
shall be observed indicating any leaks.
Pueumatic testing is also acceptable, the contractor to perform both pneumaticas well as
hydraulic testing for one sample unit during FAT.
A02.3.3.1 This shall consist of aluminium impeller of forward curved type, both
A02.3.3.2 Maximum noise level acceptable shall be 65dB at a distance of 3m from fan.
A02.3.3.3 The two impeller shall be directly mounted on to a double shaft, single phase,
multiple winding motor, capable of running at three speeds.
A02.3.3.4 Motor shall be capable of providing at least 3 fan speeds (‘LOW- MEDIUM-
HIGH’) and shall be of adequate capacity to prevent over- loading at any
speed and duty of the fans. Each fan coil unit shall be equipped with a three-
speed fan switch (‘LOW-MEDIUM-HIGH’) and ON/OFF switch for the fan
control.
A02.3.3.5 Motor shall be of the permanent split-capacitor type for direct-on-line starting,
and factory wired to a terminal block inside a factory installed junction box.
Motor shall be provided with UL listed thermal overload protection. Motor
windings and electrical components shall be impregnated or protected to avoid
trouble from condensation.
A02.3.3.6. Connection unit or socket outlet shall be provided near each fan coil unit.
Location of these electrical power points shall be coordinated so that the
connection unit or socket outlet shall be positioned within 1 m from the fan
coil unit.
A02.3.3.7 Electrical wiring connection including cables and wiring accessories between
the connection unit or socket outlet and the fan coil unit shall be
provided.
A02.3.3.8 Electrical cables or wiring installed outside the casing and inside the air
stream shall be protected by metallic flexible conduit.
A02.3.4.1 Every fan coil unit shall be provided with a drain pan that shall be situated
beneath the coil and arranged so that all moisture will be collected in the pan.
The pan shall project under the entire length and width of the coil including
all headers and bends.
A02.3.4.2. The drain pan shall be of double skin construction with 15mm nitrile foam/
thermocole (TF quality) insulation sand-witched between 22 G outer and 18 G
A02.3.4.3 The FCU shall also be provided with a secondary drain pan of 18 G SS (SS-316)
sheet duly epoxy coated/FRP lined from inside.
A02.3.4.4 Each drain pan shall be fitted with an insulated drain pipe which shall be connected
via suitable runs correctly laid to fall to the drainage system. Drain pans shall
have copper male connectors for connection to the condensate drainpipes. The
frame and drain pipe should be of SS-316.
A02.3.4.5 The drain pipe should connect to the nearest drain point in the room to be provided
by other contractor.
A02.3.4.6 Drain pans shall be large enough to collect all condensate from the coils, return
bends and pipe work connections. For units catering for load including a high
proportion of latent heat, the size of the drain connection shall be adequate to deal
with the condensate.
A02.3.5.1 The filters shall be washable fibre glass/polypropylene air filters with anodised
extruded aluminium frames mounted behind the fans in a filter box made of GI
sheets.
A02.3.6.1 The water lines shall be finally connected to the coil of the fan coil unit by
at least 300 mm long type L, seamless, solid drawn copper tubing, with flare
fittings and connections
A02.3.6.2 The water connections shall be made so that all the valves installed are
accommodated within the extension of the drain pan of the unit. So that, in case
of any leak in the valves, the water shall fall into the drain pan and not onto the
false ceiling.
A02.3.6.3 The copper piping shall be insulated with polyethylene tubes of suitable size,
and all joints shall be sealed with aluminium tapes.
A02.3.7.1 FCU shall be selected for the lowest operating noise level of the equipment.
Maximum noise level acceptable shall be 50dB in the room.
A02.3.8. Valves
A02.3.8.1 The water valves on inlet line shall be of gunmetal ball type integral water
strainer, having B.SP (FPT) inlet and flare type MPT outlet connection.
A02.3.8.3 Fan coil unit valve set shall be factory fitted and tested with all accessories
(PICV, ball valve at return pipe, ball valve with vise stainer at supply and air vent
etc) shall be fitted on FCU on site.
A02.3.9 Installation
A02.3.9.1 The FCU shall be installed as per good engineering practice and as per the
standard referred.
A02.3.9.2 The power outlet to the FCU shall be provided with an isolator and its
location shall be co-ordinated so that it is located with 1 to 1.5m of the FCU.
A02.3.9.3 Each FCU shall be provided with a thermostat positioned in an approved
location. The thermostat shall have switches t provide Low-Medium-High fan
speeds and a rotating temperature set point selector.
A02.3.9.5 The cabling and wiring between the thermostat, the FCU and the power point
shall be provide in fully concealed metal conduits of approved quality. Free
hanging of cabling and wiring shall be kept to the minimum distance possible,
and such cables shall be provided with metallic flexible conduits of approved
quality.
A02.3.9.6 The end of the flexible conduit shall be properly terminated in the junction box of
the FCU and the pipe conduit/switch box at the other end.
A02.3.10.1 After each FCU is installed and ready for pipe connection, the coil shall be tested
against leaks at a hydraulic pressure of 10kg/m². The pressure shall be
maintained at least one hour, and no drop or leak shall be observed. Repair
of coil shall not be permitted.
A02.3.10.2 After the installation work is completed, the following minimum characteristics
shall be measured:
Flow measurement
TABLE OF CONTENT
A03.1. General .............................................................................................................................751
A03.2. Quality control ..................................................................................................................751
A03.3. Technical and installation requirements ...........................................................................753
A03.1. General
A03.1.1 This section specifies the requirements for furnishing, installing and testing
water chilling units with screw compressors and appurtenances as specified
herein, including but not limited to:
Chiller package
A03.1.2 The performance curves and other data submitted for the water chilling units
proposed to be furnished shall be certified by the American Refrigeration
Institute (ARI). The water chilling units shall be the product of a single
manufacturer whose name shall appear on all the technical submittals and it
shall be manufactured in a facility whose products are certified by ARI.
A03.2.1.1 Materials and workmanship shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the
following standards and codes to the extent specified herein. The publications
listed below form a part of these specifications to the extent referenced. The
publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only.
A03.2.2.1 The water chilling units Manufacturer shall show at least ten years of
continuous and current experience in the design, assembly and testing of such
units.
A03.2.3 Submittals
A03.2.3.1 Before giving the Manufacturer notice to proceed, the Contractor shall submit
to the Employer for review and approval, the name and qualifications
of the Manufacturer of water chilling units. Qualification statement shall
include but need not to be limited to the following data:
Manufacturer’s selection software print out for the model of the chilling units
proposed to be furnished under this contract as certified by ARI
A03.2.3.3 Within 14 days after successful completion of all factory tests specified herein
and of any additional tests conducted at the Contractor’s own option, the
Contractor shall submit the following:
Certified results for all factory tests conducted. All test data shall be
bound in one report. The test report shall be indexed and cross-
referenced in an easily understood manner.
A03.3.1.1 Each water cooled chilling unit shall be a standard cooling model and shall
comprise:
Screw compressor
Accessories as specified/required.
deleted
A03.3.2 The chillers shall fit into the space provided and shall be made readily serviceable
including where applicable, the provision of marine water boxes and other necessary
accessories, etc., to complete the system.
Compressor
A03.3.2.1 Each unit shall have a rotary twin-screw or centrifugal compressor serviceable
bolted semi-hermetic type.
A03.3.2.2. The twin rotary screw shall be manufactured from forged steel with
precision cast male and female profiles, which are asymmetrical. The
profile of screws shall permit safe operation upto a speed of 3000 RPM for 50
Hz operation.
A03.3.2.3 The compressor shall unload from fully loaded to the minimum capacity by
means of hydraulically actuated slide valve positioned over both the male and
female rotors.
A03.3.2.4 The compressor housing shall be of high grade cast iron, machined with
precision, to provide a very close tolerance between the rotors and the
housing.
A03.3.2.6 There shall be built in oil reservoir to ensure full supply of lubricants to all
bearings and a check valve to prevent back spin during shut down.
A03.3.2.7 There shall be oil pump or other means of differential pressure inside the
compressor for forced lubrication of all parts during start-up, running and
coasting for shut down. An oil sump header shall be provided in the casing.
A03.3.2.8 The units shall be complete with automatic capacity control mechanism,
to permit modulation between 20% and 100% of capacity range. The
Compressor will be designed to operate both on full capacity as well as part
capacity without effecting the operating efficiency. The chiller units should be
able to modulate cooling capacity to precisely match the load and minimise
energy consumption. Chilled water temperature control setting capability
will be to 0.1 F or less
A03.3.3.1 The driving motor shall be double squirrel cage type or suitable hermetic type as
required, protected against damage by means of built in protection devices.
A03.3.3.2 In case of hermetic type, motor shall be liquid refrigerant cooled with
internal thermal overload protection devices embedded in the winding of each
phase.
A03.3.3.3 If open type motors are used, the Contractor shall ensure that the motor heat loss
will not result in excessive increases in temperature of the plant rooms affecting
the operation and performance of the chillers and other equipment. The
Contractor shall provide at his own expense any additional
ventilation/cooling equipment. In addition, the Contractor shall also bear all
direct, indirect and associated costs to provide a mechanical room safety
alarm, wiring and chiller emergency shutdown shall be included to prevent
chiller operation if the room temperature exceeds 40°C.
Condenser
A03.3.4.1 Each unit shall have one horizontal shell and tube, water-cooled, multipass
condenser, fitted with safety valve, purge valve, and other safety devices.
A03.3.4.2 The shell shall be of welded steel construction fitted with machined steel tube
sheets on either ends. The water boxes/end covers shall be marine type of steel
or cast iron so that tubes are accessible without dismantling of pipes. The water
boxes/end covers shall be removable and plant components shall be arranged so
that the space for tube removal is not obstructed.
A03.3.4.3 The tubes shall be at least 12 mm O.D. of seamless copper with integral fins. The
tubes shall be supported in the shell to avoid noise and vibrations and the ends
shall be properly expanded in the tube sheets to prevent leakage of refrigerant
gas.
A03.3.4.4 The water heads shall be of fabricated steel, easy to remove, with suitable baffles
for multipass water flow, In and Out connections and gasket to prevent water
leakage.
2
A03.3.4 The condenser shall be tested against leaks with a pressure of 24.5 Kg/Cm on
both the shell side and the waterside.
A03.3.4.6 The condenser shall be complete in all respects and shall also include:
Support for mounting.
A03.3.5 Chiller
A03.3.5.1 Each unit shall have one horizontal shell and tube, Flooded type/falling film type
cooler complete with accessories.
A03.3.5.2 The shell shall be of welded steel construction fitted with machined steel tube
sheets on either ends. End water boxes shall be designed to provide adequate
space for water movement such that there is no erosion of the tube ends. In
general, this requires the water box end to be domed rather than flat. End box
covers shall be removable, and allow easy access for cleaning the tubes.
A03.3.5.3 The chiller shall either have internally finned copper tubes or tubes with
other means for increasing heat transfer surface. The tube shall be supported
in the shell by adequate, stiff supports to eliminate vibration and noise. The
tube ends shall be mechanically bonded to the tube sheets to prevent leakage of
refrigerant gas.
A03.3.5.4 The water heads shall be made of fabricated steel and the faces ground to a
close tolerance to prevent leakage and permit 2, 3 or 4 pass operation.
A03.3.5.5 The chiller shall be tested against leaks with a pressure of not less than 15.75
2
Kg/cm both on the shell and the waterside.
A03.3.5.7. The chiller shall be complete in all respects and also include: -
In and Out connections both for the refrigerant and the water circuit and
drain connections.
A03.3.6.1. An efficient oil separator shall be included to remove oil from the refrigerant
and there shall be suitable heat exchanger for oil separation, if required.
Compressor shall be fully field serviceable with full acoustical alteration as per
ARI standard (Latest) and early serviceable type. Discharge oil separation shall
be accomplished external to the compressor casing, oil separator and return
system. Seal shall be designed to ensure that oil is adequately returned to the
compressor and does not collect in the heat exchangers.
A03.3.7.1 The unit shall be complete with a Microprocessor Based Interactive Control
Panel having multi colour display mounted directly on the unit and prewired with
all operating and safety controls. The exposed control wiring should be
provided in suitable conduits.
A03.3.7.2 The control panel shall have the following extended capabilities:
Shutdown codes
– Hours of operation and number of starts, time of last start and stop
Self-diagnostics
– Load on chiller
3. The control panel should include but not to be limited to the items listed
below:
Indicating lights
Deleted
A03.3.7.3 The display shall have a minimum of 160-characters liquid crystal having multi-
colour display and be backlit with a light emitting diode. Messages shall be in
plain English. Coded two or three characters displays are not acceptable.
A03.3.7.4 A time clock shall be incorporated to allow daily time starts and stops
A03.3.7.5 The control system shall have automatic restart after a power failure and not
require a battery backup for memory continuity.
A03.3.8.3 The chilling units shall be delivered with pre-charged refrigerant from the
manufacturing premises. The refrigerant shall not be charged at site.
A03.3.9.1 The lubrication system shall be complete with accessories such as oil chiller
with thermostatic control, oil heaters, oil strainer, relief valve etc.
A03.3.9.2 Necessary pipe lines for lubricants and Cooling system with valves, shall be
included.
A03.3.10 Accessories
A03.3.10.1. Each unit shall include the following as part of unit price:
A03.3.10.2. Each unit shall have the following item priced separately:
Water flow switches at the outlet of the condenser and the chiller
Stem type thermometers and dial type water pressure gauges at the inlet
and outlet of the condenser and the chiller
Suitable size motorised butterfly valves at the outlet of the condenser and
chiller
A03.3.10.3 Each unit shall include, but not to be limited to, all the items listed in the
foregoing paragraphs or in the “schedule of equipment” and drawings for this
project. In addition all such items, as may required, shall be included whether
specifically mentioned or not, if considered or found necessary to fulfil the intent
and meaning for the purpose of maintaining design operations under all extreme
weather conditions.
A03.3.10.4 All exposed surfaces and insulation shall be painted using the Manufacturer’s
standard paint system and colours.
A03.3.11 Deleted
A03.3.12 Type of refrigerant
A03.3.13 Limitation
A03.3.13.1 The water velocity in the condenser and the chiller shall not exceed 2.5
m/s.
A03.3.14 Execution
A03.3.14.2 Contractor shall install chillers, including components and controls required
for chiller operation, in accordance with chiller Manufacturer’s written
instruction and recommendations. Chillers shall be installed on an equipment pad
with vibration isolators.
A03.3.14.3 Contractor shall field insulate all cold surface (not factory insulated) to
prevent condensation.
A03.3.14.4 Contractor shall paint damaged and abraded factory finish with touch-up paint
matching factory finish.
A03.3.14.5 All controls and switchgear shall be tested for proper functioning and set of
design values.
A03.3.14.6 On completion of installation and tests the Water Chilling unit shall be tested
for performance. The capacity in kcal/hr (tons) shall be calculated from
measurements of temperature difference and flow rate of water in condenser
and water in chiller. The power consumption shall be checked from current
measurement of the motor. All calculated and checked results shall match the
specified data.
A03.3.14.7. The Contractor shall provide all instruments and personnel for tests.
A03.3.14.8 Machines, which operate below atmospheric pressure, shall be pressure tested
after shipment and prior to refrigerant charging without exceeding test pressure
recommended by the Manufacturer. Machine shipped precharged need not
comply with this requirement unless the factory precharge or holding charge
is lost during shipment or prior to start-up, in which case, Contractor shall test as
indicated.
A03.3.14.9 Contractor shall perform all tests and start-up in such a manner as not to
introduce moisture into the machine.
Factory Tests
Nitrogen Charging
A03.3.1.1 Description: Factory-assembled and -tested water chiller complete with single or
multiple compressor(s), evaporator, condenser, controls, interconnecting unit piping
and wiring, indicated accessories, and mounting frame.
A03.3.1.2 Fabricate water chiller mounting frame and attachment to the pressure
vessel with reinforcement strong enough to resist water chiller movement during
a seismic event when the water chiller mounting frame is anchored to the building
structure.
Casing: Cast iron, precision ground. Casing design shall ensure that major
wearing parts, bearings thrust bearings are accessible for maintenance and
replacement. Condensed liquid refrigerant shall be injected in to the
compressor discharge to reduce discharge gas temperature and to reduce sound
level of the compressor
A03.3.2.2 Capacity Control: Variable-inlet guide-vane assembly for stable operation that
is free of surge, cavitation, or vibration throughout throttling range from 100
to 15 percent of full load even at constant condenser water temp.
Oil Lubrication System: Positive-displacement submersible pump with heater,
oil filter, and sight glass. The oil pump shall operate prior to start- up, during
compressor operation and during coastdown. Compressor shall have an
auxiliary reservoir to provide lubrication during coastdown in the event of a
power failure.
A03.3.2.5 Refrigerant Compatibility: Seals, 0-rings, motor windings, and internal water
chiller parts exposed to refrigerants shall be fully compatible with refrigerants,
and pressure components shall be rated for refrigerant pressures.
A03.3.3.1 Evaporator:
A03.3.3.1.1 Description: Shell-and-tube design, ASME labeled.
Material: Copper.
A03.3.3.1.3 Water Box: Hinged Marine water box, with design working pressure of
minimum 1000 kPa, and having flanged water-nozzle connections with the
rmistor-type temperature sensor factory installed in each nozzle.
A03.3.3.2 Condenser:
A03.3.3.2.1 Description: Shell-and-tube design, ASME labeled.
A03.3.3.2.2 Shell Material: Carbon steel.
A03.3.3.2.4 Tube Construction: Externally enhanced and individually replaceable, expanded
into tube sheets.
Material: Copper.
A03.3.3.2.4 Water Box: Hinged Marine water box , with design working pressure of
1620kPa, and having flanged water-nozzle connections with a thermistor- type
temperature sensor factory installed in each nozzle.
A03.3.3.2.4 Pass : Even
A03.3.4 Insulation
A03.3.4.1 Cold Surfaces: Closed-cell, flexible elastomeric, thermal insulation complying
with ASTM C 534, Type II, for sheet materials.
coating to insulation.
A03.3.5 Accessories
A03.3.5.2 Purge System: Factory mounted, air, water, or refrigerant cooled; with
operating controls, piping, elapsed-time meter, and refrigerant service valves to
isolate the purge unit from the chilling unit.
A03.3.6 Controls
A03.3.6 General: The chiller shall be controlled by a stand-alone microprocessor based
control center. The chiller control panel shall provide control of chiller operation
and monitoring of chiller sensors, actuators, relays and switches.
A03.3.6 Control panel: The control panel shall include a 10.4 in. diagonal color liquid
crystal display (LCD) surrounded by “soft “keys which are redefined based on
the screen displayed at that time. This shall be mounted in the middle of a
keypad interface and installed in a locked enclosure. The screen shall detail
all operations and parameters, using a graphical representation of the chiller
and its major components. Panel verbiage shall be available in other languages
as an option with English always available. Data shall be displayed in either
English or Metric units. Smart Freeze Point Protection shall run the chiller at
36.00°F leaving chilled water temperature, and not have nuisance trips on low
water temperature. The sophisticated program and sensor shall monitor the
chiller water temperature to prevent freeze up. When needed Hot Gas Bypass
is available as an option. The panel shall display countdown timer messages
so the operator knows when functions are starting and stopping. Every
programmable point shall have a pop-up screen with the allowable ranges, so
that the chiller can not be programmed to operate outside of its design limits.
• The text displayed within the system status and system details
field shall be displayed as a color coded message to indicate severity:
red for safety fault, orange for cycling faults, yellow for warnings, and
green for normal messages.
Safety shutdowns enunciated through the display and the status bar, and
consist of system status, system details, day, time, cause of shutdown, and type
of restart required. Safety shutdowns with a fixed speed drive shall include:
a. evaporator – low pressure
b. evaporator – transducer or leaving liquid probe
c. evaporator – transducer or temperature sensor
Cycling shutdowns enunciated through the display and the status bar, and
consists of system status, system details, day, time, cause of shutdown, and
type of restart required. Cycling shutdowns with a fixed speed drive shall
include:
a. multiunit cycling – contacts open
b. system cycling - contacts open
c. oil - low temperature differential
d. oil – low temperature
e. control panel - power failure
f. leaving chilled liquid - low temperature
g. leaving chilled liquid - flow switch open
h. Deleted
i. motor controller – loss of current
j. power fault
k. control panel - schedule
l. starter – low supply line voltage
m. starter – low supply line voltage
n. proximity probe – low supply voltage
o. oil - variable speed pump - drive contacts open
remote control of the chiller, and to allow manual operation of the prerotation
vanes and oil pump. Access shall be through ID and password recognition,
which is defined by three different levels of user competence: view, operator, and
service.
Trending data with the ability to customize points of once every second to
once every hour. The panel shall trend up to 6 different parameters from a list
of over 140, without the need of an external monitoring system.
Operating hours.
A03.3.6.6 Manually Reset Safety Controls: The following conditions shall shut down water
chiller and require manual reset:
A03.3.6.6 BMS Interface: Factory-installed hardware and software to enable the BMS
to monitor chiller status and control chiller functions, as indicated.EEF-1motors
A03.3.7.1 Comply with requirements in specification for Motors for open-drive motors.
A03.3.7.2 Open-drive motors shall have flanged or flexible coupling suitable for direct
connection to compressor.
A03.3.10.1 Rate water chillers according to ARI 550/590, "Water Chilling Packages Using
the Vapor Compression Cycle." Stamp with ARI label.
A03.3.10.2 Factory test heat exchangers hydrostatically at 1.50 times the design
pressure.
A03.3.10.3 Factory test and inspect evaporator and water cooled-condenser according to
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1. Stamp with
ASME label.
A03.3.10.4 Factory test and inspect water boxes at 150 percent of working
pressure.
A03.3.10.6 Allow Employer access to places where water chillers are being source
quality-control tested. Notify Employer 14 days in advance of testing.
A03.3.11 Execution
A03.3.11.1 Examination
A03.3.11.1.1 Before water chiller installation, examine roughing-in for concrete equipment
bases, anchor-bolt sizes and locations, piping, and electrical to verify actual
locations, sizes, and other conditions affecting water chiller performance,
maintenance, and operations.
A03.3.11.2.2.1 Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless
otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 450mm centers around the full
perimeter of concrete base.
A03.3.11.2.2.2 For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend
through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor.
A03.3.11.2.2.3 Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates,
diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
A03.3.11.2.2.4 Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported
equipment.
A03.3.11.3.2 Install piping adjacent to water chillers to allow service and maintenance.
A03.3.11.3.3 Refrigerant Pressure Relief Valve Connections: Extend vent piping to the outside
without valves or restrictions.
A03.3.11.4.3.1 Verify that refrigerant charge is sufficient and water chiller has been leak
tested.
A03.3.11.4.3.9 Verify and record performance of chilled- and condenser-water flow and low
temperature interlocks.
A03.3.11.4.3.11 Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning
controls and equipment.
A03.3.12.1 Prepare a written startup report that records results of tests and
inspections.
A03.3.12 Deleted
1.0 General
This section specifies the requirements for furnishing, installing and testing of Air Cooled Water
chilling units with scroll compressors and appurtenances as specified herein, including but
not limited to:
Chiller package
Air cooled chiller packages shall be factory assembled and tested for rated efficiency. Unit
shall be delivered to site fully assembled, and charged with refrigerant and oil by the
manufacturer.
2.1 Materials and workmanship shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the
following standards and codes to the extent specified herein. The publications listed
below form a part of these specifications to the extent referenced. The publications
are referred to in the text by basic designation only.
2.3 Chiller shall be pressure-tested, evacuated and fully charged with refrigerant and Oil and
shall be factory operational run tested with water flowing through the vessel.
2.4 Within 14 days after successful completion of all factory tests the Contractor shall submit
the following:
a. Certified results for all factory tests conducted. All test data shall be bound in one report.
The test report shall be indexed and cross-referenced in an easily understood manner.
The Air cooled chilling units manufacturer shall show at least five years of continuous
and current experience in the design, assembly and testing of such units. The Offered
chillers shall be ARI/AHRI/Eurovent Certified.
4.1. The water chilling machine shall be self contained type consisting of multiple scroll
compressors, squirrel cage induction motor, air cooled condensers, chiller, frame
forming a compact assembly. The water chilling machine shall be complete with full
charge of Zero ODP Environmental friendly refrigerant R134a/ R410A/R-32 and oil,
vibration isolation pads and accessories, factory assembled and tested for rated capacity.
The IKW/TR for part load conditions of 25% and 50% under operating conditions shall
be indicated.
Structure shall be factory assembled and constructed out of formed & powder coated
galvanized steel panels.
4.2. Chillers
Chillers shall be shell and tube/BPHE(Brazed Plate Heat Exchanger) and multi-pass type.
The shell shall be of welded steel construction fitted with machined steel tube sheets
on either ends. End water boxes shall be designed to provide adequate space for
water movement such that there is no erosion of the tube ends. End box covers shall be
removable, and allow easy access for cleaning the tubes.
The chillers shall either have internally finned copper tubes or tubes with other means
for increasing heat transfer surface. The tube shall be supported in the shell by
adequate, stiff supports to eliminate vibration and noise. The tube ends shall be
mechanically bonded to the tube sheets to prevent leakage of refrigerant gas.
Tubes shall be of minimum 12mm O.D. The chiller shall be tested against leaks with a
2
pressure of not less than 15.75 Kg/cm both on the shell and the waterside. Chillers shall
be complete with the following accessories:
Condensers shall be air cooled type of copper tube and aluminium fin construction.
Copper tube dia shall be minimum 9.5mm. Condenser shall be manufactured to ASME
codes for unfired pressure vessels and designed for refrigerant working pressure of
450 psig. Condenser shall be complete with provisions for refrigerant piping
connections, shut off valves and any other standard accessory necessary with the
equipment supplied. In case of twin compressor system two independent sets of
condenser coils shall be incorporated. The condenser coils shall be arranged in
staggered rows and shall be expanded into super slit aluminum fins to achieve superior
efficiency. The fins shall have hydrophilic coating.
The condenser fans shall be propeller type, directly driven by a motor and positioned
for vertical air discharge. The draw-through design provides uniform airflow over the
entire condenser coil shall be, thus ensuring proper condensation throughout the coil. The
condenser fan motors shall be of totally enclose squirrel case type with IP-55 type
protection and shall be designed for outdoor operation in high ambient temperatures.
They shall operate or 415 Volts, 3 Phase, 50 Hz supply.
4.4. Compressor
Chiller packages shall be provided with Hermetic Scroll compressors. The compressor
shall be hermetically sealed having an integral cast iron frame & cast iron scrolls with a
sight glass & an oil adjustment port. The compressor shall be internally lubricated with
a highly refined, low foaming, and mineral oil should be provided with a crankcase
heater.
The compressor motor should be hermetic, refrigerant gas cooled with inherent all
phase protection and shall be suitable for 415 V, 3 phase, 50 cycles AC supply.
Motor shall be screen protected drip proof squirrel cage induction type, designed and
guaranteed for continuous operation at name plate rating and motor to be suitable for
the refrigerant being used. Temperature sensor shall be provided in motor winding to
protect the motor for high temperature rise.
The starter for the motor shall be automatic Soft type with tappings to limit
starting current, within 2 times the full load current.
Unit mounted pre-wired & pretested with factory settings Starters shall include all
necessary safety devices i.e. Overload relays, under voltage release and single phase
preventing device.
The motor starter shall be factory mounted and fully wired and factory tested during
the run test of the unit
The starter shall have a metal nameplate showing Manufacturer’s identifying , serial
number, maximum full load amps, and maximum overload trip setting. Starter shall
have affixed to the inside of the door complete, as built, wiring scheme showing all
accessory items.
4.6. Fans
The fans shall be dynamically and statically balanced, direct drive, corrosion
resistant glass fiber reinforce composite blades molded into low noise, providing
vertical air discharge from extended orifices for efficiency and low sound. Guards shall
be made from heavy gauge, steel wire epoxy oven baked painting.
The Fan Motors shall be of High efficiency, direct driven, 6 Pole 3 phase, insulation
class “F”. Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled (TEFC), rigid mounted, with double sealed,
permanently lubricated, ball bearings.
The compressors shall have an automatic regulating capacity from 100% to 25%. In case
of multiple compressors, sequencing of compressors shall be provided to allow the
compressors to start at a time lag of 3-4 minutes.
The chiller shall be provided with a factory installed and wired micro processor based
rain tight control panel. The control panel shall be provided with necessary TPN isolator
for termination of incoming power cable. A contactor shall be included in the control
centre for each compressor and a pair of fan motors.
The control system shall automatically control the operation of the unit from the time
the unit is started, through the operating period, until the unit is stopped. The internal
components shall be arranged for easy access. The panel shall incorporate necessary
interlocking between equipment as required. The motor control centre should include
safety devices to protect the unit from mal functions. These controls should shut down
the unit and signal the operator with their respective lights. The protective controls shall
be as listed hereunder:
i. High condenser pressure cutout.
ii. Low oil pressure cutout.
iii. High oil temperature cutout.
iv. High discharge temperature cutout.
v. Solid state motor over current cutout.
vi. Solid state low evaporator temperature control.
The chiller shall be BMS compatible. The control panel shall incorporate hardware
cards/control units for complete integration of chillers to building automation system.
The Software shall be stored in non-volatile memory, with programmed set-points
retained in lithium battery backed real time clock (RTC) memory for minimum 5
years.
Liquid crystal display, descriptions in English, numeric data in English (or Metric) units.
Sealed keypad with sections for Set points, Display/Print, Entry, Unit Options and clock,
and On/Off Switch.
Programmable Set-points: Display language; chilled liquid temperature set point and
range, remote reset temperature range, manual override for servicing, low and high
ambient cutouts, number of compressors, low liquid temperature cutout, low suction
pressure cutout, high discharge pressure cutout, anti-recycle timer (compressor start
cycle time), and anti-coincident timer (delay compressor starts).
Display Data: Return and leaving liquid temperatures, low leaving liquid
temperature cutout setting, low ambient temperature cutout setting, outdoor air
temperature, English or metric data, suction pressure cutout setting, each system suction
pressure discharge pressure (optional), liquid temperature reset via a Building
Automation System (by others) via PWM input as standard or at a 4-20 milliamp or 0
10VDC input or contact closure with optional BAS interface, anti- coincident system
start timer condition, compressor run status, no cooling load condition, day, date and
time, daily start/stop times, holiday status, automatic or manual system lead/lag control,
lead system definition, compressor starts/operating hours (each), status of hot gas valves,
evaporator heater and fan operation, run permissive status, number of compressors
running, liquid solenoid valve status, load and unload timer status, water pump status
(optional).
System Safety: Shall cause individual compressor systems to perform auto shut down;
for high discharge pressure, low suction pressure, high pressure switch, and motor
protector. Compressor motor protector shall protect against damage due to high input
current or thermal overload of windings.
Unit Safety: Shall be automatic reset and cause compressors to shut down if low
ambient, low leaving chilled liquid temperature, under voltage, and flow switch
operation. Contractor shall provide flow switch and wiring per chiller manufacturer
requirements.
Alarm Contacts: Low ambient, low leaving chilled liquid temperature, low voltage, low
battery, and (per compressor circuit): high discharge pressure, and low suction pressure.
Manufacturer shall provide any controls not listed above, necessary for automatic chiller
operation. Mechanical Contractor shall provide field control wiring necessary to
interface sensors to the chiller control system.
Rain tight, powder painted steel cabinets with hinged, latched, and gasket sealed outer
doors. Provide main power connection (s), control power connections, compressor
and fan motor start contactors, current overloads, and factory wiring.
Exposed compressor, control and fan motor power wiring shall be routed through liquid
tight conduit.
4.10. Refrigerant Circuit
The unit shall consist of copper refrigerant piping, independent refrigerant circuits for
multi compressor unit. Each refrigerant circuit shall include: liquid line shutoff valve
with charging port, filter-drier, solenoid valve, sight glass with moisture indicator,
thermostatic expansion valves, and flexible, closed-cell foam insulated suction line.
4.11. Installation
The air cooled chiller package housing compressor, chiller and condensers shall be
mounted on structural foundation. The Contractor shall supply all necessary foundation
bolts, nuts, washers, leveling screws, mounting frame or base plate, vibration isolation
pads etc. After erection, the unit shall be properly leveled before grouting the
foundation bolts and the levels should be shown to the Engineer’s representative.
All the equipment shall be thoroughly tested and checked for leaks.
The refrigeration filling shall be as per manufacture’s recommendation. The system shall
be vacuumed to within 7.6mm Hg Absolute and maintained for four hours. At the end
of this period the pumps shall be stopped and vacuum maintained for twenty four hours
without exceeding a vacuum drop of 2.5mm Hg Absolute. The Contractor shall certify
that the vacuum was maintained as specified above. All safety controls, low and high
refrigerant pressure controls, starter, overload trips shall be suitably set and record of
all the setting shall be furnished to the employer.
5.1 Testing
A05.1. General
A05.1.1 This section specifies the requirements for furnishing, installing and testing
the water circulating pump sets complete with all accessories specified herein.
A05.1.2 The pump sets shall be the product of one single Manufacturer whose name
shall appear on all submittals.
A05.2.1 The following codes, regulations, references, standards and specifications apply to
the work of this section.
A05.2.2. Submittals
A05.2.2.1 Before providing the pump Manufacturer with Notice to Proceed, the Contractor
shall submit to the Employer for his review and consent the following data
(not limited to):
The pump performance curves form shut off to free delivery shall have
the following data plotted as ordinate versus flow in cubic meters per
hour as abscissa:
– Head in m
– Efficiency
– NPSH required in m
The curve shall be for the recommended operating speed of the pump
(2) A motor data sheet for each pump giving the following information at the
operating point of the pump.
Current in ampere
Efficiency in percent
Torque in Nm
Pressure loss in all pipe fittings like elbows, reducers and tees
A05.3.1 The pump sets shall be split case type with flanged connections
directly mounted on TEFC squirrel cage induction motor and
suitable starter as specified. The pumps should have anti corrosion coating
on the inside of the casing and exterior (colour) finish should be as per employers
requirement.
A05.3.2 The impeller shall single entry shrouded design. The pump efficiency shall be
80% minimum.
A05.3.3 Water seal shall be of mechanical type to minimise water leakage and
should be easily serviceable in the field.
A05.3.4 Motor and starter shall conform to relevant specifications and of ratings
given in “Bill of Quantities”.
A05.3.5 The pump set shall be with horizontal/vertical split case type as per
the data sheet/Bill of Quantities.
A05.3.6 The pump casing shall be high density cast iron or cast steel
volute design machined to a close tolerance.
A05.3.9 The shafts seal shall be of mechanical type to withstand leakage at high
working pressure of 12 kg/cm².
A05.3.10 A suitable flexible coupling shall be provided to connect the pump and the
motor
A05.3.11. The base plate shall be suitable for mounting the motors and the pumps.
A05.4.1 General
The scope of this section comprise the supply, erection, testing and
commissioning of variable speed primary chilled water pumping system
conforming to these specifications as per Equipment Schedule.
operation.
A05.4.2.1 The capacity of primary chilled water pumps shall be in accordance with
Equipment Schedule and Schedule of Quantities.
A05.4.2.2 The pumps shall be of split casing/Inline type. Pump casing shall be close- grained
cast iron of heavy section, horizontal/vertical split, making possible complete
servicing of rotating parts without breaking piping or motor connections. Motor
to pump connection shall be of the smooth entry to impeller and increased
efficiency. Impeller shall be bronze or gun metal, double suction, enclose type,
hydraulically balanced and passages smooth- finished for minimum friction and
maximum efficiency. Shaft shall be stainless steel, protected by gunmetal sleeves
extending through stuffing boxes. Stuffing boxes shall be supported in ball/journal
bearings, grease lubricated, contained in easily removable housing. Pumps shall
be fitted with an air valve, two grease lubricators, drain plug and water seal
connections. Mechanical seals shall be provided with all pumps.
A05.4.2.3 Pump motor shall be energy efficient having the efficiency class of EFF-1 or
equivalent IEC standard, totally enclosed, fan-cooled, class-F insulation and
suitable for operation on AFD. Motor shall be specially designed for quiet
operation and its speed shall not exceed 1450 rpm. The motor rating shall be such
as to ensure non overloading of the motor throughout its capacity range. Motor
shall be suitable for 3-phase 415 + 10% volts, variable frequency power supply.
A05.4.2.4 Pump base shall be of size suitable for the pump, motor and shaft and shall
be constructed of cast iron or welded steel. Flexible coupling shall be protected by
a guard mounted on the common base.
A05.4.2.5 The pump shall be installed on a concrete foundation as shown in Approved- for-
Construction shop drawings.
A05.4.2.6 Each pump shall be provided with certified performance curves showing power
absorbed and corresponding flow rates by varying the speed. The tests shall be
done at factory and may be witnessed by Consultant/Owner.
A05.4.2.7 Split casing pumps, prior to testing shall be aligned with a dial indicator within
0.05mm.
A05.4.2.8 Pump performance curves and power consumption with operating points clearly
indicated shall be submitted and verified at the time of testing and
commissioning of the installation.
A05.4.2.9 Pump performance shall be computed from the pump curves provided by
manufacturer. All pumps shall be tested at factory as per relevant codes.
A05.4.3.1 The pump logic controller assembly shall be listed by and bear the label of
Underwriter’s Laboratory INC. (UL). The controller shall meet Part 15 of FCC
regulations pertaining to class A computing devices. The controller shall specifically
designed for variable speed pumping application. Pump logic controller shall be
suitably interfaced with on Adjustable Frequency Drive housed within same
enclosure.
A05.4.3.2 The controller shall function to a proven program that safeguards against
hydraulic conditions including:
b) Hunting
c) End of curve
A05.4.3.3 The pump logic controller shall be capable of receiving up to two dicrete
analoge variable signal inputs from sensors/transmitters. It shall then select the
analogue signal that has deviated the greatest amount from its set point. This
selected signal shall be used as the command feedback input for a hydraulic
stabilisation function to minimize hunting. Each input signal shall be capable of
maintaining a different set point value. Controller shall be capable of controlling up
to two pumps in parallel.
A05.4.3.4 The pump logic controller shall have an additional analogue input for a flow sensor.
This input shall serve as the criteria for the end of curve protection algorithm.
a) Multi-fault memory and recall last 10 faults and related operational data.
A05.4.3.7 Controller shall be capable of performing the following pressure booster function:
b) High system pressure cut-out to protect the piping system against high
pressure conditions.
c) No flow shut down to turn the pumps off automatically when system
demand is low enough to be supplied by hydro pneumatic tank. No
flow shutdown shall require any external flow meters, flow switches,
1. Frequency
2. Process Variable
3. Output Current
4. Output Power
f) Individual KW signals.
A05.4.4.1 The adjustable frequency drive(s) shall be pulse width modulation (PWM) type,
microprocessor controlled design.
A05.4.4.2 The AFD, including all factory installed options, be tested to UL Standard
508. The AFD shall also meet C-UL and be CE marked and built to ISO 9001
standards.
A05.4.4.3 The VFD shall be housed in a NEMA 1 enclosure. AFD’s with plastic enclosures
shall not be acceptable.
A05.4.4.4 The VFD shall employ an advanced sine wave approximation and voltage vector
control to allow operation at rated motor shaft output speed with no derating.
This voltage vector control shall minimize harmonics to the motor to increase motor
efficiency and life. Power factor shall be near unity regardless of speed or load.
A05.4.4.5 The VFD shall have balanced DC link reactors to minimize power line harmonics.
VFD’s without a DC link reactor shall provide a 3% impedance line reactor.
A05.4.4.6 Automatic motor adaptation (AMA) algorithm shall be utilized. This feature shall
allow for automatically optimized drive performance and efficiency leading to
additional energy savings.
A05.4.4.7 Input and output power circuit switching can be done without interlocks or
damage to the VFD.
a. Accel . time
b. Decel . time
c. Minimum frequency
d. Maximum frequency
A05.4.4.9 The VFD shall be compatible to interface with RS 485 utilizing N2 Protocol.
A05.4.4.10 An automatic energy optimization selection feature shall be provided. This feature
shall reduce voltages when lightly loaded and provide a 3% to 10% additional
energy savings.
A05.4.4.11 The AFD shall be suitable for elevations to 3300 feet above sea level without
derating. Maximum operating ambient temperature shall not be less than 104
A05.4.4.12 The AFD shall be capable of displaying the following information in plain
English via a 40 character alphanumeric display:
a. Frequency
b. Voltage
c. Current
d. Kilowatts per hour
e. Fault identification
f. Percent torque
g. Percent power
h. RPM
A05.4.4.13 All AFD’s shall be warranted for a period of 18 months after shipment. This
warranty shall cover parts and labor.
A05.4.6.1 The system shall consist of a pump logic controller, multiple pump/AFD sets, with
manual and automatic alternation and pump staging [wherever applicable].
A05.4.6.2 The pumping system shall start upon the closure of customer’s contact when the
pump logic controller Mode of Operation selector switch is in the REMOTE
position.
A05.4.6.3 When the pump logic controller selector switch is in the LOCAL position, and start
command is given via operator interface, the pumping system shall operate
automatically.
A05.4.6.5 Each sensor/transmitter shall send a 4-20mA signal to the pump logic controller,
indicative of process variable condition.
A05.4.6.6 The pump logic controller shall compare each signal to the independent,
engineer/user determined set points.
A05.4.6.7 When all set points are satisfied by the process variable, the pump speed shall
remain constant at the optimum energy consumption level.
A05.4.6.8 The pump logic controller shall continuously scan and compare each process variable
to its individual set point and control to the least satisfied zone.
A05.4.6.9 If the set point cannot be satisfied by the designated lead pump, the pump logic
controller shall initiate a timed sequence of operation to stage a lag pump
[wherever applicable].
A05.4.6.10 The lag pump shall accelerate resulting in the lead pump(s) decelerating until
they equalize in speed [wherever applicable].
A05.4.6.11 Further change in process variable shall cause the pumps to change speed together
[wherever applicable].
A05.4.6.12 When the set point criteria can be safely satisfied with fewer pumps, the
Technologic pump logic controller shall initiate a timed destage sequence and
continue variable speed operation [wherever applicable].
A05.4.6.13 As the worst case zone deviates from set point, the pump logic controller shall
send the appropriate analog signal to the AFD to speed up or slow down the
pump/motor.
A05.4.6.14 In the event of a AFD fault, the pump logic controller automatically initiates a times
sequence of events to start the redundant pump/AFD set in the variable speed mode.
The redundant variable speed system shall be started through the pump logic
controller.
A05.4.6.15 Upon AFD fault(s), the pump controller shall display an alarm condition
through a plain English message.
A05.4.6.16 AFD fault indication shall be continuously displayed on the operator interface of the
pump until the fault has been corrected and the controller has been corrected and
the controller has been manually reset.
A05.4.6.17 In the event of the failure of a zone sensor/transmitter, its process variable signal
shall be removed from the scan/compare program. Alternative zone
sensor/transmitters, if available, shall remain in the scan/compare program for
control.
A05.4.6.18 Upon sensor failure a plain English warning message shall be displayed on the
operator interface of the pump logic controller.
A05.4.6.19 In the event of failure to receive all zone process variable signals, a user
selectable number of AFDs shall maintain a user adjustable speed, reset shall be
automatic upon correction of the zone failure.
A05.4.7.2 The manufacturer shall have a minimum of 5 years experience in the design and
construction of variable speed pumping systems.
A05.4.7.3 All functions of the variable speed pump control system shall be tested at the factory
prior to shipment. This test shall be conducted with motors connected to AFD
output and it shall test all inputs and program execution specific to this
application.
A05.4.7.4 The manufacturer shall be fully certified by the International Standards Organisation
per ISO 9001. Proof of this certification shall be furnished at time of submittal.
A05.4.7.6 Tenderer shall comply with all sections of this specification relating to variable speed
pumping systems. Any deviations from this specifications shall be clearly
defined in writing at time of bid. If no exceptions are taken at time of bid, the
supplied shall be bound by these specifications.
A05.4.8 PAINTING
All variable pumping system, pumps, motors and bases shall be supplied with
approved finish. Shop coat of paint that have become marred during shipment or
erection shall be cleaned off with mineral spirits, wire brushed and spot primed
over the affected areas, then coated with enamel paint to match the adjoining
areas.
TABLE OF CONTENT
A06.1. General .............................................................................................................................798
A06.2. Quality control ..................................................................................................................798
A06.3. Technical and installation requirements ...........................................................................799
A06.1. General
A06.1.1. Description
A06.1.1.1. This Section specifies the manufacture and installation of ductwork, diffusers,
registers, grilles, dampers, guide vanes, cleaning of air system, access panels
and accessories.
A06.1.1.2. All ductwork and distribution accessories delivered to Site shall be new and
indelibly stamped to identify different grades, materials and manufacturers.
A06.1.1.3. Provide all ductwork, diffusers, registers, dampers and grilles generally in
accordance with the Drawings to be performed during final design stage.
A06.1.1.4. Diffusers, registers and grilles shall be selected to meet the requirements of noise
control as described elsewhere in this Specification.
A06.3.1.3 Provide splitter dampers, complete with adjusting handle or similar device to all
branches of the supply air ducts to regulate air flows along the main
duct and the branch ducts. Provide opposed blade type volume control
dampers to all branch.
A06.3.1.4 Provide flexible connectors of not less than 100 mm long between primary air
handling units/air handling units/fans and related ductwork to prevent
transmission of vibration to adjacent elements. Flexible connectors shall also be
provided at building/station expansion and movement joints.
A06.3.1.5 The material used for the flexible connections shall withstand the specified
conditions of temperature and air pressure, and shall comply with the
standards of air-tightness. The material shall be fire resistant.
A06.3.1.6 Provide access doors in ducts where required to gain access to fans,
silencers, dampers, filters or controls for cleaning and future maintenance.
A06.3.1.7 Access doors and panels in ductwork shall be quick release type with
handles. Multiple screw fixings will not be accepted. The doors shall be of air-
tight construction with gasket mounted on the periphery of door frame.
A06.3.1.9 All flanged joints in ductworks shall be made up with rubber gaskets or
suitable mastic material. These joints should also be connected with suitable
material for earthing. Proper sized electrical continuity jumpers (min. 2 per
joint) is required to be provided for making the duct work continuous. The
gaskets provided should be fire retardent and should not emit toxic gases in case
of fire.
A06.3.1.10 Apply sealant, adhesives, tapes to joints for sealing. All such material shall
comply with the requirements of DW/144.
A06.3.1.11 Balancing dampers of appropriate types shall be provided for air balancing.
A06.3.1.12 Short radius rectangular and square elbows in air ducts shall be equipped with
double thickness turning vanes. Long radius elbows shall be used wherever possible.
A06.3.1.13 The transition ductwork between silencers and fans shall be constructed of not
less than 1.2mm thick galvanised steel sheet. The transition shall be aligned
with the fans and shall be connected with angle flanges.
A06.3.1.14 The ducts and supports in the stations must be adequate for minimum 100
mm wg static pressure or the system pressure whichever is the higher.
A06.3.2.2 Flexible ducting used to connect the air distribution accessories and main
ductworks shall comply with Part 7 of DW/144.
A06.3.2.3 Flexible duct length shall not exceed 3.7m in length. Sheet metal duct branch
off shall be provided in case the maximum length of flexible duct permitted is
not long enough to reach the air terminal.
A06.3.2.4 Bending radius shall be sufficient to prevent undue tensioning of the outside
of the bend and restriction of the throat likely to cause deformation and/or
leakage. The ratio between the bending radius and the duct diameter shall be less
than 2. In no case shall flexible ductwork be used to connect misaligned ducts.
A06.3.2.5 Flexible duct shall consist of flexible corrugated metal tubing of stainless steel,
aluminium, tin plated or aluminium coated steel and suitable for an operating
temperature range of –5 to 9°C.
A06.3.2.6 The frictional resistance to air flow per unit length of flexible duct shall not
exceed 150% of the frictional resistance per unit length of galvanised steel
duct of similar diameter.
A06.3.2.7 Flexible duct shall be insulated and wrapped with a minimum 25mm thick
3
24kg/m density fibre glass blanket.
A06.3.2.8. Flexible duct shall not be used for any system which is designed for
handling smoke or being part of a smoke control system.
A06.3.3.1 Provide fire dampers in air ducts where ducts penetrate fire compartments.
A06.3.3.2. Fire dampers shall fully comply with the requirements of DW/144.
A06.3.3.3 Fire dampers shall be constructed to the same standards of air tightness as the
rest of the system.
A06.3.3.4 Fire damper casings and blades shall be constructed of galvanised sheet (275
GSM) and provided with a galvanised steel angle frame to each side of wall or
floor.
A06.3.3.5 Fire damper casings shall be flanged to suit the ductwork which they are fitted
and the cross-sectional area shall not be less than that of the ductwork.
A06.3.3.6 Blade and fusible link shall be accessible for servicing through air-tight
inspection doors placed upstream or downstream of the air path whichever
provides the better access.
A06.3.3.7 Provide Approved fusible link set at 68°C or else as approved to all fire
dampers unless otherwise specified. Fusible link shall be arranged in an exposed
position and at upstream of the damper.
A06.3.3.8 Details and position of all fire damper and associated access doors shall be
submitted for Approval prior to installation on Site.
A06.3.3.9 Provide all necessary fixing framework for the installation of fire dampers.
A06.3.3.10 Provide fire rated material to seal off the clearance between the fire
dampers and wall.
A06.3.4.1 Where shown on the Drawings, fire rated ductwork or equipment enclosure
shall be fabricated from fire rated material to the requirements of BS 476 Part 24
or ISO 6944.
A06.3.4.2 The fire rated ductwork shall follow the latest Code of Practice of Fire
Resisting Construction BS 9999 and BS 7346 Part-2.
A06.3.4.3 The construction of the ductwork or enclosure shall take into account the
structural strength, noise isolation as required and the requirements of Class
C duct in accordance with DW/144.
A06.3.4.4 All necessary supports, and other accessories required for the complete
installation of fire rated ductwork, Sealent, Gasket, including additional material for fire
stopping at wall/ceiling penetration, shall be supplied by the same manufacturer as the fire rated
duct material and shall be assembled in accordance with all the manufacturer’s
recommendation regarding all aspects of construction and installation shall be certified by the
manufacturer.
A06.3.4.5 The applicable smoke temperature shall be 250 deg C. The ductwork system
shall be fire-rated for two hours and shall maintain mechanical stability, fire resistant
integrity, and thermal insulation criteria to BS 476: Part 24 as per the ISO Cellulosic Fire
Curve at temperature of 1029 C, for both vertical and horizontal duct arrangements, for
both inside and outside fire exposures. Restriction of the duct due to twisting or buckling after
the fire test shall not cause 25 % or more reduction in cross- sectional duct area.
A06.3.4.7 Whether BS 476 thermal insulation criterion is applicable or not, fire rated air-
conditioning supply, return, and exhaust ductwork shall be complete with
thermal insulation and vapour barrier.
A06.3.4.8 The fire resistant material shall not attract pests and shall not rot or
support the growth of mould.
A06.3.4.9 All fire resistant ductwork or enclosure, apart from its fire resisting quality, shall
be capable of resisting accidental damage and shall require to pass the hard body
impact test section of BS 5669: Part 1 with the weight being dropped through not
less than 1m.
A06.3.4.10 Smoke extraction system ductwork shall be made from suitable material with
adequate thickness. Rivets or self sealing screws used shall not be of aluminium.
A06.3.4.11 Fire resistant and acoustically sealed access panels shall be provided in the
above-mentioned enclosures for the access and maintenance of equipment and
fire dampers.
A06.3.5.1 All motor operated dampers shall be suitable for installation in either a
vertical plane or a horizontal plane.
A06.3.5.2 The dampers shall be operated by electric actuators and shall be readily
assembled on Site from modular panels. Each motor operated damper panel
shall be of the multiple-parallel-blade type, with an independent channel
frame; and shall be factory-assembled complete with frames, blades, shafts,
bearings, seals, linkage, and all accessories required to erect the panels into
composite dampers. Motor operated dampers shall be provided with all structural
support members and hardware required for installation with additional framing
or trims as required to complete the installation.
A06.3.5.3 Motor operated damper actuator shall be mounted outside of the damper frame.
A06.3.5.4 Spring-return type damper actuator shall be provided either to open or close
damper as required in the event of power failure.
A06.3.5.5 All motor operated dampers shall be the product of a single manufacturer; and all
like components shall be provided by a single supplier.
A06.3.5.6 Motor operated damper module assembly shall have a net free face area of not
less than 80 % measured to the inside of the frames.
3
A06.3.5.7 Dampers shall be based on standard air having a density of 1.20 kg/m .This
shall apply to MOD and MSFD/MFD.
A06.3.5.8 The motor operated damper manufacturer shall carry out factory tests to verify
that when the dampers are fully-closed and holding against a differential
3
pressure of 1000 Pa, air leakage through the damper will not exceed 0.1 m /s
per square metre of net damper face area.
A06.3.5.9 When the dampers are in the fully-open position and air is flowing across the
damper at a uniform velocity of 10 m/s and the static-pressure drop across the
damper shall not exceed 38 Pa.
A06.3.5.10 The motor operated dampers and their associated structural-supporting systems
shall, when the dampers are in the fully - closed position, be capable of
withstanding a differential pressure across the dampers of not less than 1.5 kPa.
A06.3.5.11 The motor operated damper blade and shaft assemblies shall be supported at
each end by means of heavy duty, permanent self- lubricating bronze or
stainless steel bearings.
A06.3.5.12 All motor operated damper-blade seals and damper-frame seals shall be
fabricated of a flexible material suitable for the specified operating
conditions as Approved. The seals shall be factory-installed in dovetail
grooves incorporated for this purpose in the design of the blade and frames
to facilitate a tight closure between the blades, and between the
blades and frame. All seals shall sit securely in the closed damper position.
Alternative design of the seals will be subject to the Approval of
the Engineer. Noise due to resonance of spring-type seals or any other source
shall be rejected.
A06.3.5.13 Each module of damper with only two operating positions should have one
limit switch with two contacts to monitor its open/closed status. If any one
module of the damper fails to operate, the damper shall be considered
not functioning properly. For each module of damper with three operating
positions, two or more limit switches shall be provided.
A06.3.5.14 Motor operated damper linkage shall consist of stainless steel (SS-316),
extending through bearings inserted in brackets fabricated of stainless steel.
The linkage bearings shall be fabricated from bronze or other material
suitable for the specified operating conditions as Approved. The linkage brackets
shall either be attached to the damper-blade shafts or be side-mounted and
mechanically inter-connected with the shafts. Set screws shall not be used in the
linkage assembly.
A06.3.5.15 Motor operated damper frames shall be a channel cross-section with not less
than a 100 mm web and 50 mm flanges, and shall be fabricated of hot-dipped
galvanised steel plate (min. 275 GSM) to BS EN 10142. Reinforcing bosses and
dove-tail grooves for mounting frame seals shall be integral parts of the channel
configuration. The corners of the frames shall be either welded or reinforced by
means of riveted gusset plates.
A06.3.5.16 All screws, bolts, nuts, washers, expansion anchors, and/or other hardware
required to complete the installation shall be fabricated from stainless steel
grade 316, and all intermediate supports, framing members, and hardware
required for assembly/installation of the damper shall be fabricated of hot-dipped
galvanised steel to BS 729.
A06.3.5.17 The motor operated dampers shall be installed using fastening devices and
structural support elements herein specified, and in accordance with
the published instructions of the damper manufacturer.
A06.3.5.18 Motor operated damper blades shall have an aerofoil cross-section, and shall be
fabricated of hot-dipped galvanised steel plate( min. 275 GSM) to
BS EN 10142 extruded to a minimum thickness of 2 mm. The width of the
blades, measured in the direction of airflow shall not be less than 100 mm and
shall not be greater than 200 mm.
A06.3.5.20. All VCDs, and MDs shall also comply with above specifications to the
extent applicable. VCDs shall have provision to set & lock the damper at any
desired position, whereas, MDs shall have a two position set and lock facility
only. These would be made of GSS (275 GSM) with 2 mm frame and blades.
A06.3.6.1 MSFD/MFD, FMDs shall comply with FSD requirements and as specified above
for MOD, with the following additional requirements:
A06.3.6.2 MSFD/MFD frames and other components made of steel shall be hot- dipped
galvanised to BS EN 10142 and shall not be painted. Damper blades shall be
fabricated of galvanised steel to BS EN 10142. All unprotected edges shall be
touched up with an Approved paint-on type zinc-based protective coating.
A06.3.6.3 MSFD/MFD design and construction materials shall be submitted for Approval
and shall conform to the high temperature ratings as specified on the Equipment
Schedules and/or Drawings.
A06.3.6.4 MSFD/MFD shall comply with BS 476: Part 20 or UL 555 and Class I to UL
555S. MSFD/MFD shall be tested in accordance with the procedure specified
in UL 555S with respect to the requirements of elevated temperature and air
leakage of the MSFD/MFD.
A06.3.6.5 MSFD/MFD shall have a minimum fire rating to match with the FRP
requirement of the structural elements where the MSFD/MFD is mounted.
A06.3.6.6 All materials used for the construction of the MSFD/MFD shall be so
selected and all components and accessories of the dampers shall be so designed
that the dampers will be fully operational in accordance with the
performance requirements specified when fully exposed in an air stream
temperature of 250°C for not less than one hour. Accessories shall
include electric actuators, limit switches and any other damper status sensing
devices.
A06.3.6.7. Actuator shall be of sufficient torque to ensure tight closure of the damper,
and shall be capable of being detached with ease to allow manual operation of
the damper. The actuator shall be provided with spring return to close or open as
required by the design in case of power failure.
A06.3.6.8 The actuator linkage shall be capable of being adjusted so as to allow the damper
to function as a volume control damper.
A06.3.6.9 All VCDs and MFDs shall also comply with the above specifications to the extent
applicable. In addition, VCDs shall have provision to set and lock
the damper in any position, whereas, FMDs shall have a two position set and
lock facility only.
A06.3.7.2 All blanking plates and sealing plates shall be provided for a complete
installation.
A06.3.7.3 Vanes, supports, stiffeners, flanges, washers, bolts and welding filler
shall be of galvanised steel (275 GSM) and constructed to the
recommendations of DW/144.
A06.3.7.4 Vanes shall be of continuous seam welded construction, except for stiffening
ribs, which may be stitch welded. Welding shall be in accordance with
relevant British Standards.
A06.3.7.5 Curved sections shall be rolled or alternatively formed by a series of
creases in a break press as long as the creases are closely spaced, not
obstructive and form a smooth profile of air flow. If a break press is to be used,
a sample of a section of vane shall be submitted for Approval.
A06.3.8. Ductwork Installation
A06.3.8.1 Provide complete ductwork systems and ensure that the installation can
be adjusted to the designed flow rates to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
A06.3.8.2 Check all the Drawings provided in regard to structural requirements and
other finishes before detailing the ducting system. Allowance shall be made
for the detailed development and on Site co-ordination.
A06.3.8.3 Submit all drawings to indicate the fabrication and installation of ductwork
for Approval before fabrication commences.
A06.3.8.7 Install dampers and splitters in a manner so that they can be adjusted at any
time after completion of the work.
A06.3.8.8 Install dampers without strain or distortion of any part of the dampers.
A06.3.8.11 Adjust dampers and splitter adjusting rods to operate freely, between the
open and closed position.
A06.3.8.13 All ductwork shall be manufactured according to the dimensions taken on Site.
Provision shall be allowed to accommodate any discrepancies between the
Drawings and the Site dimensions.
A06.3.8.14 All branches and openings in ducts shall be purpose made prior to
erection of the ductwork.
A06.3.8.16 Internal roughness, sharp edges or obstructions to air flow shall not be
allowed.
A06.3.8.17 External edges and corners formed from cleated joints shall be neatly
dressed down with air tight joints.
A06.3.9.2 Unless otherwise specified, install vanes, volume control dampers and
multiple-blade extractors so that they can be removed through the diffusers and
registers for access to the duct.
A06.3.9.3 Install diffusers, grilles, registers and louvres with frame connected to the
ductwork and provide soft gaskets inserted under the frame or otherwise so
arranged so as to avoid air leakage around the diffusers and grilles.
A06.3.10.1 Each damper shall be installed so as to provide smooth operation, opening and
closing without shock in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
A06.3.10.2 Undue flexing or bending of connecting rods and linkage will not be acceptable.
Such connecting rod or linkage shall be replaced with either a corrected design,
A06.3.10.4 Wall and floor mounted dampers: All slight, unavoidable spaces and purpose-
provided spaces between the damper frames and the structure shall be sealed as
required or as Approved. Blanking-off plates for such purpose shall be
considered as part of the damper assembly and shall be provided at no additional
cost to the Employer.
A06.3.10.5 Damper module installations shall be fully sealed by gaskets between the module
frame and the mounting frame. The gasket material for MSFD/MFD shall
meet the continuous operation in an air stream temperature of 250°C for not
less than one hour criteria. Identification of damper position is required on easy
visible and accessible position, and the damper setting position after balancing
shall be marked in a permanent manner.
A06.3.11.1 The Contractor shall supply and install air duct cleaning points access doors
at suitable locations to the duct work system. The cleaning points shall be
installed at fully accessiable locations. The contractor shall also supply
proprietary type compressed air lance, disinfection application lance and
ambling probe which shall be suitable for use with the cleaning points. All joints
must be air/water tight to prevent leakage.
A06.3.12.1. All grills and diffusers shall be designed and rated in accordance with
ASHRAE 32-7.
A06.3.12.2 All grills and diffusers shall be of pure polyester finish aluminium unless
otherwise specified. Colour of grills and diffusers shall be selected by the
Engineer. Samples of finishes shall be submitted for approval.
A06.3.12.3 All supply, return and exhaust diffusers shall be complete with opposed blade
dampers, suitable for mounting with appropriate diffuser and shall be fitted
with concealed adjustment devices. Straightner grids are required before
diffusers except for the last diffuser on the route. Each supply air grille shall
be complete with an opposed blade multi-leaf damper. One set of tool for every
10 grilles or diffuser shall be provide for volume adjustment.
A06.3.12.4. The inside of all components and surfaces of all diffusers and grilles shall be
painted matt black. The drawings show provisional locations of diffusers and
grilles but in each instance outlets shall be installed in accordance with the
final detail drawings and reflected ceiling plans.
A06.3.12.5 Velocities, net airways and distribution patterns shall give satisfactory air
distribution and temperature equalisation, be free of draughts stratification or
noise nuisance. The contractor shall make final adjustments to air patterns
when balancing.
A06.3.12.6. The sizes of the grilles (including linear grille) indicate on drawings imply the
neck sizes of the fittings. Whereas the sizes of ceiling diffusers on drawings
imply overall external dimensions.
Provide galvanised steel sheet painted black at the front view to seal
off dummy parts of diffuser.
Throw : 4m
Noise criteria : NC 30
Grilles and register shall be factory assembled with opposed blade volume
control dampers operable through the grilles face. The adjustment shall be by a
key through the face of the register and the volume control damper shall be
group operated or opposed blade type. The operating mechanism shall not
project through any part at the register face.
All grille cores shall be capable of being removed easily from the duct work
of access to dampers.
All edges exposed to view shall be rolled or otherwise stiffned and rounded. All
edges shall be equipped with air tight, non-combisible neoprene or sealing stips
to prevent leakage. The register ring of frames shall be compitable with ceiling
construction in which they are installed.
Supply air registers shall comply with the following performance requirements at
design flow as :
Throw : 4m
Noise criteria : NC 30
Grilles shall have single set of fins which shall be vision proof to effectively
0
mask the return opening. Grilles shall have 45 inclined fins spaced
approximately 19 mm apart.
Provide air boot to the diffusers as shown on the drawings. Air boot
casing shall be constructed of 0.6 mm thick galvanised steel with interior
surfaces insulted to prevent erosion. Insulation and air boot shall be
Subject to the ceiling panel design, the flanges of the diffusers shall be
designed to support “drop in “ceiling pane.
Provide suitable support points independent of suspended ceiling for the air
boots and the associated diffusers.
Air boot spigot location and dimensions shall generally be as indicated on the
drawings.
Provide galvanised steel sheet painted black at the front view to seal off the
dummy part of the diffusers.
Linear air diffuser shall comply with the following performance requirements
at design flow as :
Throw : 6m
Noise criteria : NC 35
Each nozzle/Jet diffuser assembly shall consist of the diffuser element and
shall be compitable with the architectural design in which they are installed.
Individual diffuser element shall be capable of adjusting the air deflection upto
0
30 from any plane perpendicular to the face. Adjustment shall be
accomplished from front or back of the diffuser without tools.
Throw : 15m
Noise criteria : NC 35
A06.3.13.1. Gasketed airtight access doors shall be provided at the duct for access, inspection
and maintenance of fans, equipment, dampers, filters, smoke probes and
controls.
A06.3.13.2. Doors shall be hinged type complete with minimal of two sash locks and shall be
made of same metal thickness as ducts. Doors shall have suitable size to access.
A06.3.13.3. Access doors for insulated ductwork shall be of double skin construction with
insulation in between. The insulation for the access doors shall be of the same
type and thickness as the adjacent ductwork.
A06.3.13.4. The door panels shall be made of suitable material and they shall have not less
than 12 mm wide neoprene rubber gasket around the entire perimeter to
ensure air tightness. It shall have the same fire rating as the adjacent duct
construction.
A06.3.13.5. The access doors shall be hung on approved heavy duty hinges and provided
with suitable quantity with locks. The locks shall be able to operate both
from inside and outside. Where it is impracticable to use hinge doors, the
access doors may be fixed in position with wedge type locks on opposite sides
with suitable quantity per door. The section of the duct where the access door
is located shall be reinforced with suitable material.
A06.3.13.6. Where the duct is of smaller dimensions than the access door specified, the door
shall be of the full width of the duct Sealant and gasket used shall be in
accordance with the recommendations of HVCA, DW/144 Specification.
TABLE OF CONTENT
A07.1. General .............................................................................................................................818
A07.2. Quality control ..................................................................................................................818
A07.3. Technical and installation requirements ...........................................................................819
A07.1. General
A07.2.2 All insulating materials shall comply with the requirement of BS 5422 &
BS 5970.
A07.2.3. All insulating materials shall be tested to comply with the following:
BS 476: Part 5: Product shall not ignite when tested by source A for 10s by face
ignition.
BS 476: Part 6: Fire propagation I less than 12, i less than 6
BS 476: Part 7 Class 1: surface spread of flame
BS 476 : Part-4 : Non Cumbustability
A07.2.4 Combustion rating when tested in accordance with NFPA Standard Nos.
90A and 90B, shall not exceed 25 for flame spread and 50 for smoke
developed.
A07.3.1 The materials, thickness and finishes for insulation applied for various
services are specified as:
Semi-rigid fibre glass / wool or rockwool duct wrapped with a factory
applied vapour barrier jacketing secured in position with adhesive and fixing
pin/retaining washers. Vapour barrier shall be double sided aluminium foil
kraft paper, fire resistant adhesive and reinforced with fibre glass yarn. The
kraft paper shall be permanently treated to assure permanent fire and smoke
safety, and to prevent corrosion of the foil.
A07.3.1.1 Areas of flat insulation with any dimension greater than 1200mm shall
have galvanised fixings equal to the thickness of the insulation secured to
the surface with self-sealing aluminium ’pop’ rivets to provide firm fixing
for finishes.
Minimum density: 32kg/m3 for glass wool and 64 kg/m3 for Rockwool
Maximum K-factor: 0.035W/mK at 25°C mean temperature
Temperature range: 0 to 120°C
Thermal Resistance or R-value shall be as per ECBC code
A07.3.2.2 0.8mm thick aluminium hammerclad cladding firmly secured with ’pop’
rivets evenly spaced at 100mm centres shall be applied to indoor insulation
which is visually exposed to view inside station areas and within
plant rooms. Cladding shall be provided with means of removal for repair and
maintenance. The same cladding is to be provided on the chilled
waterpipes.
A07.3.2.3 15mm cement plaster finish on chicken-wire mesh with additional finish of
0.8mm polyisobutylene sheeting with solvent weld joints shall be applied
to outdoor type insulation which is exposed to ambient. The whole shall be
then provided with a completely weatherproof external enclosure to the
insulation. Corrosion proof bands and clips shall hold the sheeting tight against
the insulation such that ballooning will not occur.
A07.3.3. Execution
A07.3.3.1 Insulation shall not be applied before the relevant plant or service has
been satisfactorily inspected and tested.
A07.3.3.3 Apply insulation on clean and dry surface with no foreign materials, such
as oil, grease, rust, scale or any other dirt.
A07.3.3.7 Stagger all joints with respect to the adjacent butt joint. Seal with 50mm
wide aluminium foil type for fibre glass insulation.
securing of insulation.
A07.3.4.5 The protruding ends of the pins shall be cut off flush and the vapour barrier
facing shall be thoroughly sealed with a vapour barrier mastic or
tape where the pins have pierced through. Pin spacing shall not exceed
300mm on centres.
A07.3.6. Piping
A07.3.6.1 Install same thickness insulation as the adjoining pipe insulation on flanges,
valves and other fittings to obtain the maximum strength and security. Seal
joints, protruding metal parts and valve stems thoroughly.
A07.3.6.2 All valves, traps, flanges and strainers shall be insulated in conformity with
the pipework in which they are incorporated except that 1.2mm thick galvanised
steel or aluminium split boxes shall be provided to ensure easy removal of
insulation.
A07.3.6.3 Insulate strainers in such a manner to permit removal of gasket without
disturbing the insulation of the strainer body. Insulate valves up to and
including bonnets.
TABLE OF CONTENT
A08.1. General .............................................................................................................................824
A08.2. Quality control ..................................................................................................................824
A08.3. Technical and installation requirements ...........................................................................825
A08.1. General
A08.1.1 This section specifies the requirements for furnishing, installing, testing and
commissioning cooling towers complete with all accessories as specified herein.
A08.1.2 The cooling towers shall be the product of a single Manufacturer whose
name shall appear on all submittals.
Cooling Towers should be CTI certified. As per latest CTI STD 201 – 1991
Certification standard for cooling towers and shall demonstrate the performance
test on selected sample in factory/ at site.
CTI ATC 133 - 1985 Acceptance test code for spray cooling system
CTI ATC 105 – 1990 Acceptance test code for water cooling towers:
mechanical draft, Natural draft, fan assisted types,
evaluation of results, and thermal testing of wet/dry
cooling towers
CTI STD 201 – 1991 Certification standard for commercial water cooling
towers
CTI ATC 128 – 1981 Code for measurement of sound from water cooling
towers
CTI PFM 143 – 1994 Recommended practice for airflow testing of cooling towers
A08.2.1. Submittals
A08.2.2.1 Submit certificate of compliance that the design and fabrication of various
components of the cooling towers meet the requirement of the Contract.
A08.2.2.2 Include data substantiating that materials comply with the requirements of the
various standards as specified.
A08.2.2.3 Submit complete selection sheet, sound datasheet, performance curve, detailed
unit drawing, load point analysis as supporting documents tocomply on various
standards.
A08.3.1.1 The cooling towers shall be induced draft, Counter Flow/Cross flow type with
vertical discharge complete with FRP basin, FRP body, fan and motor
assembly, fill media, distribution pipes, etc.
A08.3.1.2 The Cooling tower shall be constructed with a sturdy structural Hot dipped
Galvanized frame designed to transmit all wind, seismic and mechanical Load
to the equipment anchorage. The body shall be made of FRP sections of equal
segments, all bolted together. The surface on both inside and outside shall be
smooth, for minimum air resistance. The fan deck shall form an integral part of
the body. The Casing panels shall be constructed of corrosion resistant and UV
resistant fibre glass reinforced Plastic (FRP) with smooth finish to minimize air
resistance and ensure prolong equipment life as per CTI Standard.
A08.3.1.3 The water basin shall be constructed of mimimum 4 mm thick Fibre glass
reinforced plastic (FRP), having an auxiliary cylindrical suction tank, wherever
required. The basin shall be completed with connections for drain, overflow,
make up-water, quickfill and float valve, plus hot dipped galvanised suction
strainer.
A08.3.1.4 The support structure for the tower shall be of mild steel duly sturdy
structural hot dipped galvanised frame (750GSM).
A08.3.1.5 The water diffusion deck shall be of rigid PVC fill as per manufacturer’s
standard, arranged in a suitable pattern for ease of replacement. The fill shall be
rated and certified by the cooling tower manufacturer.
A08.3.2.1 The hot water distribution basin shall be open gravity type for easy cleaning
and constructed with FRP and shall be distributed through a sprinkler
system consisting of PVC sprinkler pipes, which shall be mounted on top of
the main supply stand pipe. Alternately, the water distribution could be with a
water diffusion deck.
A08.3.3.1. The Fans shall be heavy duty, axial flow with aluminium alloy blades
selected to provide optimum cooling tower thermal performance with minimum
sound levels.The fan blades shall be of aerofoil design and
A08.3.3.2 The fan outlet velocity shall not be less than 10 m/s and the fan speed RPM
shall be as per manufacturer recommendations.
A08.3.3.3 The Fans shall be driven by either by speed reduction gears or multigrooved
V type belts with taper lock sheaves designed for 150 % of the motor nameplate
horsepower. In case of Belt driven assembly, Belt shall be of proven design
(already in service for more than 5 years) and be specifically designed for
cooling tower application. Fans and shafts shall be supported by heavy duty,
self aligned, grease–packed ball bearings with moisture proof seals and integral
slinger collars. One set of additional V belt set for one cooling tower shall be
supplied with each cooling Tower.
A08.3.3.4 The fan motor shall be of high efficiency class EFF-1 or equivalent IEC standard
totally enclosed fan cooled squirrel cage type conforming to I.P. 55
protection for outdoor operation designed specifically for cooling tower services.
The motor shall be furnished with moisture protection on the windings, shafts
and bearings and have watertight terminal box.
A08.3.3.5. The fan guard shall be hot dipped galvanised (min 750 GSM) with wire
mesh screen to prevent bird nesting during idling period.
A08.3.3.7. The air inlet area is to be provided with Stainless steel (SS-304) wire mesh and
louvers.
A08.3.4. Ladder
A08.3.4.1 All towers shall be provided with a ladder, made out of hot dipped galvanised
M.S. tubes (min. 750 GSM) to access the fan Deck. Handrails can be provided
along the perimeter of the cooling tower cells. The ladder design shall be
submitted for approval by Employer’s representative.
A08.3.5.1 The noise emanating from the cooling towers, when measured at the nearest
property line of a commercial building, shall not exceed 85 dBA from the
distance of 1 meter. Sound data sheet showing complete octave band should be
submitted by the manufacturer.
A08.3.6. Installation
A08.3.6.1. Installation shall be carried out in a manner which shall fully comply with the
Manufacturer’s recommendations.
Furnish all field test instruments. The Contractor may remove test
instruments only after testing is completed.
A08.3.7.3 The noise level testing for the cooling tower shall be conducted in
accordance with the procedure specified in CTI publication ATC 128.
TABLE OF CONTENT
A09.1. General .............................................................................................................................830
A09.2. Quality control ..................................................................................................................830
A09.3. Technical and installation requirements ...........................................................................832
A09.1. General
A09.1.1 This section specifies the requirements for manufacturing, furnishing, installation
and testing of pipe work related to ECS, complete with all required
accessories.
A09.2.1 Material and workmanship shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the
following standards and codes, and the materials shall be certified by the
standard organisation.
ASTM B16: Standard Specification for Free-Cutting Brass Rod, Bar and Shapes for
use in Screw Machines
ASTM B88: Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube ASTM D2000:
Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in
Automotive Applications
BS 43&1256: Malleable Cast Iron and Cast Copper Alloy Threaded Pipe Fittings
BS 476: Fire Tests on Building Materials and Structures
BS 864: Capillary and Compression Tube Fittings of Copper and Copper Alloy
BS 1387: Screwed and Socketed Steel Tubes and Tubulars and for Plained End
Steel Tubes Suitable for Welding or for Screwing to BS21 Pipe
Threads
BS 1965: Butt Welding Pipe Fittings for Pressure Purposes
BS 2494: Elastomeric Seals for Joints in Pipework and Pipelines
BS2871Part2: Copper and Copper Alloys, Tubes Part 2: Tubes for
General Purposes
BS 3600: Specification for Dimensions and Masses Per Unit Length of Welded and
Seamless Steel Pipes and Tubes for Pressure Purposes
BS 3601: Carbon Steel Pipes and Tubes with Specified Room
Temperature Properties for Pressure Purposes
BS 3974: Pipe Supports
BS 4504: Circular Flanges for Pipes, Valves and Fittings (PN Designated)
BS 4865: Dimension of Gaskets for Flanges to BS 4504
BS 5422: Method for Specifying Thermal Insulating Materials on Pipes,
Ductwork and Equipment (In Temperature Range 40 Degrees Celsius to
+700 Degrees Celsius)
BS CP 2010: Codes of Practice for Pipelines
BS EN 287: Part 1: Approval Testing of Welders for Fusion Welding: steels
BS EN 545: Ductile Iron Pipes, Fittings, Accessories and Their Joints for
Water Pipelines - Requirements and Test Methods
A09.2.2. Submittals
A09.2.2.1 Certificate of the standards organisation testifying that the material furnished
under this Contract comply with these standards.
Material test certificates giving the physical and chemical properties of the
material used in the manufacture
Hydraulic tests
Radiographic film
A09.3.1.2 Condensate drain and vent piping system: Nominal bore 15-150:
Galvanised steel to BS 1387 or IS 1239 medium grade
A09.3.1.3 For fan unit connections: Copper tubes to ASTM B88 type L
A09.3.2.1 Chilled water system/Condenser water system: Black malleable iron screwed
fittings to BS 143 and 1256 or purpose made heavy weight welding fittings
to BS 1965: Part 1 for pipes up to 50 mm. Purpose made heavy weight welding
fittings to BS 1965: Part 2 for pipes 65 mm diameter and above. Thickness and
outside diameter of the pipefittings shall match with the straight pipe.
A09.3.2.2 Condensate drain and vent piping system: Galvanised malleable iron screwed
fittings to BS 143 and BS 1256.
A09.3.3. Flanges
A09.3.3.1 Welded piping: Steel, welding neck pattern, 150 (1035 kPa) or 300 (2070 kPa)
WSP class, complying with BS 4504 shall be used.
A09.3.3.2 Screwed piping: Galvanised steel screwed boss flanges complying with BS
4504: Part 1 Table 16/4 or galvanised malleable cast iron screwed boss
flanges complying BS 4504 Part 1 Table16/13.
A09.3.3.3 Copper tubing: Copper slip-on flanges for brazing, complying with BS 4504
shall be used. Galvanised iron bolts and nuts shall not be used for fixing copper
flanges.
A09.3.4 Gaskets
A09.3.4.1 Gaskets shall be suitable for the temperature, service and pressure of the system
and shall be installed in accordance with the Manufacturer’s recommendations.
Made-up flanged joints shall be fabricated from one- piece ring gaskets, 3mm
thick, neoprene rubber.
A09.3.4.2 For flanged joints between dissimilar metals or insulating flange joints:
insulating gaskets, sleeves and washers between flanges, bolts and nuts
respectively shall be used. Insulating material shall be “Teflon” or approved
equal.
A09.3.4.3 Joint rings and gaskets shall comply with the requirements of BS 2494 or BS
4865 but other materials may be used if they have been proved to be more
suitable for their duty as recommended by the Manufacturer, and approved by
the Engineer.
A09.3.4.4 For FCU connections, gaskets shall conform to ANSI B 16.21 and ASTM D
2000.
A09.3.5 Jointing
A09.3.5.1 Chilled water/Condenser water systems: screwed sockets or welded joints for
sizes up to 50mm; butt-welded joints for sizes 65 mm and above.
A09.3.5.2 Condensate drain and vent piping systems: screwed sockets joints for sizes up
to 50mm; screwed flanges for pipe work 65mm and above.
A09.3.5.3 Chilled water/Condenser water systems: black malleable iron, bronze to iron
spherical seat unions for pipework up to 50 mm diameter. Black mid steel
welding flanges to BS 4504 in accordance with the specified working pressure for
pipework above 65mm diameter.
A09.3.5.4 For condensate drain and vent piping systems: Galvanised malleable iron, bronze
to iron spherical seat unions for pipework up to 50 mm diameter. For pipes of
A09.3.8. Installation
A09.3.8.2 The installation shall be neat and tidy, with accurate spacing between pipes,
valves and joints, whether running in straight routes or turning through
bends.
A09.3.8.3 Particular care shall be taken that all pipework is erected and secured truly
parallel with the building structure, clear of obstructions, preserving headroom
and keeping passageways clear and that all vertical drops are plumb.
A09.3.8.5 Wherever possible, horizontal pipes shall be fixed to ’fall’ to aid venting and
draining down of the pipework. Eccentric reducing sockets shall be used on
horizontal runs of pipe to prevent the formation of air pockets. On vertical pipes,
concentric reducing sockets shall be used.
A09.3.8.6 Drain outlets shall be provided at all low points of the system to enable
emptying and to facilitate maintenance of the pipework.
A09.3.8.7 Automatic or manual air vents shall be placed at each high point of each water
line and discharge pipe shall be terminated at 50 mm above floor drain.
A09.3.8.8 Pipe runs, where exposed, shall be positioned at least 25 mm from the finished
wall surfaces to enable subsequent cleaning and painting of all surfaces. Where
pipe runs are installed at an angle, they shall be positioned 40 mm from the
finished surfaces.
A09.3.8.9 All pipes shall be fitted clear of the floor to permit cleaning beneath the pipes.
Where possible, a 125 mm clearance shall be provided between the underside
of the pipe and the finished level of the floor and in no case shall the pipe be less
than 100 mm clear of the floor.
A09.3.8.10 All pipe runs when not buried underground shall be concealed as far as
possible by careful positioning or shall be chased into walls, or laid in
screeds except inside plant rooms. All pipes which are to be concealed shall be
tested and Approved before being covered.
A09.3.8.11 Where it is not possible to install the pipework with setting out dimensions as
shown on the Drawings, minor deviations will be allowed, subject to prior
Approval.
A09.3.8.12 Where pipes pass through walls and floors, steel pipe sleeves shall be
provided to allow free axial movement of the pipes. Sleeves passing
through walls shall be of sufficient length to fully enclose the pipe, from one
side of the finished wall to the other side. Sleeves passing through floors shall
protrude at least 50 mm above and below the finished floor and soffit to
enclose the pipe.
A09.3.8.13 All pipes passing through the roof shall be provided with at least mm lead
flashing sandwiched between the layers of waterproofing roofing membrane, and
secured to the pipe with a galvanized spring clip.
A09.3.8.15 Accessible pipes shall be flanged or union connected in sections of three nominal
lengths for dismantling. Embedded pipework shall be in straight lengths as far
as possible. Pipes with screwed joints shall be installed with hexagon unions at
suitable positions for easy removal of equipment.
A09.3.8.16 All pipe installations shall be provided with removable sections to facilitate pipe-
cleaning operations.
A09.3.8.17 Pipework shall rest freely upon supports and be carefully aligned prior to final
connection.
A09.3.8.18 All pipes on straight runs shall be lined up with facilities for pipes to be
rotated for the process of welding joints to avoid welding from the bottom as far
as possible.
A09.3.8.19 Site welding shall be applied with pipework unrestrained and each joint
hydraulically tested at 1.5 times working pressure plus 350 kPa for 60
minutes without loss of pressure followed by application of appropriate
protective coating, both internally and externally, prior to final installation.
A09.3.8.20 During storage, all pipes shall have end covers fitted to prevent the ingress of
any unwanted particles or waste.
A09.3.8.21 During installation, all open ends of pipes shall be blanked off with blank
flanges or pipe caps. These shall be removed only immediately prior to
connecting to adjacent sections. As soon as pipes have been installed, all open
ends shall be covered to prevent entrance of materials that would obstruct the
pipes. Covers shall be left in place until removal is necessary for completion of
the installation.
A09.3.8.23 The Engineer reserves the right to reject any material deemed to be
unsuitable for installation and such material shall be removed from the Site
and be replaced with approved material at no extra cost to the Employer.
A09.3.8.24 Steel welded fittings shall be of the same weight as the piping with which they
are to be used complying with ANSI B 16.9 and ASTM A234. Long radius
welded elbows shall be used at changes in the direction of the pipework.
Welded tees shall be used for branc hes of the same size as the main pipe.
Long radius reducing elbows shall be used at pumps. Reducing outlet tees
shall be used for branches of smaller size than main pipe. Where the branch size
is three or more pipe sizes smaller than the main pipe, steel gussets to provide
full pipe strength shall be used. Where a branch is connected to screwed piping, a
steel welded threaded socket shall be used. Eccentric welding reducing fittings
shall be used at changes in pipe size for horizontal piping, with top level for
water piping.
A09.3.9. Supports
A09.3.9.1 Unless otherwise specified or indicated, all brackets, stays, frames, fixed and
roller supports and hangers necessary to carry and support all pipes and valves
shall be provided.
A09.3.9.2 Generally supports shall be spaced. Unless otherwise specified, pipe supports
shall be provided at interval in accordance with the following tables.
15 2.5 1.8
20-25 3 2.5
32 3 2.7
40-50 3.6 3
Cast iron and ductile Maximum intervals for Maximum intervals for
iron pipe size (mm) vertical runs (m) horizontal runs (m)
All 3 1.75
UPVC or ABS pipe size Maximum intervals for Maximum intervals for
(mm) vertical runs (m) horizontal runs (m)
A09.3.9.3 Where hangers and/or supports are provided for insulated chilled water pipes,
a segmental section of hardwood or high density phenolic insulation
approximately 100 mm long shall be inserted, the outer diameter being
identical to that of the insulated pipe and the ends thereof facing tight the pipe.
A09.3.10. Hangers
A09.3.10.1 Hangers rods of steel, threaded and fitted with two removable nuts at each
ends for positioning rod and hanger and locking each in place shall be provided.
A09.3.10.2 Secure hangers from metallic inserts cast into concrete. When these inserts are
not available, attachment by anchor bolts to be placed with fast setting high
strength grout shall be used.
A09.3.11.1 Steel piping shall be mill-bevelled on both ends before welding, bevelled to
37.5°. Weld spacing on all butt welds shall comply with the following table.
A09.3.11.3 Before starting any welding, all corrosion product and other foreign material
from surfaces to be welded shall be removed by scraping, brushing, chipping and
swabbing.
A09.3.11.4 Welding process: welding shall be carried out by either manual shielded
metallic arc process or automatic submerged arc process using direct current.
All pipeline welding shall conform to Chapter 4, Section VI, “Welding of pipe
joints”, of ANSI code for pressure piping, ANSI B31.1, and in accordance
with latest accepted practice applicable to the particular service. Welding
procedure specifications shall be submitted for Approval.
A09.3.11.5 Welding operation: Electrodes, voltage, current, thickness and number of passes
or beads, shall be as previously specified. After deposition, each layer of weld
metal shall be cleaned to remove all slag and scale by wire brushing and
grinding and chipped where necessary to prepare for deposition of the next
layer. Welded reinforcement shall be not less than
1.6 mm nor more than 3.18 mm above the normal surface of sections being
welded. Reinforcement shall be crowned at centre and tapered on
each side of surfaces being jointed. Exposed surfaces of weld shall present
workmanlike appearance and be free of depressions below
surface of jointed members.
A09.3.11.6 Weld metal shall be thoroughly fused with base metal at all sections of weld.
Penetration of weld shall include unbevelled portion and extend to
inside walls of pipe.
A09.3.11.7 Inspection: All welds shall be inspected visually and non-destructively by the
Engineer. The Engineer reserves the right to order at random the examination
of 2 % of the number of the welded joints for ultrasonic test by an independent
firm nominated and paid by the Contractor. Should any one of the above welds
prove faulty in materials or workmanship, further test of welds will be ordered
up to a total of 4 % of the welded joints. If the number of welds failing the tests
within the above 4 %, it is sufficient to suggest that an operative is not
consistent in standard, the Engineer may order any number of that welds to be
removed and rectified at no extra cost to the Employer.
A09.3.12. Jointing
A09.3.12.1 Pipes shall be cut in a neat manner without damaging the pipe. Unless
otherwise approved by the Engineer, cutting shall be done with an approved
type of mechanical cutter. Wheel cutters shall be used only when practicable.
Pipe ends shall be reamed to remove burrs.
A09.3.12.2 Flanges and unions shall be face true. Flanges shall be provided with
approved gaskets and made square and tight.
A09.3.12.3 Screw joints shall be made with tapered threads properly cut. Joints shall be
made tight with a stiff mixture of litharge and glycerin, or polytetra
fluoroethylene tape, or other approved thread joint compound applied to the
male threads only. Not more than three threads shall show after the joint is
made up.
A09.3.12.4 Flanges and unions shall be faced true. Flanges with approved gaskets shall be
provided and made square and tight. Union or flange joints shall be provided in
each line immediately preceding the connection to each place of equipment or
material requiring maintenance such as coils, pumps, control valves, and other
similar items.
A09.3.13.1 Buried steel pipes shall be protected against corrosion by treating with two
coats of good quality bituminous paint and fully wrapped with an Approved
weatherproof tape before laying.
A09.3.13.2 Under special circumstances, such as in ground containing industrial wastes,
refuse, ashes, clinker, or in aggressive water-logged clays,additional
external protection shall be provided.
A09.3.13.3 Where buried metallic pipes cross the route of the railway, the pipework shall
be electrically continuous and double half-wrapped with an approved electrical
insulating tape.
A09.3.14. Cleaning
A09.3.14.1 For buried ductile iron pipes complying with BS EN 545 or BS EN 598,
bituminous coating against corrosion shall be provided for the pipes and joints
where steel is used for bolts and nuts.
A09.3.14.2 Where copper pipework is required to be chromium plated, such pipework shall
be sent to a specialist for plating after all pulled bends and soldered joints are
completed.
A09.3.15. Testing
A09.3.15.1 At Manufacturer’s factory, samples of pipes and fittings shall be tested and
certified to the relevant BS. Test certificates shall be submitted for each type
of pipe and fitting to the Employer.
A09.3.15.2 All pipework, except chilled water pipe which is specified below, including
valves and fittings shall be hydrostatically pressure tested to 1.5 times the duty
head of the system or 1.5 times the closed delivery valve pressure of the pump,
whichever is the highest. The pressure shall be held for a minimum period of
24 hours.
A09.3.15.3 The Contractor shall perform hydrostatic testing of all piping. Preliminary tests
shall be carried out to demonstrate that the work is satisfactory. The Engineer
and all authorities having jurisdiction shall be notified in ample time to be
present for final testing of all piping. Testing shall be carried out before insulating
or concealing any piping takes place. Defects disclosed by tests shall be repaired
and the complete test repeated. Tests shall be carried out in stages if so ordered
by the Engineer to facilitate work of others. Use of wick in tightening leaking
joints is not permitted.
A09.3.15.4 Unless otherwise specified, chilled water piping shall be tested hydrostatically to
1553 kPa. Tests shall be for a two hours duration, during which time piping shall
show no leaks and during which time no sealing of leaks shall be permitted.
Equipment not capable of withstanding test pressures shall be isolated. Blind
flanges, bypass valves and piping shall be used as required during testing.
A09.3.15.5 Refrigerant pipework when completed shall be pressure tested by nitrogen gas
in two or more steps up to 28 bar and maintained for at least 24 hours. Prior to
charging any additional refrigerant as necessary into the system, it shall be
vacuum dried. A vacuum test of 1 mm of mercury shall be applied to the
pipework and held for 8 hours. The vacuum shall not rise beyond 2 mm of
mercury during the 8 hour test.
TABLE OF CONTENT
A10.1. General .............................................................................................................................845
A10.2. Quality control ..................................................................................................................846
A10.3. Technical and installation requirements ...........................................................................847
A10.1. General
A10.1.1 This Section specifies the manufacture and installation of globe valves, gate
valves, check valves, butterfly valves, motorized valves, gauge cocks, automatic
air valves, strainers, dirt pockets, stopcocks, pressure reducing valves, double
regulation valves, safety and relief valves, thermostatic mixing valves, UPVC
valves for flushing water, drain cocks, ball float valves, safety and pressure relief
valves, escutcheons, thermometer, pressure gauges, flow measuring elements,
vortex inhibitors, pipe sleeves, expansion loops, expansion joints, pipe anchors,
pipe guides, gaskets for pipe separation, access pipes, traps, water – closet
connectors and fresh air inlets.
A10.1.2 All valves, taps and cocks shall be of the types and working pressures suitable
for the systems to which they are connected. Valves shall be rated to
withstand the system hydraulic test pressure.
A10.1.3 Brass, bronze or cast iron valves shall generally be of 16 bar pressure rating
(working pressure) type and UPVC valves of 10 bar. In addition, all valves at
discharge side of transfer water pumps shall be of minimum 16 bar pressure
rating.
A10.1.4. Where valves are provided at the discharge side of 2 or more pumps, each
valve shall be so selected to withstand effectively the anticipated system
pressure under the worst case scenario.
A10.1.5 All valves shall comply with British Standards in respect of tests and
working pressures, dimensions and materials of construction.
A10.1.6. Wheelhead valves shall be arranged for clockwise operation of the handle to close
the valve.
A10.1.7 Screwed valves shall have taper threads to BS 21. Flanged valves shall
have dimensions and bolting in accordance with BS 4504.
A10.1.8 Connections shall be made between each valve and the adjoining
pipework or equipment with flanges for 65mm size pipework and above.
Flanges shall be selected to suit working pressure and temperature.
A10.1.9. Screwed connections shall be made between each valve and the
adjoining pipework or equipment for 50 mm size pipework and below. A union
shall be fitted on each side of all screwed valves.
A10.1.10 All valves shall be suitably located in accessible positions for operation
A10.1.11 All drain outlets and manual air vents shall have connection pipes leading
to the nearest drain.
A10.1.12 Valve packing shall be suitable for the service intended. Valve packing
consists of asbestos or asbestos based materials shall not be used.
A10.1.13 Valves of identical make, size, type and duty shall be fully
interchangeable.
A10.1.14 Inverted mounting of valves shall not be permitted without prior Approval.
A10.1.15 All valves provided for manual operation shall have a handwheel or other
suitable device which shall be fixed to the valve. Handwheels shall be
rotated clock-wise to close the valves and shall be clearly marked with the
words "OPEN" and "CLOSE" and arrows pointing in the appropriate
directions. The rims of handwheels shall be machined to a smooth finish.
All handwheels which may be dangerously hot to touch when the system is in use
shall be provided with an Approved heat insulation on the rim and spokes.
A10.2.1 Material and workmanship shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the
following standards and codes, and the materials shall be certified by the
standard organisation.
A10.3.1.1 Generally, globe valves shall be used on service pipelines where regulation is
required, and shall be supplied and fitted in positions indicated on the Definitive
Design Drawings.
A10.3.1.2 The bodies shall be of an even thickness throughout, clean and free from scale
and flaws. Valves up to and including 50 mm nominal bore shall have bronze
bodies and valves of 65 mm bore and larger shall have cast iron bodies. No
material used shall be susceptible to dezincification.
A10.3.1.3 Globe valves are used for circuit regulation and shall have characterised plug
discs. The discs shall be free to rotate, readily removable from the
valve stem and renewable. Discs may be manufactured proprietary
composition type materials if approved by the Engineer.
A10.3.1.4 Valves may have packed stuffing boxes or be fitted with 'O' rings
.
A10.3.1.5. Valves up to and including 50 mm nominal bore shall have taper screwed
A10.3.1.6 Regulating valves shall be fitted with a lockable spindle to limit the proportion
open once regulation is complete.
A10.3.1.7 Bronze globe valves shall be rising stem pattern. Cast iron globe valves
shall be outside screw rising stem type.
A10.3.2.3 Valve wedges may be of cast iron, bronze, nickel alloy or stainless steel.
Cast iron wedges shall have bronze trims and seating. Wedges shall be
renewable and free to rotate on the valve spindle.
A10.3.2.4 Valves may have packed stuffing boxes or alternatively may be fitted with 'O'
rings.
A10.3.3.1 Bronze gate valves shall have non-rising spindles. Cast iron body gate valves
shall be outside screw rising stem type.
A10.3.4.2 The balancing valves up to 40 mm dia shall be of gunmetal screwed type and 50
mm dia. And above shall be C.I double-flanged type confirming to B.S. 1452 or
equivalent specifications.
A10.3.4.3 The balancing valves shall be made of stainless steel AISI 410. All other
internals shall be non-corrosive material preferably of forged brass.
A10.3.4.4 The port opening shall permit precise regulation of flow rate, by accurately
measuring the pressure drop across the port.
A10.3.4.5 The valve shall be complete with two ports for connections to a mercury
manometer, to measure the pressure drop, as well as drain port.
A10.3.4.6 The spindle shall have a shielded/concealed locking screw to avoid the
tempering of the setting after balancing.
A10.3.4.7 The valves must have easily accessible pressure drop measuring facility.
A10.3.4.8 The balancing valve shall have indication of number of turns on hand wheel
preferably digital type.
A10.3.4.9 The balancing valve shall be used in liew of butterfly / gate / globle / regulating
/ flow measurement valves and shall be suitable at 16 kg/sqm working
pressure.
A10.3.4.2 Sets up to DN50 size shall be screwed end valves and threaded nipple type
carrier with integral orifice ring. Sets DN65 size and above shall be flanged and
include an orifice plate and carrier with mating flange. Sets
shall be used for measurement and isolation in conjunction with a double
regulating valve.
A10.3.5.1 Double regulating valves as described shall additionally be provided with 2 No.
double seated pressure test valves for flow measurement in conjunction with a
double regulating valve used in a balancing application.
A10.3.6.2 FODR valves DN65 and above shall be cast-iron double regulating valves to BS
7350, or other equivalent standard with flanged connections.
A10.3.6.3 The flow measurement device shall comprise a single piece stainless
steel square edged orifice plate carrier with 2 No. double seal pressure test
valves, integral orifice to fit between the valve outlet flange and mating flange.
A10.3.6.4 Low flow rate commissioning sets shall comprise bronze double regulating
globe valve with bronze stem, slotted parabolic disc and screwed ends,
close-coupled to a bronze carrier with integral fixed orifice and 2 No. double seal
pressure test points.
A10.3.6.5 Butterfly valve commissioning sets DN65 to DN300 shall comprise cast- iron
wafer semi-lugged valves with stainless steel shaft, aluminium bronze disc, nitrile
liner and gear operated double regulating properties close- coupled to fixed
orifice nickel-plated cast-iron measuring station, with 2 No. double seal
pressure test points.
A10.3.7.1 Check valves shall be supplied and fitted in the locations indicated on the
Definitive Design Drawings. Care shall be taken to ensure that the valves supplied
are suitable for installation in the plane required as per data sheets. Check
valves shall not be installed in vertical pipes with a downward fluid flow.
A10.3.7.2 Check valves up to DN50 shall be bronze with renewable nitrile rubber faced
disc and screwed-in cap with ends screwed taper thread.
A10.3.7.3 Check valves DN65 to DN150 shall be cast iron with bronze seat and trim and
nitrile rubber faced disc with flanged connection.
A10.3.7.4 Check valves DN200 and above shall be with metal faced disc, bronze trim
with flanged to connection to PN16.
A10.3.8.1 Valves of DN40 and larger shall be of cast iron body and arranged to be fixed
between pairs of mating flanges (wafer body) with interconnecting long bolts
except for 'end of line' service or equipment isolation. Valves for the latter
applications shall be fully lugged type.
A10.3.8.2 Valve stems shall be of stainless steel with either 'O' ring type seals or non-
asbestos material packed glands.
A10.3.8.3 All isolation valves shown on pipe schematic for all major branches and risers
shall be lugged butterfly valves.
A10.3.8.4 Valve discs shall be either stainless steel or aluminium bronze and shall be
machined to give tight shut off against the valve seat. Valves may contain
proprietary latex based materials to ensure that a good seat is
obtained. Where such materials are utilised they shall be well proven in use and
fully bonded.
A10.3.8.5 Valves shall be supplied with graduated indicator plates to show disc
position.
A10.3.8.6 Generally valves up to and including DN150 shall be lever operated and valves
in excess of DN150 shall be provided with gear operation.
A10.3.8.7 Motorized butterfly valve for chillers, cooling towers shall be 2 positions
ON/OFF type Butterfly valve with standard train. The valve shall be controlled
by an electric actuator mounted directly on the valve. The actuator shall have
a reversible synchronous motor and generate the desired stoke by gear train.
It shall be suitable for hook up to any major BMS.
A10.3.8.8. Actuator
Each actuator shall have current limiting circuitry incorporated in its
design to prevent damage to the actuator.
Actuators shall provide the minimum torque required for proper valve
close-off against the system pressure for the required flow.
Two-position or open/closed actuators shall accept 24 or 120 VAC
power supply and be UL listed. Butterfly isolation and other valves, as
specified in the sequence of operations, shall be furnished with
adjustable end switches to indicate open/closed position or be hard wired
to start/stop the associated pump or chiller
A10.3.9.2 Valves DN20 to DN30 shall be gunmetal bodies double seat balanced
equilibrium type of full bore pattern with inlet screwed end.
A10.3.9.3 A stopcock shall be fitted on the inlet to all ball float valves.
A10.3.9.4 Ball float valves of the delayed action type shall incorporate an equilibrium type
ball valve with the float operating in an auxiliary chamber within the storage
tank, cooling tower, etc. A second float below the base of the chamber shall
A10.3.9.5 Ball float valve installations shall be complete with water stilling pipes to
minimize the effect of the water inflow on the operation of the floats and the
level controllers.
A10.3.11.2 Valves shall be fitted with a leather flap and shall be screwed up to DN50
and flanged DN65 and above.
A10.3.12.2 Seat arrangement shall be that closure of one outlet port occurs when the alternate
outlet port is opened. Clockwise hand wheel operation shall
open the vent port.
A10.3.13. Strainers
A10.3.13.1 Strainers shall be 'Y' pattern, unless otherwise indicated, suitable for the
working pressures and service of the piping system and of the same
nominal bore as the pipeline in which they are to be installed.
A10.3.13.2 Strainers shall be screw or flanged connected to suit the isolating valves
adjacent to, and on the 'dead' side of which they shall be installed.
o
A10.3.13.3 Strainers 15-300mm for use up to 120 C shall have upstream and downstream
self-sealing test points incorporated and two blank tapped points.
A10.3.13.7 Strainers for cold service up to 17 bar and size DN15 to DN40 shall be
gunmetal body, screwed ends, with stainless steel screen, non-ferrous
cap and non-asbestos cap gasket.
A10.3.13.8 Strainers DN50 to DN200 shall be cast iron flanged body, with stainless steel
strainer screen, cast iron cap, asbestos-free reinforced non-stick cap
gasket. The cap shall be complete with 20mm drain valve fitted with hose
union.
A10.3.13.9 Strainers DN250 and above shall be cast steel flanged pot-type with
scantlings as for DN200.
A10.3.14.3 Pipelines requiring regulation shall be fitted with 'B' grade diaphragm
valves.
A10.3.14.4 Pipelines requiring shut-off provision only shall be provided with ball valves
with plain ends for solvent weld jointing in sizes DN15 to DN80
inclusive.
A10.3.14.5 Foot valves and strainers in thermoplastic pipework systems shall be PVC ball
foot valves and strainers for solvent welding.
A10.3.15. Stopcocks
A10.3.16.1 Stopcocks for fresh water systems shall conform to BS1010 Part 2 or
equivalent standard and the materials for constructing the stopcock shall be non-
dezincifiable type. They shall generally be able to withstand a working
pressure of 16 bar.
A10.3.17.1 Drain valves shall be provided at the bottom of every riser and at all low points
within the water systems to enable full draining down of the entire system.
A10.3.17.2 Drain valves shall comply with BS 2879, be screwed end, solid wedge disc,
inside screw, non-rising stem, screwed in bonnet lock shield type
bronze gate valves with hose union connection.
A10.3.17.3 Extended drain lines shall be of the same size as the drain valves.
A10.3.17.1 Drain cocks shall be gunmetal or bronze, gland pattern with screwed female
inlet, BSP taper thread, hose union outlet and complete with operating wrench.
A10.3.18.3 Gauge cocks for use with chilled water; condenser cooling water and cold water
shall be of the straight pattern, ground plug type with lever handle.
A10.3.19.1 Connections to the service pipe shall be made at the highest point to ensure
complete venting. Valves shall be mounted so that the inlet connection is in an
exact vertical plane. A lock shield valve shall be provided between service
pipe and automatic air release valve. The highest point shall include both
ends of Station Concourse plantroom pipework and also Auxiliary Building
plantrooms pipework.
A10.3.19.2 Valves for water systems may have bodies of brass, gunmetal or malleable
iron, non-ferrous or stainless steel floats and guides, and non-
corrodible valves and seats.
The tank shell shall be heavy gauge carbon steel and the replaceable membrane
shall be of butyl/EPDM material.
A10.3.21. Vacuum Degasser
A10.3.19.3 The vacuum degasser shall be of a solid and a robust construction. It should
work on pressure differential deaeration principle. It shall be installed as a bypass to the main
CHW line and shall be used for removal of dissolved gases from water to make the water
absorptive in order to prevent corrosion as well as remove air locks from the most distant ends
of the CHW pipeline. The Degasser shall be of Plug & play type & shall be of automatic
operation. The degasser shall be capable of refilling the CHW pipeline with degassed water
to compensate the volume of vented gases. The Deagasser shall be able to switch itself off
when the pipeline achieves desired Pressure & degassed levels of water. It should be with a Multi-
stage Centrifugal pump. The Degasser shall be of Carbon Steel with a Brass Automatic Airvent. It
should degas the volume from 150 to 300m3 holding capacity.
A10.3.23.1. The Dirt separator shall be of a solid and robust construction (Mild Steel). All the
connections, fittings and heads shall be of carbon steel. The Dirt separator shall
be capable of removing solid particles upto 10 microns and less from water. All
connections, fittings and heads shall be of carbon steel. The medium used to
remove dirt shall be manufactured of Steel Tube & copper wire or stainless steel
depending upon the quality of water to be passed through it. This medium should
be non clogging in nature. The flow should not be obstructed by the dirt
collected. Centrifugal action for Dirt separation is not acceptable. A brass Drain
valve should be present to remove the accumulated dirt without the need of
shutting down the operation of the system. The Dirt Separator shall be insulated
depending upon its location (outdoor or indoor).The pressure drop on account
of the air and dirt separator shall not exceed the values below
50 3.0 11.8
65 2.7 11.6
80 2.9 12.4
100 3.7 14.6
125 4.2 16.8
150 4.9 19.4
200 5.8 23.1
250 6.9 27.7
300 7.7 31.0
350 7.8 31.0
400 8.4 34.0
450 10.0 39.0
500 11.0 43.0
600 12.0 47.0
A10.3.23.1 For connections larger than DN 600, the contractor must provide the
pressure drop specifications in his submittal for approval.
The Air and Dirt separator shall be of a solid and robust construction (Mild
Steel). It shall be able to remove free air and microbubbles as well as
remove solid particles upto 5 microns from water at Velocity between 2- 3m/s.
Removal of Air & dirt shall be through coalescence. The unit shall be able to
condition the water to make it highly absorptive at all points in the system
.This ensures that microbubbles can no longer exist at any point in the
system. All connections, fittings and heads shall be of carbon steel. The
medium used to de-aerate and remove dirt shall be manufactured of Steel
Tube & a mesh made of copper wire. This medium should be non clogging in
nature. An automatic air vent of atleast 100mm free area to be connected at the
top for the release of the air separated from the water. The flow should not be
obstructed by the dirt collected. A Drain valve should be present at the bottom
to remove the accumulated dirt without the need of shutting down the operation
of the system. The Air
& Dirt Separator shall be insulated depending upon its location (outdoor or
indoor). The pressure drop on account of the air and dirt separator shall not
exceed 21kPa at maximum flow of the chilled water system. The performance of
the air & Dirt Separator shall be confirmed by TNO report.
TABLE OF CONTENT
A11.1. General .............................................................................................................................861
A11.2. Quality control ..................................................................................................................861
A11.3. Technical and Installation Requirements ..........................................................................861
A11.1. General
A11.1.1. This Section specifies the manufacture and installation of air-cooled, split- type air
conditioning units consisting of an indoor evaporator unit, filter section and
outdoor air-cooled condensing unit, control and the inter- connection wiring,
piping and accessories.
A11.1.2. All acoustic and thermal insulation including facings, associated fasteners, adhesives,
tapes, etc. shall comply with BS 476: Part 6 & 7 (Surface Spread of Flame
Class 1) .
A11.1.3. Provide split-type air conditioning units with capacity and duty as shown on the
Equipment Schedules and/or Drawings.
A11.1.4. Evaporating unit shall receive its power supply from the corresponding
condensing unit.
A11.1.5. Provide emergency push buttons (EPBs) for both the evaporating and
condensing units. EPBs shall be wired back to the starter control inside
the condensing unit so as to trip the evaporating/condensing units in case
of emergency.
A11.3.1. Units shall be of minimum vibration and noise level during operation.
Additional vibration isolators and sound attenuators shall be provided at
Contractor’s expense if noise and vibration are found excessive.
A11.3.2. Provide units completely piped, wired, charged, and factory tested as package.
A11.3.3. All components shall be dehydrated, sealed and shipped with holding
charge/refrigerant.
A11.3.4.2. Containing junction boxes, polarized sockets and plugs for chassis
electrical connection.
A11.3.4.3. Front panels and return air grilles shall be assembled to be removable for cleaning
and access.
A11.3.4.4. Casing shall be provided with an insulated condensate drain pan.
A11.3.4.5. Line interior casing with moisture, vermin and flameproof mat-faced 25mm
thick fibreglass.
A11.3.4.6. Discharge grilles where required shall be adjustable blade type in four
directions.
A11.3.4.7. Discharge plenum shall be insulated.
A11.3.4.8. Provide return air grille in louvre form with frame for holding filters.
A11.3.4.9. Provide frame for installing filters external to the units in case ducted return
system is adopted. Details shall be submitted for Approval.
A11.3.4.10. Finish cabinet with a high quality backed-on enamel paint. Colour shall be
submitted for Approved. Primer and undercoat shall be applied prior to
applying finish coats.
A11.3.4.11. Provide removable panels or access doors for all accessories.
A11.3.6. Compressor.
A11.3.6.8. Compressor operated with input above 15 kW shall be complete with the
following:
– Crankcase heater;
– Suction and discharge shut off valves;
– Crankcase sight-glass;
– Oil strainer; and
– Manual reset oil failure switch with time delay.
–
– Both internal and external pan surfaces shall be coated with corrosion-
resistant elastomeric based material
– Joints shall be brazed water-tight; and
– Minimum 25 mm diameter drain coupling shall be brazed onto the drain
pan if the size has not been specified.
A11.3.12.4. Drain pan shall be installed in a pitch position towards the drain coupling.
A11.3.12.5. Drain pipe shall be of minimum diameter 25 mm and shall be connected to
nearest suitable condensate drainage system.
A11.3.13. Controls
A11.3.13.1. The following equipment shall be provided as standard components of the split-
type air conditioning units:
– Factory installed and wired control as specified on the Equipment
Schedules and/or Drawings;
– Compressor and fans contactors;
– Compressor motor running and starter contactors and starter relay;
– Manual changeover selector switch for either ventilation or air
conditioning;
– Electronic thermostat for desired temperature setting: 10°C to 28°C;
– Interlock for condenser and evaporator unit with compressor circuit; and
– Fan speed selector: High/Medium/Low/Off.
A11.3.14. Installation
A11.3.14.1. Fit equipment and appurtenance to the space provided and make readily
serviceable.
A11.3.14.2. Provide all galvanized support beams, galvanized legs, galvanized
hangers, anchor bolts, vibration isolators, ductworks and silencers for the
installation of the units as shown on the Drawings. GI drain pipes to the
nearest drain point to be provided for drainage. All refrigerant pipes, drain pipes
and electrical wiring are to be embedded. Wires used should be of
LSZH type.
A11.3.14.3. Supply all condensing units holding bolts and hand over to Civil Contractor for
setting into the plinth. Future cutting and drilling into the plinth shall be
avoided.
A11.3.14.4. After completion of testing on piping and accessories, charge the system with
refrigerant in accordance with the manufacturer's published data
A11.3.14.5. Make unit operate without noticeable vibration after installation.
A11.3.14.6. Provide temperature and pressure gauges at the suction and discharge pipe of
compressor. The gauges shall be mounted on a hardwood gauge
board on the wall or elsewhere as directed by the Engineer.
A11.3.14.7. A thermostat complete with Fan Only-Off-Cooling switch and Low-
Medium-High switch shall be positioned in an Approved location enabling
on, off, low, medium and high fan speed and temperature to be selected.
A11.4.1 General
A11.4.1.1 The Variable Refrigerant volume / flow VRV / VRF system shall have
Variable Digital Scroll / Rotary compressors along with constant speed Scroll
compressors to provide proportional power consumption as per actual
requirement. The variable load compressor shall work in Tandem with the
Fixed Scroll Speed Compressors. It should also be provided with duty cycling for
multiple / variable compressor switching starting sequence of multiple outdoor
unit.
A11.4.1.2 The unit shall be provided with its own microprocessor control panel.
A11.4.1.3 The outdoor unit should have an anticorrosion paint free steel plate for easy
mounting of unit. The out door unit should be fitted with low noise, aero spiral
design fan with grill for spiral discharge air flow to reduce pressure loss and
should be fitted with DC fan motor for better efficiency. The unit should also be
capable to deliver external static pressure to meet proper exhaust of condensing
Air.
A11.4.1.4 The condensing unit shall be designed to operate safety when connected
multiple indoor units.
A11.4.2 COMPRESSOR
A11.4.2.1 The compressor shall be highly efficient scroll/rotary type and should be
capable of varying the capacity from 100% to 10% load. It shall change the
speed/ loading in accordance to the variation in cooling load requirement.
A11.4.2.2 All outdoor units shall have multiple steps of capacity control to meet load
fluctuation and indoor unit individual control. All parts of compressor shall be
sufficiently lubricated stock. Proper lubrication may also be employed.
A11.4.3.1 The heat exchangers shall be constructed with copper tubes mechanically
bonded to Aluminum fins to form a cross fin coils. Aluminum fins shall be
covered by anti corrosion resin film.
A11.4.3.2 The unit should be with bypass heat exchanger type for good efficiency of
condenser. The unit shall be provided with necessary number of direct driven
low noise level propeller type fans arranged for vertical discharge. Each fan
shall have a safety guard
A11.4.4.2 All necessary safety devices shall be provided to ensure the safely operation
of the system.
A11.4.4.3 All refrigerant piping for the air conditioning system shall be constructed from
hard drawn seamless copper refrigerant pipes with copper fittings and silver-
soldered joints. The refrigerant piping arrangements shall be in accordance with
good practice within the air conditioning industry, and are to include
expansion valves, charging connections, suction line insulation and all other
items normally forming part of proper refrigerant circuits.
A11.4.4.4 The suction line pipe size and the liquid line pipe shze shall be selected
according to the manufacturer’s specified outside diameter. All refrigerant pipes
shall be properly supported abd anchored to the building structure using still
hangers, slotted angle tray, anchors, brackets and supports which shall be
fixed to the building structure by mean of inserts or expansion shields of
adequate size and number to support the load imposed thereon.
A11.4.4.5 The Outside diameter and wall thickness of copper refrigerant piping shall be as
follows:
Outside Dia (mm) Min. wall thickness (mm)
41.3,34.0 1.3
31.8,28.6,25.4,22.2 1.2
19.15.9 1.0
A11.4.5.2 Following safety devices shall be part of the outdoor unit ; High Pressure
Switch , Fuse, Fan drive overload Protector , Fusible Plug , Over Load relay,
Overload Protection for inverter.
This section deals and suitable for the duty selected. The type, capacity and
size of indoor units shall be as specified in detailed Bill of Quantities.
A11.4.7 GENERAL
A11.4.7.1 Indoor unit shall be either ceiling mounted cassette type, or ceiling mounted
ductable type or floor standing type or wall mounted type or other as
specified in BOQ. Each unit shall have electronic control valve to control
refrigerant flow rate respond to load variations of the room.
A11.4.7.2 The address of the indoor unit shall be set automatically in case of individual
and group control.
A11.4.7.4 The fan shall be dual suction, aerodynamically designed turbo, multi blade
type, statically & dynamically balanced to ensure low noise and vibration
free operation of the system. The fan shall be direct driven type, mounted
directly on motor shaft having supported from housing.
A11.4.7.5 The cooling coil shall be made out of seamless copper tubes and have
continuous aluminum fins. The fins shall be spaced by collars forming an
integral part. The tubes shall be staggered in the direction of airflow. The tubes
shall be hydraulically/mechanically expanded for minimum thermal contact
resistance with fins. Each coil shall be factory tested at 21kg/sqm air pressure
under water.
A11.4.7.6 Unit shall have cleanable type filter fixed to an integrally moulded plastic
frame. The filter shall be side away type and neatly inserted.
A11.4.7.7 Each indoor unit shall have computerized PID control for maintaining
design room temperature. Each unit shall be provided with microprocessor
thermostat for cooling or cooling and heating.
A11.4.7.8 Each unit shall have wireless LCD type remote controller. The remote
controller shall memorize the latest malfunction code for easy maintenance.
The controller shall have self –diagnostic features for easy and quick
maintenance and service. The controller shall be able to change fan speed and
angle of swing flap individually as per requirement.
A11.4.8.1 The unit shall be ceiling mounted type. The unit shall include pre-filter, fan
section and DX- coil section. The housing of the unit shall be powder
coated galvanized steel. The body shall be tight in weight and shall be able
to suspend from four corners. The fan shall be aerodynamically designed
diffuser turbo fan type.
A11.4.8.2 Unit shall have an external attractive panel for supply and return air. Unit shall
four way supply air grilles on sides and return air grille in center.
A11.4.8.3 Each unit shall have high lift drain pump, fresh air intake provision (if
specified). Low gas detection system and very low operating sound.
A11.4.8.4 All the indoor units regardless of their difference in capacity should have same
decorative panel size for harmonious aesthetic point of view. It should have
provision of connecting branch ducts.
A11.4.9.1 Unit shall be suitable for ceiling suspended arrangement above false
ceiling. The unit includes pre filter, fan section & DX coil section. The
housing of unit shall be light weight powder coated galvanized steel
A11.4.10.1 The units shall be wall-mounted type. The unit includes filter, fan section, &
DX coil section. The housing of unit shall be light weight powder coated galvanized steel.
Unit shall have an attractive external casing for supply and return air.
TABLE OF CONTENT
A12.1. General .............................................................................................................................873
A12.2. Quality control ..................................................................................................................873
A12.3. Technical and installation requirements ...........................................................................874
A12.1. General
A12.1.1. This Section specifies the manufacture and installation of all ventilation fans
as shown on Drawings.
A12.1.2. The fan external static pressure resistance figures specified on the Equipment
Schedules and/or Drawings are for guidance and information only and are
calculated based on assumed resistance figures of equipment. The exact fan
total pressure based on the duct run and the offered equipment shall be
carefully checked and re-calculated for each
fan before ordering the equipment. Calculation shall be submitted for
Approval. No modification to the ductwork system shall be allowed without prior
Approval. Any additional cost for the modification of the system (fans,
motors, switchgears, cables, panel boards, switchboards, etc.) necessary to
meet the specified duties, spatial conditions and the offered equipment shall be
provided at no extra cost to the Employer.
A12.1.3. Allowance shall be made for the effects on fan performance of all
installation conditions including coils, eliminators, sound attenuator, plenums,
enclosures, inlet and discharge arrangements so that actual installed fan
performance equals that specified.
A12.1.4 Proprietary bell mouth and wire guard shall be provided for fans without
ductwork connection.
A12.2.3. All fans, drives and accessories shall be designed, constructed, rated and tested in
accordance with the recommendations and standards of AMCA.
A12.2.4. Fan tests shall conform to the requirements of AMCA Standard 210, ISO 5801
or to an Approved equal standard.
A12.2.5. Sound ratings shall conform to AMCA standard test code for sound rating of air
moving devices or BS 848: Part 2, whichever more stringent requirements shall
apply.
A12.3.1.1. Fans shall have non-overloading characteristic, except for forward curved
centrifugal, over their entire operating range. The characteristic curves shall
be such that the fan operating point falls between the no flow static pressure
and the maximum mechanical efficiency. The fan characteristic shall also be
such that for a 15 % increase in static pressure over the specified value, the
fan shall deliver not less than 85 % of the specified air volume flow rate. The
stability of fan operation shall not be affected under such situation.
A12.3.1.2. All fans with nominal rating above 7.5 kW shall have a minimum efficiency of
80%.
A12.3.1.3. Each fan unit including motor and drive shall be supplied from the
manufacturer as a completely factory-assembled package and all guarantees and
test certificates shall be deemed to apply to the entire assembly.
A12.3.1.4. All fans shall be capable of withstanding the pressures and stresses
developed during continuous operation at the selected duty. Additionally, all belt
driven fans shall be capable of running continuously at 15% in excess of the
selected duty speed.
A12.3.1.5 Lifting eye shall be provided on all centrifugal and axial fans.
A12.3.1.6 All fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced.
A12.3.1.7 All centrifugal fan shafts shall have the ends drilled to receive a tachometer.
A12.3.1.8 Motor speed shall not exceed 1450 rpm unless otherwise specified.
A12.3.1.9 Nominal motor nameplate rating shall be higher than the peak operating power
of the selected fan curve for non-overloading characteristic. The motor rating
shall be a minimum of 15% higher than the motor operating point at design
conditions unless otherwise specified.
A12.3.1.10 All fans and motors offered shall be of minimum vibration and noise level during
operation. Should the vibration and noise level be excessive and not within
acceptable standards, additional vibration isolation and sound attenuation shall
be provided at no extra cost to the Employer to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
A12.3.1.11 All fans are required to be Hot dip galvanised/ galvanised.
A12.3.2.1. The impeller shall be designed to give maximum volume with minimum noise
level and minimum power consumption and shall be made of steel or other
Approved material. The hub shall be steel with grey stove epoxy finish. The fan
shall be complete with anti-vibration mount.
A12.3.2.2. The motor shall be dust and moisture protected to IP54 and of a totally
enclosed construction with permanently lubricated ball bearings suitable
for running in ambient temperatures of up to 40°C and relative humidity of up to
100%.
A12.3.2.3. Wire guards made of heavy gauge steel wire or rod with all joints and
crossings welded and shall be fitted to impeller side or motor side or both where
appropriate.
A12.3.2.4. Propeller fans shall be diaphragm mounted on not less than 3mm thick steel
mounting plate with stove epoxy grey finishes.
A12.3.2.5. Provided with seal permanently lubricated bearings.
A12.3.2.6. With tip speed not exceeding 17.5m/s
A12.3.3.3. Impeller.
– Impellers shall be of die-cast aluminium alloy.
– For hub size of 315mm (dia.) and above, blades shall be manual
adjustable without removing the wheel.
– Positive locking shall be provided for securing the impeller blades into the
hub. Spun aluminium hub caps shall be fitted.
– The blades and hubs shall have index marks which show the design
operating blade setting and a minimum of three increments of stagger angle
both larger and smaller than the design operating blade setting and stops at
hub to prevent overload of the motor.
– The blades shall be counter-balanced and mounted on a thrust
bearing.
A12.3.3.4. Except smoke extraction fans and unless otherwise specified, drive motors
shall be of class F insulation (BS 4999 and BS 2757) totally enclosed type
and rated for continuous operation in ambient temperature of 40 °C. Performance
and rating shall comply with BS 5000 and IEC 34-1 with protection to IP55.
A12.3.3.5. Factory bell mouth shall be provided where no duct connection is
required. Fans shall be fitted with bell mouth inlets. Flow cores and bell mouth
inlets shall be fabricated in steel and provided with flanges drilled and rigidly
bolted to the fans.
A12.3.3.6. Provide wire guards on fan outlet/inlet not connected to ductwork and shall
be made freely accessible for maintenance.
A12.3.3.7. Fans shall be provided with mounting feet and spring isolators.
A12.3.3.8. The average bearing life of the fan shall be at least 200,000 hours.
A12.3.3.9. Stationary, curved guide vanes shall be located on the outlet side of the fan to
straighten the motion of the air leaving the blades to improve operating
efficiency if required.
A12.3.3.10. For smoke extraction fan, adequate clearance shall be provided between blade
tips and housing at all points to allow for expansion and contraction
over a continuous operation in an air stream temperature range from 0 °C to 250
°C without developing interference to the specified flow capacity.
The fabrication/shop drawings shall show the clearance at over a
continuous operation in an air stream temperature range from 0 °C to 250
°C as well as any point of minimum clearance in between.
– Fan casings shall be fitted with flanges on the outlet connection suitable for
connection of discharge ductwork and flexible connections as shown on the
Drawings.
– Where the inlet side of the fan is connected to ductwork, matching
flanges for connection of flexible connections shall be provided
– Inspection doors or sight ports to enable direction of rotation to be
established shall be provided.
A12.3.4.4. Fan Impellers
– Impellers shall be double inlet, double width or single inlet, single
width as shown on the Equipment Schedule and/or Drawings and shall
be mounted on substantial hubs.
– Fan impellers shall be backward/forward sloping blades as specified on the
Equipment Schedule and/or Drawings.
– Impellers shall be rigidly fixed to solid bright steel shafts adequately sized
and proportioned to ensure that the maximum operating speed is not more
than 60% of the first critical speed. The shaft shall be protected by
reliable anti-rust coating.
– Impellers shall be of steel, electro-galvanized after fabrication (or aluminium
where indicated), of riveted or welded construction, with spiders or
hubs, of robust design and shall be capable of running continuously at
15% in excess of normal speed.
– All forward curved fans shall be selected for use with speed not exceeding
1200rpm and backward curved fans shall be selected not to exceed
2000rpm, unless otherwise specified.
A12.3.4.5 Unless otherwise specified, drive motors to Class F insulation to BS 2757 shall be
totally enclosed and rated for continuous operation in an ambient temperature of
40°C. Performance and rating shall comply with BS 5000: Part 99.
A12.3.4.6 The fan and motor shall be mounted on rigid galvanized steel channel base.
Provide slide rails for adjustable mounting of motors.
A12.3.4.7. The driven V-belt shall be rated at 150% of the operating motor power input.
Provide adjustable sheaves on the motor, capable of 20% adjustment in fan
speed, with the design fan capacity settling at approximately the midpoint of the
adjustment. Belt speed shall not exceed 25m/s.
A12.3.4.8 Type of V-belt shall be in accordance with the "Standards for Light-duty or
Fractional-Horsepower V-Belts" of Rubber Manufacturers Association.
A12.3.4.9 Belt guards shall be of heavy gauge steel framing with expended mesh
screen.
A12.3.4.10 All belt guards shall have access openings at the shaft ends to enable
tachometer readings to be taken.
A12.3.4.11 Vibration isolators shall be provided in accordance with "Acoustic
Treatment and Vibration Control" sectionof this M&W Specification.
A12.3.4.12 The shafts shall be carried in ring lubricated self-aligning sleeve bearings for
shafts of 150mm diameter and larger. Each bearing shall have large oil storage
capacity to ensure efficient lubrication. On shafts of sizes smaller than 150mm
A12.3.6. Installation
A12.3.6.1 All belts, pulleys, chains, gears, couplings, projecting set screws, keys and
other rotating parts shall be adequately guarded so that any person can safely
come in close proximity thereto.
A12.3.6.2 Fit fans and appurtenances to the space provided and make readily serviceable.
A12.3.6.3 Provide support beams, support legs, platforms, hangers and anchor bolts required
for the proper installation of equipment as shown on the Drawings or as
recommended by the manufacturer and Approved by the Engineer.
A12.3.6.4 Provide permanently attached lifting eyes of sufficient number for on Site
installation and future dismounting of fan units.
A12.3.6.5. Provide factory inlet bells and other accessories for fan units as shown on the
Drawings or otherwise required for a complete and efficient installation.
A12.3.6.6. Where corrosion can occur, appropriate corrosion resistance materials and
installation methods shall be used including isolation of dissimilar metals
against galvanic interaction.
A12.3.6.7 Thoroughly clean the entire system before installing filters or operating the fans.
A12.3.6.8 For systems containing filters, install filters and permanently seal the filter frame
air-tight before operating the fans. Replace all dirty filters and filter media before
handing over the system to the Employer.
A12.3.6.9. Means of protection against overcurrent in the motor shall be incorporated in the
control equipment when the motor rating exceeds 0.37 kW.
A12.3.6.10 A hole in the blanking off plate shall be provided for the cables leading to the
fans. The hole shall be sealed around the cables with material suitable for sealing
the hole effectively and continuously exposed to an air stream temperature of 25
degree C for not less than one hour rating if the fans are used for smoke
extraction.
TABLE OF CONTENT
A13.1. General .............................................................................................................................882
A13.2. Quality control ..................................................................................................................882
A13.3. Technical and Installation Requirements ..........................................................................882
A13.1. General
A13.1.1. This Section specifies the manufacture and installation of the ECS control
equipment.
– Pressure drop across fan coil control valve shall be about 1 m. Valve
working pressure shall not be less than 10 bar with 3 bar close off
pressure.
– Fan coil control valves shall be equipped with automatic reset to
automatic control mode after fully opened.
A13.3.4.2 Provide a handwheel for each valve operator, which shall automatically de-
clutch when motorized valve operator is functioning.
A13.3.4.3. The motorized valve operator shall be capable of operating in any valve
mounting altitude and capable of being mounted either in line or transverse to
the pipeline.
A13.3.4.4. The motorized valve operator shall be bolted directly to the butterfly valve top
without the use of special brackets, linkages or couplings if butterfly valves are
used.
A13.3.4.5 Where motorized valve operators are exposed to weather, provide a 0.6 mm G.I.
or aluminium removable housing to the Approval of the Engineer.
A13.3.4.6 Motorized valve operator shall be totally enclosed with no external moving
parts. The actuator shall be of the rack and pinion type providing constant output
torque.
A13.3.4.7 Motorized valve operator shall operate on 240 V, single phase, 50Hz power
supply. Motorized valve operator shall consist of motor, magnetic motor
controller, control circuit transformer, built-in reversing contactors, opening and
closing torque and limit switches, built-in open-close-stop momentary contact
pushbuttons and open-close position indicating lights. Terminal posts shall also be
provided for field wiring of remote momentary contact open-close-stop
pushbuttons and open-close position indicating lights. All components shall be
factory prewired in single enclosure.
A13.3.4.8 Motor shall be of high speed and high torque type, of adequate capacity, specially
suitable for valve operation. Motor winding insulation shall be to IEEE standard
class B. Provide built-in thermal overload protection. Closing time of all
motorized valves shall be set with an adjustable timer control which can be set to
not less than one minute nor more than two minutes.
A13.3.5.1. Motorized damper actuator shall be of the piston or rotary type with a 550 to 700
kPa working pressure and shall be capable of actuating the dampers against a
differential pressure of 2000 Pa across the dampers. Motorized damper actuators
for smoke extraction, and staircase pressurization systems shall be fully
operational after exposure to ambient air stream temperatures of 250°C for a
continuous period of not less than one hour for smoke and fire dampers.
A13.3.5.2. Motorized damper actuators shall be provided with spring-return devices
capable of driving the dampers to their de-energized positions within a period
of 10 to 20 seconds after the motorized damper actuators are de- energized.
A13.3.5.3. Motorized damper actuators shall be mounted outside of the duct with support
plates that are completely outside of the insulation or covering. Support plates
shall be installed in a manner that will prevent condensation on the motorized
damper actuator or on supports.
A13.3.5.4. Motorized damper actuator mountings shall be supported so that the actuator
does not deflect from its normal path when operating under load.
A13.3.6.1. The transmitter shall work in conjunction with the flow measuring element and
shall have adjustable range which is factory calibrated and secured and will
match with the flow measuring element together with field adjustment of
damping up to 30 second time constant. It shall have an indicator to monitor
the process differential pressure, and 4 to 20mA DC output for central
monitoring. The device shall be rated at the working pressure of water pipe
and have overload protection in either direction. Accuracy shall be better than
±0.5% of full scale with negligible dead band. Housing shall be weather-
proof with Teflon gasket and stainless- steel cover. Process connection shall be
via stainless steel capillary complete with isolation valves and bypass valve.
A13.3.7.1. Limit switches for monitoring open and closed positions of motor operated
dampers shall be designed to withstand the environmental condition of the
ECS operation. All limit switches monitoring motor operated damper
installations for smoke extraction and staircase pressurization systems shall be
suitable for continuous operation in an air stream temperature of 250°C for not
less than one hour. Each module of a multi-module damper shall be equipped
with two status indicating limit switches. Each limit switch shall have two
contacts, one normally open and one normally closed for status and alarm
monitoring.
A13.3.7.2. Construction shall be suitable for outdoor installation with a centre neutral and
two-point detection mechanism. Sensing arm shall be adjustable and lockable
into desirable lengths to fit each specific installation. Standard mounting
bracket shall be provided to facilitate adjustments on Site and shall be complete
with cable terminal board and conduit fixings. Contact rating shall be 10 A
minimum at 240 V AC with overall life of over one million operations at one
ampere resistive load at 240 V AC.
A13.3.8.4. The Type 300 passivated stainless steel cartidge assembly shall consist of a
spring-loaded cup. The cup shall be guided at two points and shall utilise the
full available differential pressure across the valve to actuate the cup and
thereby reduce friction and hysterisis and eliminate binding. It shall have a thin
orifice plate for self cleaning of the variable inlet ports over the full control
range.
A13.3.8.5. Valves shall be available in four differential pressure ranges with minimum
range requiring pressure of less than 10kPa to control the flow.
Cast iron valve bodies shall be provided with inlet and outlet tappings
suitable for connection of instruments for verification of flow rates. Valve
bodies shall be rated for not less than 150% of system design working
pressure.
A13.3.8.6. Submit certified performance data for the flow control valve based on
independent laboratory tests for Approval.
A13.3.8.7. Each automatic flow control valve shall be provided with a valve
kit consisting of 6.35mm by 50mm minimum size nipples, quick-
disconnect valves (to be located outside of insulation), and fittings suitable
for use with the measuring instruments specified.
A13.3.8.8. Provide a metal identification tag with chain for each installed valve. The tag to
be marked with model number and rated flow rate in litres/second and GPM.
A13.3.8.9. Provide flow measuring instrument to verify flow rates. Correct flow shall be
verified by establishing that the operating pressure differential across the valve
tappings is within the range indicated on the submittal data sheet for that
model number. The pressure measuring apparatus shall be portable.
months.
– Flow Detector Head
(1) Field excitationer : Stabilized AC or bipolar pulses from flow
converter.
– Flow Converter
(1) Input signal : Induced e.m.f. from flow detector head.
– Output Signals
(1) Current : 4-20 mA DC to drive 600 ohm maximum.
(2) Pulse : 24 V/200 mA DC pulses with an adjustable maximum pulse rate
of 5 pulses/ second suitable for driving a pair of electromechanical
counters each with coil resistance of 180 ohms.
(3) Low flow signal cut off : Automatic output signal cut off at less than 1 %
of full scale flow range with resumption of normal measurement
when flow is above 2 %.
(4) Signal average time : Field adjustable between 0 to 5 seconds.
(5) Linearity error : Better than ±0.5 % of span.
(6) Repeatability : Better than ±0.1 % of span.
(7) Supply voltage effects : Less than ±0.1 % of calibrated span per +/-10
% change in supply voltage.
(8) Frequency effects : Less than ±0.1 % of calibrated span per +/-
(9) Temperature effects : Less than ±0.05 % of calibrated span per °C.
(10) Power supply : 240 V AC/50 Hz
A13.3.10.3. The sensor shall be suitable for operation within the design velocity and
temperature range and without any substantial change in the accuracy in its own
operating conditions.
A13.3.10.4. Provide air straighteners and equal area transverse pressure sensors mounted
in a complete galvanized iron casing.
A13.3.13.1 The unit shall consist of probe fitting complete with stainless steel probe rods
(electrodes) and a controller
A13.3.13.2 The controller shall be operated in a bridged circuit principle with a built-in
arrester circuit to protect against surge from power source and lightning surge
from electrode side.
A13.3.13.3 The electrodes shall be capable of withstanding the corrosiveness of
chemicals.
A13.3.13.4 Separators made of porcelain shall be provided to prevent short-circuit
between electrodes.
A13.3.16. Installation
A13.3.16.1. Fit equipment and appurtenances to the space provided and make readily
serviceable.
A13.3.16.2. Install the entire automatic control system, including control equipment and
wiring under the supervision of the automatic control equipment
manufacturer.
A13.3.16.3. Mount damper operators outside of the duct with support plates that are
completely outside the insulation or covering. Install support plates in a
manner that will prevent condensation on damper operator or on supports.
A13.3.16.4. Support valves and damper operator motor mountings so that the operator does
not deflect from its normal path when operating under load.
A13.3.16.5. Locate sensing elements and duct sensors where they will respond to
representative temperature within the duct or casing.
A13.3.16.6. Install duct sensors and remote transmitters outside of ducts and casings.
A13.3.16.7. Where ducts or casing are insulated, mount sensors flush with outside
insulation so that moisture will not condense on sensors or on supports.
A13.3.16.8. Install duct sensor capillary tubes and wires to pierce the
thermal insulation at the least practicable number of
points
A13.3.16.9. Seal insulation properly where wiring passes through.
A13.3.16.10. Protect control wires by conduit or use flexible armoured cables. Coil control
wires and fasten excess lengths to provide a tidy installation.
A13.3.16.11. The buttons side of control panel shall be mounted at 1200 mm above the finished
floor level.
A13.3.16.12. Provide 100 mm clearance between rear of panel and wall by a bracket mounting.
A13.3.16.13. Mount controls, instrument gauges, thermostats and relays flush on the front of
the panel.
A13.3.16.14. Mount framed schematic control diagram adjacent to each control panel or
cabinet.
The PICV valves shall meet the following high performance generic specific
criterion: Valves should be pressure independent and should have integral
differential pressure control over built in control valve and flow control.
The valves should have a bonnet for temperature control and diaphragm
operated differential pressure controller all built in one valve body.
Valves should be protected against overload with a safety spring Valves
should be inline body type and should be suitable for modulating control at
temperatures between -10° and +140° Centigrade
Valves shall be suitable for Pressure class PN25 Valves body to me made only
from Ductile Iron and surface should be Dual solid painted.
The diaphragm and gaskets shall be made from EPDM_
The valve sear shall be made from stainless steel.
The valve should be designed for readjustment of flow rate at site without
removal of actuator.
The pressure drop on the flow control spring / throttle should not exceed
45kPa.
The PICV for FCU air terminal units with shall have the following criterion
with respect to the above mentioned:
The valve should have integral spring and diaphragm arrangement for
differential pressure control.
Valve should be capable of operating under maximum differential pressure
of 500 KPascal.
The pressure drop on the flow control spring / throttle should not exceed
40kPa.
The minimum lift on the control valve shall be 10mm and 3 mm resp.
Generally PICV valves shall be a single assembly, however, for larger
valves to the district cooling plant shall be a differential pressure valve
(DPC) and low loss control valve (CV).
Installation and construction shall comply with below mentioned
specification
80mm and
1 DZR Brass Flanged
above
Direction of
7 Flow arrow on valve body
flow
CO2 & air quality monitor cum sensor shall be provided for the occupied areas to
monitor the CO2 & air quality level.
Lowest detection of the monitor shall be 0 to 2000 PPM with a resolution of less than
30 PPM.
The sensing element for CO2 & air quality sensor shall be dual beam infrared
absorption type.
The sensor shall have a relay output with programmable selection to control CO2
& air quality.
The communication interface shall be RS port.
Visual digital display shall be provided which shall read CO2 & air quality level in
PPM.
The sensor, monitor and all components shall be mounted in one neat and compact case,
suitable for wall mounting. The indication light shall be mounted on the cover of
the case, if surface mounted. All components shall be factory mounted.
TABLE OF CONTENT
A14.1 General .............................................................................................................................898
A14.2 Quality control .................................................................................................................898
A14.3 Technical and installation requirements ..........................................................................899
A14.1 General
A14.1.2 Unless otherwise specified, the total noise level, whether it be airborne,
structure-borne or duct-borne, shall not exceed the following limits when all the
plant/equipment installed by the Contractor are put into operation:
A14.1.3 The noise level from the ventilation system shall not exceed 80dBA in the tunnel
when used for applying ventilation under congested traffic conditions or
smoke control in an emergency.
A14.3.2.1 Concrete inertia bases shall be formed within a structural steel beam or channel
frame reinforced as required preventing flexing, misalignment of the drive and
driven units or transferral of stresses into equipment. The base shall be
complete with height saving brackets, concrete reinforcement and equipment
bolting down provisions.
th
A14.3.2.2 In general the thickness of concrete inertia bases shall be a minimum of 1/12
of the longest dimension of the base but never less than 150mm. The base depth
needs not exceed 300mm unless specifically required.
A14.3.2.3 As anindication of the standards required, minimum thickness of the inertia
th
base shall generally comply to the following table or be 1/12 of the longest
dimension of the base, whichever is the larger:
±10%.
A14.3.3.8 The ratio of lateral to vertical stiffness for springs shall be not less than
0.9 nor greater than 1.5.
A14.3.3.9 All neoprene mountings shall have hardness of 40 to 65 durometer, after
minimum aging of 20 days or corresponding over-aging.
A14.3.3.10 In order to resist corrosion, all vibration isolation mountings and hangers shall be
treated as follows:
- Springs to be neoprene coated or hot dip galvanised.
- Wearing hardware to be cadmium plated steel with
stainless steel of an appropriate grade.
- All other metal parts to be hot dip galvanised.
A14.3.3.11 For a particular contract, all vibration isolators and associated equipment bases
shall whenever possible be the product of a single manufacturer. Acceptable
manufacturer’s systems shall strictly comply with the design intent of this.
A14.3.4.1 Unless otherwise specified, the selection of type of equipment base and
vibration isolator (mounting/hanger) for differing plant/equipment and on
differing floor spans & levels may follow the requirements as indicated in the
Selection Guide for Vibration Isolation. Table 48 Chapter 47 of the ASHRAE
Application’s Handbook 2007 or its latest edition, and the static deflection of the
vibration isolator selected shall either provide a minimum isolation efficiency of
90% in ground floor areas and 95% in upper level areas or be not less than the
corresponding values shown in Table 48.
However, the Contractor is responsible for ensuring that the selected
vibration isolation system is suitable for his specific plant/equipment and the
specific building structure on which the plant/equipment is mounted.
A14.3.4.2 The Contractor shall provide more efficient isolation than those suggested in Table
48 if the adjacent occupied space is a noise critical area such as board room or
executive office. Advice from vibration isolator manufacture shall be sought if
necessary.
to the isolators. When all isolators are properly adjusted, the blocks or
shims will become slightly free and can then be removed.
A14.3.5.3 The springs of vibration isolators shall in general have a loaded working height
equal to 1.0 to 1.5 times the outside diameter of the spring and shall be
compressed to approx. 50% of their unloaded height.
A14.3.5.4 Where any vibration isolation system permits equipment motion in all
directions, provide where necessary additional resilient restraints to flexibly
limit the lateral movement of the equipment to 6mm at start and stop.
A14.3.5.6 Prior to start-up, remove all foreign matter underneath the equipment base
and verify that there is no short-circuiting of the vibration isolation system.
A14.3.5.7 Electrical circuit connections to isolated equipment shall be looped to allow
free motion of isolated equipment.
A14.3.6.1 Unless otherwise indicated, all piping located in mechanical equipment rooms
and having connections to vibrating equipment shall be isolated from the
building structure by means of noise and vibration isolation hangers for a
distance of at least 15m or 100 times the pipe diameter from the vibration
equipment, whichever is the greater. This “floated” pipe run shall include,
where situation permits, bends in two mutually perpendicular directions in
order to give three degrees of freedom of movement, with approximately
equal distance between successive elbows or bends.
A14.3.6.2 All horizontal and vertical pipework throughout the building that has connection
to vibrating equipment shall also be isolated from the building structure by means
of noise and vibration isolation guides and supports.
A14.3.6.3 All piping to be isolated shall freely pass through walls and floors without rigid
connections. Penetration points shall be sleeved or otherwise formed to allow
passage of piping, and a clearance of 10 to 15mm around the outside of the piping
shall be maintained. This clearance space shall be lightly packed with glass fibre
or rock wool and caulked airtight after installation of piping. Alternatively,
factory fabricated split wall/floor seals may be used.
A14.3.6.4 The inlet and outlet connections of all vibrating equipment shall be fitted with
either flexible connectors or flexible hoses as appropriate.
A14.3.6.5 Horizontal Pipe Isolation : Where horizontal pipe isolation is required, the first
three pipe hangers in the main line near the mechanical equipment shall be of
Pre-Compressed Spring Hangers and the hangers for the horizontal run in all
other locations shall be of Spring Hangers or Spring and Double Deflection
Neoprene Hangers, the latter being used for more sensitive situations where a
higher degree of noise and vibration attenuation is required.
A14.3.6.5 Pre-Compressed Spring hangers shall have the same static deflection as that of
the mountings under the connected equipment. Spring Hangers and Spring and
Double Deflection Neoprene Hangers shall have a minimum deflection of
20mm.
A14.3.6.6 Pipe Riser Isolation : Where pipe riser isolation is required, the pipe risers to be
isolated shall be suspended from Pre-Compressed Spring hanger or supported by
Restrained Spring mountings and anchored with pipe anchors or guided by
pipe guides. Steel spring deflections shall be a minimum of 20mm except in
those expansion locations where additional deflection is required to limit
deflection or load changes to plus or minus 25% of the initial stress.
A14.3.6.7 Flexible connectors shall be fitted to the inlet and outlet connections of all pumps,
water chillers, water towers ad other centrifugal or reciprocating vibrating
equipment.
A14.3.6.8 Flexible connectors shall be the full line size of the equipment connection and
fitted as close to the source of vibration as is practical. Straight connectors
shall, where practical, be installed in a position that is parallel to the equipment
shaft, as equipment vibration tends to be most severe in a direction radial to the
shaft.
A14.3.6.9 Flexible connectors shall consist of a single or twin-sphere body
manufactured with reinforced rubber, the ends of which are raised and wire
reinforced to form the cuffs for sealing purposes. The cuffs shall be backed by
floating steel flanges.
A14.3.6.10 For use in water, the rubber type shall be EPDM. For other duties, a suitable
rubber shall be selected in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendation.
A14.3.6.11 The rubber body shall be reinforced by multi-layered nylon tire cord fabric.
A14.3.6.12 Flexible connectors shall have a life in excess of 10 years under the design
working conditions.
A14.3.6.13 Flexible connection shall be installed at all fancoils, AHU’s, fans and from duct
branch takeoffs to risers in platform area.
A14.3.6.14 The rubber membranes shall have an indelible identification system to clearly
identify the model and hence suitability for the application and working
conditions and shall have the date of manufacture moulded into
the cover to ensure no units are used that have exceeded their
recommended shelf life.
A14.3.7.1 Flexible connections shall be provided between the vibrating equipment and the
ductwork and shall be made of approved materials such as lead vinyl or similar
of minimum surface density of 5kg/m² and installed such that airflow is not
obstructed. The material used must be in compliance with local statutory
requirements for fire retardant period but this period shall not be less than 2
hours.
A14.3.7.2 Unless otherwise specified, all discharge duct runs for a distance of 15m from
the connected vibrating equipment which has a discharge pressure
of 1 kPa or above shall be isolated from the building structure by means
of spring hangers. Spring deflections shall be a minimum of 20mm.
A14.3.7.3 Except in the case of ducts passing through compartment walls requiring a fire
damper, all ductwork to be isolated shall freely pass through walls and
floors without rigid connections. Penetration points shall be sleeved or
otherwise formed to allow passage of ductwork, and a clearance of 20 to
32mm around the outside surface of the ducts shall be maintained. This
clearance space shall be tightly packed with glass fibre and caulked airtight
after installation of ductwork.
A14.3.7.4 In cases where a fire damper is required, ductwork to be isolated shall be
fitted with a flexible joint on the side of the fire damper from where the
vibration originates.
A14.3.8 Ductwork Acoustic Insulation
A14.3.8.1 Unless otherwise specified, the acoustic duct liner shall conform to the
requirements of ASTM C1071 Type II. It shall be composed of long
textile-type glass fibres firmly bonded together with a thermosetting resin
3
into a rigid board of 50mm thickness and 48 kg/m density. The air
stream surface shall be overlaid with a fire-resistant black acrylic coating
that adds strength to the product during fabrication, installation and system
operation. The manufacturer’s product identification shall appear on the air
stream surface.
A14.3.8.2 Transverse joints of the duct linerboard shall be neatly butted and there
shall be no gaps. Board shall be cut to assure tight, overlapped corner
joints. Board shall be adhered to the sheet metal duct with 100%
coverage of adhesive conforming to ASTM C-916, and all exposed edges
and joints shall also be coated with adhesive. Board shall be additionally
secured with mechanical fasteners that shall start within 75mm of the
upstream transverse edges and 75mm from the longitudinal joints and be
spaced at a maximum of 150mm centres around the perimeter of the duct
and 100mm from corner joints. Elsewhere the fasteners shall be spaced at
a maximum of 150mm centres in the direction across width of duct and
400mm centres in the direction along length of duct and not more than
75mm from longitudinal joints and 100mm from corner joints. Entering and
leaving edges of the duct linerboards shall be provided with continuous
sheet metal edge protectors.
A14.3.8.4 The acoustic linings shall have the following minimum sound absorption
coefficients when tested in accordance with ASTM C-423.
A14.3.8.5 Air duct internal linings shall not be installed within 1m of the fire damper.
A14.3.9.4 The Contractor shall submit installation details to the Contractor for
approval prior to installation.
A14.3.10 Duct Silencers
A14.3.10.1 The outer casing of rectangular duct silencers shall be fabricated from not
lighter than 0.8mm galvanised steel in accordance with the recommended
practices in the ASHRAE Guide. Seams shall be lock-formed and mastic
filled. Each silencer shall be provided with a flanged inlet and outlet. The
The walls and ceiling of AHU room shall be provided with fix resin bonded glass
wool 50mm thick of density 32 kg/m3 for acoustic lining as per following
specifications:
Installation:
Clean the surface
Fix section (size 25 x 50 x 50 x 50 x 25mm) fabricated out of 24G GI
frame with spacing not more than 600mm x 600mm center to center
to be laid in horizontal and vertical formation.
Fix resin bonded glass wool 50mm thick of density of 32 Kg/m3 in the GI
frame and cover with tissue paper.
Cover the insulation with 0.8mm perforated aluminium sheet with at least
20% perforation.
Cover the joints in aluminium sheet with 25mm x 1mm aluminim
beading secured with GI frame by means of steel screws.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A15.1 General
A15.1.1 This Section specifies the manufacture and installation of L.V. Main
Switchboards (LVSBs).
A15.2 Standards
A15.2.1 Relevant Codes and Standards
A15.2.9 IEC-1036, 687, 1286 direct reading single / three phases meter (Digital
Type).
A15.2.10 IEC 60228/BS 6360: Specification for conductors in insulated cables and
cords.
A15.2.17 IEC 60947/ EN 60947: Part 3: Specification for low-voltage switchgear and
controlgear. Switches, disconnectors, switch-disconnectors and fuse-
combination units.
A15.2.24 IEC 60529/EN 60529: Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code).
A15.2.25 IEC 60831: Shunt power capacitors of the self-healing type for AC systems
having a rated voltage up to and including 1000 V.
A15.2.26 IEC 60871-1: Shunt capacitors for AC power systems having a rated voltage
about 1000 V.
A15.3 Technical and Installation Requirements
A15.3.1.1 The LV main switchboards shall be type tested assemblies (TTA) as defined in IEC
61439-1 & 2 or EN 61439-1 & 2, built up from compartments housing
circuit breakers, controlgear, relays, busbars, controls and other items of
equipment.
The LV main switchboards shall also pass the arc fault containment tests
in accordance with IEC 61641.
All panels should be factory built.
The complete units shall be suitable for service on a 415 V, 3 phase 4 wire,
50 Hz supply.
A15.3.1.2 The LV main switchboards and the associated equipment, including
switchgear, controlgear and busbar assemblies shall be certified for the
category of duty specified. The LV Main Switchboard shall be identical in
mechanical construction to the LV Switchboard which had been type-tested by
an acceptable, accredited and independent testing laboratory for the fault
conditions, temperature rise limits and arc fault containment. Any manufacturer
not having the above will not be considered for supply. The main circuits of the
LV main switchboards shall have an insulation voltage of 1000 V AC.
A15.3.13 The protective earthing configuration shall be TN-S unless otherwise specified.
A15.3.1.4 The design temperature for the equipment provided in the main low voltage
switchboards shall be + 50 °C. The relative humidity shall be 75% at a
temperature of + 50 °C.
A15.3.1.5 The secure service life of equipment used for switchboards, sub-assemblies
and components shall be at least 30 years.
A15.3.1.6 Where armoured multicore cables terminate inside the switchboard
enclosure, glanding plates or glanding brackets shall be provided for securing
the cables to the switchboard.
Glanding plates, glanding brackets and extension boxes shall be removable and
shall be of adequate size for the particular cables to be terminated.
Separate current transformers shall be provided for each protection device and for
instrumentation.
The switchgear assembly/sub-assemblies or panels shall be termite and rodent
proof. The sub-assemblies of similar equipment shall be interchangeable.
A15.3.1.7 The switchboard shall have sufficient space to house all electrical equipment
allowing for 25% spare space capacity for the future expansion. Any
equipment which comprises an assembly of similar modules shall be
constructed such that further similar modules can be added at either end.
A15.3.2 Quality Control
A15.3.2.1 Workmanship
(a) All similar items of the LVSBs and their component parts shall be
completely interchangeable. Spare parts shall be manufactured from
materials similar to the originals and shall fit all similar items of the
LVSBs. Where machining may be needed before fitting renewable parts,
the machining fits and the associated tolerances shall be as mention in
BOQ accompanying the instruction manuals.
(b) All parts which are susceptible to wear or contaminated by dust shall
be totally enclosed in dust-proof housings.
(c) The LVSBs shall operate without excessive vibration and with a minimum
of noise, and shall also operate without excessive temperature rise at the
rated load conditions.
(d) The style and finish of the workmanship shall be consistent throughout
the Works. Unless otherwise specified, Employers Representative shall
decide the final colours for all paintwork and other finishes to be
applied to the LVSBs.
A15.3.2.2 Tropicalisation
(a) All items of plant shall be tropicalised to suit the conditions prevailing in
India in general and within the substations and plant rooms in particular.
(b) In particular, the following points for tropicalisation of electrical
components shall apply:
A15.3.3.2 The LVSBs shall be designed for indoor use in the form of free standing,
floor mounting, extendible, self contained, flush fronted cubicles and
sectionalized as necessary to facilitate easy transportation and erection,
containing all the equipment indicated on the Drawings and specified
hereinafter. The Switchboard shall be complete with all components and
accessories, which are necessary or usual for their efficient performance and
satisfactory maintenance under the various operating and atmospheric
conditions. Such parts shall be deemed to be included within the scope of
supply whether specifically included or not in the specifications or in the
tender schedules. The contractor shall not be eligible for any extra charges for
such accessories etc.
A15.3.3.3 The LVSBs shall be provided with front and back access and the maximum
height shall not exceed 2.60 m. All relays and indicating instruments shall be at
least 500 mm and not higher than 1.8 m above floor level. The clearance in
front, back and side of all assemblies of switchgear and control gear shall be
generally not less than 1.2 metres. The switchgear shall be considered in the
fully drawn out condition for this purpose.
A15.3.3.4 The cubicle section shall be constructed of angle iron type frames and folded
sheet steel or fully welded construction with all necessary removable covers.
Removable lifting lugs shall be provided on the top of the cubicles. Cubicle
sections shall be provided with bolts or devices for ensuring that they are
correctly aligned when being coupled together. The busbar chambers shall be
fitted with removable end cover plates secured by mild steel captive screws.
The degree of Ingress Protection for Main LV Switchboards shall be IP 54
which shall not deteorate with time.
A15.3.3.5 Various units comprising a complete LVSB shall be grouped in a multi-tier
arrangement including a cabling and wiring chamber of ample dimensions to
accommodate terminal blocks, cable boxes and gland plates.
A15.3.3.6 Adequate maintenance access shall be provided to equipment within the LVSBs.
Demountable panels shall be provided at the back of the LVSBs that can
be handled by a single person. Every demountable panel shall be provided with a
pair of handles for easy removal and fixing.
A15.3.3.7 The LVSBs shall be constructed of nominal 2 mm thick sheet steel. Front
access door shall be fixed with concealed hinges and interlocked with the
switch mechanism. The door panel can be opened only if the switchgear is in
the “OFF” position. It shall be finished to provide a rigid shell type of enclosure
in accordance with BS EN 10137.
A15.3.3.8 Ventilating louvres where required shall be provided on the sides of the panels
and shall be of the approved design to suit local conditions.
A15.3.4.1 A continuous copper earthing busbar shall be provided along the whole length
of each LVSB and shall be provided with terminals for connections to the
metal housings of incoming busways, cable trunkings, and cladding or
armouring of all incoming and outgoing cables and to the substation earth.
The copper earthing busbar shall be tin-plated and with a size 50x6mm copper or
higher as required for fault level specified for the panel in BOQ.
A15.3.4.2 Switchboards shall be provided with two earthing terminals,one at each end, for
the connetion of sleeved Copper bars for earthing. The earthing bars shall be
fixed at rear interior bottom portion throughout the length of the switchboard,
bonding all gland plates, and other component parts of the switchboard to a
main earth point adjacent to the intake position in accordance with BS 951 and
BS 7430.
A15.3.5.1 All terminals, connections, relays and other components which may remain
live when access doors are open shall be screened. It shall not be possible to
obtain access to an adjacent cubicle when any door is opened.
A15.3.5.2 Where several outgoing circuits occupy a common cabling chamber, all
copper work, cable lugs, terminations and terminal blocks shall be fully
segregated by compartmentation to enable work on any one circuit to be
carried out with other circuits remain live.
A15.3.6 Busbars
A15.3.6.1 Busbars and busbar connections shall be constructed in accordance with the
requirements of IEC 61439-1 or EN 61439-1.
A15.3.6.2 The short-time withstand current rating shall be at least for 1 second at 415 V as
per BOQ.
A15.3.6.3 Busbars shall be of rectangular section hard drawn high conductivity copper to
BS 1432, adequately rated and supported by non-tracking moulded insulators
spaced at suitable intervals. The complete assembly shall be capable of
withstanding the maximum mechanical stresses to which it may be subjected to
under fault conditions.
A15.3.6.4 Connection shall be made with double split cast brass clamps. Drilling of the
bars will not be permitted, as per type tested design of OEM unless Approved by the
Employers Representative.
A15.3.6.5 Full size neutral bars shall be provided.
A15.3.6.6 Busbar, busbar connection and conductors forming part of the equipment of
the switchboards shall comply with IEC 61439-1 or EN61439-1 on current
carrying capacity and limits of temperature rise.
A15.3.6.7 The main busbars shall be so positioned and arranged that all busbar risers and
droppers can be brought onto the main busbars without undue bending.
Busbars shall be separated and supported with appropriate clearances in air in
addition to the requirement of providing full insulation. Seperate insulaing
covers shall be installed over all bus-bars and incoming bus-bars in accordance
with BS EN 60216, IEC 60085 and IEC 60216-1. The insulating covers shall
withstand fire or excessive heat caused by internal electrical phenomenon.
Busbars shall be coloured for phase identification. The material for phase
identification shall be non-colour fading and use of adhesive label shall not be
acceptable. Fire retardant LSZH paint shall be used for phase identification.
A15.3.6.8 All conductors between the busbars and the switchgear shall be of high
conductivity copper bar, having a current rating of not less than that of the
frame size of the switchgear to which they are connected. The conductors
shall be insulated and colour coded for phase identification.
A15.3.6.10 The maximum temperature of the bus-bars and the bus connections shall
comply with IEC 61439-1 or EN 61439-1 on current carrying capacity and
limits of temperature rise.
.
A15.3.6.11 The temperature rise tests shall be carried out at full rating of rated current for
all busbars. Type test certificates for temperature rise shall be given for
acceptance.
A15.3.7 Polarity
A15.3.7.1 The polarity of all apparatus shall be arranged as follows when viewed facing
the front of the LVSBs:
(a) For two pole apparatus, phase pole and neutral pole when reading from
top to bottom or left to right; and
(b) For three or four pole apparatus, red, yellow and blue phases and
neutral when reading from top to bottom or left to right.
A15.3.7.2 All cables shall be so connected within the LVSBs such that the correct
sequence are preserved throughout.
A15.3.8 Not Used.
A15.3.9.1 Terminal blocks for low voltage wiring shall be moulded from high grade
non – hygroscopic melamine, comprise banks of rail-mounted blocks with all
live parts fully shrouded, screw- clamp, spring- loaded insertion, solder-lug
or stud type terminals as appropriate to the design and duty of the cables to
be terminated. Pinch-type screws, where the screw is in direct contact with the
conductor, shall not be used.
A15.3.9.2 Each terminal shall be provided with claw-type washers, crimp lugs or other
approved means for connection of the wires. Plain and spring washers, nuts
and lockouts shall be electro-tinned.
A15.3.9.3 Terminals shall be assembled in banks and each terminal shall be complete
with marking tags to fit into moulded tag slots.
A15.3.9.4 All terminals to which 240 V or 415 V AC circuits are connected, where they are
not housed in individual terminal blocks, shall be provided with a transparent
insulated cover which, in addition to any other form of identification and shall
have a label engraved suitably indicating the voltage.
A15.3.9.5 Terminals for the control supply which may be still alive when the main
equipment is isolated from the mains supply shall be suitably labelled to
reduce the risk of accidental contact.
A15.3.10.1 All equipment shall have adequate provision for the entry and termination of
all associated power and auxiliary cables.
A15.3.10.2 Cable entry shall in all cases, except where otherwise specifically approved, be at
the base of the equipment. LSZH and Fire Survival Cables shall be as specified
in Section A16 of the M&W Specification.
A15.3.10.3 All cabling and wiring within the LVSBs shall be neatly run and fitted in or
upon such cable trays, trunkings and conduits as may be appropriate to the
layout and equipment. Cable trays, trunkings, conduits, cable ties, gaskets and
cleats shall be non - metallic and shall be of the low smoke halogen free material.
A15.3.10.4 All internal and control wiring shall be Low Smoke Zero Halogen (LSZH)
copper conductor wires rated at 450/750 V complying with BS 7211 and
Section A16 of this Specification. All control wiring within the LVSBs shall
be with single core; minimum 2.5 mm² copper conductor complying with the
requirements of this Clause. Insulation shall have a glossy finish, be resistant to
oil and be incapable of supporting combustion.
A15.3.10.5 Different insulation colours shall be provided to distinguish the various circuits.
All wiring shall conform to the colour and ferrule codes to be approved by
Employer’s Representative. The ferrules shall be made of low smoke halogen
free material.
A15.3.10.6 All internal wiring shall be neatly run and securely fixed in non-metallic
cleats in such a manner that, wherever practicable, wiring can be checked against
diagrams without removal of the cleats. Wiring passing out to fully accessible
positions shall be run in non-metallic low smoke halogen free flexible tubes or
conduits.
A15.3.10.7 Bus-wires shall be fully insulated. Bus-wires terminals shall be fully accessible
from the point of entry to each enclosure. MCB and links shall be provided to
enable all control circuits within the LVSBs to be isolated from the bus-wires.
A15.3.10.8 All wires between the terminals of two equipment shall be given an unique
number according to an approved system. A wire number shall not change solely
by virtue of passing through, say, a marshalling terminal block.
A15.3.10.11 Where inter-panel wiring passes through panel side sheets etc., the access hole
shall be fitted with a suitable grommet.
A15.3.10.12 There shall be no joint in conductors between terminal points.
A15.3.10.13 Terminations for terminals shall be of the crimped-on ring type. Terminations
of stranded conductors to clamp type terminals shall be of the crimped-on solid
rod type.
A15.3.10.14 No more than one core of either internal or external wiring shall terminate on
any outgoing terminal. Where duplication of terminal blocks is necessary,
suitable solid bonding links shall be incorporated in the design of block selected.
A15.3.10.15 Wiring for all known future equipment shall be provided and all wires shall
be terminated.
A15.3.10.16 Wiring from the fixed part of the switchboard to the movable part such as
hinged door shall be enclosed by a flexible tubing made of Low smoke Zero
Halogen material. Exposed live termainals shall be suitably shrouded or covered.
A15.3.11.1 Instruments shall be similar in appearance throughout the whole of the LVSB.
All instruments, gauges and meters shall be of flush pattern, dust and moisture
proof, suitable for the environment in which they are installed. All instruments
and meters shall be completely segregated in instrument compartments.
Compartments containing these devices shall not contain any terminals or
equipment operating at higher voltages.
A15.3.11.2 Meter shall be suitable for 3 phase, 4-wire system, balanced as well as unbalanced
load. All instruments and associated apparatus shall be capable of carrying
their full-load current without undue heating. They shall not be damaged by the
passage of fault currents up to the rating of the associated switchgear through the
primaries of their associated instrument transformers. All instruments and
apparatus shall be flush mounted and cases shall be earthed by a conductor of
not less than 2.5mm² cross-sectional area.
A15.3.11.3 Direct reading electrical meters shall conform to IS 13779 / IEC - 1036, 687,
1286 suitable for single phase / three phase supply system in all respects.
Accuracy of direct reading shall be class 0.5 or 1.0 or as specified in BOQ.
A15.3.11.4 All the meters shall be digital with menu drive selection and RS 485 connectivity
to suit BMS System. Suitable memory and software for logging the information
along with realtime metering information must be available. The meters must
have required level of protection and sufficient number of auxialiary contacts.
All digital meter should be of accuracy class 0.5 or 1 or as specified in BOQ.
0 0
A15.3.11.5 Meters shall be suitable for continuous operation between 0 C and + 50 C
and shall display full rated value of the parameter
A15.3.11.6 Meters shall be flush mounted and shall be enclosed in dust tight housing.
The housing shall be of steel or phenolic mould. Design and manufacture of
A15.3.11.7 Energy meters shall be two / three element, switch board mounting type suitable
for unbalanced loads. In case of two incoming feeders, a summation C.T.
shall be provided with the meter, Meters shall conform to BS: 37 or
equivalent Indian Standard. The energy meter shall be electronic type having
digital display.
A15.3.11.10 Wattmeter shall be of 3 phase Digital type and shall be provided with a
maximum demand indicator with RS-485/RS232 connectivity, as required.
A15.3.11.11 Three phase power factor meters shall be of Digital type with current and
potential coils suitable for operation with current and potential transformers
provided in the panel. Scale shall be calibrated for 50% lag - 100% - 50%
lead readings with RS485/RS232/RJ45 connectivity.
A15.3.11.12 Trivector meters shall be of two / three element, integrating type. Meters
shall conform to IEC 170 in all respects. Energy meters, kVA, and kVARH
meters shall be provided with integrating registers. The registers shall be able to
record energy consumption of 500 hours corresponding to maximum current at
rated voltage and unity power factor. Meters shall be suitable for operation with
current and potential transformers available in the panel and shall have
connectivity through RS 485/RS232.
A15.3.11.13 Square/rectangular pattern flush mounting meters complying with the
requirements of the relevant Indian / International Standards shall only be used.
A15.3.11.14 The display for single meters i.e. ammeter or voltmeters shall be 4.5 digits
and integral meters shall be page display type as specified.
A15.3.11.15 The digital disply energy meters shall be provided in all motor feeders as
desired by employer’s representative.
A15.3.12 Relays
A15.3.12.1 All control, interlock and alarm relays shall be mounted in positions readily
accessible within the LVSBs. Unless otherwise Approved, these relays shall
comply with the relevant requirements of EN 60255 or IEC 60255.
A15.3.12.2 Relays shall be Micro processor based, of well proven design having
auxilliary contacts and RS 232 / 485/RJ 45 connectivity/as per IEC 61850, as
required.
A15.3.12.3 Protection relays shall be equipped to indicate cause of tripping. Relays shall
be designed to make or break the maximum circuit current with which they are
associated. Relay contacts shall be of silver or platinum alloy and shall be
designed to withstand repeated operation without damage. Relays shall be of
draw out type to facilitate testing and maintenance. Draw out case shall be dust
tight. Relays shall be capable of disconnecting faulty section of network without
causing interruption to remaining sections. Analysis of setting shall be made
considering relay errors, pickup and overshoot errors and shall be submitted
to Employers Representative for approval. All relays shall be hand reset type
from front of panel.
A15.3.12.4 The relays shall be duly compensated against fluctuation in ambient temperature
and frequency and shall have single phase prevention feature.
A15.3.12.5 Over current relays shall be of digital micro processor type with inverse
definite minimum time lag characteristics. Relays shall be provided with
adjustable current and time settings. Setting for current shall be 20 to 200% in
steps of 5%. The IDMT relay shall have time lag (delay) of 0 to 3 seconds. The
time setting multiplier shall be adjustable from 0.1 to unity. Over current
relays shall be fitted with suitable tripping device with trip coil being suitable
for operation on 5 amps.
A15.3.12.6 Earth fault relays shall be same as over current relay, except that the current
setting shall be 10% to 40% in steps of 5%.
A15.3.12.7 Under voltage relays shall be of digital micro processor type & shall have
inverse limit operation characteristic with pickup voltage range of 40 to 95%
of the rated voltage.
A15.3.12.8 Relays shall all be contained in dust-proof cases suitable for flush mounting with
the doors of dedicated and segregated relays compartments within the LVSBs.
A15.3.12.9 All metal cases and frames of relays shall be earthed except where they must
be insulated for special requirements.
A15.3.12.10 The relays shall be of the approved type, construction and finish. Relay
equipment shall be of the withdrawable pattern and shall have positive means
for retention in the service position.
A15.3.12.11 All relays completing either a tripping circuit or the circuit to a coil of an
auxiliary tripping relay shall be provided with Approved operation indicators
which, wherever possible, shall be of the mechanically operated manually reset
type.
A15.3.12.12 All DC or AC relays shall operate satisfactorily when the DC or AC supply
voltage varies between 70 % and 120 % of its rated value, unless stated
otherwise.
A15.3.12.13 All relays shall be suitably marked for purposes of identification with the
following information:
a.) Function of relay,
b) Device number, and
c) Voltage and phase colour of the supply (where applicable).
A15.3.12.14 All interposing relays used for remote supervisory control shall have surge
suppression device across each coil.
A15.3.12.15 Contacts for remote alarms and indication shall be volt-free.
A15.3.12.21 Adjustable time delay U/V relays shall be selected such that the relays will
not operate due to starting of a high rating motor at the LV side.
A15.3.12.22 Relays measuring the current quantities in series with the CTs shall be fitted
with contacts which shall short circuit the associated CTs on withdrawal of the
relays.
A15.3.12.23 For triple pole VIDMT or EIDMT O/C relays, three single phase units in
one horizontal plane and housed in a common casing shall be provided.
A15.3.13 Interlock and Padlocking Facilities
A15.3.13.1 Mechanical key interlocks shall be provided and shall be so designed as to avoid
mal-operation at the point of manual application. The scheme shall be such
that attempts to remove a captive key shall not result in tripping or opening
of the device.
A15.3.13.2 Electrical interlocks on withdrawable equipment shall be so arranged that if
the equipments are withdrawn, the complete operation of the withdrawn
equipment shall be independent of the remote interlocking contacts. In
addition, interlocks shall not be defeated leading to damages or unsafe operations
of LVSBs due to the withdrawing of equipment.
A15.3.13.3 Locking facilities shall be provided where appropriate for switches and isolators
in order that they may be locked in the open position. Switchgear cubicle
access doors shall be equipped with integral type locks, preferably
incorporated in the handles of the equipment. The locks and keys shall be of
metallic type.
A15.3.13.4 Where locking facilities are of the integral barrel type, the key for each lock shall
be unique to the associated lock unless otherwise specified.
A15.3.13.5 Two keys shall be provided for every lock supplied. The keys shall be fitted
with rings with identification labels, and wooden cabinets with glazed front-
opening doors shall be provided. The cabinets shall be adequate in size and
equipped with hooks to house all keys when not in use, and shall be mounted in
positions to be decided.
A15.3.14 Emergency Push Button (EPB)
A15.3.14.1 Wherever specified in BOQ, Emergency lock and key type push buttons
shall be installed at or near all exit doors of the LV Switch rooms to de-
energize the LVSB in the event of an emergency. The EPB shall be button
type with flat surface protection guard ring and pressed-in design with key
reset so that accidental triggering and vandalism shall be avoided as far as
possible. Transparent hinged cover shall be provided in front. Unless otherwise
specified on the Drawings, the EPB shall be mounted at 1300mm above finish
floor level. The button design and the installation details shall be submitted for
approval.
A15.3.14.2 The tripping of the ACB(s) shall be via local hard wiring control and interface
with the EPBs. Signal(s) shall also be generated from the control circuit(s) of the
LVSB to inter trip the HV circuit breaker(s) upstream of the corresponding
LVSB and the switchboard interconnected section ACB.
A15.3.15 Equipment for BMS Interface
A15.3.15.1 Volt-free contacts provided shall comprise a pair of contacts operated directly by
the equipment but electrically separated such that no potential derived from
the equipment appears at the contacts. Volt-free contacts shall be used to
complete external alarm or indication circuits with the supplies for these circuits
being obtained from an external source. For the equipment to be controlled by
the BMS, the BMS will transmit a voltage pulse signal of required voltage
to termination block. There shall be one interface for control open and one
for control close operations. The Contractor shall provide appropriate equipment
to sense and latch the voltage pulse signal for performing the open/close control
function. The BMS digital output (DO) signal shall be as stipulated.
A15.3.15.2 Volt-free contacts shall be readily convertible from NO to NC and vice versa by
simple field adjustment. Contacts shall be rated to adequately make and break
and carry continuously not less than 5 A at 250 V AC or 2 A at 110 V DC.
A15.3.15.3 Volt-free contacts for sequence of event (SOE) alarms shall firmly close and seat in
position once activated. The contacts shall not bounce or vibrate due to internal
or external causes.
A15.3.16 Wiring Diagrams
A15.3.17.1 The indicating lamps shall be LED type and shall be suitably rated so that the
indication is clearly visible from the side and front at a distance of not less than 3
m in a room having an average vertical illumination of 150 lux.
A15.3.17.2 Lamps shall be well ventilated and the design shall permit replacement of
lamp lens and bulbs from the front of the unit.
A15.3.17.3 The colours of indicating lamps for red phase, yellow phase, blue phase, ACB
on, ACB off and ACB trip shall be red, yellow, blue, red, green and amber
respectively.
A15.3.18 Control Switches
A15.3.18.1 Circuit breakers shall be fitted with control switches of the pistol grip type,
with spring return to the neutral position, and with an interlock to prevent
repetitive closing without moving first to the trip position.
A15.3.18.2 Switches for other control selection and other purposes shall have spade
type handles.
A15.3.18.3 Control switches shall be fitted with facilities for padlocking to prevent
unauthorised operations.
A15.3.18.4 Selector switches shall be provided such that voltmeters can read voltages
between phase and phase and between phase and neutral, and that ammeters can
read currents between phases and between phase and neutral.
A15.3.19 Operating Coils
All fine wire operating coils and wire wound resistors shall be vacuum
impregnated with an insulating varnish.
A15.3.20 Auxiliary Switches and Contacts
A15.3.20.2 For each control compartment, spare auxiliary contacts with a minimum of two
NO and two NC contacts shall be provided, and wired to suitably identified
spare terminals.
A15.3.20.3 Auxiliary contacts for all applications shall be rated at 240 V AC or 110 V DC
with contact rating of at least 6 A AC or DC and operating life of at least one
million on- load operations at 0.4 power factor inductive load..
A15.3.21 Control Supply
A15.3.21.1 240V control supply will be available from the station UPS. DP MCB
protection shall be provided at incoming. Separate control bus of suitable
rating made of copper shall be provided through out the panel length, and the
control bus should be accessible from the front of the panel. Control voltage
taping for different feeder shall be done with proper clamp. 240V voltage sensing
relay with volt free contacts shall be provided for sensing the control supply for
local and remote indication to BMS/SCADA. The control circuit shall be
separated from other auxiliary circuits, i.e. indicating circuit, heater and lighting
circuits, with dedicated circuit protective devices.
A15.3.22 Air Circuit
Breakers
A15.3.22.1 General
All ACBs shall comply with IEC 60947-2 and EN 60947-2 and shall meet
the following requirements:
a)Number of poles: The incomer ACBs and bus-section ACB shall be four-
pole type. For balance ACBs the number of poles shall be as mentioned in
BOQ.
b) Rated insulation voltage: 1000 V AC,
h) Utilization category: B,
i) Rated short-time withstand current (Icw): 56 kA/ BOQ for 1 second
(minimum) subject to actual fault current on board and 22 kA for 3 seconds.
l) All ACBs shall be of the air break horizontal withdrawable pattern complete
with interlocks to prevent withdrawal when the breaker is closed. Electrical
connection between the breaker and “Switchboard” shall be of plug and
socket type with automatic screening shutters which will shield the fixed
terminals in the “Switchboard” in a manner such that no access can be made
to the fixed terminals when the breaker is withdrawn. In order to prevent
unauthorised operation, the withdrawable air circuit breakers shall be
provided with padlock facilities to secure them in their CONNECTED, TEST
and ISOLATED positions.
m) ACB shall have microprocessor based protection releases for type of faults,
as required, and shall have an LED display to show true RMS current in
all the three phases and the highest current among three phases. The
release should have an internal fault indication by LED’s for fault
differentiation. The release shall be equipped with self diagnostic feature
with indication.
a)All ACBs shall be provided with hand charged and motor charged spring
closing mechanism rated at 240V AC / 110 V DC.
b)All operating mechanisms shall have mechanical ‘ ON’ and ‘ OFF’ indicators
and a manual trip device fitted with means for locking. The spring charging
motor shall be suitable for operation within a voltage range of 70% to 120% of
the rated control supply voltage.
e)With hand charged and motor charged spring mechanisms the springs cannot
be discharged until they have been fully charged and until the means for
charging has been removed or disconnected,
f) Facilities shall be provided for testing the ACB operation when in the isolated
and withdrawn positions by the normal means as in service, and
g) where control circuits are provided and interlock circuits are broken via
plugs on withdrawal of the ACB, a minimum of one jumper lead and plug
assembly of each size and type shall be provided to facilitate testing in the
withdrawn position.
A15.3.22.5 Safety Shutters
The handles of control switches for air circuit breakers shall turn clockwise
for closing and anti - clockwise for tripping and shall be of the pistol grip
type. The control switch shall be clearly labelled as CIRCUIT BREAKER OPEN
– NEUTRAL - CLOSE, with spring return to the neutral position. Mechanical
interlock shall be fitted to prevent repetitive closing without moving first to the
trip position, and shall be capable of padlocking in the neutral or trip position.
A15.3.22.7 Air Circuit breakers shall have panel space and be equipped with at least but
not limited to the devices as detailed below:
(a) Transformer Incomers
1) Four pole horizontal draw - out automatic air circuit breaker with normal
current rating as per BOQ and provided with:
i) Circuit-breaker open,
ii) Circuit-breaker closed,
iii) Circuit-breaker tripped on fault, and
iv) Switch position of local/auto control selector switch
14) Set of terminals wired to provide for connection to the following:
i) Automatic changeover and interlocking as shown on the Drawings/as per
employment requirement
, and
ii) Operation of Emergency Push Buttons.
Signal cables wired to the terminal block for remote monitoring to SCADA.
(9) Power and control cable terminals with undrilled gland plates for
outgoing power cables and multi-core cables.
(10) Circuit labels, one on the front of the panel and one on the rear of the
panel suitably engraved.
(11) Remote indication and alarm facilities:
i. Circuit-breaker open,
ii. Circuit-breaker closed,
(12) Set of terminals wired to provide for remote close and trip.
iv) ACB shall be equipped with release unit with selective over current (long time,
short time & instantaneous) & earth fault protection, measurement of electrical
parameters as mention in BOQ and with communication capability with SCADA/BMS
system.
2) One single pole, lock-out, hand reset fault trip for circuit-breaker tripping, inter-
ripping, and local indication.
3) Control relays and wiring for automatic changeover, interlocking and other
breaker operation as mentioned in BOQ/as per requirement.
(4) Anti-condensation heater(s) complete with humidistat, MCB and isolating switch.
(5) Off/Local/remote control selector switch, lockable in all positions. The remote BMS
control shall be defeated when the selector switch is put at ‘off’ or ‘Local’ position. When
the selector switch is put at ‘off’ position, the automatic changeover operation mentioned
in Clause (5) above shall also be defeated.
(6) Circuit breaker with close/trip control switch and of pistol grip type.
(7) Indicating lamps for on, off, tripped on fault and trip supply healthy, with all
necessary push buttons, panel wiring, bus-wiring, terminals, fuses etc.
(8) Electrical interlock for the two incoming circuit breakers and interconnector bus-
s ection circuit breakers to prevent paralleling of different power supply sources at any time
as shown on the Drawings/as per requirement.
(9) Power and control cable terminals with undrilled gland plates for power cables and
multi- core cables for interconnector circuit breaker.
(10) Circuit labels, one on the front and one on the rear of the panel suitably
engraved.
(11) Remote indication and alarm facilities.
Control circuits and relays with signal cables wired back to terminal to initiate
remote alarms and indicators as follows:
i. Circuit-breaker open,
ii. Circuit-breaker closed,
iii. Circuit-breaker tripped on fault, and
iv. Switch position of off/local/remote control selector switch
ii) 110 V DC or 240 volts A.C shunt-trip coil,within operational range of 70% to
120% of rated voltage.
iii) Maximum number of circuit- breaker auxiliary switch to be equally divided
between normally open and normally closed. At least 4 spare pairs shall
be provided.
iv) ACB shall be equipped with release unit with selective over current (long
time, short time & instantaneous) & earth fault protection, measurement
of electrical parameters as mention in BOQ and with communication
capability with SCADA/BMS system.
(2) One single pole lock-out hand reset fault trip relay for circuit-breaker
tripping, and local indication.
(3) Control relays and wiring for breaker operations as mentioned in BOQ/as per
requirement.
(4) Electrical interlock for automatic sequences as detailed on the Drawings/as
per requirement.
(8) Indicating lamps for on, off, tripped on fault and trip supply healthy,
with all necessary push buttons, panel wiring, bus wiring, terminals, fuses,
etc.
(9) Circuit labels one on the front and one on the rear of the panel
suitably engraved.
(10) Remote indication and alarm facilities. Volt-free contacts shall be provided
and wire back to terminal block to initiate remote alarms and indications as
follow:
i) Circuit - breaker open,
ii) Circuit - breaker closed,
(11) Set of terminals wired to provide for remote close and trip.
(12) Signal cables wired to the terminal block for remote monitoring to BMS.
d) Rated uninterrupted current (ln): as mentioned in BOQ, but after taking into
account the installation conditions and temperature deration.
e) Rated frequency: 50 Hz,
h) Rated service short-circuit breaking capacity (lcs): (56 kA/ BOQ). Further,
Ics must be equal to 100% Icu for the selected breaker,
i) Utilization category: A or B as appropriate,
j) Degree of protection: IP 3X to IEC 60529 or EN 60529, and
permitted.
In case higher frame sizes (than those specified in the BOQ) is required to
be provided to achieve the above requirement, due to selection of a
particular make, the same shall be provided at no extra cost if other makes
are able to achieve the same with the specified frame size.
A15.3.24.9 MCCB’s shall have common field fittable auxiliaries for the entire range and
above 250 A the accessories like spreaders and phase barriers should be the
integral part of the MCCB’s.
A15.3.24.11 Electronic trip units shall comply with the requirements as specified in Appendix
F (EMC / EMI Compatibility) of IEC 60947-2 or EN 60947-2.
A15.3.25 Remote Monitoring
The following critical status and alarms for each LVSB shall be sent to BMS
for remote monitoring via volt-free contacts rated at 230V AC/ 24 V DC,
provided in the LVSB:
Individual ACB open/close status,
A15.3.26.1 CTs and VTs shall comply with BS 3938, IEC 60185, IEC 61869, IS 2705 or
IEC 60044, IS 3156 or latest applicable standard and CTs shall be of the epoxy
resin encapsulated ring type. The ratings specified on the Drawings are
indicative only and it shall be contractor / manufacturer’s responsibility to
ensure that the ratings offered are adequate for the relays / meters provided
considering lead resistance, etc.
A15.3.26.2 All CTs shall have a short-time current rating on primary side should be as per
IEC 60185, IEC 61869, IS 2705 or latest applicable standard.
A15.3.26.3 Multi-ratio CTs (where used) shall have a label clearly indicating the
connections required for the alternative ratios. These connections shall be
shown on panel wiring diagrams.
A15.3.26.4 Identification labels shall be fitted, giving type, ratio, rating, output and serial
numbers. Duplicate rating labels shall be fitted on the exterior of the
mounting chambers suitably located to enable reading without the removal of
any cover or metal sheeting forming part of the structure of the LVSBs.
A15.3.26.5 CTs for protection shall be compatible with the protection relays to ensure that the
CTs will not be saturated up to the maximum prospective fault current.
A15.3.26.6 CTs designed for unit protection schemes shall be able to withstand a stability of
not less than the maximum through-fault of the units.
A15.3.26.7 In balanced circuits, the spill current with maximum stability conditions shall
not exceed one quarter of the operating current of the relay.
A15.3.26.8 CTs for use in conjunction with protection relays shall be of class 5 P accuracy or
better. CTs for use in conjunction with measuring instruments shall be of Class
1 accuracy. The product of rated accuracy limit factor and rated output of the
protection CTs shall not be less than 20 times the total rated burden of the
trip circuit including the relay, connection leads and O/C release where
applicable.
A15.3.26.9 All CTs shall have output ratings adequate to cater for the burden connected to
them. The Contractor shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Employers
Representative, by calculation or by test, that each group of the CTs, when
installed and having the secondary burden connected, is capable of operating the
relays and other measuring instruments in accordance with the manufacturer’s
published characteristics and the requirements of the system, with a reasonable
margin of safety.
A15.3.26.10 Measuring CTs shall be connected to test terminal block. The test blocks shall be
provided with easily removable links and designed to facilitate connection of
testing instruments on load without open-circuiting the CTs.
A15.3.26.11 The secondary circuit of each set of CTs shall be earthed at one point only through
a disconnectable copper link at a readily accessible position for testing.
A15.3.26.12 VTs shall be provided with adequately rated primary and secondary
fuses.
A15.3.27 BMS / SCADA / RS485 connectivity of communicable ACB / MCCB
A15.3.27.1 Junction box suitable for four no ACB connection shall be provided as per
requirement.
A15.3.27.2 Connecting cable with connector between ACB communication unit and junction
box shall be provided.
A15.3.27.3 24V DC source unit or as required (Incoming supply shall be taped form the control
supply available in the panel) for communication of ACB/MCCB with
SCADA/BMS system.
A15.3.28 Contactors
A15.3.28.8 The making and breaking capacity values of the contactors should be as follows
(as per IEC 947-4)
For AC3 duty
Making capacity equal to or more than 10
Ie Braking Capacity equal to or more than
8 Ie For AC4 duty
A15.3.28.9 The contactors should be capable of frequent switching and should operate without
o
derating at 60 C for AC3 applications. They should be climate proof. The coil of
the contactor should have class H insulation to support frequent switching.
A15.3.28.10 The rated voltage of the contactor and the rated insulation voltage shall be 690V.
The rated impulse voltage of the contactor should be at least 8 KV.
A15.3.28.11 Wherever DC control is required, the contactor should have wide range (0.7 to
1.25 Uc) DC coil with built in interference suppression as required.
A15.3.28.12 The control and power terminals should be at separate layers preferably with
colour coding (black for power and white for control). All contactors power
connection shall be finger safe (IP 2X).
A15.3.28.13 They should be capable of being integrated into automated system (PLC’s)
without any interposing components in the minimum operating conditions.
A15.3.29.1 Power factor correction equipment and its installation shall comply with IEC
60831.Each power factor correction equipment shall consist of capacitors,
switchgears, cables, cable gland, control relays, step controllers, sensing
apparatus, CTs and contactors etc. Capacitor bank with rating a s mentioned
i n B O Q shall be provided and connected to the designated switchgear in the
LV main switchboard to improve the overall power factor to not less than 0.95
lagging. The Contractor shall ensure that the power factor correction equipment
shall not cause harmonic resonance in the LV electrical network. The system
shall ensure that a leading PF does not occur.
A15.3.29.2 The capacitor bank shall be of floor standing type built up from static primary
capacitor units. The primary capacitor unit shall be of the dry type without
impregnation liquid, self-healing and with losses not greater than 0.5 W/kvar.
The primary capacitor unit shall comply with the requirement of IEC 60871-1
or BS 1650. Each capacitor bank shall be fitted with an automatic discharge
assembly which shall discharge the entire capacitor bank from the peak
alternating voltage to a voltage not exceeding 50 V measured at the capacitor
bank terminals one minute after disconnection from the supply.
A15.3.29.3 The capacitors shall be controlled by an automatic multi-step capacitor control
relay switching the appropriate bank of capacitors in stages minimum to
achieve the best average power factor. A no-volt and single phasing
protection shall be provided. All capacitors involved shall be disconnected
instantaneously, and reconnected step by step at intervals after the supply is
restored.
A15.3.29.4 The power factor correction equipment shall be a self-contained integral unit. The
control relays, fuses and contactors etc. shall be housed in a cubicle complete
with an isolation switch interlocked with cubicle door. Local/off/auto selector
switch and visual indication of energized capacitor with red lamps, etc shall be
provided. The following alarms shall be provided:
(1) Local Alarms:
Out of Steps
Over-compensation
Overcurrent
Overvoltage
Capacitor Bank Failure
A15.3.29.5 The automatic control shall be accomplished by the use of an automatic multi-
stage kVar sensitive, solid state relay having a number of stage switches,
which shall operate the capacitor contactors.
A15.3.29.6 Capacitor banks shall comprise single phase units with sheet steel case and
terminals suitable for connection with copper bars in delta connection and shall
be built from modular units preferably of identical rating. Impregnants used in
capacitors shall be non-harmful, and shall not have been condemned by
any Environmental Protection agencies.
A15.3.29.7 Type tests for the equipment shall include 1.4 x operating voltage, temperature
cycling and repeated switching.
A15.3.30 Finishes
A15.3.30.1 All exposed metal surfaces, both internal and external, shall be thoroughly cleaned
of all dust, oil, grease, dirt, scale, rust or other contaminants and shall be
epoxy powder coated immediately at the manufacturer’s factory.
A15.3.30.2 The epoxy powder coating shall be not less than 75 micron thick and with colour
in accordance with BS 381C or BS 4800 as approved by Employers
Representative.
A15.3.30.3 All surfaces of the LVSBs shall have any damage to the finished coating made
good on completion of installation and shall then be painted to its original
finished colour.
A15.3.30.4 Painting procedure, paint samples and manufacturers shall be approved prior to
commencement of painting.
A15.3.30.5 Touch-up proposals to make good any areas/surfaces that have been damaged on
site or in transit shall be as approved.
A15.3.31 Nameplates and Labels
A15.3.31.1 Nameplates
(a) Labels shall be provided for every panel to describe the duty of or
otherwise identify every instrument, relay or item of control equipment
mounted externally and internally.
(b) The designation on these labels shall be clear and shall, where
applicable, incorporate the device number along with concise descriptive
wording in English.
(c) Externally fitted panel labels shall be of perspex or other qapproved
transparent plastic with letters and numbers rear engraved and filled with
black.
(d) Internally fitted panel labels shall be finished in white with engraved letters
and numbers filled with black, laminated material such as Traffolyte or
rear engraved and filled plastic may be used. Embossed materials and
techniques will not be accepted.
(e) Labels shall be provided in conformity with the above requirements or by
other approved means wherever necessary to designate panels or panel
sections, to describe or identify circuits or circuit components, to provide
warnings or reminders of dangerous or potentially dangerous circumstances
and wherever called for elsewhere in this M&W Specification.
(f) Safety labels “Danger, 415 V” in both English and Hindi shall be provided
on both the front and rear of the LVSBs. The safety labels shall have
graphic symbols and wording in red on a white background. The design
of all such signs shall be submitted for approval. Similar labels shall be
provided for other panels at different voltages.
(g) Labels shall not be less than 45 mm high. Lettering shall be of not less than
10 mm high. All labels shall be securely fixed to the panels by bolts and nuts.
(h) Details of proposed inscription, including the English and Hindi wordings,
and samples of the labels shall be submitted for approval before any
labels are manufactured.
A15.3.32 Installation
A15.3.32.1 The LVSBs shall be installed in the locations as approved by the Employers
Representative. LVSBs shall be secured, plumbed and levelled and in true
alignment with related adjoining work.
A15.3.32.2 The rigid galvanized U-channels with adjustable levelling screws to ensure
effective fixing of the LVSBs on the uneven floor shall be provided.
A15.3.32.3 Anchor bolts and anchorage items shall be provided where required and field
checked to ensure proper alignment and location. Templates, layout drawings,
and supervision on Site shall be provided to ensure correct placing of anchorage
items in concrete.
A15.3.32.4 Supporting members, fastenings, framing hangers, bracing, brackets, straps, bolts,
angles, shall be installed as required to set and rigidly connect the work.
A15.3.32.5 Temporary bracing, guys, or other devices shall be provided as required to
accomplish erection and to provide safety and stability until the LVSB is in its
final and approved position.
A15.3.32.6 Erection tolerance requirements shall be controlled so as not to impair the
strength, safety, serviceability, or appearance as Approved.
A15.3.32.7 After installations are complete, all places where the shop applied coating is
abraided, all bare steel, including bolts, nuts, washers, and welds shall be
thoroughly cleaned. Each item shall be painted with the same paint as used
for shop coating in the corresponding location.
(c) Imag at 125 V < 30 mA The line side and neutral CT’s shall match with
each other. The magnitudes of the spill currents shall not cause instability of
the LV REF protection under through fault conditions. The Contractor shall
co-ordinate with the Power Supply System Contractor for the exact
requirements.
A15.3.33.4 The size of CT wirings shall not be less than 6 mm². The conductors shall be of
standard, high conductivity annealed copper wires in compliance with Table
II, Class 2 of IEC 60228. Terminals and cable lugs for connecting the
secondary wiring of CT’s shall be of stud and ring types respectively. When
the CT’s and protection relays are fitted, facilities shall be provided for
primary and secondary injection tests to be carried out. These facilities shall
be such that wires and connections need not be disconnected for the tests to be
carried out and the need for de-energization of the equipment is not required.
A15.3.34 Other Provisions
A15.3.34.1 The LVSB shall be provided with all necessary cable lugs etc., fixed in positions on
mounting plates and straps, to suit the types and directions of entry of the
cables as shown on the Drawings/as per site requirement or as specified.
A15.3.34.2 Cable conductors for all circuits within the LVSB shall be arranged in a tidy
manner and mechanically secured at regular intervals such that any movement
occurring to the conductors, either under normal operation conditions (e.g.
thermal expansion, vibration, etc.) or due to short circuit in any one of the
circuits, shall not cause any damage or short circuit to any healthy bare live parts
in the LVSB.
A15.3.34.3 Each LVSB shall be supplied complete with all operating handles jigs, etc. required
for the normal charging, closing, opening, racking in and out operations of all
circuit breakers of the LVSB and shall be properly fixed in a neat manner on a
board with brass hooks inside the switch room/plant room where the LVSB is
installed.
A15.3.34.4 Each LVSB shall be provided with two rubber mats of ribbed surface, complying
to BS 921 or equivalent Indian standards, laid in front of and at the rear of
the switchboard. The rubber mats shall be continuous sheets of minimum
thickness of 10 mm, each of same length as the switchboard and minimum
width of not less than 1000 mm or the width of the space between the front or
back of the switchboard to the adjacent wall.
A15.3.34.5 Hydraulic operated handling truck suitable for handling all sizes of air circuit
breakers for the LVSB shall be provided as required.
A15.3.35 Annunciation
A15.3.35.1 The alarm annunciation scheme shall include fascia units with a relay for each
fault, a common alarm bell and Accept / Reset / Test push buttons.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A16.1.1 This Section specifies the manufacture and installation of Power and Control
Cables.
A16.2 Standards
A16.2.1 Relevant Codes and Standards
A16.2.1.1 The power / control cables shall comply with the latest versions of the
relevant requirements of the British Standards, International
Electromechanical Commission (IEC) standards, European and other
International Standards specified in this section of Specifications or approved
equivalent International standards.
The following standards for cables and cable testing shall apply where
appropriate:
in insulated cables
Performance requirements for cables BS 6387
required to maintain circuit integrity
under fire condition
Tests for electric cables under fire IEC 60332-1 BS 4066-1
conditions
IEC 60332-3 BS 4066-3
Method of determination of amount IEC 60754 – BS 6425 / BS –
of Halogen acid gas evolved during Part 1 and 2 EN - 50267 Part 1
combustion and 2
Determination of flammability by ISO 4589-2 ASTM – D2863
oxygen index
A16.3.1.1 Cables shall be manufactured from fire resistant/retardant, low smoke and halogen
free materials, and utilised at locations as specified herein.
A16.3.1.2 All the cable requirements listed herein shall be met without compromising the
mechanical and electrical properties of the cables both during and after installation.
A16.3.1.3 The Employer’s Representative / Engineer shall have such access to the premises
of the Contractor / Manufacturer as is reasonable to enable him to determine the
quality of the material and the workmanship and may reject any part of the cable
which may appear defective either in material or workmanship.
A16.3.1.4 (a) For Underground areas such as tunnels and stations, the cables shall be XLPE
insulated with Low Smoke Zero Halogen (LSZH) properties as described
in Clause A16.3.2. Further these cables should have reduced flame
propagation properties to BS EN 50268.
(b) For above ground area cables (which are not connected with Switchboards
/ loads located in Underground areas on either end of the cable) with the
following specifications may be used:
XLPE power cables shall be heavy-duty types, 1100 V grade with copper
conductor. XLPE insulated, sheathed, armoured and with overall PVC
sheath suitably compounded to meet FRLS properties where used over
ground in Metro sub-way. The core insulation shall be with cross-
linked polyethylene unfilled insulation compound free from voids, of
thickness as specified in IS: 7098 (Part I). The inner sheath shall be
applied over the laid up cores by extrusion with PVC compound type
ST1 of IS: 5831 of uniform thickness less than that specified against
rodent and termite attack.
The armouring shall be by galvanised steel wires or
strips.
The outer sheath shall be applied by extrusion over the armouring with
PVC compound meeting FRLS properties mixed with chemicals for
protection against rodent and termite attack.
A16.3.1.5 Cables used in external or open areas shall be ultra violet radiation stabilised.
A16.3.1.7 Unless otherwise specified, all power and auxiliary / control cables shall be rated at
600 / 1000 V for armoured and non-armoured cables and 450/750 V for non-
armoured wires.
A16.3.2 Construction Requirement for cables required for Underground Station
A16.3.2.1 Power and Auxiliary Cables for use in the Underground areas of Jaipur Metro shall
be of the type and manufactured to the standards as given below.
(a) Cables conforming to BS 7846: “Specification for 600 / 1000V fire
resistant armoured cables having thermosetting insulation and low
emission of smoke and corrosive gases when affected by fire“
Fire resistant / fire survival power cables shall be provided for the
emergency lighting circuits, UPS supply circuits, battery and charger
circuits, fire services installations, smoke extraction system, staircase
pressurization system, fireman lifts, disable lifts, and those circuits
required to maintain circuit integrity under fire conditions. Cables
for loads classified as the “Emergency” loads shall be Fire Survival type
and shall conform to NFPA requirements.
Other than the cables specified in Clause A16.3.2.1 (a), cables for
Essential and Non-essential circuits shall be of the type specified in
Clause A16.3.2.1 (b) and (c).
Some of the major constructional features of these cables are described below.
Further requirements additional to the standards mentioned are also described and
the same must be complied with. In case of any contradiction between these the
most stringent conditions will apply.
Conductors
c) Conductors shall be smooth, uniform in quality, free from scale, spills, splits
and any other defects. There shall be no joints in individual strands except
those made in the base rod or wire before final drawing.
A16.3.2.2 Insulation
a) All single-phase wires and cables shall be colour coded, i.e. Red, Blue and
Yellow colours. The earthling cable shall be Green and Neutral shall be
black
b) Black denotes the neutral conductor and other colours denote the phase
conductors.
c) The earth conductor shall be coloured green.
A16.3.2.4 Fillers and Binders
a) Low Smoke and Zero Halogen Fillers and synthetic binders, compliant
with the relevant clauses of BS 6724 / BS 7211 / BS 7846 for different
types of cables mentioned in Clause A16.3.2.1 of this Specifications, shall
be applied to ensure that the cable is compact and reasonably circular.
A16.3.2.5 Bedding
a) The bedding shall consist of an extruded layer of low smoke halogen free
bedding compound compliant with the relevant clauses of BS 6724 / BS
7211
/ BS 7846 for different types of cables mentioned in Clause A16.3.2.1 of
this Specifications.
A16.3.2.6 Armour
a) Armouring shall be of galvanised steel wire compliant with the relevant clauses
of BS 6724 / BS 7211 / BS 7846 for different types of cables mentioned in
Clause A16.3.2.1 of this Specifications. The direction of lay of the armour shall
be left hand, and the wire shall be sized in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
b) Where single core cables are armoured and are in use on ac circuits, the
armouring shall consist of non-magnetic material.
A16.3.2.7 Over-sheath
c) Outer sheath should be of such material to make the cable rodent and termite
proof.
a) Physical properties of the cable sheathing materials shall comply with the
relevant clauses of BS 6724 / BS 7211 / BS 7846 for different types of cables
mentioned in Clause A16.3.2.1 of this Specifications and have the following
requirements when tested in accordance with BS 6469.
Property Requirement
A16.3.3.1 Flammability
a) The bedding and over-sheath of the cable shall have a minimum oxygen index
b) The temperature index of the bedding and over-sheath of the cable shall not be
less than 280 °C when tested in accordance with EN ISO 4589-3 / ASTM –
D2863.
A16.3.4 Flame Propagation
A16.3.4.1 Fire Resistant or Fire Survival Cable
Fire Resistant / Survival cables shall comply with the requirements of BS 7846 and
BS 6387 Category “F1 and F2”.
A16.3.4.2 XLPE Insulated LSZH cables as per Clause A16.3.2.1 (b) and (c)
a) These cables shall comply with the requirements of BS 4066 / BS EN 50268 /
IEC 60332: Part 1 for tests on a single cable under fire conditions when
tested in accordance with that standard.
b) The cables shall comply with the requirements of BS 4066 / BS EN 50268 /
IEC 60332: Part 3 Category ’A’ for tests on bunched cables under fire
conditions when tested in accordance with that standard.
A16.3.5 Corrosive and Acid Gas Emission
A16.3.5.1 The level of hydrochloric acid gas (HCl) emission of the insulation, fillers,
binder tapes, bedding, and over-sheath of the cable shall not be greater than 0.5%
when tested in accordance with IEC 60754 / BS 6425 / BS EN 50267 Part 1
and 2, whichever is latest.
A16.3.6.1 The value of smoke generated (Ao) shall meet the requirements of the relevant
clauses of BS 6724 / BS 7211 / BS 7846 for different types of cables mentioned in
Clause A16.3.2.1 of this Specifications, when a sample of the complete cable is
tested in accordance with IEC 61034 / BS 7622 (3 m Cube Test).
A16.3.7 Toxic Gas Emission
A16.3.7.1 The cables should not emit toxic gases in case of fire (NES 713: Test method for
determination of Toxicity Index). The toxicity Index for the cables shall be less
than 3.
A16.3.8.1 The maximum continuous current carrying capacity and the factors for determining
such ratings and temperatures, for XLPE insulated cables shall be based on IEC
60287 and on the conditions available at Site.
A16.3.8.2 The maximum continuous rating of the cable shall be based on the
following conditions:
All the materials employed in the manufacture of the cable shall be subjected to
tests specified in relevant standards before manufacture of the cable.
The manufacturer must have type test certificates from the third party accredited
laboratories certifying compliance to all the type tests mentioned in the relevant
clauses of BS 6724 / BS 7211 / BS 7846 and relevant tests mentioned in Clause
A16.2.1.1. In case of non – availability of these test certificates, the manufacturer
must get these cables type tested at third party accredited laboratory prior to
production of cables.
After completion of manufacture and prior to dispatch the cables shall be subjected
to routine & acceptance tests as specified in relevant standards.
In addition to the above tests, test certificates from the third party accredited
laboratories for the following tests must be supplied. In case of non – availability
of these test certificates, the manufacturer must get these cables type tested at
third party accredited laboratory prior to production of cables.
7. Humidity test
The Contractor shall maintain a record of test results commencing from the
Manufacturer’s tests conducted at the place of manufacture for comparison with
the values obtained at site before and after installation. The cause for any
appreciable change shall be investigated and corrective action taken as agreed
with the Employer’s Representative. This record shall be a submittal at the time of
handing over.
A16.3.10 Cable Construction Identification
A16.3.10.1 The individual cores of the cable shall be clearly identifiable in terms of
phase sequence.
A16.3.10.2 The over-sheath of the cable shall be embossed with the following
legend: Voltage Designation Cable Marking
A16.3.10.3 A means of identifying the manufacturer, year of manufacture, conductor size and
insulation type shall be provided throughout the length of the cable. If the
identification is by means of embossing, it shall not affect the spacing of the
legend specified above.
A16.3.11 Cable Drums
A16.3.11.1 Immediately after the manufacturer's tests both ends of every length of cable shall
be sealed by enclosing them with Approved caps, tight fitting and adequately
secured to prevent ingress of moisture.
A16.3.11.2 The ends of the factory lengths of cable shall be marked "A" and "Z", "A" being the
end at which the sequence of core numbers is clockwise and "Z" the end at which
the sequence is anti-clockwise.
A16.3.11.3 The end which is left projecting from the drum shall be consistently "A" or "Z",
and shall be protected against damage in such a manner that the enclosure cannot
be easily removed during handling while in transit
A16.3.11.4 Cable drums shall be stored on well-drained hard surfaces to prevent cable drums
sinking and to simplify drum movements.
Cable drums shall be stored on battens placed directly under the flanges. Storage
shall be in such a manner to leave sufficient space for air circulation. Every three
o
months of storage the drums shall be rotated 90 in the direction of the arrow.
During storage the ends of the cable shall remain properly sealed to prevent
ingress of moisture.
Adequate shelter from rain and sun shall be provided. Adequate drainage shall be
provided to prevent the cable drums standing in water.
Cable drums shall not be dropped during transit, and cranes should be employed
during unloading. Cable drums should be rolled only in the direction of the arrow.
If passing one cable to another drum, the cable drum sizes must be the same.
During removal of the cable from the drum the minimum bending angle of 1 in
15shall not be exceeded. Pulling force when using stockings shall not exceed 9D
in Newton (N) where D is the outer diameter of the cable.
Drum Lengths
Marking
On flange of the drum, necessary information such as manufacturer’s name, type,
size, number of cores, voltage grade of cable, length of cable in metres, drum No,
cable code, finish, gross and net weights etc. shall be printed. An arrow shall be
printed on the drum indicating the direction of rotation of the drum.
A16.3.11.6 All cable drums shall be arranged to take a 100 mm diameter round spindle and
shall be lagged with strong closely fitting battens so as to prevent damage to the
cable. Each drum shall bear a distinguishing number, either printed or neatly
chiselled on the outside of one flange.
A suitable spindle shall be provided with each consignment for loading and
unloading where the gross weight of the drum and cable exceeds 10 tonnes.
A16.3.11.7 The words "Running End A" or "Running End Z" as appropriate shall be marked on
the flange.
A16.3.11.8 All cables and accessories shall be carefully packed for transport and storage on
Site in such a manner that they are protected against all climatic conditions,
particular attention being paid to the possibility of deterioration during transport
to the site by sea or over-land and to the conditions prevailing on the Site.
A16.3.11.9 Wooden cable drums shall be suitably constructed to avoid any problem due to
shrinkage. The drums shall be designed for use in conjunction with any special
cable-laying equipment complete with spindles and cable drum braking gear.
A16.3.12 Cable Installation
A16.3.12.1 This clause covers the requirements for the use and installation of all cables on or
in conduits, trays, trunking and accessories.
A16.3.12.2 All cables shall be provided with identification labels at each end and at each
position where cables change direction. In the instances where cables are multiple
runs, labels shall be provided at 10 m intervals indicating run number also.
Identification discs for cables installed within buildings or tunnels shall be
supplied and attached with galvanised wire to each cable at intervals not greater
than 12 metres and at all cable terminations.
A16.3.12.3 Cables shall be installed in accordance with this M&W Specification and BS
7671 and shall be run between their source and termination points on or in
cable ladder/trays, ducts, cable brackets, trunking and conduits.
A16.3.12.4 Cables running horizontally at high level shall in general be supported by cable
ladder and/or perforated cable trays or trunking. Where cables are installed in
vertical ducts or on vertical cable ladder/tray, they shall be cleated at intervals not
exceeding 1,200 mm
A16.3.12.5 Where cables pass through fire-rated walls and floors, all openings shall be sealed
with fire-resistant material of a fire rating equivalent to that of the fire rating of
the wall or floor approved by Jaipur Fire Services.
A16.3.12.6 Where cables are to be laid at ground level these may be laid in concrete duct
banks (with or without conduits) or laid in GI / HDPE / RCC pipes available
directly in ground as per the approval of Employer’s Representative. The cables
shall be segregated according to their duty.
A16.3.12.7 Cables shall be installed with a minimum of 300-mm clearance from any equipment
or pipe work including lagging associated with other services. Where this
A16.3.12.9 Materials manufactured for use as conduits, raceways, ducts and their surface
finish materials, when installed in stations and train-ways shall be capable of being
subjected to temperatures up to 930 F (500 C.) for an hour, and shall
conform to the National Electrical Code (NFPA 70). They shall also conform to
the codes of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA), the
American National Standards Institute (ANSI), and Underwriters Laboratories,
Inc.
Materials manufactured for use as conduits, raceways, ducts and their surface,
finish materials when used for emergency power circuits shall be strong and
durable.
A16.3.12.10 All cable routes near tracks are to be parallel or perpendicular to the running lines.
A16.3.12.11 In general two cable routes shall be constructed, one each for Up and Down lines,
with minimum changes of directions. Bends shall not be less than the
manufacturer’s recommended minimum bending radius for the cables to be
installed.
A16.3.12.12 Cables passing under road and railways shall be mechanically protected
(i.e.HDPE / Galvanized iron sleeves / pipes) and have a minimum cover of 1000
mm. Proper care must be taken for jointing of metallic pipes, so that they do not
give way due to weight above and damage the cables.
A16.3.12.13 Track crossings are to be at right angles and at least 2 m clear of any rail switches
or crossing areas of leads.
A16.3.12.14 All cable entries into cable pit shall have rounded edges to prevent damage to
cables during installation or during service or as a result of the weight of the cables
themselves bearing against the edges.
A16.3.12.15 Unarmoured cables, which are direct buried, shall be mechanically protected
throughout their length such as laid in metallic pipes or by other equivalent
methods.
A16.3.12.16 Cable route markers shall be installed for underground cables where cables
change direction and on straight runs of cable at intervals of no more than 50 m.
Markers shall be of pre-cast concrete type and be marked "electrical cable" and
have a projection of 200 mm above the finished ground level.
A16.3.12.17 Cables shall be installed without tee joints.
A16.3.12.18 Cable armour shall be earthed at one end or both ends of the cable as required by
the installation and system. Cleats shall be of the moulded reinforced nylon type of
low smoke and halogen free materials.
A16.3.12.19 Where cables are laid in concrete troughs, the trough opening shall be sealed with
concrete slabs.
A16.3.12.20 Bends in cables shall have an internal radius of not less than six times the overall
cable diameter, or as specified by the cable manufacturer.
A16.3.12.21 Where cables are laid in open ground they shall be bedded in 75 mm of sieved
sand, covered with a similar material, and protected by concrete slabs or
interlocking tiles, and the trench shall then be back filled. Medium voltage
and signalling cables shall have a minimum cover of 750 mm.
A16.3.13 Not Used.
A16.3.14 Installation of Insulated Power Cables
A16.3.14.1 The installation and handling of cables shall be undertaken at all times by adequate
and suitably trained staff, equipped with all the necessary plant, equipment, tools
and lighting.
A16.3.14.2 Every precaution shall be taken to ensure that the cables and accessories are not
installed in a manner or under conditions likely to cause electrolytic or other
corrosive action or damage to the cables, or be detrimental to the performance of
the cable during operation.
A16.3.14.3 The cable system shall be fully protected from mechanical damage and be
accessible at all points for inspection.
A16.3.14.4 All cables installed shall conform to the relevant International standard for
acceptable bending radius.
A16.3.14.5 In case, it is unavoidable, to cut any cables during installation, all cut ends shall be
properly sealed.
A16.3.14.6 All transitions where cables pass from one graded area to another shall have an
approved means of sealing the aperture against fire transference.
A16.3.14.7 The maximum pulling force on any cable shall not exceed the design force of the
cable.
A16.3.14.8 All bolts, studs and nuts supplied shall comply with the relevant requirements.
A16.3.14.9 All exposed metalwork surfaces shall be properly painted, finished and galvanised
as per relevant specifications.
A16.3.15 Installation of Cable Supports for Insulated Power Cables.
A16.3.15.1 The design of all support and fixing items shall ensure freedom from rough edges,
burrs and sharp corners. No materials shall be used which will promote electrolytic
or other corrosive action in contact either between the various parts, or with the
cable sheaths or the building surfaces and other materials with which they may
make contact. All cable supports shall be hot dipped galvanised.
A16.3.15.2 Hot dipped galvanised cable supports that are subject to excessive humidity shall
be protected with an approved coating.
A16.3.15.3 The cable supports required for the installation of single-core cables forming three
phase circuits shall permit the cables to be laid in close trefoil formation in case of
three-phase circuit without neutral conductor or quadrature formation in case of
three-phase circuit with neutral conductor. Non-magnetic metal cleats shall be used
for this purpose. Low smoke halogen free packing material shall be applied
between the cables and the cleats to avoid damaging the cable sheath by the
installation of the cleats.
A16.3.15.4 Where single core cables in trefoil or quadrature formation are secured in cleats,
intermediate binders of approved material and construction shall also be fitted
around the formation to prevent the cables separating under fault conditions. The
binders shall be secured around the cables by means of a bolted connection with
low smoke halogen free packing material applied between the cable and the
binder.
A16.3.15.5 Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, all non-armoured cables, where
required to be run on walls, ceilings or other building structures, shall be secured or
enclosed in conduit or trunking. Armoured cables shall generally be supported by
cable ladders, cable trays or cable brackets.
A16.3.15.6 Every cable, whether in or out of sight, shall be neatly run vertically, horizontally or
parallel to adjacent walls, beams or other structural members.
A16.3.15.7 Spacing of clips, saddles and cleats shall be such as to prevent sagging of the
cables at all times during their installed life.
A16.3.15.8 All steel trays, supporting steel work, brackets, clamps, hangers, cleats, saddles
and other fixings necessary for the support of the cables shall be approved by the
Engineer, and be of adequate strength for the cables they are supporting. All
supporting steelwork and brackets shall be fitted with adjustable mechanisms.
A16.3.15.9 Where a number of cables are terminated to any particular item of plant or
machinery, special care shall be taken to ensure that the cables finally approach
the plant or machinery from a common direction and are individually terminated
in an orderly and symmetrical fashion.
A16.3.15.10 At joints and terminations, all cables shall be adequately supported and secured by
cable cleats at a distance of not more than 300mm from the glands or joints.
A16.3.15.11 LV power cables terminated onto the LV cable box of the Distribution transformer
shall not impose load on the LV cable box to cause sagging, distortion, etc.
A16.3.16 Termination
A16.3.16.1 The terminating kits shall be suitable for termination of the cables on an
indoor switchgear or equipment. These shall be of proven design and shall be type-
tested as per relevant Indian or International Standards. Type test certificates
shall be submitted. The cable and wire terminations shall avoid any possibility of
loose joint and wire snapping. Cable conductor termination shall be by means of a
heavy-duty solder less cable lug. The lug shall be of high conductivity copper,
electro-tinned and applied to the conductor by means of a hydraulic crimping
tool. All such crimping should meet the requirements of BS 4579.
A16.3.16.2 The cable sheath shall be clasped by means of a gland of compression type based on
BS 6121 or equivalent Indian standard with a compression washer, which will
hold the cable sheath securely. A cable shroud shall be fitted to cover the body of
the compression gland.
b) The cable glands shall have a watertight seal when fitted to a cable.
c) Each cable gland shall be supplied with a brass gland locknut and a flame
retardant low smoke halogen free outer gland shroud. The shroud shall totally
enclose the gland body and form an effective seal against the cable sheathing.
A16.3.17.2 Armoured Cables
c) Cables shall be terminated in a gland fitted with an armour clamp and an earth
tag. The gland body shall be provided with an internal conical seal to receive the
armour clamping cone, and a clamp nut, which shall secure the armour-clamping
cone, and conical armour seal. The spigot of the gland body shall be threaded to
suit standard conduit accessories. A flame retardant low smoke halogen free
shroud shall be fitted to cover the gland body.
A16.3.17.3 Cable Ties
a) Cable ties shall be made from corrosion resistant, flame retardant and ultra violet
stabilised materials. At locations where cables are installed above tracks or in
areas subjected to significant and constant vibration, cable ties shall be of metal
construction type and coated with a corrosion resistant, low smoke halogen free
and flame retardant insulation material.
A16.3.18 Cable Joints
A16.3.18.1 The straight through jointing kits shall be suitable not only for conditions of
high humidity encountered in Metro sub-way, but also for underground buried
installation with uncontrolled back-fill and possibility of flooding by water.
These shall be of proven design and shall be type-tested as per relevant
Indian or International standards. Type test certificates shall be submitted.
The jointing kits shall match the cable specifications. Joints shall not be permitted
in the fire survival cables in case the joint does not meet the fire survival
conditions.
A16.3.18.2 Every connection at a cable joint shall be mechanically and electrically sound, be
protected against mechanical damage and any vibration, shall not impose
mechanical stress on the fixings of the connection and shall not cause any
mechanical damage to the cable conductor.
A16.3.18.3 The appropriate tools specified by the joint manufacturer shall be used when
jointing cables.
A16.3.18.4 The outer casing/outer sheath of the cable joint shall be fabricated from a low
smoke halogen free material.
A16.3.18.5 No cable joints shall be allowed without the prior Approval of the Employers
Representative / Engineer. All joints, accessories and cable joint locations shall be
submitted to the Engineer for Approval prior to any jointing of cables. All
cable jointing shall be performed by a qualified jointer and preferably by the
manufacturer of the jointing kits.
A16.3.19 Cable Identification
A16.3.19.1 All cables shall be provided with identification markers, at each end of the cable,
at entry and exit point of cable trays, ducts and trenches and in other such
positions as are necessary to identify and trace the route of the cable. Identification
discs for cables installed within buildings or tunnels shall be supplied and
attached with galvanised wire to each cable at intervals not greater than 12
metres and at all cable terminations.
A16.3.19.2 Cable identification shall be assembled from elliptical profiled low smoke
halogen free markers, carrier strip and cable ties.
A16.3.19.3 Every single core cable and every core of a multi-core cable shall be provided with
identification at its terminations in the form of sleeves or ferrules of
appropriate colours or as specified for signalling cables.
A16.3.20 Screened Signal and Control Cables
A16.3.20.1 General
a) The control cables shall meet the requirement specified in this Section.
b) Cables for protection and control functions associated with the Power Supply
System and Fire Alarm System, and used on line-side routes, shall be
armoured and shall be low-smoke, non-halogenated type where used on
underground sections or in enclosed public areas. All critical control
cables shall be duplicated and run separately in the underground section.
SCADA related wiring shall be terminated in supervisory termination cabinets.
c) The control cable shall be heavy-duty type, 600V / 1000 V grade FRLS
(complying with the standards BS 6724 and BS 7846, as specified above for
Power and Auxiliary cables and fire performance requirements specified
in Clause E02.3.3 of this M&W Specification.), nil halogen with stranded
copper conductor of size not less than 2.5 sq. mm. The outer sheath shall
also be mixed with chemicals for protection against rodent and termite
attack. Wherever specified, fire resistant type cable shall be provided.
A16.3.20.2 Conductors
a) The conductors shall be of stranded, high conductivity annealed copper wires
complying with BS 6360.
b) Flexible cables and cables for fixed installations shall have stranded conductors.
c) Conductors shall be smooth, uniform in quality, free from scale, spills, splits
and any other defects. There shall be no joints in individual strands.
d) All signal /control copper armoured cables shall be rated at 600 / 1000 V whilst
non-armoured cables shall be rated at 450 / 750 V and have a minimum cross
sectional area of 2.5 mm².
A16.3.20.3 Screening
a) Screening shall be achieved by the use of laminated tape, consisting of an
aluminium foil bonded to a polyester film for the strength, applied to the
cable with an overlap so that full 100 % coverage of the conductors is afforded.
b) The cable shall be individually screened pair cables to provide improved cross
talk immunity characteristic if required.
c) A drain wire or continuity conductor, laid under and in contact with the
aluminium foil shall be provided. The tinned annealed copper conductor may
be of solid or strand construction, using the approved manufacturing technique.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A17.1 General
A17.1.1 This Section specifies the manufacture and installation of cable tray, cable
trunking, cable ladder, ducts and conduits.
A17.2 Standards
A17.2.1.1 BS 476: Part 6: Fire tests on building materials and structures. Method of test for
fire propagation for products.
A17.2.1.2 BS 476: Part 7: Fire tests on building materials and structures. Method of test to
determine the classification of products based on surface spread of flame.
A17.2.1.3 BS 729: Specification for hot dip galvanized coatings on iron and steel articles.
A17.2.1.4 BS 731: Part 1: Flexible steel conduit for cable protection and flexible steel
tubing to enclose flexible drives.
A17.2.1.5 BS 970: Part 3: Specification for wrought steels for mechanical and
allied engineering purposes. Bright bars for general engineering purposes.
A17.2.1.6 BS 1449: Part 1: Steel plate. Sheet and strip. Carbon and carbon-manganese
plate, sheet and strip.
A17.2.1.7 BS 3382: Part 2: Specification for electroplated coatings on threaded components.
Cadmium on steel components.
A17.2.1.8 BS 3692: Specification for ISO metric precision hexagon bolts, screws and
nuts.Metric units.
A17.2.1.9 BS 4568: Part 1: Specification for steel conduit and fittings with metric threads
of ISO form for electrical installations. Steel conduit bends and couplers.
A17.2.1.10 BS 4568: Part 2: Specification for steel conduit and fittings with metric threads
of ISO form for electrical installations. Fittings and components.
A17.3.1.1 Material for use in cable containment system including their surface finish
materials shall be capable of being subjected to temperatures up to 500 degree
Celsius for an hour and shall not support combustion under the same temperature
conditions.
A17.3.1.2 All cable containment ducts, particularly concrete cable ducts shall be sloped
toward manhole or box from which water may be drained or pumped.
A17.3.2 Installation of Cable Containment System, Supports and Hangers
A17.3.2.6 Support channels shall be the basic structural members of the system and shall be
easily fixed to the floors, walls or ceilings as necessary and may be interconnected
in a multitude of ways by using different brackets. All components shall be
fitted together using bolts, spring washers and channel nuts.
A17.3.2.7 The channels shall be cold rolled from 2.6 mm mild steel with a hot dip
galvanised finish, to BS 729 or equivalent Indian Standard. In environment
with excessive humidity, the cable containment system shall be protected with an
approved coating.
A17.3.2.8 Channel nuts shall be inserted into the channel as necessary along its length, and a
90° clockwise turn of the nut shall clip each nut firmly into position. Each channel
nut shall have two parallel grooves on its outside face with teeth along its length.
A17.3.2.9 Channel nuts shall be manufactured from steel bar, to BS 970: Part 3 and shall be
zinc plated to BS 3382: Part 2. Channel nuts of M6, M10 and M12 screw threads
shall be used as appropriate to meet specified requirement based on the working
drawing approved by Employers Representative.
A17.3.2.10 The standard fixing bolts for use throughout the system shall be M10 or M12 high
tensile, hexagon head set screws to BS 3692-8.8. The standard finish for these
bolts shall be zinc plated to BS 3382: Part 2.
A17.3.2.11 For fixing cable tray to tray arms, tray brackets or cantilever arm, M6 by 16 mm
bolt shall be used, unless otherwise specified.
A17.3.2.12 Brackets and fittings shall be attached to the channel using bolts, spring washers
and channel nuts. Standard fittings shall be used for the attachment of cable tray to
a framework.
A17.3.2.13 Acceptance tests for the safe carrying load for each bracket at typical locations
shall be established by the Contractor during preparation of working drawings
for the Employers representative’s consent.
A17.3.3 Cable Trays and Ladders
A17.3.3.1 General
without crowding and shall allow for future additions to the proportion of
25-30 % of present requirements. Contractor shall prepare Working
Drawings based on actual cable routing and above mentioned spare capacity
and obtain consent of Employers Representative. Double stacking of cable shall
not be allowed except where specifically agreed by the Employers
Representative
d) Hot dipped galvanised cable trays and supports used within damp environment
shall be protected with an approved coating. All the cable trays shall be of heavy
duty with return flange type
e) Widths of cable trays, thickness of steel, flanges of trays, and bends or tees, shall
be nominally as follows:
300-450 1.2 50
450-900 2 50
1000 2 50
f) All trays / ladders that are cut for installation shall be made good by first
treating the surfaces with a suitable rust-proofing agent, similar to that used in
the original manufacture, and then shall have their ends painted with a zinc
coating to ensure continuous protection.
g) Trays / ladders shall have suitable strength and rigidity to provide adequate
support for all contained cabling.
h) Steel trays and ladders shall be supported so that the maximum deflection
between supports is 1/360th of the span length.
i) Midspan joints shall be located as close as practical to one-quarter of the span
distance away from a support position. Joints at mid-span or directly over
supports shall be avoided. Supports shall be provided within 150 mm of all
accessories.
j) Cable trays / ladders shall not present any sharp edges, burrs, or projections that
could damage the insulation or sheathing of the cables.
k) Each run of cable tray/ladder shall be completed and cleared of debris before
the installation of any cables.
l) Sufficient space shall be provided and maintained above the cable trays to
permit adequate access for the installation and maintenance of the cables.
Where a cable tray / ladder is suspended from the ceiling, wall or structure,
it shall be supported by hot dipped galvanized steel supports or hangers
of Approved design.
m) Cable ladders shall be used for supporting cables of bigger size. Cable trays
shall be used for cables of smaller sizes, control cables and wires.
A17.3.3.2 Cable Tray Installation
a) Where two straight lengths of cable tray are joined together, an external coupler
or joint plate shall be used to prevent any sag or bending at that point. The
coupler or joint plate shall be joined to each length of the tray by means of not
less than two non-corrosive round-headed screws fixed from the inside of the
tray.
b) All bends and tee's shall be 90° bends or tee-offs with minimum 50 mm
inside bend radius. Cable bends in cable trays shall be such that the bending
radius of the largest cable to be clipped to the tray shall not exceed the
bending radius limits as specified in BS 7671.
c) The cable trays shall be fixed in such a manner that it is rigid throughout
its length with a minimum of 13mm clearance between the tray and the
structure.
d) Cable trays shall be adequately supported. Fixing of cable trays shall be
provided at regular interval not exceeding 1.2m and on both sides of and at a
distance not exceeding 225 mm from, a bend or intersection especially where
bends and tee joints are fitted to the trays.
e) Where cable trays pass across structure movement/expansion joints, the cable
trays shall be physically separated by a gap of width equal to the joint it is
crossing. To maintain electrical/earth continuity of the cable trays a
2
150mm
copper flexible earth continuity conductor shall be installed across the gap and
secured to each end of the cable trays.
f) Where cables are required to pass through the tray, or over the lip of the cable
tray, a low smoke halogen free grommet or packing section shall be installed
to protect the cable sheath from sharp edges.
g) Where cables pass through wall openings the cable tray shall be installed in
such a manner as to support the cables as they pass through the wall opening.
A17.3.3.3 Cable Tray Earthing
2
(a) Each joint shall have a 150mm tinned copper bond bolted to each
adjacent tray to ensure electrical continuity. The cable tray systems shall be
b) The complete cable ladder system shall be designed so that drilling will not be
necessary on site and cutting will be kept to a mini mum.
c) Cable ladders shall be manufactured from 2.5mm thick mild steel and hot-
dip galvanized to BS 729 or equivalent Indian Standards. The two side rails of
the cable ladder shall be of minimum 100mm in height with returns at top
flange to gain extra strength. The rung shall be spaced at approximately
250mm centres with sufficient width for various cable fixing methods
including nylon tiles, saddles and perforated strips, cable clamps and cleats.
d) Factory standard right-angle bends, tee junctions, off-set reducers, straight
reducers shall be used for horizontal bends, vertical bends, branching out and
reduction of cable ladder width. Factory standard expansion splice plate shall
also be provided to allow for expansion and contraction of the cable ladders.
e) All clamping nuts, bolts, washers etc. shall be hot-dipped galvanized to BS 729
or equivalent Indian standards.
f) Vertical runs of cable tray or ladder shall not be installed such that they
straddle vertical expansion joints of the building structure.
g) Notwithstanding the above, complete cable ladder system shall be electrically
continuous.
A17.3.3.5 Cable Ladders Installation The same requirements as specified cable tray
installation, Clause A17.3.3.2, shall apply.
A17.3.3.6 Cable Ladder Earthing The same requirements as specified cable tray earthing,
Clause A17.3.3.3, shall apply.
A17.3.4 Cable Trunking
A17.3.4.1 General
e) Manufacturer’s standard fittings shall be used for all connections and changes
of direction. All bends, tee pieces, stop ends, outlets, intersections and
adapters shall be of the same manufacturer as the trunking. Trunking shall not
be cut or bent to form bends, flanges or attachments. Gusset bends shall be
used wherever necessary to provide sufficient bending radius for the cables.
i) All inside edges of trunking shall be smooth and provision shall be made to
prevent abrasion at bends.
j) Cable retaining straps supplied by the trunking manufacturer shall be fitted at
intervals not exceeding 1m. Where trunking passes through walls, floors and
ceilings, proprietary fire barriers shall be installed in the trunking. The
fire barrier shall have a rating not less than that of the original construction
of the opening.
k) Trunking shall be adequately supported throughout its length. Trunking
support and channel shall be quick-fixing type and shall be such as to
space the trunking a minimum of 13mm from any part of the wall or
up to 75 mm by 75 mm 1200 mm
up to 150 mm by 150 mm 1500 mm
o) Flush or buried trunking and under floor metal ducts shall comply with BS 4678.
p) The space factor for cables installed in trunking shall not exceed 45%.
Drawings.
u) Partitions or dividers shall be of the same material and finish as the trunking.
The method of fixing shall not cause any long-term corrosion or
electrolytic action.
v) Connections to multiple boxes, switchgear and distribution boards shall be
made with flanged units or bell mouths. Expansion joints in long
continuous runs shall be provided as recommended by the manufacturer
A17.3.5 Ducts
A17.3.5.1 The term "ducts" in this clause shall mean any pipe, open or covered trench or
cavity formed for the specific purpose of routing electrical and/or other services
and shall be other than electrical conduits, trunking and cable trays.
A17.3.5.2 Ducts into which cables are to be drawn shall be such that the usable spare
capacity is not less than 50%.
A17.3.5.3 Care shall be taken to make the bends of pipe or duct lines as easy as practicable.
In no case shall the radius be less than 6 times the outer diameter of the duct
circumference, or 6 times the minor dimension of the duct if rectangular.
A17.3.5.4 Before drawing or installing cables in the duct, the duct shall be clean, dry and free
from obstructions and of adequate size for the cables to be installed, having
particular regard for the separation from other services and to the provision of
adequate drawing pits, covers and markings, and allowances for bending radii.
Adequate provision shall be made for cables entering or leaving ducts. Draw wires
shall be provided wherever appropriate.
A17.3.5.5 All cables run in open ducts or in ducts shared with other services, shall be
adequately secured to the wall of the duct by type saddles or hangers.
A17.3.5.6 Adequate precautions shall be taken to ensure that there is no interference to the
cables from the other services both mechanically and electrically.
A17.3.5.7 Trunking shall be used within a duct, only where specified.
A17.3.5.8 No materials other than completely water-proof materials shall be installed in
any duct.
A17.3.5.9 The duct shall be sealed to prevent the entry of water or vermin.
A17.3.6 Conduit and Accessories
A17.3.6.1 General
a) All conduits and fittings shall be heavy gauge, hot-dipped galvanized welded
steel complying with BS 4568: Part 1 Class 4, BS EN 50086 or
equivalent Indian Standards and shall be of screwed classification.
b) All conduit fittings and components shall be in accordance with BS 4568:
Part 2.
c) Hot dipped galvanised conduits and fittings used in damp environment shall be
protected with an approved coating. In damp and exterior situations or when
fixing into concrete, sheradised or cadmium plated screws or stainless steel
screws in bronze inserts, shall be used.
j) Inspection - type conduit bends, elbows and tees shall not be permitted.
k) All boxes and conduit accessories shall be fully weatherproof when used in
outdoor locations and tunnels. Weatherproof boxes and conduit accessories
shall also be used in locations other than outdoors where specified.
l) Covers for external application shall have machined faces, and shall be
provided with neoprene type gaskets. No box shall be fixed in such a position
as to be inaccessible on the completion of the building structure or other
services.
m) All draw boxes and junction boxes shall comply with the appropriate BS
or equivalent IS and be of ample size to permit the cables being drawn in and
out. They shall be made of galvanized malleable iron with jointing surfaces
machined to ensure a dust-tight joint. All circular boxes shall be provided
with long spouts, internally threaded, incorporating a shoulder for the proper
butting of the conduit and a tapped 5 mm hole in the base to accept a solid
brass earth terminal.
n) The ends of all conduits shall be reamed to remove all burrs or sharp edges
after the screw threads have been cut. All dirt, paint or oil on the screwed
threads of the conduit, sockets and accessories shall be removed before
installation.
o) The ends of the conduits shall butt solidly in all couplings. Where
conduits connect to distribution boards, trunking, switch and fuse units,
single and multiple switch boxes, etc, they shall be connected to the apparatus
by means of a conduit coupling and hexagon male smooth bore hot dip
galvanized bush., compression washers and sockets. All exposed threads and
all bends shall be painted with an aluminium spirit paint after installation.
Exposed metal shall be similarly treated.
p) All conduits shall be kept 80 mm clear of water, gas and other services.
All necessary equipotential bonding shall be installed including that for
piped services, in accordance with BS 7671.
q) No water shall be allowed to enter the conduit at any time and all conduits shall
be arranged with adequate ventilation and drainage.
r) Where an exposed galvanized surface has been cut or otherwise damaged it
shall be repaired by application of a zinc rich epoxy primer with a
generous overlap on the existing sound metal coating. Exposed threads
and connections shall be similarly treated. The epoxy primer shall be used
strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
u) All conduits shall be swabbed through before wiring is commenced and cables
shall not be drawn into any section of the system until all conduits and
draw boxes for that particular section are fixed in position.
y) Wiring shall be carried out on the loop - in system and no joints other than the
looping-in points will be allowed.
z) No cables installed in conduits shall be laced.
a) Cast in and buried conduit shall be steel Class 4.The manufacturer shall certify
conduits as suitable for the application.
b) All buried conduit work shall be installed on a 'loop-in' system.
c) Where conduit is cast in-situ it shall be securely fixed before concrete is poured.
As soon as shuttering is removed it shall be checked for freedom from blockage
and continuity. Conduit buried in concrete shall have a minimum of 25 mm
depth of cover over its entire length.
d) Conduits in chases shall be held in place by purpose made saddles or fixings
e) Outlet boxes or draw-in boxes shall be provided of the same material as the
conduits and shall finish flush with the surface.
f) Where conduit boxes are flush with the surface finish, covers shall be of the
overlapping type.
g) Where for reasons of construction, the surfaces of boxes are not flush with the
wall, ceiling or floor surface, extension rings of the same section, as the boxes
shall be fitted to achieve this condition.
h) Where steel conduit is to be buried within the building fabric two coats of
“bitumastic” paint shall be applied to exposed threads, vice marks, etc,
immediately after the conduit is erected
n) An indelible display shall identify the cables laid along with the conduits at
each conduit junction / termination etc for identification during any future
handling.
o) Conduit installations that are in conspicuous locations within public areas and at
locations as shown on the Drawings/as per employer requirement shall be cast-
in/concealed within the structural members.
p) All conduit boxes and accessories for concealed/cast-in conduit systems shall be
of the type specifically manufactured for that purpose.
q) Spacing between concealed conduits entering the draw-in boxes shall not be less
than 25 mm to allow concrete aggregate to pass and set between conduits.
r) Prime coating shall be applied to the exceed exposed screw thread of the
conduit.
A17.3.6.3 Not Used.
a) All conduit boxes and accessories for surface conduits shall be of a type
manufactured specifically for that purpose.
b) Conduit systems in electrical and mechanical plant rooms and within false
ceiling void areas, behind detachable wall panels, below raised floor and at
locations where cast-in conduits and concealed conduits are not used, shall be
surface mounted, on the walls or ceiling soffit, they shall be fixed by means of
distance saddles and shall terminate in deep pattern conduit boxes. In other areas,
concealed/cast-in conduit system shall be adopted. Surface conduits shall not be
bent or set to enter accessories, and where they turn through walls, back-outlet
boxes shall be provided.
c) All surface mounted conduits shall be run neatly on the surface of the building
and truly vertical and horizontal, substantially supported at 1200 mm
centres on vertical runs and 900 mm centres on horizontal runs. The false
ceilings shall not carry the weight of the conduit or any equipment rigidly
connected to it. Conduit shall be supported in accordance with BS 7671, or
other international standards independently of the suspended ceilings.
A17.3.6.5 Flexible Steel Conduits
a) Flexible steel conduits and solid type brass adaptors shall comply with BS 731:
Part 1 or equivalent Indian Standards. In addition, the conduits shall be of
metallic watertight pattern to IP 54 in accordance with BS EN 60529.
The flexible conduits shall be of galvanised steel with LSHF oversheathed
jacket complying with BS 476: Parts 6 and 7 and Jaipur Fire Services
Department requirements for installation inside ventilated ceilings. Under no
circumstances shall asbestos packing be used.
b) Where flexible steel conduit is employed, the length shall not exceed 2.5
metres and shall be provided with an earth continuity conductor of size not less
than 2.5 mm² copper conductor.
A17.3.6.6 Cable Bracket
a) Brackets and fittings shall be formed from mild steel and manufactured from
6 mm steel. Fittings shall be in a standard width of 40 mm or 60 mm or
as approved by Employers representative.
b) Fixing holes shall not be less than 10 mm diameter to accept the. M10 bolts
and even larger for the M16 bolts used for assembly whenever called for.
Finish for brackets and fittings shall be hot dip galvanized after manufacture,
to BS 729 or equivalent Indian Standards.
A17.3.7 Penetration in walls
A17.3.7.1 Where proprietary cable transits are required, they shall be installed strictly
in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommended procedures. Where cables
pass through walls, floors, or fire partitions, sleeves shall be installed to
facilitate installation and subsequent withdrawal of the cable.
A17.3.7.2 After installation of the cables, the hole(s) through which the cables pass shall be
sealed with fire resisting material to achieve the fire rating as the structure through
which they pass. Details of the proposed sealing method shall be submitted for
approval prior to implementation. Cables passing through external walls shall
additionally be sealed with appropriate additional weather protection to prevent the
ingress of water.
A17.3.7.3 The fire resisting material shall intumesce to form a hard char that tightly seals
penetrations against flame spread, smoke and toxic fumes. The fire resisting
material shall be tested according to ASTM E119, ASTM E814 and ASTM
E84. Test certification and test report shall be submitted.
A17.3.7.4 The materials shall emit toxic gases on exposure to fire. The materials shall be
easy to dismantle and replace in case of rearrangement and also withstand
vibration due to rail operation and seismic tremor.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A18.1.1 This Section specifies the manufacture and installation of Local Motor
Control Panel (LMCP), Distribution Board and Moulded Case Circuit Breaker
(MCCB) Board.
A18.2 Standards
A18.2.1 Relevant Codes and Standards
A18.2.1.4 IEC 60947-4-1/EN 60947-4-1: Specification for low - voltage switchgear and
controlgear. Contactors and motor-starters. Electromechanical contactors and
motor-starters.
A18.2.1.5 IEC 60947-2/EN 60947-2: Specification for low-voltage switchgear and controlgear.
Circuit-breakers.
A18.2.1.6 IEC 60947-4-1/EN 60947-4-1: Specification for low - voltage switchgear and
controlgear. Contactors and motor-starter. Electromechanical contactors and
motor-starters.
A18.2.1.7 IEC 60947-6-1/EN 60947-6-1: Specification for low - voltage switchgear and
controlgear. Multiple function equipment. Automatic transfer switching
equipment.
A18.3.2.2 The LMCP shall be partially type-tested assemblies (TTA) as defined in IEC
61439-1 or EN 61439-1 and constructed generally to Form 4 of IEC 61439-1 or
EN 61439-1. Apart from the Specification hereunder, the LMCPs shall comply,
wherever applicable with the requirements laid down in the Section A20 of
this M&W Specification. For items not specifically covered in this Section,
provisions contained in Section A15 and A20 shall apply.
A18.3.2.3 The LMCP shall be of sheet steel construction, self supporting, with modular
top, side and back panels and doors of sheet steel built up on substantial framing
with all necessary stiffeners, supports and return edges to provide a rigid
construction and clear accessibility to all internal components within panel. The
thickness of the sheet shall be at least 1.6 mm.
A18.3.2.4 The enclosure of the panels shall be of degree of protection of IP 54 to IEC 60529
or EN 60529. All doors shall have hinges and provided with dust-excluding gasket.
A18.3.2.5 LMCP shall include, the following operational features or shall meet the
requirement as per BOQ:
a) Local/Remote-auto control selector switch,
b) On/Off switch for each equipment,
h) Ammeter:
(1) LMCP for Fire Services equipment: Digital ammeter for each motor
starter circuit and digital ammeter with inbuilt selector switch for
incoming breaker shall be provided.
(2) LMCP for Plumbing and Drainage Services equipment: Digital ammeter
for each motor starter circuit and digital ammeter with inbuilt selector
switch for incoming switch shall be provided.
i) Voltmeter for panel with incoming power supply rating of 200 A or above,
j) Hour run meter (Plumbing and Drainage Services Only),
k) Indicating lamps for all faults alarms, health conditions and status of all
equipment, push buttons, selector and control switches,
l) Emergency stop push buttons,
m) Labelling,
n) Selector switch with interlock between starters for duty and standby equipment
as required,
o) Interface with station building services controller as required, and
A18.3.2.6 Every motor starter shall be designed to perform the following functions
efficiently and safety:
a) To start the motor without damage to the drive or driven equipment whilst
regulating the starting current to the satisfaction of the requirements of this
Specification and ensuring that at all stages of starting, the motor will
develop sufficient torque to accelerate the load.
b) To stop the motor.
f) To prevent damage to the motor or the starter itself due to improper, unskilled
or hesitant operation or failure to complete a starting sequence once it is
connected.
g) To enable the motor and starter to be completely isolated from the main supply
and from all control supplies for inspection and repairs by means of drawout
type unitfor each starter circuit.
A18.3.2.7 Each motor starter assembly shall comprise MCCB/MPCB, contactors, protection
relays, electronic circuitry, control switches, lamps and instruments and
accessories as specified hereinafter. It shall include control devices for automatic
control systems. The whole unit shall be enclosed in the cubicle, from which
no access can be gained to adjoining cubicles.
A18.3.2.8 The specified starter types are based on estimated motor ratings. The final
selection of starter shall be based on the installed motor rating. Starters and
associated overload devices shall be selected in accordance with the run-up time
of the associated motor/driven load, the maximum thermal capacity of the motor
and frequency of starting, and the duty cycle. All starters shall have suitable
protection for phase-to-phase, phase-to-neutral and phase-to-earth faults,
overloads, and single phasing, with additional protection measures as specified.
Overload relays shall have inverse time delay characteristics compatible with the
motor drive to which they are applied For all protective devices the short-
circuit capacity (Isc) shall be capable of withstanding a fault current of the
panel, as a minimum. The specifications of incoming and other circuit breakers
(ACB/MCCB etc.) shall be as per Section A15 as relevant.
A18.3.2.9 All starters shall be in accordance with section 7.2 of IEC 60947-4-1 or EN
60947- 4-1, and shall be adequately rated for conditions in which it shall operate.
A18.3.2.10 All starters shall be type tested by a competent and internationally recognised
testing authority for type 2 co-ordination in accordance with IEC 60947-4-1 or
EN 60947-4-1.
A18.3.2.14 Type of starters for other mechanical equipment such as plumbing, drainage, fire
services pumps and other motor circuits shall be as specified in this clause subject
to ratings of the motors selected during working drawing production as per clause
A18.3.2.8. The starters shall also comply with the requirements laid down in the
Code of Practice of Electricity (Wiring) Regulations. Voltage for motors shall
be 415V 3-phase or 240V 1-phase, as required. Motors rated 0.37kW and larger
shall have a rated voltage of 415V, 3-phase, 50Hz. Motors rated smaller than 0.37
kW shall be operated at 240V 1-phase. Direct-on-line motor starters shall be used
for motors up to and including 3.75 kW at 415 volts, 3 phase. All motors over this
limit shall be equipped with reduced voltage starters of the star delta type.
Motor Size (M) Maximum Starting current in Multiple of
Full
Load Current (Phase of Motor)
M < 0.37 kW 6 (single phase
motor)
(b) Calibrated and adjustable solid state timer for automatic star-delta transition, and
(c) Automatic changeover timers shall be adjustable from 1 second to 30 seconds.
Timers shall incorporate a fixed delay of between 20 ms between the star
contactor opening and the delta contactor closing.
(d) MPCB / MCCB as specified in drawings / Schedules shall be used. MCCB
shall be as specified in section A20 with Trip Units suitable for Motor
Protection and providing adjustable protections against Over load and Short
Circuit.
The isolation devices for assemblies with duplicated supplies shall be interlocked
(electrically and mechanically) to prevent simultaneous closure.
Indicating lamps shall be provided on each phase of the main incoming supply.
(b) All assemblies incorporating automatic control systems shall be equipped with
suitable status/alarm annunciation facilities. If these are not available directly
from the automatic control system then a separate status/alarm annunciator
shall be provided. Status/alarm enunciators shall provide indications for all
starting devices of 'ON', 'OFF' and 'TRIPPED' conditions.
(c) The status/alarm annunciator equipment shall be mounted in the same cubicle
as the automatic controls. Volt-free contacts shall be provided for each
condition in each starter cubicle, which shall be wired internally to the
status/alarm annunciator, via terminals at each end.
(d) The schematic diagrams as indicated in the Working Drawings shall be shown
and the operating status of all equipment shall also be indicated. Status
indicating lights shall exhibit run/stop or open/close and fault conditions.
The Contractor shall provide test buttons for the indicating lights. The layout,
colour, symbols and arrangement of the mimic diagram shall be submitted
(e) Suitable interfaces shall be built into each channel to relay signals to remote
locations, by means of volt-free contacts.
(f) Hours-run meters shall be fitted as specified and not be resettable.
A18.3.2.23 Control Circuits
(a) In each individual starter, the control circuit shall be provided with MCB,
a neutral link, a means of disconnection and, where specified, a
disconnection override switch.
(b) Neutral links shall comprise a solid copper link mounted in a white
coloured fuse base base and carrier, which shall not be interchangeable with
control or power fuse carriers.
(c) The control circuit supply shall be connected via an auxiliary contact on
the starter isolator.
(d) Where automatic changeover systems are specified for duty/standby operation,
the control circuit for the changeover controls shall be independent of both
starters.
(e) Start delay timers shall be incorporated for sequential operation of starters
where specified. The failure of one timer or starter to operate shall not prevent
operation of the remaining starters.
A18.3.2.24 Interlocking
(a) The control circuit of a dependent starter shall be wired via auxiliary
contacts on the motor contactor in the lead starter. In the case of reduced
voltage starters, the auxiliary contacts shall be on the full voltage contactor.
(b) Should the lead starter be shut down either intentionally or by a fault
condition, the dependent starter shall drop out immediately.
(c) A time delay shall be incorporated in the interlock circuit to delay the
operation of the dependent starter where specified. Such time delays shall be
in addition to the interlock circuits.
A18.3.2.25 Auxiliary Contacts
Two normally open and two normally closed auxiliary contacts shall be provided
for each starter as spares unless otherwise specified. These contacts shall be
in addition to contacts used for the control of the starter.
A18.3.3 Distribution Boards
A18.3.3.1 Distribution boards for miniature circuit breakers shall be of sheet steel
construction with a minimum thickness of 1.6 mm, suitably braced to form a
rigid structure. Exterior corners and edges shall be rounded to give a smooth
overall appearance. Hinged swing doors shall be fitted with gaskets and shall be
easily removable to simplify installation.
A18.3.3.2 IP ratings for distribution boards shall be IP 54.
A18.3.3.3 Each distribution board shall be arranged for top and bottom cable entry and shall
be provided with ample cable termination plates and chambers to enable cables to
be neatly glanded with tails grouped and terminated on to appropriate internal
terminations.
A18.3.3.4 Distribution boards shall be wall mounted and shall, where specified,
incorporate double pole or triple pole all insulated switches as appropriate, which
shall be front of panel operated with an "ON/OFF" indicator and capable of
being padlocked in the "OFF" position. Distribution boards shall incorporate
combinations of single pole, double pole, ,triple pole and four pole miniature
circuit-breakers (MCB’s)/(MCCB) as specified.
A18.3.3.5 Each bank of MCB’s shall be clearly identified with its appropriate phase
colours/code, and the mounting framework for the banks of MCB’s shall be
easily removable to simplify installation. Adequate phase barriers and shields
shall be fitted to ensure that after installation and wiring, all bare terminals and
wires are covered to prevent accidental contact with live conductors during the
normal procedure of resetting MCB’s.
A18.3.3.6 Each distribution board shall be supplied complete with a permanent circuit
identification chart, preferably mounted within the front door. This chart shall
be permanently and legibly filled in as circuits are completed, including the
circuit description, the MCB rating and the identification of upstream source of
the distribution board.
A18.3.3.7 Each distribution board shall be clearly labelled indicating its service and all
3- phase distribution boards shall be fitted with white labels red engraved
"DANGER - 415 VOLTS".
A18.3.3.8 In the top and bottom, of each distribution board a 32 mm clear hole in addition
to other requirements shall be provided. These spare holes shall be fitted with 32
mm stopping plugs and locknuts.
A18.3.3.9 Spare MCB’s shall be provided on the basis of one per four ways or part thereof
for every distribution board ensuring that spares are provided in numbers and
ratings proportional to the numbers and ratings in the installation.
A18.3.3.10 Distribution boards shall comply with IEC 61439-3 or EN 61439 -3.
A18.3.3.11 All busbars shall be of hard drawn copper having ratings as specified complying to
relevant clauses given in section A15, and shall be electro-tinned. Neutral busbars
shall be of the same cross-sectional area as the phase busbars and shall have
adequate number of terminals for all outgoing circuits including spare ways.
A18.3.3.12 The configuration of the busbars, busbar supports and busbar mounting
arrangement shall be rated at 415 V. It shall be type tested and certified to a short-
time withstanding current which is not less than 10 kA for 1 second at voltage
of 415 V.
A18.3.3.13 Multi-terminal connectors shall be provided within the distribution board for
connection of protective conductors of all outgoing circuits including spare ways.
A18.3.4 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers Boards (MCCB Boards)
A18.3.4.1 MCCB boards shall be factory built assemblies for indoor use and fully comply with
all the requirements of IEC 61439-1 or EN 61439-1. All MCCB boards shall
be capable of withstanding through fault of not less than the MCCB rated
fault- breaking capacity as specified without sustaining permanent damage.
A18.3.4.2 MCCB boards shall be totally enclosed type and suitable for floor/surface
mounting. The cases and doors shall be manufactured from CRCA sheet steel
finished with high quality powder coated with colour to be decided. The doors
shall be gasketed and fitted with ball catch lock or equal and approved, and the
complete enclosure shall be in accordance with IP 54 to IEC 60529 or EN 60529.
A18.3.4.3 The factory-built assemblies shall comprise tinned copper busbar(s) as specified in
clause A18.3.3 with rating as specified, multi-terminal neutral, neutral link and
earth bars of adequate sizes.
A18.3.4.4 All wirings, busbars, etc., within the board shall be adequately shrouded and a
flame retardant insulating shield of 2.0 mm thickness shall be provided to
completely screen the live parts and wiring when the front panel is opened. Only
the MCCB operating toggle and insulated surround shall project through the shield
and the front panel. Insulating barriers shall be fixed between phases and between
phase and neutral.
A18.3.4.5 The sequence of terminals shall be such that the neutral terminals for the
connection of each outgoing circuit are arranged in the same order as that of the
phase terminals.
A18.3.4.6 A multi-terminal protective conductor shall be provided, with one terminal for
each MCCB way.
A18.3.4.7 An earthing terminal shall be provided to enable the enclosure to be earthed. The
earthing terminal shall be suitable for internal or external connection.
A18.3.4.8 MCCB boards shall be provided with vertical triple-pole and neutral copper busbar
of rating not less than that of the supply side of protective device subject to a
minimum of 250 A. The configuration of the busbars, busbar supports and busbar
mounting arrangement shall be type tested to a short-time withstanding current of
not less than 35 kA for 1 second at a voltage of 415 V.
A18.3.4.9 All MCCB boards shall be clearly labelled, and marked with phase identification.
Inside each board door, a circuit record card shall be provided. The card shall be
renewable and protected by transparent material for recording the title, cable size
and actual current rating of each outgoing circuit, the rated current of the
MCCB board, the identification of the upstream source, the total number of points
served by each MCCB circuit and the area served.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A19.1 General
A19.1.5 The starting current shall not exceed 6 times of the full load current when direct-on-
line starting at full voltage is applied.
A19.1.6 All motors shall be capable of accelerating the driven plant from standstill to rated speed
with a terminal voltage of 80% of the nominal supply voltage at 50Hz in less than 4
seconds. All motors shall be capable of operating continuously or, for short-time
rated motors, for the duration of the short- time period, at rated torque at any supply
voltage between 90% and 110% of the nominal supply voltage at 50Hz. They shall be
capable of delivering the rated torque when running at 70% of the nominal voltage for a
period of 10 seconds without injurious overheating and under these conditions the slip
shall not exceed 10%.
A19.1.7 All motors shall be capable of operating continuously without injurious effect and
capable of driving the driven units at their rated output at any frequency between 48Hz
and 52Hz together with any voltage between 90% and 110% of the nominal voltage.
A19.1.8 Vertically mounted motor shafts shall be supported by Approved thrust bearings.
A19.1.9 All bare steel internal parts except bearings shall be painted unless otherwise
protected against corrosion.
A19.1.10 Motors shall be designed for low shaft current and shall have adequate provision
to prevent bearing damage by shaft current.
A19.1.11 Anti-condensation heaters shall be provided for motors, which are to operate on
non-regular basis or being exposed to high humidity environment. The heaters shall
be terminated in a robust terminal box electrically and mechanically separate from
any other terminal boxes. The anti-condensation heater terminal box shall be fitted
with an undrilled gland plate suitable for conduit termination or cable entry. Heaters
shall be single phase. Heater circuits shall have an indicating lamp on corresponding
motor control panel. Heaters shall be turned off automatically when the motors are
operating.
A19.1.12 An auxiliary marshalling box, electrically and mechanically separated from the power
supply terminal boxes, shall be securely mounted on the motor frame for marshalling
all small wiring for motor control or monitoring.
A19.1.13 For axial fans, external copper grease leads shall be provided for lubrication of
motor bearings unless totally sealed bearings are used.
A19.1.14 The maximum motor efficiency shall be at the normal operating condition.
Motors in all cases shall be entirely suitable for the duty intended. A margin of not
less than 5% for compressors, 15% for fans and 10% for water pumps shall be
provided for equipment over the continuous rating of the motor (without over-
loading) under the normal operating condition unless otherwise specified. The motor
shall have efficiency class as EFF-1 or equivalent IEC standard. A19.1.15The power
factor of motors shall not be less than 0.85 lagging at the operating condition.
Otherwise suitable power factor correction facilities shall be provided to improve the
power factor. For two-speed fans, the requirement shall be achieved at both high
speed and low speed operating condition.
A19.1.16 All steel works, supporting brackets and members, which are required for the pump
motor installation, shall be hot-dipped galvanized to BS 729. Motors shall be
factory-painted to the appropriate finish. The paint used shall be capable of
withstanding continuous operation in an air stream temperature of 250 degree C for
not less than one hour without emitting smoke or toxic fumes.
A19.1.17 unless otherwise specification in this M&W Specified, in normal ambient
conditions bearings shall be designed for 50,000 hours operating service (L10 life,
shall be brought to outside of fan housing and provided with covers which shall
effectively exclude water and dirt.
A19.1.18 Motor terminals shall preferably be of the stud type, totally enclosed both from
atmosphere and from the motor winding and be fully insulated from the frame.
Rubber insulation shall not be used for connections between the windings and the
terminals.
A19.1.19 Each motor terminal box shall be fitted with sealing chamber, conduit gland or adaptor
plate, as required, together with the necessary fittings to suit the cable entry. Terminal
markings and rating plates shall be in accordance with BS 4999. The terminal box
shall be large enough for the specified cable sizes of the respective motor.
A19.2 Standards
A19.2.1.1 BS 729: Hot Dip Galvanized Coatings on Iron and Steel Articles
A19.2.1.2 BS 2757: Method for Determining the Thermal Classification of Electrical Insulation
A19.2.1.3 BS 4999: General Requirements for Rotating Electrical Machines A19.2.1.4
BS 5000: Rotating Electrical Machines of Particular Types or for
Particular Applications
A19.2.1.5 BS EN 60034-9: Rotating Electrical Machines Part 9: Noise Limits
A19.3.1 Motors of intake and exhaust fans of the axial type taking in 100% outside air shall be
suitable for operation in atmosphere of up to 95% RH.
A19.3.2 Noise level shall meet BS EN 60034-9.
A19.3.3 The degree of protection of the motors shall conform to IP54 defined in BS 4999: Part
20 with the following additional requirements:
A19.3.3.1 Motor frames shall be steel or aluminium alloy for motors inside station areas as
appropriate.
A19.3.3.2 Motor frames shall be cast iron for motors in tunnels and Ancillary Buildings.
A19.3.3.3 Earthing terminal shall be provided.
A19.3.3.4 Unless otherwise specified, red oxide zinc chromate primer with two finish coats of
grey paint shall be painted.
A19.3.3.5 All motors shall be squirrel type and shall be suitable for DOL or reduced voltage
starting as specified on the Equipment Schedules and/or Drawings.
A19.3.4 Termination boxes of adequate size shall be die cast aluminium alloy or cast iron
diagonally split type and suitably gasketed to prevent ingress of moisture and dirt with
the following additional requirements:
o
A19.3.4.1 Rotatable in any of the four 90 positions;
A19.3.4.2 Threaded holes suitable for mounting brass cable glands;
A19.3.4.3 Stud type terminals for terminating electric cables as specified; and
A19.3.4.4 Internal wiring connections to the main terminal boxes and auxiliary marshalling
boxes.
A19.3.5 Bearings shall be double shields and have the following additional requirements:
A19.3.5.1 Ball or roller bearings with grease fittings and minimum pressure relief fittings for
in service lubrication.
A19.3.5.2 Guide and thrust bearings for vertical motor drive units shall be subject to Approval.
A19.3.6 Lifting eyes shall be provided for motors with a weight of 20kg and above.
A19.3.7 Tests shall be carried out before shipment to demonstrate that the equipment
complies fully with specified requirements. Test certificates shall be provided for
Approval.
A19.3.8 Type tests shall, as defined in BS 5000: Part 99, be carried out on the first motor of
each type and rating supplied. For motors of the same type having different ratings but
identical in all essential details, motors with the highest rating shall be subject to type
tests whereas the remainder shall be subject to routine tests.
A19.3.9 If tests to determine the starting current are under-taken at reduced voltage, due
allowance shall be made for the effects of saturation and the estimated value of starting
current at full voltage shall be stated on all test certificates. (Two Speed Fans)
A19.3.11 Installation
A19.3.11.1 Motors shall be installed as required by the driven equipment.
A19.3.11.2 Lifting equipment shall be provided for the installation of motors.
A19.3.11.3 Any additional steel works, supporting brackets and members which are required for
the motors installation shall be provided by the Contractor at no extra cost to the
Employer.
A19.3.11.4 The frames and supports shall be accurately set and leveled.
A19.3.11.5 Each motor shall be provided with an emergency stop push button in the immediate
vicinity of the associated motor drive at the Approved location. For outdoor
installation, all emergency stop push buttons shall be of weatherproof type.
A19.3.11.6 All moving or rotating parts of motors, which can be accessed by personnel, shall be
properly covered by steel wire mesh guards.
TABLE OF CONTENT
A20.1 General..........................................................................................................................1017
A20.2 Standards........................................................................................................................1017
A20.3 Technical and Installation Requirements………………………………………..1018
A20.2.1.9 IEC 61008/EN 61008: Residual current operated circuit - breakers without
integral overcurrent protection for household and similar (RCCBs).
A20.2.1.10 IEC 61009/EN 61009: Specification for residual current operated circuit -
breakers with integral overcurrent protection for household and similar uses
(RCBOs).
A20.3 Technical and Installation
Requirements
A20.3.2.1 All assemblies of switchgear and control gear shall comply with EN 61439-1
or approved equivalent. The marking and arranging of switchgear, busbars,
connections and small wiring shall be clear and comply with an approved
international standard.
The identification marking on all terminals, cables and component parts shall be
clear and correspond with those on the manufacturer's drawings.
Terminal blocks for low voltage wiring shall be of the DIN rail mounted
type moulded from high-grade non-hygroscopic melamine having all live parts
fully shrouded.
Terminals shall be assembled in banks and each terminal shall be complete with
marking tags to fit into moulded tag slots.
Terminals for final connections for indication, instrumentation and metering
circuitry shall have test probe facilities and an integral disconnecting device to
facilitate testing. The cores of all outgoing cables shall be identified.
All assemblies of switchgear and control gear shall have a high standard paint
finish applied to the enclosure and any supporting metalwork. The finish shall
be applied to rust and grease free metal.
A20.3.2.2 Switchboards shall be metal clad comprising the assembly of switchgear, control
gear and components indicated in the drawings and shall be floor standing of the
multi-cubical type not more than 2.4m high and maximum operating height
should not more than 1.8m high.
A20.3.3.1 MCCBs shall comply with and be type-tested to IEC 60947 -2 or EN 60947-2.
Each MCCB shall have all the mechanical and live parts completely enclosed
in an insulated moulded case.
A20.3.3.2 MCCBs shall meet the following requirements:
h) Rated service short-circuit breaking capacity (lcs): (35 kA / BOQ). Further, Ics
must be equal to 100% Icu for the selected breaker,
i) Utilization category: A or B as appropriate,
l) MCCB shall be suitable for isolation as per Annexure 7.1.2 of IEC 60947 – 2
m) All MCCB’s should have front adjustable electronic / microprocessor
based releases with adjustment in the range of 40 – 100% for nominal
overloads and 2 – 10 times of rated current for short circuit faults
n) Impulse Withstand Voltage - 8KV
o) Mechanical Strength
p) O – t - CO – t - Co type of Duty ie Ics=Icu
q) Selection of ACB, MCCB and MCB shall be of same make. Total
Discrimination must be available between the various elements of switchgear
(ACB, MCCB, MCB etc) selected. Supplier must provide test certificates
from acceptable, accredited and reputed laboratories to prove the same, if so
desired by Employers Representative. In view of Standardisation and
Uniformity, mixing of two series of switchgear (even from the same
manufacturer) for either MCCB or ACB will not be permitted.
In case higher frame sizes (than those specified in the BOQ) is required to be
provided to achieve the above reuirements, due to selection of a particular
make, the same shall be provided at no extra cost if other makes are able to
achieve the same with the specified frame size.
A20.3.3.3 The operating mechanism of MCCB’s shall be independent of the operating speed
of the over centre toggle and the MCCB shall be of current limiting type
and comprise of Quick make and Quick break switching. Contacts shall be non-
welding type. The operating mechanism shall be trip-free and provided with
mechanical "ON", "OFF" and "TRIPPED" indicator. The MCCB shall be
designed for both vertical and horizontal mounting, without any adverse effect
on electrical performance.
A20.3.3.4 The time delay on overload tripping shall be inversely proportional to the
overcurrent up to a threshold value of approximately seven times the rated current
at the rated working temperature.
A20.3.3.5 All MCCB’s shall be arranged for padlocking in OFF positions with lock
provided. A shunt trip coil shall be provided to facilitate automatic tripping and
local manual tripping. The manual trip device shall be fitted with the means of
padlocking. The shunt trip coil shall be suitable for operation within a voltage
range of 70% to 110% of the rated DC / AC power supply voltage.
A20.3.3.6 Handle position shall give positive indication of ‘ON’ or ‘TRIPPED’, thus
qualifying to Disconnection as per IEC 947 – 3 indicating true position of all the
contacts.
A20.3.3.7 In case of 4 pole MCCB neutral shall be defined and capable of offering
protection upto full rating with possibility of adjustment at site in the neutral
setting.
A20.3.3.9 MCCB’s shall have common field fittable auxiliaries for the entire range and
above 250 A the accessories like spreaders and phase barriers should be the
integral part of the MCCB’s.
A20.3.3.9 Remote tripping coil should be of continuous duty cycle.
A20.3.3.10 MCCB’s shall have an electrical endurance of the order of 10000 operation cycles or
as per IEC 60947.
A20.3.3.11 Electronic trip units shall comply with the requirements as specified in Appendix
F (EMC / EMI Compatibility) of IEC 60947-2 or EN 60947-2.
A20.3.4 Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCB)
A20.3.4.1 MCBs shall comply with and be type-tested to IEC 60898 or EN 60898.
l) MCB’s shall have minimum power loss (Watts) per pole as per the IEC
and should be proven by published value by manufacturer.
A20.3.4.3 The load handling contacts shall be silver/tungsten and the contacts and operating
mechanism shall be designed so as to give a wiping action both at make and
break. The breaker operating mechanism shall be of trip-free type. The breaker
operating dolly shall be clearly indicated for the "ON" and "OFF" positions. It
should be of Quick make and Quick break type.
A20.3.4.4 Circuit protection against overload and short-circuit conditions shall be provided
by means of thermal-magnetic device. Double-pole, triple-pole, and four pole
MCBs shall be integral units and interlocked internally so that an overcurrent
through any pole shall trip all the poles of the MCB simultaneously. An assembly
of two or three or four single-pole units mechanically strapped together is not
acceptable.
A20.3.4.5 Housing shall be heat resistant and having a high impact strength. All DP, TP and
FP circuit breaker shall have a common trip bar and should be mechanically
coupled through a pin. It shall have an electrical endurance of the order of 10000
operation cycle or as per IEC 60898 for current rating of up to 50A.
A20.3.5 Residual Current Circuit Breaker
A20.3.5.3 The tripping mechanism shall be of trip-free so that the unit cannot be held closed
against an earth fault. Tripping devices utilizing electronic amplifiers or rectifiers
are not acceptable.
A20.3.5.4 Provision shall be made for testing the automatic earth - leakage tripping by an
integral test device. A device shall be fitted for prevention against reclosing
after the device has tripped on earth leakage.
A20.3.5.5 The rated earth-leakage tripping current shall be as indicated on the Board Details.
A20.3.6 Busbar Chambers
A20.3.6.1 Busbar chamber shall comply with and be tested to IEC 61439-1 or EN 61439–1.
Busbar chamber shall be type-tested to a short time current capacity not less than
35 kA at 415 V for 1 second.
A20.3.6.2 Busbar chambers shall contain four full-size hard-drawn tinned copper busbars to
BS 1432 supported on porcelain or other Approved insulators. The busbar
chamber shall be totally enclosed to a IP rating as required as per Clause
A20.3.2.2 and manufactured from galvanized sheet steel of a minimum thickness
of 2 mm, with cast frame members and finished grey. The busbar chamber shall be
arranged such that it is extendable from both ends. The front cover and end plates
shall be removable and normally held in position by non-ferrous metal screws.
A20.3.6.3 Busbar chambers of similar rating shall be capable of coupled together using
busbar coupling links, in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendation.
Coupling links shall be approved by the Employers Representative before use.
A20.3.6.4 Interconnecting conductors between busbar chambers and switchgear shall not be
less in cross-sectional area than the incoming or outgoing cables connected to the
other side of the switch.
A20.3.6.5 Each busbar shall be coloured to indicate the phase to which it is connected.
Colouring shall comprise a band of paint in one position on each busbar. Busbars
shall not be painted throughout their length.
A20.3.6.6 Switchgear shall be joined to busbar chambers by means of properly designed
busbar chamber connection flanges or conduit couplers and male bushes.
Connection flanges shall be manufactured from galvanized sheet steel and finished
grey.
A20.3.7 Automatic Load Transfer Switches
A20.3.7.1 Automatic load transfer switches shall be composed of paired ACBs or
MCCBs (ACB/ MCCB shall be as specified in relevant Sections of Specifications
above).
A20.3.7.2 Paired ACBs or MCCBs (as specified above) shall be provided with
motorised mechanisms for "ON/ OFF" operation.
A20.3.7.3 Each automatic load transfer switch shall be equipped with, but not be limited
to, the following:
a) Illuminated indicator for "Normal Supply On" and "Standby Supply On" to
be provided at the front cover of the compartment housing the
changeover switches.
f) A test switch to simulate mains power failure and indicate the changeover
sequence to allow on-load testing.
g) Auxiliary relays and contacts to facilitate main power source failure
for routine testing of the automatic changeover operation.
h) 2 nos. each NO and NC volt free dry contacts shall be provided for each
changeover circuit breaker unit.
i) The Changeover function shall work without Auxilliary Power Supply with
Fail Safe operation.
j) All indications for all the operations viz., ON, OFF, TRIP.
A20.3.7.4 The changeover system between the normal and standby sources shall be as
follows:
a) 3 phase sensing circuits with adjustable time delay facility in the range of 0 to
15 seconds shall be provided to monitor the voltage condition of the normal
and standby source.
A20.3.8.1 Specifications for Air Circuit Breakers shall be same as that in Section A15 of
the specifications.
A20.3.9 Nameplates and Labels
A 21.1.1 The precise form of water treatment at station shall depend on analysis of the
particular borehole water supply.
A 21.1.2 Water treatment for the water circulating systems shall be provided to
control corrosion and algae. Chemical cleaning of the systems shall comply
with the requirements of the BSRIA application guide.
A 21.2.1 This method shall be included for by the contractor as the basic form of treatment
for re-circulated chilled water circuits. The minimum provisions are as follows –
The entire chilled water shall be flushed out using appropriate chemical
dispersant, detergent and defoamer of type and strength recommended by a
reputable chemical water treatment manufacturer and guaranteed in writing by
that company as suitable in every respect for the application in question.
The chemical shall remain in the system for 72 hours including a minimum of
24 hours with pumped circulation in operation, unless otherwise recommended
by supplier with free technical support accepted by the contractor.
The system shall then be completely drained and flushed until tests at all drain
points show that traces of suspended matter have been substantially removed to
the contractor’s approval.
The system water shall be completely drained as rapidly as possible and
contractor shall provide temporary 50 mm valved drain outlets on all points
where the main pipe works is 50 mm or over, for this purpose.
Subsequent to the flushing out operations the large drain down points shall be
reduced to 15 mm valves or cocks or the sizes as indicated on the drawings. The
system shall be refilled and flushed as necessary to achieve the required water
quality level.
b) Chemical Treatment to prevent corrosion, Scaling and Sludge Formation
Where applicable storage tanks shall be fabricated from glass reinforced plastics
(grp) or material as specified.
Chemicals used for the water conditioning shall have no detrimental effect on non-
The water for the chilled water system shall be maintained at the following
specification. pH value 8.0-10.0
for water re-circulated between cooling tower and condenser applications. The
minimum provisions are as follows –
The chemical shall remain in the system for 72 hours including a minimum of 24
hours with pumped circulation in operation, unless otherwise recommended by
supplier with free technical support accepted by the contractor.
The system shall then be completely drained and flushed until tests at all drain
points show that traces of suspended matter have been substantially removed to
the contractor’s approval.
Subsequent to the flushing out operations the large drain down points shall be
reduced to 15 mm valves or cocks or the sizes as indicated on the drawings. The
system shall be refilled and flushed as necessary to achieve the required water
quality level.
as specified.
Dosing and metering pumps shall inject into the system by means of flexible
plastic piping and an injector fitting.
The water treatment program shall provide corrosion control for the water
circuit(s) by use of suitable corrosion inhibitors and pH control.
Overall corrosion rate shall not exceed 5 m per year for steel components of
the circuit in continuous contact with the conditioned water.
The contractor shall provide suitable comparative corrosion test coupons
representing the metals in the treated circuit(s) for the purpose of measuring
overall corrosion and pitting rates.
Formation of adherent mineral deposits in the form of scale that cannot be
flushed from heat transfer surfaces shall be prevented.
A continuous bleed-off shall be specified for the cooling tower circuits.
Internal chemical treatment of water in the circuit and external treatment of
the make-up water shall be provided when bleed-off alone is inadequate to
prevent scale formation, or if bleed-off is uneconomical because of excessive
use of corrosion inhibitors.
The electrical conductivity of the re-circulated water shall be used to control
the cycles of concentration and chemical feed.
Algae growth shall be prevented by using suitable algicides. Algaecides that may
cause damage to equipment or impair operation shall not be used.
Chemicals shall be fed to circuits requiring continuous make-up by
automatic proportional feeding devices.
Bleed off shall be automatic type
Acid feeders, when used, shall be controlled by electronic pH controllers.
The equipment shall be of portable type suitable for field sampling and testing.
For pH value testing, pH meters or phenol red solution and color discs shall be
provided. Other relevant test kits shall include total dissolved solids and
corrosion inhibitor level testers.
A competent person from the approved water treatment specialist and equipment
uppliers shall hold on-site training, which shall last for at least two months period with
one full day in-hand training per month.
The contractor shall provide prominent warning notices, goggles, gloves and necessary
accessories for handling the chemicals.
A sufficient number of sampling points in the pipe work or equipment for water
analysis, routine inspection and testing shall be provided.
A21.6 The contractor shall provide the chemical volume based on system water volume and
considering 10% wastage
A 22.1.1 Intake & Extract louvers shall be provided as shown on the drawings/BOQ.
These shall be made of GSS frame and blades in extruded aluminum construction.
A 22.1.2 Blades shall be inclined at 45 degree and placed at a pitch of 75mm to minimize
water ingress. The assembly shall be complete with bird wire guard of galvanized
steel. Face velocity shall not be more than 2.5m/sec with corresponding pressure
drop of 19 Pa.
A 22.1.3 Galvanized M.S channel (Box channel) of 100X50mm shall be provided to support
grid of not more than 1500 X 1500mm. GSS frame of louvers shall be 1.6mm and
blades shall be 1.5mm thick.
A.22.1.4 The louvers shall be powder coated as per colour scheme approved by engineer in-
charge. Depth of louvers shall be 150mm.
A.23.1 The electronic anti fouling system shall prevent the scale fouling by including
dissolved minerals ions to precipitate into larger particles by the use of square wave current
source. Which shall be supplied along with this equipment. Which shall be wrapped around
condenser water circuit.
Control Box
Electrical Input 110-240v AC, 50-60 Hz Enlosure
NEMA 12
Soleniod coil
A23.2 Auto tube cleaning system shall prevent the scale formation by high pressure sponge
ball through the condenser tube. W ater injection system will be operated by a touch screen
graphical PLC controller which is pre-programmed to execute the cleaning process in two
consecutive steps. They are ball injection cycle and ball collection cycle.
Pipe size as per BOQ of different stations for condenser water system Enclosure
ABS Plastic weather resistant.
A.24.1 GENERAL
Water side shall be designed for 150 psig working pressure. Power shall be supplied to the
unit at 415 volts - 3 phase - 50 Hertz. The chiller shall use HFC R- 134A.
Each unit shall be completely factory-packaged including evaporator, unit mounted variable
speed drive with active harmonic filter, condenser, sub-cooler, compressor, motor, Advance
microprocessor panel with graphics and all interconnecting unit piping and wiring. The chiller
shall be painted prior to shipment.
A.24.2Quality Control
Performance shall be certified in accordance with ARI Standard 550/590. Only chillers that
are listed in the ARI Certification Program for Centrifugal and Rotary Screw Water Chillers are
acceptable.
The chiller shall be capable to unload up to 15% at constant entering condenser water
temperature.
10.0
COMPRESSOR
The compressor shall be a single / multi-stage centrifugal type powered by a high speed electric
motor. A cast aluminum, fully shrouded impeller shall be mounted directly to the motor shaft.
The impeller shall be designed for balanced thrust, dynamically balanced and overspeed
tested for smooth, vibration-free operation. Compressor castings shall be designed for 235 psig
working pressure and hydrostatically pressure tested at 355 psig for HFC R-134A units.
Capacity control shall be achieved by the combined use of variable speed and variable
diffuser geometry / inlet guide vanes to provide fully modulating control from maximum to
minimum load while maintaining constant chiller leaving water temperature.
MOTO
R
The compressor motor shall be a hermetic, oil free, permanent magnet type directly
coupled to the compressor. The motor will be bolted to a cast iron adapter plate mounted on the
compressor to provide factory alignment of the shaft. The motor shaft shall be supported on
active magnetic radial and thrust bearings. Magnetic bearing control shall be equipped
with auto vibration reduction and balancing systems. During a power failure event, the
magnetic bearings shall remain active throughout the compressor coast down. Rolling element
bearings shall be provided as a backup to the magnetic bearings designed for emergency touch
down situations. Motor stator and rotor shall be equipped with a pressure driven refrigerant
cooling loop to maintain acceptable operating temperatures.
A variable speed drive shall be factory installed on the chiller. It will vary the compressor
motor speed by controlling the frequency and voltage of the electrical power to the motor.
The capacity control logic shall automatically adjust motor speed and compressor diffuser
geometry for maximum part-load efficiency by analyzing information fed to it by sensors
located throughout the chiller.
Drive shall be PWM type utilizing IGBT’s with a power factor of 0.97 or better at all loads and
speeds.
The variable speed drive shall be unit mounted in a NEMA 1 enclosure with all power and
control wiring between the drive and chiller factory installed. Field power wiring shall be a
single point connection and electrical lugs for incoming power wiring will be provided. The
entire chiller package shall be UL listed.
EVAPORATOR
Evaporator shall be a shell-and-tube, hybrid falling film type designed for 235 psig working
pressure on the refrigerant side. Shell shall be fabricated from rolled carbon steel plate with
fusion welded seams; have carbon steel tube sheets, drilled and reamed to accommodate the tubes;
and intermediate tube supports spaced no more than four feet apart. The refrigerant side shall
be designed, tested and stamped in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,
Section VIII- Division 1. Tubes shall be high-efficiency, internally and externally enhanced type
having plain copper lands at all intermediate tube supports to provide maximum tube wall
thickness at the support area. Each tube shall be roller expanded into the tube sheets providing
a leak-proof seal, and be individually replaceable. Water velocity through the tubes shall not
exceed 12 fps. A liquid level sight glass will be located on the side of the shell to aid in
determining proper refrigerant charge. A suction baffle eliminator will be located above the
tube bundle to prevent liquid refrigerant carryover to the compressor. The evaporator shall
have a refrigerant relief device sized to meet the requirements of ASHRAE 15 Safety
Code for Mechanical Refrigeration.
Water boxes shall be removable to permit tube cleaning and replacement. Stubout water
connections having victaulic grooves will be provided. Waterboxes shall be designed for 150psi
(10.3 bar) design working pressure and tested at 225 psig (15.5 bar). Vent and drain connections
with plugs will be provided on each water box. Low flow protection shall be provided by a
thermal-type flow sensor, factory mounted in the water nozzle connection and wired to the
chiller control center.
CONDENSER
Condenser shall be of the shell-and-tube type, designed for 235 psig working pressure on
the refrigerant side. Shell shall be fabricated from rolled carbon steel plate with fusion welded
seams; have carbon steel tube sheets, drilled and reamed to accommodate the tubes; and
intermediate tube supports spaced no more than four feet apart. The refrigerant side shall be
designed, tested and stamped in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,
Section VIII- Division 1. Tubes shall be high-efficiency, internally and externally enhanced type
having plain copper lands at all intermediate tube supports to provide maximum tube wall
thickness at the support area. Each tube shall be roller expanded into the tube sheets providing
a leak-proof seal, and be individually replaceable. Water velocity through the tubes shall not
exceed 12 fps.
Water boxes shall be removable to permit tube cleaning and replacement. Stubout water
connections having ANSI/AWWA C-606 grooves will be provided. Waterboxes shall be
designed for 150 psi (10.3 bar) design working pressure and tested at 225 psig (15.5 bar).
Vent and drain connections with plugs will be provided on each water box.
Refrigerant flow to the evaporator shall be controlled by a variable orifice for improving
unloading capabilities. The variable orifice control shall automatically adjust to maintain
proper refrigerant level in the condenser and evaporator. This shall be controlled by monitoring
refrigerant liquid level in the condenser, assuring optimal subcooler performance.
Control panel: The control panel shall include a 10.4 in. diagonal color liquid crystal
display (LCD) surrounded by “soft“ keys which are redefined based on the screen
displayed at that time. This shall be mounted in the middle of a keypad interface and
installed in a locked enclosure. The screen shall detail all operations and parameters,
using a graphical representation of the chiller and its major components. Panel
verbiage shall be available in English as standard and in other languages as an option
with English always available. Data shall be displayed in either English or Metric units.
Smart Freeze Point Protection shall run the chiller at 36.00°F leaving chilled water
temperature, and not have nuisance trips on low water temperature. The sophisticated
program and sensor shall monitor the chiller water temperature to prevent freeze up.
When needed Hot Gas Bypass is available as an option. The panel shall display
countdown timer messages so the operator knows when functions are starting and
stopping. Every programmable point shall have a pop-up screen with the allowable
ranges, so that the chiller can not be programmed to operate outside of its design limits.
The chiller control panel shall also provide:
1. System operating information including:
a. return and leaving chilled liquid temperature
b. return and leaving condenser liquid temperature
c. evaporator and condenser saturation temperature
d. evaporator and condenser pressure
e. compressor discharge temperature
f. percent full load motor current
g. motor frequency
h. magnetic bearing levitation status
i. magnetic bearing temperatures
j. operating hours
k. number of compressor starts
4. The text displayed within the system status and system details field shall be
displayed as a color coded message to indicate severity: red for safety fault, orange for
cycling faults, yellow for warnings, and green for normal messages.
5.Safety shutdowns enunciated through the display and the status bar, and consist
of system status, system details, day, time, cause of shutdown, and type of restart
required. Safety shutdowns shall include:
a.evaporator – low pressure
6.Cycling shutdowns enunciated through the display and the status bar, and consists
of system status, system details, day, time, cause of shutdown, and type of restart
required. Cycling shutdowns shall include:
a. multiunit cycling – contacts open
b. system cycling - contacts open
c. control panel - power failure
d. leaving chilled liquid - low temperature
e. leaving chilled liquid - flow switch open
f. condenser – flow switch open
g. motor controller – contacts open
h. motor controller – loss of current
i. MBC – Position
j. MBC – Low Frequency Displacement
k. MBC – Vibration
l. MBC – High Amplifier Temperature
m. MBC – High DC/DC Temperature
n. MBC – No Levitation
o. MBC – Serial Communications Fault
p. Power Fault
q. Control Panel – Schedule
r. VSD Precharge – Low DC Bus Voltage
s. VSD – DC Bus Preregulation
t. VSD – Logic Board Power Supply
u. VSD – High DC Bus Voltage
v. VSD – High Phase Input Current (A,B,C)
w. VSD – High Phase Motor Current (A,B,C)
x. VSD – Phase Input Gate Driver (A,B,C)
y. VSD – Phase Motor Gate Driver (A,B,C
z. VSD – Single Phase Input Power aa.
8. Trending data with the ability to customize points of once every second to once
every hour. The panel shall trend up to 6 different parameters from a list of over 140,
without the need of an external monitoring system.
11. A numbered terminal strip for all required field interlock wiring.
12.An RS-232 port to output all system operating data, shutdown / cycling message,
and a record of the last 10 cycling or safety shutdowns to a field-supplied printer.
Data logs to a printer at a set programmable interval. This data can be preprogrammed
to print from 1minute to 1day.
The services of a factory trained, field service representative will be provided to supervise the
final leak testing, charging and the initial startup and conduct concurrent operator instruction.
FACTORY INSULATION
Factory-applied, anti-sweat insulation shall be attached to the cooler shell, flow chamber, tube
sheets, suction connection, and (as necessary) to the auxiliary tubing. The insulation shall
be a flexible, closed-cell plastic type, 3/4 thick, applied with vapor-proof cement. The
insulation will normally prevent sweating in environments with relative humidity up to 75% and
dry bult temperatures ranging from 50 to 90 °F.
c. The VFD and its options shall be factory mounted and tested as a single unit
under full load before dispatch. For Chillers the drive should be calibrated
and synchronized with the chiller capacity control mechanism (i.e. guide vanes
for centrifugal, slide valve for screw)
d. The VFD shall be tested to UL 508C. The appropriate UL label shall be applied.
e. The VFD shall be CE marked and conform to the European Union Electro
Magnetic Compatibility directive.
f. The VFD shall be UL listed for a short circuit current rating of 100 kA and
labeled with this rating.
25.2.1 The VFD shall convert incoming fixed frequency three-phase AC power into an
adjustable frequency and voltage for controlling the speed of three- phase AC motors.
The motor current shall closely approximate a sine wave. Motor voltage shall be
varied with frequency to maintain desired motor magnetization current suitable for
the driven load and to eliminate the need for motor derating.
When properly sized, the VFD shall allow the motor to produce full rated power at
rated motor voltage, current, and speed without using the motor's service factor. VFDs
utilizing sine weighted/coded modulation (with or without 3rd harmonic injection) must
provide data verifying that the motors will not draw more than full load current
during full load and full speed operation.
25.2.2 The VFD shall convert incoming fixed frequency three-phase AC power into an
adjustable frequency and voltage for controlling the speed of three- phase AC motors.
The motor current shall closely approximate a sine wave. Motor voltage shall be
varied with frequency to maintain desired motor magnetization current suitable for
the driven load and to eliminate the need for motor derating.
When properly sized, the VFD shall allow the motor to produce full rated power at
rated motor voltage, current, and speed without using the motor's service factor. VFDs
utilizing sine weighted/coded modulation (with or without 3rd harmonic injection) must
provide data verifying that the motors will not draw more than full load current
during full load and full speed operation.
25.2.3 The VFD shall include an input full-wave bridge rectifier and maintain a
fundamental (displacement) power factor near unity regardless of speed or load.
25.2.4 The VFD shall have a dual 5% impedance DC link reactor (harmonic filters) on
the positive and negative rails of the DC bus to minimize power line harmonics and
protect the VFD from power line transients. The chokes shall be non-saturating.
Swinging chokes that do not provide full harmonic filtering throughout the entire load
range are not acceptable.
25.2.5 VFDs with saturating (non-linear) DC link reactors shall require an additional 3% AC
line reactor to provide acceptable harmonic performance at full load, where harmonic
performance is most critical.
IEEE519, 1992 recommendations shall be used for the basis of calculation of total
harmonic distortion (THD) at the point of common coupling (PCC). On request VFD
manufacturer shall provide THD figures for the total connected load. The contractor
shall provide details of supply transformer rating, impedance, short circuit current,
short circuit impedance etc to allow this calculation to be made.
25.2.6 All VFDs shall contain integral EMC Filters to attenuate Radio Frequency Interference
conducted to the AC power line. The VFDs shall comply with the emission and
immunity requirements of IEC 61800-3 : 2004, Category C1 with 50m motor cable
(unrestricted distribution). The suppliers of VFDs shall include additional EMC filters if
required to meet compliance to this requirement.
25.2.7 The VFD’s full load output current rating shall meet or exceed the normal rated currents
of standard IEC induction motors. The VFD shall be able to provide full rated output
current continuously, 110% of rated current for 60 seconds and 120% of rated torque for
up to 0.5 second while starting.
25.2.8 The VFD shall provide full motor torque at any selected frequency from 20 Hz to base
speed while providing a variable torque V/Hz output at reduced speed. This is to allow
driving direct drive fans without high speed derating or low speed excessive
magnetization, as would occur if a constant torque V/Hz curve was used at reduced
speeds. Breakaway current of 160% shall be available.
25.2.10 The VFD must be able to produce full torque at low speed to operate direct
driven fans.
25.2.11 Output power circuit switching shall be able to be accomplished without interlocks
or damage to the VFD.
25.2.12 An Automatic Motor Adaptation algorithm shall measure motor stator resistance and
reactance to optimize performance and efficiency. It shall not be necessary to run the
motor or de-couple the motor from the load to perform the test.
25.2.13 Galvanic isolation shall be provided between the VFD’s power circuitry and control
circuitry to ensure operator safety and to protect connected electronic control
equipment from damage caused by voltage spikes, current surges, and ground loop
currents. VFDs not including either galvanic or optical isolation on both analog I/O
and discrete digital I/O shall include additional isolation modules.
25.2.14 VFD shall minimize the audible motor noise through the used of an adjustable carrier
frequency. The carrier frequency shall be automatically adjusted to optimize motor and
VFD operation while reducing motor noise. VFDs with fixed carrier frequency are not
acceptable.
25.2.15 The VFD shall allow up to at least 100 meters of SWA (Single Wire Armour) cable to
be used between the FC and the motor and allow the use of MICS (Mineral Insulated
Copper Sheath) cable in the motor circuit for fire locations.
2
25.3.1 A minimum of Class 20 I t electronic motor overload protection for single motor
applications shall be provided. Overload protection shall automatically compensate
for changes in motor speed.
25.3.2 Protection against input transients, loss of AC line phase, output short circuit,
output ground fault, over voltage, under voltage, VFD over temperature and motor
over temperature. The VFD shall display all faults in plain language. Codes are not
acceptable.
25.3.3 Protect VFD from input phase loss. The VFD should be able to protect itself from
damage and indicate the phase loss condition. During an input phase loss condition,
the VFD shall be able to be programmed to either trip off while displaying an alarm,
issue a warning while running at reduced output capacity, or issue a warning while
running at full commanded speed. This function is independent of which input power
phase is lost.
25.3.4 Protect from under voltage. The VFD shall provide full rated output with an input
voltage as low as 90% of the nominal. The VFD will continue to operate with
reduced output, without faulting, with an input voltage as low as 70% of the nominal
voltage.
25.3.5 VFD shall include current sensors on all three output phases to accurately measure
motor current, protect the VFD from output short circuits, output ground faults, and
act as a motor overload. If an output phase loss is detected, the VFD will trip off
and identify which of the output phases is low or lost.
25.3.6 If the temperature of the VFD’s heat sink rises to 80C, the VFD shall
automatically reduce its carrier frequency to reduce the heat sink temperature. It
shall also be possible to program the VFD so that it reduces its output current limit
value if the VFD’s temperature becomes too high.
25.3.7 In order to ensure operation during periods of overload, it must be possible to program
the VFD to automatically reduce its output current to a programmed value during periods
of excessive load. This allows the VFD to continue to run the load without tripping.
25.3.8 The VFD shall have temperature controlled cooling fan(s) for quiet operation,
minimized losses, and increased fan life. At low loads or low ambient temperatures,
the fan(s) may be off even when the VFD is running.
25.3.9 Protect from output switching : The VFD shall be fully protected from switching
a contactor / isolator at the output with out causing tripping e.g.: for switching on/off the
isolators of the AHU / ventilation fans / pumps near the motor with VFD in ON mode.
25.3.10 The VFD shall store in memory the last 10 alarms. A description of the alarm, and the
date and time of the alarm shall be recorded.
25.3.11 When used with a pumping system, the VFD shall be able to detect no-flow situations,
dry pump conditions, and operation off the end of the pump curve. It shall be
programmable to take appropriate protective action when one of the above situations is
detected.
25.4.1 Hand, Off and Auto keys shall be provided on the control panel to start and stop the
VFD and determine the source of the speed reference. It shall be possible to either
disable these keys or password protect them from undesired operation.
25.4.2 There shall be an “Info” key on the keypad. The Info key shall include “on- line” context
sensitive assistance for programming and troubleshooting.
25.4.3 The VFD shall be programmable to provide a digital output signal to indicate whether
the VFD is in Hand or Auto mode. This is to alert the Building Automation System
whether the VFD is being controlled locally or by the Building Automation System.
25.4.4 Password protected keypad with alphanumeric, graphical, backlit display can be
remotely mounted. Two levels of password protection shall be provided to guard
against unauthorized parameter changes.
25.4.5 All VFDs shall have the same customer interface. The keypad and display shall be
identical and interchangeable for all sizes of VFDs.
25.4.6 To set up multiple VFDs, it shall be possible to upload all setup parameters to the
VFD’s keypad, place that keypad on all other VFDs in turn and download the setup
parameters to each VFD. To facilitate setting up VFDs of various sizes, it shall be
possible to download from the keypad only size independent parameters. Keypad shall
provide visual indication of copy status.
25.4.8 A red FAULT light, a yellow WARNING light and a green POWER-ON light shall be
provided. These indications shall be visible both on the keypad and on the VFD when
the keypad is removed.
25.4.9 A quick setup menu with factory preset typical HVAC parameters shall be provided on
the VFD. The VFD shall also have individual Fan, Pump, and Compressor menus
specifically designed to facilitate start-up of these applications.
25.4.10 A three-feedback PID controller to control the speed of the VFD shall be standard.
25.4.11 This controller shall accept up to three feedback signals. It shall be programmable to
compare the feedback signals to a common setpoint or to individual setpoints and to
automatically select either the maximum or minimum deviating signal as the
controlling signal. It shall also be possible to calculate the controlling feedback signal as
the average of all feedback signals or the difference between a pair of feedback signals.
25.4.12 The VFD shall be able to apply individual scaling to each feedback signal.
25.4.13 For fan flow tracking applications, the VFD shall be able to calculate the square root
of any or all individual feedback signals so that a pressure sensor can be used to measure
air flow.
25.4.14 The VFD’s PID controller shall be able to actively adjust its setpoint based on flow.
This allows the VFD to compensate for a pressure feedback sensor which is located
near the output of the pump rather than out in the controlled system.
1625used to control damper and valve positioners in the system and to provide
setpoint reset.
25.4.17 Five simultaneous meter displays shall be available. They shall be selectable from (at
a minimum), frequency, motor current, motor voltage, VFD output power, VFD
output energy, VFD temperature in degrees, feedback signals in their own units, among
others.
25.4.18 Programmable Sleep Mode shall be able to stop the VFD. When its output frequency
drops below set “sleep” level for a specified time, when an external contact commands
that the VFD go into Sleep Mode, or when the VFD detects a no-flow situation, the
VFD may be programmed to stop. When the VFD’s speed is being controlled by its PID
controller, it shall be possible to program a “wake-up” feedback value that will cause the
VFD to start. To avoid excessive starting and stopping of the driven equipment, it shall
be possible to program a minimum run time before sleep mode can be initiated and a
minimum sleep time for the VFD.
25.4.19 A run permissive circuit shall be provided to accept a “system ready” signal to ensure
that the VFD does not start until dampers or other auxiliary equipment are in the
proper state for VFD operation. The run permissive circuit shall also be capable of
initiating an output “run request” signal to indicate to the external equipment that the
25.4.20 VFD shall be programmable to display feedback signals in appropriate units, such
as inches of water column (in-wg), pressure per square inch (psi) or temperature (°F).
0 0
Examples can be room temperature in C , return air temperature in C , supply air
0
temperature in C, CO2 concentration in ppm, pressure in bar, differential pressure in
PSI etc.
25.4.21 VFD shall be programmable to sense the loss of load. The VFD shall be
programmable to signal this condition via a keypad warning, relay output and/or over
the serial communications bus. To ensure against nuisance indications, this feature
must be based on motor torque, not current, and must include a proof timer to keep
brief periods of no load from falsely triggering this indication.
i. The VFD shall provide front panel meter displays programmable to show the
value of each analog input signal for system set-up and troubleshooting,
k. It shall be possible to read the status of all analog and digital inputs of the VFD
through serial bus communications.
l. It shall be possible to command all digital and analog output through the
serial communication bus.
a. It shall be possible to add optional modules to the VFD in the field to expand
its analog and digital inputs and outputs.
b. These modules shall use rigid connectors to plug into the VFD’s control
card.
c. The VFD shall automatically recognize the option module after it is powered
up. There shall be no need to manually configure the module.
25.4.24 Standard programmable firefighter’s override mode allows a digital input to control the
VFD and override all other local or remote commands. It shall be possible to program
the VFD so that it will ignore most normal VFD safety circuits including motor
overload. The VFD shall display FIREMODE whenever in firefighter’s override mode.
Firemode shall allow selection of forward or reverse operation and the selection of
a speed source or preset speed, as required to accommodate local fire codes,
standards and conditions.
a. It shall be possible to use this to display the current date and time on the
VFD’s display.
e. The real-time clock shall be able to time and date stamp all faults recorded in
the VFD fault log.
f. The VFD shall be able to store load profile data to assist in analyzing the
system demand and energy consumption over time.
25.4.26 The VFD shall include a Cascade Controller which allows the VFD to operate
in closed loop set point (PID) control mode one motor at a controlled speed and
control the operation of 3 additional constant speed motor starters.
25.5.1 The VFD shall include a standard EIA-485 communications port and capabilities to be
connected to the following serial communication protocols at no additional cost and
without a need to install any additional hardware or software in the VFD:
Metasys N2 Modbus
RTU
25.5.2 VFD shall have standard USB port for direct connection of Personal Computer (PC) to
the VFD. The manufacturer shall provide no-charge PC software to allow complete
setup and access of the VFD and logs of VFD operation through the USB port. It shall
be possible to communicate to the VFD through this USB port without interrupting
VFD communications to the building management system.
25.5.3 The VFD shall have provisions for an optional 24 V DC back-up power interface to
power the VFD’s control card. This is to allow the VFD to continue to
communicate to the building automation system even if power to the VFD is lost.
25.6 ADJUSTMENTS
25.6.1 The VFD shall have a manually adjustable carrier frequency that can be adjusted in
0.5 kHz increments to allow the user to select the desired operating characteristics.
The VFD shall also be programmable to automatically reduce its carrier frequency to
avoid tripping due to thermal loading.
25.6.3 Four preset speeds per setup shall be provided for a total of 16.
25.6.4 Each setup shall have two programmable ramp up and ramp down times.
Acceleration and deceleration ramp times shall be adjustable over the range from 1
to 3,600 seconds.
Each setup shall be programmable for a unique current limit value. If the output
current from the VFD reaches this value, any further attempt to increase the current
produced by the VFD will cause the VFD to reduce its output frequency to reduce the
load on the VFD. If desired, it shall be possible to program a timer which will
cause the VFD to trip off after a programmed time period.
If the VFD trips on one of the following conditions, the VFD shall be
programmable for automatic or manual reset: external interlock, under- voltage,
over-voltage, current limit, over temperature, and VFD overload.
The number of restart attempts shall be selectable from 0 through 20 or infinitely and
the time between attempts shall be adjustable from 0 through 600 seconds.
An automatic “start delay” may be selected from 0 to 120 seconds. During this delay
time, the VFD shall be programmable to either apply no voltage to the motor or apply a
DC braking current if desired.
Four programmable critical frequency lockout ranges to prevent the VFD from
operating the load at a speed that causes vibration in the driven equipment shall be
provided. Semi-automatic setting of lockout ranges shall simplify the set-up.
25.7.1 All optional features shall be built and mounted by VFD manufacturer as an inbuilt
factory solution. All optional features shall be UL listed by the VFD manufacturer as
a complete assembly and carry a UL label.
25.8.1 Ambient temperature at full speed, full load operation with continuous drive rated
output current:
25.8.2 -10 to 40°C for ratings 110 kW and higher without derating
25.8.8 All power and control wiring shall be done from the bottom.
25.9.1 To ensure quality, the complete VFD shall be tested by the manufacturer.
The VFD shall drive a motor connected to a dynamometer at full load and speed and
shall be cycled during the automated test procedure.
25.9.2 All optional features shall be functionally tested at the factory for proper operation.
Thermal insulation material for Duct & Pipe insulation shall be closed cell Elastomeric
EPDM Rubber. The Thermal conductivity of the insulation material shall not
exceed
0.038 W/moK at an average temperature of 32oC. Density of the EPDM rubber shall be
40-60 Kg/m3. The product shall have temperature range of –57 oC to 125oC. The
insulation material shall be fire rated for Class V 0 as per UL 94.The flammability and
smoke density shall be 25/50 as per ASTM E 84, Non flammable as per JIS K 6911,
Australian standard 1530 and class 5.3 as per EMPA. Water vapour diffusion resistance
factor(µ) ≥ 7000.The water absorption (weight%)shall not exceed 5 as per ASTM D
1056.
The insulation material should be free from Nitrosamine contents as per US FDA norms.
It should be CFC free. It should not be corrosive to copper and stainless when tested as
per DIN 1988.The material should not develop crack when tested for ozone resistance as
per ASTM 1149. The % shrinkage (Heat Stability) should not exceed 6 when tested as
per ASTM C 534( 93oC, 7 days). No cracks should develop when exposed to UV
(accelerated weathering resistance test cycle UVB-313 at 60 oC/8h, CON at 50 oC/4h)
as per ASTM G 154-04. The resistance to microbiological growth should be in
accordance to UL 181 – and meet the acceptance criteria of resistance to fungal
contamination as per ASTM G21. It should meet the acceptance criteria of resistance to
bacterial contamination as per ASTM 2180.
General
A. The Chiller Plant Optimizer system shall be as indicated on the drawings and
described in the specifications.
D. The control system shall be designed such that each mechanical system will
be able to operate under stand-alone control. As such, in the event of a
network communication failure, or the loss of any other controller, the control
system shall continue to independently operate under control.
B. The Chiller Plant Optimizer System (CPO) shall be a state of the art
technology, freely expandable for any future expansion plans. The system
(CPO) shall have a minimum controlling capacity of 10,000 physical points
without upgrading the data server software or related hardware. In general
the system shall support “Open Architecture Concept” with capability to
Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE) Link. The system shall be modular in
nature, and shall permit expansion of both capacity and functionality
through the addition of sensors, actuators, controllers and operator devices,
while re-using existing controls equipment.
The CPO as provided shall incorporate, at minimum, the following integrated features,
functions and services:
The Chiller Plant Optimizer (CPO) shall use an open architecture and fully support a
multi-vendor environment. To accomplish this effectively, the CPO shall support open
communication protocol standards and integrate a wide variety of third-party devices
and applications. The system shall be designed for use on the Internet, or intranets
using off the shelf, industry standard technology compatible with other owner provided
networks.
The system shall be designed into three tiers and contain a field tier (the tier that
contains all of the field level controllers, and application specific controllers), an
automation tier (this is the tier that connects all of the field tiers), and an enterprise
tier (this is the tier that connects all of the automation tiers). No two-tier design is
acceptable.
D. Network engine shall have Unlimited number of user license without any additional
cost of license on the OWS.
H. Network engine should have inbuilt display and keys to operate in absence of PC
A. The system shall provide a real-time database incorporating data from analog,
logical or pulse inputs.
D. Trend and change of value data shall be stored within the engine and
uploaded to a dedicated trend database or exported in a selectable data format
via a provided data export utility
E. The system shall provide a configurable data storage subsystem for the
collection of historical data. Data can be stored in SQL database format
G. The operator interface shall be flexible in its connection to the CPO server. Both
serial wireless, 3G and LAN connection shall be possible. The operator interface
shall provide standard dial-up modem support. Using other packages such as
Microsoft Terminal to make the modem connection shall not be acceptable.
H. CPO management level software shall have Unlimited number of user license
without any additional cost of license on the OWS.
I. CPO software shall be web based software shall allow 5 simultaneous user
access.
K. Energy Management software capable of fetching the energy data from the
BMS and store the data into separate application database (SQL) for analysis.
This Software should have the following Key features:
L. The software shall have Ready Access Portal Architecture , graphics and
management software shall be accessible thru smart phones.
O. Alarms shall be routed directly from Network Automation Engines to PCs and
servers. It shall be possible for specific alarms from specific points to be
routed to specific PCs and servers.
Q. The system shall support a flexible reporting package to allow easy generation
of report data. The reports provided should include pre- configured standard
reports for common requirements such as Alarm Event reports and custom
report generation
R. The system shall provide up to six levels of security providing varying degrees
of access to system operation and configuration functions.
E. As a back up, DDC’s shall store DDC programs and data files on non-volatile
EEPROM or flash memory to allow simple and reliable additions and
changes. Each DDC shall have a 72 hours battery backed real-time clock.
F. Each panel shall be provided with a socket for a Portable Operators Terminal
(POT) which can be connected via Bluetooth communication for easy access
for testing & trouble shooting and no need to open the panel, and a port for
network communications In max. speed of 76Kbps
The DDC I/O modules should communication within the CPO network by
ASHARE BACnet MS/TP protocol, no other proprietary protocol is accepted
protocol
J. The DDC software configuration tool shall use be GUI based logics Immersion
Temperature Sensors:
a. Immersion sensors shall be provided with a separable
stainless steel/brass well. Pressure rating of well is to be consistent
with the system pressure in which it is to be installed.
DIN Class B
PART 3 Executions
The CPO shall be designed, installed, and commissioned in a turnkey operational manner;
including all labour not noted in Work by others paragraph of PART I of this section of these
specifications, and not noted in other sections of these
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION
FRAME
4" x 1.06" x .125" (107 x 27 x 3.2) thick Series,625 Vinyl Ester Resin fiberglass channel.
BLADES
.125" (3.2) thick fiberglass at 45°blade angle,approximately 5" (127) center to center.
SCREEN
PVC coated bird screen .50" (13) mesh 19,gage (1.1) is standard. Fiberglass
insect,screen, 18-16 mesh.
MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE
200°F.
MINIMUM SIZE
Shall include:
• Extended sill.
• Exterior coatings.
Annexure-A
AHU Filter
Air Filters
Codes and Filters shall conform, where applicable, to the following standards:-
Standards
(1) UL900 - Standard for test performance of air filter units.
Fire Properties Air filters and their enclosure shall be constructed from materials
which conform to the fire property requirements of one of the following
standards:-
General (1) All filters shall be UL-approved, and shall be disposable unless
otherwise specified in the Particular Specification.
Filter Identification
The enclosure shall be constructed and assembled in such a manner that a
rigid and durable enclosure for the filter pack is effected.
(6) The housing shall be factory fabricated and assembled. They shall
incorporate access doors, extruded aluminium tracks and
individual holding frames designed to accommodate standard
size filters in efficiency and construction rating specified for the
installation.
(7) Type test certificates for each type of filter media intended for use
on the installation shall be submitted.
All filters if their filter elements are not fully constructed in metal shall,
at the place of manufacture, have the following information clearly
marked or stamped in a readily accessible location:-
(2) The filter cleaning tanks shall be constructed of at least 1 mm thick stainless steel and
suitably stiffened around the top edges by continuous external turned over inverted
`u'
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
TVS WORKS
TABLE OF CONTENT
Section V00: General Specification for Tunnel Ventilation System.........................................................
Section V01: Tunnel Ventilation System – Fan Units .............................................................................
Section V02: Tunnel Ventilation System Dampers .................................................................................
Section V03: Noise and Vibration Control ..............................................................................................
Section V04: Ductwork ...........................................................................................................................
Section V 05 Tunnel Booster Fans ..........................................................................................................
Section V 06 Compressed Air System .....................................................................................................
TABLE OF CONTENT
V00.1.1. This Specification describes the minimum standards of the Tunnel Ventilation System
(TVS).
V00.1.2. The Works to be executed under the Contract include the manufacture, verification,
delivery, installation, testing, commissioning and technical support for a complete,
integrated Tunnel Ventilation System, including all control centres, fans, dampers,
ducts, necessary to deliver the requirements of this Specification.
V00.1.3. The Tunnel Ventilation System is to be manufactured, supplied, installed, tested and
commissioned by the Contractor and shall meet all performance and functional
requirements as defined in the Specification.
V00.2.1. Unless otherwise stated, the safety and environmental control system design shall be
governed by all applicable local codes, regulations and standards.
V00.2.2. In addition to local requirements, environmental control system designs shall also
comply with the following codes of practice, standards, specifications and manuals.
V00.2.3. Local codes, regulations and standards shall take precedence where these standards or
requirements are more onerous than other international standards.
V00.2.4. NFPA 130: 2010- Fixed Guideway Transit Systems: any non-compliance shall be
approved in writing by the AGRA METRO.
V00.2.6. Ventilation and air conditioning systems for stations and tunnels are to be based on the
current "Handbook" series published by the American Society of Heating, Refrigeration
and Air Conditioning and the "Subway Environmental Design Handbook" published under
the sponsorship of the United States Department of Transportation, Urban Mass
Transportation Administration.
V00.2.7. Fans shall be rated in accordance with the "Standard Test Code for Air Moving
Services" and the "Test Code for Sound Rating Air Moving Devices" of the Air
Moving and Conditioning Association Inc., USA.
V00.2.8. Noise criteria shall be as described herein and in the current four volume "Handbook" series
published by the American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning
Employer’s Representatives (ASHRAE).
V00.2.9. The standards to be followed during construction, and installation of the Tunnel
Ventilation System shall be generally as listed, except where specific requirements are
given in the Specification, which shall take precedence. The Contractor may propose
alternative or additional standards for review by the Employer’s Representative at
least 60 days before application.
V00.2.10. All codes and standards shall be submitted in English language. The design of any one
system shall be to a single code or specification. The parallel use of different codes for
particular items or components shall not be allowed.
A 194 Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High-Pressure and High-
Temperature Service
A 239, Locating the Thinnest Spot in Zinc (Galvanised) Coating on Iron or Steel
Articles by the Preece Test (Copper Sulfate Dip).
A 525, Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Hot Galvanised) by the Hot-Dip Process.
A 588, High Strength Low Alloy Structural Steel with 50 ksi (345 MPa)
Minimum Yield Point to 4 Inch (100 mm) Thick.
A 666 Authentic Stainless Steel, Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar for Structural
Applications
ICS-1.1,Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation and Maintenance of Solid-State Control.
PA-2 Method for Measurement of Dry Paint Thickness with Magnetic Gauges.
SP-1, Solvent Cleaning.
SP-2, Hand Tool Cleaning.
SP-3, Power Tool Cleaning.
SP-6 Commercial Blast Cleaning SP-
10, Near White Blast Cleaning.
PA-1 Shop, Field, and Maintenance and Painting
ISO 1680 Test code for the measurement of airborne noise emitted by rotating electrical
machinery: engineering method for free field conditions over a reflecting
plane
IEC 34-6 Rotating electrical machines: methods of cooling (except traction engine)
IEC 892 Effects of unbalanced voltages on the performance of three phase cage
induction motors
V00.3.1. The Services to be performed by the Contractor shall include, but not be limited to, the
following:
7. Manpower and all necessary tools for work execution and installation
commissioning
V00.3.2. In a general manner, all works, facilities and services to ensure a perfect and complete
execution of works under this scope and according to relevant code and standards and to this
Specification.
V00.4.1. The Contractor shall supply all equipment and facilities necessary to meet the
requirements of this technical specification, including, but not limited to:
2. Tunnel ventilation fans and Trackway Exhaust Fans including motors and
terminal boxes.
5. All auxiliary equipment such as: conical fan inlets and outlets, sound
attenuators, ducts, inspection covers & access doors;
9. All equipment associated with any interfaces required to ensure operation within
the performance requirements;
10. All special test equipment and tools, including data configuration tools;
12. All equipment necessary to carry out factory and on site testing and
commissioning;
13. Compressed Air System including copper piping and solenoid valves to operate
pneumatically operated TVS Dampers (TVSD);
14. Minor civil works like grouting of equipment, cutting and finishing good
openings in brick walls;
15. Any other equipment/material requited for the satisfactory completion of work;
16. All software, appropriately safety validated, verified and certified, to meet the
requirements of the Specification;
V00.5.1.1. Equipment involved in safety shall be controlled locally by means of dual redundant
programmable logic controllers (PLCs) with local intelligence able to play scenarios
controlled either at central level or at station level.
V00.5.1.2. For security reasons, equipment shall also be controlled locally in manual mode with
hard-wired controls
V00.5.1.3. The Contractor shall provide necessary hardware, software and data, so that the
control and monitoring functions for the TVS can be performed.
V00.5.1.4. The Contractor shall provide control sequencing to provide safety of equipment and
passengers during emergency situations and especially during evacuation of passengers.
V00.5.1.5. The TVS shall be completed and equipped with provision for automatic, manual,
local and remote controls so that the fans and motors can be operated from a Station
Control Room (SCR) or from the Operations Control Centre (OCC).
V00.5.1.7. Direct control: to control equipment in case of control system failure. This control
level is ensured by hard-wired control panel close to the equipment.
V00.5.1.8. Local control: in the station, a terminal shall be configured to control operations of the
station and tunnel emergency equipment. This terminal shall be able top control smoke
extraction scenarios.
V00.5.1.9. Central control: Control of TVS equipment shall be also possible via the SCADA
V00.5.1.10. The priority of control levels shall be as follows: direct control shall supersede local
control which itself shall supersede central control.
V00.5.1.11. The programmable logic controllers that will control emergency equipment shall be
together, which will be provided by others.
V00.5.1.12. Temperature monitors will be installed by the Contractor in the tunnel at a suitable
distance away from the station.
V00.5.2.1. The TVS equipment shall be furnished by manufacturers who have manufactured
similar equipment for a period of at least five years.
V00.5.2.2. Control equipment shall be installed, tested, commissioned and adjusted under the
direct supervision of the manufacturer or his authorised agent.
V00.5.2.3. Installation of TVS Equipment shall be by experienced personnel under the direct
supervision of trained and qualified contractor’s personnel and Certified by representative
of Manufacturer for the Installation as per quality standard of the manufacturer.
V00.5.2.4. All items necessary to make the installation complete in every respect, safe and ready
for regular operation and use, and for easy maintenance shall be furnished by the
Contractor.
V00.6.1.1. The Contractor shall put in place a full testing regime to demonstrate that all the
requirements of the Specifications are met.
V00.6.1.2. All the tests shall be carried out by the Contractor or by an external laboratory which
shall be previously submitted to the Employer’s approval. The Employer’s Representative
reserves the right to carry out any additional tests he considers necessary to satisfy
himself that the system meets the requirements of the Specification.
V00.6.1.3. The Contractor shall support the Employer’s Representative additional tests as
necessary. The Contractor’s support shall include, but not limited to:
V00.6.1.4. The Contractor shall submit a testing and commissioning program for the Employer’s
Representative
V00.6.1.5. The Contractor shall provide all test equipment (measuring set-up and measurement
devices) and staff to perform tests as required per relevant standards.
V00.6.1.7. Before performing the tests, the Contractor shall submit to the Employer’s approval a
detailed test methodology.
V00.6.1.8. Tests shall allow to assess the whole installation. The Contractor shall provide
synthetic notes showing complete results from the tests.
V00.6.1.9. It will not be allowed to deduce from any calculations a parameter that can be
determined by measurement.
V00.6.2.1. Contractor shall perform factory tests including but not limited to:
1. Materials
2. Components
3. Motors
7. Electrical panels
V00.6.3.1. Contractor shall perform on-site tests including but not limited to:
1. Measurement of airflow and power at fans motors for the whole TVS at operation
condition.
5. Inside, sound power level measurement at 1.2m height from the floor and at a
minimum distance of 1m from all ducts.
7. Operation tests and work commissioning; testing of all manual and automatic
commands, failure simulations and overall checking of the right operation of
mechanical and electrical systems.
V00. 6.4.1. On completion of the testing given in the specifications, it will be the responsibility of
the contractor to restore the Tunnel Ventilation System to full operational use
following System Acceptance Tests (SAT).
V00. 6.4.2. During SAT, all interfaces with external Systems to the TVS shall be tested. Tests on
completion shall be necessary tests to demonstrate that the system meets the
performance requirements specified.
TABLE OF CONTENT
V01.1. General ..........................................................................................................................1090
V01.2. Quality control ...............................................................................................................1090
V01.3 Technical and installation requirements ........................................................................1097
V01.1. General
V01.1.1. This Attachment specifies the requirements for furnishing tunnel ventilation fan units and
appurtenances as specified herein. Fans shall be the product of a single manufacturer
whose name shall appear on the fan motor unit and, who shall have previously furnished
emergency fan motor units to other rail transit agencies for minimum Five years. The
trackway exhaust fans, those connected to the underplatform and overtrack exhaust ducts, are
not reversible fans.
A 123, Zinc (Hot Galvanised) Coatings on Products Fabricated from Rolled, Pressed and Forged
Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars, and Strip.
A 239, Locating the Thinnest Spot in Zinc (Galvanised) Coating on Iron or Steel Articles by the
Preece Test (Copper Sulfate Dip).
A 525, Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Hot Galvanised) by the Hot-Dip Process.
A 588, High Strength Low Alloy Structural Steel with 345 MPa Minimum Yield Point to 100 mm
thick.
B 247, Certification for Aluminium Alloy Die Forgings, Hand Forgings and Rolled Ring Footing.
B 686, Aluminium Alloy Castings, High Strength E 94,
Radiographic Testing.
E 138, Wet Magnetic Particle Inspection.
519, Recommended Practices and Requirements for Harmonic Control in Electric Power
Systems.
MIL-P-24441/2A, Paint, Epoxy Polyamide, Exterior Top Coat, Haze Grey, Formula 151, Type 1.
ICS-1.1, Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation and Maintenance of Solid- State
Control.
ICS-2, Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and Assemblies. ICS-3, Industrial Systems.
MG-1, Motors and Generators.
V01.2.1.9. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC)
PA-1, No. 1 Shop, Field and Maintenance Painting.
PA-2, Method for Measurement of Dry Paint Thickness with Magnetic Gauges.
SP-1, Solvent Cleaning.
SP-2, Hand Tool Cleaning.
SP-3, Power Tool Cleaning.
SP-10, Near White Blast Cleaning.
V01.2.1.10. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL)
508, Industrial Control Equipment. V01.2.2.
Manufacturer's Qualifications
V01.2.2.1. The fan manufacturer shall show at least Five years of continuous and current experience in
the design, assembly, and testing of axial flow tunnel ventilating fans and experience in
the design and fabrication of units capable of operating in 250 degrees C air stream for
Two hour.
V01.2.3. Submittals
V01.2.3.1. Before providing the fan manufacturer with Notice to Proceed the Contractor shall submit
to the Employer’s Representative for his review and consent, evidence of the manufacturer's
qualifications including, but not limited to the following data:
Fan-motor unit performance curves from shut-off to free delivery shall have the
following data plotted as ordinates versus airflow rate, in cubic meters per second, as
abscissa:
Separate curves shall be furnished for forward and reverse direction. Each
curve shall be identified.
The system resistance curve shall be plotted on each curve. The point of
operation shall be indicated.
– The fan load torque curve at operating speed. Plot percent revolutions per
minute as abscissa and percent full load torque as ordinate.
All performance curves shall be plotted to such scales as will make it possible to
read the data accurately.
– Project title.
– Contractor's name.
– Maximum acceleration time required to start fan-motor unit from rest and
accelerate it to operating speed, in seconds.
2. Theoretical fan motor performance curves shall cover the entire range of load
conditions from no load to 115 percent of full load.
Composite curve for each size of motor plotted with abscissa as kilowatt output
and ordinates as:
– Current in amperes.
– Efficiency in percent.
– Torque in Nm.
Composite curve for each size of motor plotted with abscissa as speed in
revolutions per minute and ordinates as:
The current versus speed and torque versus speed curves for each size of motor
shall indicate the current and torque from standstill to the synchronous speed of
motors.
Also, for comparison purposes, a curve indicating the safe operating value of
insulation resistance shall be plotted on the same sheet with the insulation
resistance temperature test curve.
The following information shall be stated on each motor performance curve and
data sheet:
– Project title.
– Motor type.
– Service factor.
A complete list of projects on which similar fans for rail or transit tunnel projects
have been applied. List shall include:
– Contract number(s).
– A list of all known failures for the past ten years, including their apparent
causes, corrective work effected (including design changes), and a
description of equipment service and operating conditions.
V01.2.3.2. Within 45 days after issue of a Notice from the Employer’s Representative, the Contractor
shall submit the following for the Employer’s Representative review and consent.
1. Certified shop drawings for fans, motors, fan-motor unit bases, installation
drawings, installation instructions, dimensioned drawings for anchor bolt locations,
and any additional data required to demonstrate compliance with Contract
documents.
6. List of technical support items specified and list of any additional support items
required.
8. Procedures for separately removing and replacing motor, rotor and blades, as well as
procedures for removing a complete fan-motor unit without disassembly.
V01.2.3.3. Within 14 days after successful completion of tests specified herein and of any additional
tests conducted at the Contractor's own option, Contractor shall submit the following:
1. Certified test results for all fan and motor factory tests conducted. All test data
shall be bound in one report. The test report shall be indexed and cross-referenced in
V01.3.1. Description
V01.3.1.2. Fans shall be axial flow type with reversible operation. Emergency fan-motor units shall
be required to operate in the forward or reverse direction of airflow, with a capability
of starting, stopping, or reversing the direction of flow at any time. The trackway
exhaust fans, those connected to the under platform and over track exhaust ducts, are not
reversible fans.
V01.3.1.3. Fan-motor units shall be direct-driven by internally mounted electric motors, with
provision for manual adjustment of the pitch of the individual blades. Fan-motor units shall
be statically and dynamically balanced and shall have non overloading characteristics.
V01.3.1.4. Motors shall be the product of a single manufacturer, whose name shall appear on the motor
performance curves and other data submitted. The motors shall conform to all applicable
ANSI, IEEE, ISO and NEMA. Motors shall not be provided with self-contained thermal
protective devices.
V01.3.1.5. Motors shall be of the totally enclosed, air-over, cast iron or steel round frame, induction
type, continuous duty, variable torque, and shall be flange, pad, or foot mounted.
V01.3.1.6. Nameplate kilowatt shall be actual continuous brake kilowatts developed without any
consideration of the "air over" factor.
V01.3.2.1. Fans and all parts thereof shall be capable of withstanding the effect of all stresses and loads
under starting, operating, and reversing conditions specified. Fans and all components shall
be capable of operating for two hour in an ambient temperature of 250 degrees C. Fans,
motors and components shall be capable of withstanding sudden temperature changes as a
result of fire between the extremes of zero and plus 250 degrees C or vice versa in a time
frame of 20 seconds. Contractor shall submit maximum design stress of rotating components
at maximum fan speed and 250 degrees C Temperature and shall designate types of materials
to be used in design by their ASTM designations or approved equal. Fan motor unit shall be
capable of withstanding 250 degree Celsius for two hour.
V01.3.2.2. Fans shall be designed and built to serve an underground subway environment and to function
under conditions of high humidity and high temperature and the inlet and outlet conditions
indicated.
V01.3.3.1. Fan-motor unit performance shall be rated for the airflow and total pressure specified per
the Contractors Drawings at a maximum air density of 1.2 kilograms per cubic meter.
V01.3.3.2. Fan performance curves for either direction shall rise continuously with decreasing flow
between free delivery and 60 percent of free air delivery or to maximum kilowatt rating. Fans
shall be capable of operating continuously at specified design points for forward and reverse
flow.
V01.3.3.3. Emergency fan-motor units shall have a total efficiency of not less than 60 percent in forward
flow and not less than 50 percent in reverse flow, when operating at the specified
nominal flow rate.
V01.3.3.4. Fans shall be capable of starting from a standstill to full speed, in not more than 15 seconds,
without failure of any part of the unit. Fans shall be capable of reversing to full speed from
either direction of airflow and rotation during an emergency within 20 seconds, after a 10
second delay between power interruption and the energising of the motor for the reversed
rotation, without failure of any part of the unit.
V01.3.3.5. Emergency fan performance, when operating in the reverse direction of airflow and against
a constant equivalent orifice, shall not deviate by more than ten percent in airflow
delivered from the fan-motor unit performance curves for operation in the forward
direction of airflow at any point between 60 percent of the nominal airflow rate and free
delivery.
V01.3.3.6. Brake kilowatts shall not exceed the nameplate kilowatts of the fans when operating in either
direction of airflow.
V01.3.3.7. Pressure variations of plus or minus 300 Pa induced by external causes shall not result in
movement of the fan operating point along the fan operating curve into the region of
unstable operation. This requirement does not affect the kilowatt requirement for the design
operating point.
V01.3.3.8. Fans shall not operate in stalling range of fan performance curve during parallel
operation (forward or reverse direction).
V01.3.3.9. Fans shall have a stable operating characteristic in both directions of free flow over the range
from 50 percent nominal flow of free delivery.
V01.3.4.1. Impeller hub and blades shall be fabricated of aluminium alloy castings (ASTM B686) or forgings
(ASTM B247) or steel (ASTM A-588, Grade A and A-151, 1020 hot rolled), suitable for the
specified performance and environment. Fan rotating components shall be designed such that no
measured or calculated stress level shall exceed 60 percent of the components materials yield
strength at design temperature. Fan blades shall not vary in weight by more than 2 percent. Blades
shall be manufactured of a homogeneous material as specified herein and shall have no cast-in or
embedded materials of any kind. Individual blades shall be secured to the hub by not less than four
bolts per blade, or shall be clamped securely between the two halves of a split hub or between
suitably designed and manufactured clamp plates or by suitable number of studs. Blade bolts, hub
bolts or clamp plate bolts shall be readily accessible. The pitch of the blades shall be manually
adjustable without removing impeller from fan unit. (Pitch is defined as the angle formed by the
chord line of a blade root cross-section and a line parallel to the direction of rotation.) The ratio of the
hub diameter to the fan-housing diameter shall not be less than 0.35. The hub shall have
index marks embossed or engraved to show the design operating blade setting and the
blade settings for a minimum of five additional increments of stagger angle with not less
than two on each side of design setting. In addition, the Contractor shall provide metal
templates or other approved devices to facilitate settings of blade angles in the field. One
template shall be provided attached to each fan unit in a location that is subject to the
Authority's approval. One template shall also be provided with each maintenance manual.
V01.3.4.2. Emergency fan housings, including motor mounts and motor supports shall be fabricated of
hot-rolled steel not less than 6 mm thick. Clearance between housing inner diameter and
blade tips shall be sufficient to allow for thermal growth difference between blades and steel
housing at temperature of 250 degrees C. Welds located in the air stream shall be ground
smooth. Flanged rings shall be continuously welded to the outer periphery at each end of the
housings, or flanges may be rolled as part of the housing. Provide remote lubrication fittings
for lubrication of fan and motor bearings from easily accessible location.
V01.3.4.3. The rotor assembly shall be fastened to the motor shaft by means of an approved- keyed
positive locking device. The rotor assembly shaft shall be an extension of the drive motor
shaft. Rotor assembly fastening to shaft shall be designed to prevent looseness during
temperature of 250 degree C.
V01.3.4.4. Motor mounts and motor supports shall be designed to support the entire weight of the impeller
and the motor, and to maintain the alignment of the fan-motor unit assembly in the specified
mounting position and to maintain vibration levels within the specified limits. Motor supports
shall be sufficient in number to provide the required strength and rigidity and shall be
continuously welded to the motor mount and to the housing. Fan motor and fan rotor
assembly shall be totally enclosed within the fan housing and not protrude at either end of the
fan housing.
V01.3.4.5. Nosepiece coverplates, access doors, hatch covers, and aerodynamic separation plates, where
provided, shall be secured by means of positive fastening devices which are fully effective
for both directions of impeller rotation, for all blade settings, and for all conditions of
operation specified herein.
V01.3.4.6. Emergency fan-motor unit assembly supports shall be of carbon steel not less than 10 mm
thick. Supports for horizontally floor mounted fans shall include fan-motor unit structural
steel base with vertical supports extending from the base to the fan housing centreline flange
and with horizontal thrust plates extending over the full length of the fan housing. Vertical
supports and thrust plates shall be welded continuously to the surfaces with which they
come into contact.
V01.3.4.7. Contractor shall provide a 6-mm thick silicone gasket between all adjacent companion flanges;
width of gasket shall be same as flange width. Gaskets shall be capable of withstanding an
ambient temperature of 250-degree C for two hour without degradation of sealing ability
and without emitting toxic or noxious fumes.
V01.3.4.8. Sufficient lifting eyes shall be provided on each fan assembly to facilitate on-site
installation and removal of the fans.
V01.3.4.9. Bolts shall be not less than 12 mm diameter. Bolts, nuts, washers and lock washers used on
the fans and components shall be Type 316 stainless steel, silicon bronze, or other corrosion-
resistant material as approved.
V01.3.5.1. After fabrication and prior to assembly, all inside and outside surfaces of all fan housings, fan
housing extensions, supports and fan-motor unit bases shall be prepared in conformity to the
requirements of SP-10 New White Blast Cleaning and shall be given a rust-inhibiting
coating, which may consist of an approved plastic coating, or bonderizing, or phosphatizing,
followed by the application of a suitable rust-inhibiting primer and finish paint that is resistant
to abrasion and to exposure to elevated temperatures. Surface finish shall be capable of
withstanding for one hour in an ambient temperature of 250 degree C without degradation
of its protective quality, and without emitting toxic or noxious fumes.
V01.3.5.2. Surface finishes damaged during transport or assembly shall be restored to their original
condition and colour by the installing Contractor.
V01.3.6.1. The motors shall be designed for continuous operation for a period of at least two hour at a
maximum ambient temperature of 250 degree C.
V01.3.6.2. Motors shall be equipped with factory installed resistance space heaters within the motor
enclosure to prevent condensation of moisture in the motor windings. The heaters shall
be energised whenever the motor is not in operation and shall be automatically de-energised
whenever the motor is in operation. The heaters shall be provided with leads terminated in
a terminal box external to the fan housing. Motor space heaters shall be energised within 24
hours of the time when the unit is installed at site.
V01.3.6.3. Nameplate kilowatt of the motors shall be as indicated. Kilowatt input required by the fans
shall not exceed the nameplate kilowatt of the motors at any point on the fan performance
curve in either direction of airflow. Motors shall have a minimum overall efficiency of 90.0
percent at the rated load. The locked rotor torque shall not be less than 175 percent of the
motor full load torque with rated voltage and frequency at the motor terminals.
V01.3.6.4. Motors shall be capable, under the specified operating conditions, of accelerating the impeller
from a standstill to rated rotational speed in not more than 15 seconds after being energised.
Motors shall also be capable of decelerating the impeller and accelerating to rated rotational
speed in the opposite direction in not more than 30 seconds after being energised for
reverse rotation.
V01.3.6.5. Motors shall be rated in accordance with NEMA Standards for the locked rotor input
(kilovolt-amperes per kilowatt) required to meet the specified acceleration performance.
Motor and shaft shall be designed for full plug reversal. Motors shall have a minimum of
Type H insulation and shall be rated for Class F temperature rise when tested at the service
factor load as a minimum requirement. Motor service factor shall be 1.15.
V01.3.6.6. Motors shall be provided with a minimum of six (two per phase) Resistance Temperature
Detectors (RTDs) / Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) and wired to a terminal box
external to the fan housing for remote indication of excessive running temperature during
normal operation. These wires shall be taped and terminated in the junction box. The
electronics required to interpret the RTD / PTC signal and generate an alarm for each phase
shall be included in the instrument panel.
V01.3.6.7. During continuous operation, motors shall be insensitive to line voltage variation of ten
percent above or below the rated voltage and to normal frequency variation. Motors
shall be able to accelerate to full speed at rated load with starting voltage (dip) of 25 percent
below rated voltage of the motor.
V01.3.6.8. Minimum power factor of motors shall be 85 percent of the high speed winding at the rated
load.
V01.3.6.9. The motor shall be designed for accelerating fan impeller from standstill to operating speed
without exceeding the rated temperature rise.
V01.3.6.10. The motor shall be single winding. The starting and accelerating torque on motor
windings shall be sufficient to permit the motor rotor and fan impeller to attain full
winding speed without tripping the motor controller overload relays, which shall be set at a
current corresponding to 140 percent of the motor full load current.
V01.3.7.1. Motor shafts shall be steel, designed and constructed to support and drive the fan impeller
under all specified operating conditions.
V01.3.7.2. Motor starters and controls shall be furnished by the electrical contractor.
V01.3.7.3. Each motor shall have at least two ball or roller type grease lubricated, electric motor grade,
noise tested bearings selected for the specified operating conditions of the fan motor unit.
The bearings shall have a minimum L-10 life rating of 40,000 hours as defined by the latest
standards of the Anti-Friction Bearings Manufacturers Association (AFBMA).
V01.3.7.4. Grease lines shall be brought from each bearing to accessible fittings, external to the fan
housing, at the ground floor level of the fan room. The lines shall be fabricated of stainless
steel or other corrosion resistant alloy, seamless metallic tubing. The tubing shall not be
crushed or scored during installation and the lines shall have neither kinks nor sharp bends.
Lines penetrating the housing shall be rigidly secured to the housings to prevent vibration
of the lines and be provided with grommets. Grease supply lines shall terminate in straight
lubrication fittings. Grease fittings shall only allow the proper amount of grease to each
bearing. The bearing lubricant shall be capable of providing the lubrication properties
specified by the bearing manufacturer under conditions of operation for Two hour with the
lubricant at a temperature of 250 degrees C.
V01.3.7.5. The motor leads shall be of cable, suitable for one hour at 250 degree C, wired to a
gasketted NEMA 12 / ISO Standard terminal box mounted externally to the fan housing.
The terminal box shall have screw type pressure terminals strips for terminating control
wires, exterior mounting lugs, full cover gasket. , The dimensions of the terminal box to be
coordinated with the space requirement for the termination of the suitable size of cable.The
terminal block should be suitable for termination of cables of suitable size. The conduit
and terminal box shall be rigidly secured to the fan housing in a manner which will
prevent vibration and air leakage and shall be capable of withstanding 250 degree C for two
hour without causing fan failure. Terminal box shall be oriented to receive feeder conduits
from any direction. Motor leads shall be installed to avoid interference with control leads
and terminal strips. Sufficient cable slack shall be provided to permit testing of cables
without disconnecting any connections. The terminal box shall be designed to take the cables
of required sizes.
V01.3.8. Nameplates
V01.3.8.1. Each fan shall be provided with a stainless steel nameplate permanently stamped with the
name and address of the manufacturer, Contractor's identification number, fan type,
Authority designated fan number, shop order, serial number of fan, year manufacturer,
maximum safe operating speed of fan in revolutions per minute, fan impeller diameter,
maximum design operating speed and corresponding volume of air delivered and the fan
total pressures at density specified. The nameplate shall be securely screwed or riveted to
the exterior of fan housing in a conspicuous position. The “material for the AGRA METRO
Project” should be inscribed on the Name Plate.
V01.3.8.2. Each motor shall be provided with two identical stainless steel nameplates permanently
stamped with the name and address of the motor manufacturer, the motor kilowatt, voltage,
phase, frequency, insulation type, full load current, locked rotor indicating code letter,
minimum overall efficiency, the design temperature rise over ambient of the motor, type of
duty, the terminal connection chart for the motor, rating of space heater, speed in revolutions
per minute, service factor, motor type and serial number, bearing numbers and shop order
number. One nameplate shall be furnished on the motor and the other either riveted or
screwed on the exterior of the fan housing immediately adjacent to the fan nameplate.
V01.3.8.3. Each fan shall be provided with a 250 mm long by 40 mm wide metallic arrow that shall
indicate the direction of forward airflow. The arrow shall be rigidly and permanently
attached to the fan housing, in a position that can be readily viewed when the fan is in its final
operating position. 20 mm letters shall be engraved on the arrow to read as follows:
"EXHAUST".
V01.3.8.4. Each fan shall be provided with 200 mm long by 50 mm wide stainless steel plate
permanently stamped with the labels "Grease Line Supply Port" and "Grease Line Exit Port".
V01.3.8.5. All the nameplates and the arrows shall be placed so as to be readily visible.
V01.3.9. Low pressure differential switches
V01.3.9.1. Fans shall be equipped with a low-pressure differential switch.
V01.3.9.2. Differential pressure switches shall be diaphragm operated with 100 mm diaphragm to actuate
a single pole double throw snap switch. Motion of the diaphragm shall be restrained by a
calibrated spring that can be adjusted to set the exact pressure differential at which the
electrical switch will be actuated. Motion of the diaphragm shall be transmitted to the switch
button by means of a direct mechanical linkage.
V01.3.9.3. Operating Range: Plus 1500Pa, zinc die casting and steel stamping; zinc plated for 200 hour
salt spray resistance. Diaphragm shall be moulded silicone rubber. Calibration spring shall
be stainless steel.
V01.3.10.1. The Contractor shall perform factory tests as described below. The Authority's
representatives may, at their option, witness any or all tests. Observations made during
the tests and all test results shall be recorded in a document form, certified by the Contractor
and submitted to the Authority for approval.
V01.3.10.2. The proposed test procedure shall be furnished to the Authority prior to the factory tests.
V01.3.10.3. . Each unit must satisfactorily pass all specified factory tests as described below under
production fan tests.
V01.3.10.4. The test procedures specified herein shall be sequential in the order prescribed. Any fan
type or size or component thereof which fails to satisfactorily perform any test as specified
shall be considered unacceptable. Failing parts shall be replaced and the entire unit shall
be retested as specified herein.
V01.3.10.5. Before manufacture is begun on any ventilation fan-motor unit to be furnished, Contractor
shall submit full details of all test procedures, samples of all test report forms, and full
details of the methods by which the raw test data has been calculated, to the Authority for
approval.
V01.3.11.1. Motors shall be tested in accordance with the procedures specified in IEEE Publication 112 and
NEMA MG-1. A certified test report and certified performance curves verifying the theoretical
motor performance curves for all of the co-ordinates specified shall be submitted to the
Authority for approval. Performance curves for each type and size of fan motor shall be
plotted to a scale that will facilitate accurate readings.
V01.3.11.2. One motor of each nameplate kilowatt rating and service factor shall be tested for
forward and reverse modes as follows:
Tests to obtain actual fan motor performance curves verifying the calculated fan motor
performance curves submitted and other data specified hereinafter.
Tests to determine:
– Winding resistance
– Temperature rise
Dielectric tests
V01.3.11.3. The remaining motors shall be tested at its rated synchronous speed unwitnessed.
Reversible motors shall be tested in one direction. Tests shall include the following:
Winding resistance
Dielectric tests
No load speed
V01.3.11.4. The following data shall be plotted for each direction as ordinates versus kilowatts as
abscissas up to 115 percent full load:
Current, in amperes
Efficiency, in percentage
V01.3.11.5. The following data shall be plotted for each motor frame size as ordinates versus
revolutions per minute as abscissas:
Current in amperes
Torque in Nm
V01.3.11.6. The following information shall be imprinted on each motor performance graph:
Project title
Name of Contractor
Service factor
V01.3.11.7. Test data for the certified performance curves shall be recorded at the rated voltage and
frequency of the motor, continuously over the speed range from standstill to rated rotational
speed of the motor.
V01.3.12.1. Provide a certification that, for all fan hubs and blades, x-rays have been taken, with
notation of the x-ray numbers, and also that zyglo testing/ Coloured Dye Penetration Testing
has been performed. In addition, provide a complete list of the identification numbers for all
hubs and blades actually installed in each fan.
V01.3.12.2. Certification of visual acceptability, the x-ray procedure, the x-ray films, and proof of
traceability of conformance with alloy specifications of the metal used to cast the hub and
blades shall be submitted to the Authority for approval. The identification number of the x-
ray film shall be etched on each blade and hub at a location that will not create adverse
stress concentrations to reduce the design safety factor at the point of critical stress.
V01.3.13.1. At least One fan rotor assemblies manufactured and furnished for this Contract shall be
subjected to an over speed test at the factory as specified herein prior to assembly of the
complete fan-motor units.
V01.3.13.2. After radiographic inspection and after static and dynamic balancing, each completely
assembled fan impeller shall be spin tested in both directions. Spin testing of individual
components, such as blades and rotors, in lieu of testing complete impellers, is not
acceptable. Each fan impeller shall be spun at 125 percent of the maximum design
operating speed for a period of not less than three minutes. Following each spin test, a
visual inspection for surface defects shall be made by the Contractor. Certificates of visual
acceptability shall be submitted to the Authority for approval.
V01.3.14.1. After assembly each fan-motor unit shall be checked for bearing operation in both directions of
rotation. Defective bearings shall be replaced, and the fan shall be rechecked before further
testing. The vibration shall be measured in two radial planes, 90 degrees apart, and in the
axial direction. Measurements shall be made for each radial plane at the front and rear of
the fan. Measured maximum vibration shall not exceed peak-to-peak amplitudes of 1.2 mils
for fans operating at a nominal speed of 1,200 revolutions per minute or less.
V01.3.14.2. If measured vibration amplitude exceeds the specified maximum, or if the specified
vibration measurements reveal unacceptable vibration at any frequency other than rated
design operating speed, vibration amplitude shall be measured and recorded continuously
as the fan is accelerated from a standstill to rated design operating speed, and as the unit
coasts down from rated design operating speed to a standstill. The amplitude versus
frequency chart shall be analysed by the Contractor (Fan Manufacturer) to determine the
cause(s) of the unacceptable excessive vibration. Resonant frequencies shall be determined
and shall be demonstrated as not to occur within fan operating ranges. The analysis shall
be submitted to the Authority for approval and the cause(s) shall be corrected. The
Authority shall be furnished final vibration amplitude readings on all fan bearings.
V01.3.15.1. Each emergency fan shall be operated continuously for a total of 24 hours, 12 hours in the
forward (exhaust) mode and 12 hours in the reverse (supply) mode of rotation. During
reversal, fan shall be allowed to coast for a period of five minutes before being restarted in the
reverse direction.
V01.3.16.1. One fan-motor unit that has satisfactorily passed the preceding test and inspections
specified, shall be tested in accordance with the procedures specified in the AMCA 210,
latest edition, using a test set-up approved by the Authority.
V01.3.16.2. Fans shall be tested without flow cones or any other static regain devices. The fans shall be
tested at the blade angle that shall produce the required volume of air at the required system
pressure. This blade angle shall not be at its maximum setting. Test data shall be recorded
on AMCA data submittal forms, or the equivalent thereof, as approved by the Authority.
Certified test data, and certified performance curves for all of the co-ordinates specified shall
be submitted to the Authority for approval.
V01.3.16.3. Performance tests shall cover the range of airflow rates from no flow to free air
delivery. Performance tests of emergency fans shall cover this range of airflow rates in both
directions of airflow. Actual fan performance shall not be less than contract values.
V01.3.16.4. Triaxial Strain gauges shall be applied to two blades per impeller and to the hub of the unloaded
impeller of each fan. To accurately measure strains and stresses developed in each rotor, one strain
gauge at the midpoint and one strain gauge at the tip of blades on each side shall be applied on
minimum of two blades. In addition, one strain gauge shall be applied on impeller hub for each strain
gauged blade. The strains developed during performance testing shall be continuously measured and
monitored. The measured strains produced under the performance test load shall be used to calculate
the corresponding stresses. Stresses found shall not exceed sixty percent of the material yield strength
at 250°C. The methods of strain measurement and stress calculation shall be submitted to the
Authority for approval. The Contractor shall submit the manufacturer's notarised certification that
the measured strains and the corresponding calculated stresses represent the strains and stresses
developed in all other blades of the pre-production fan motor unit being tested. Calculated
maximum expected stresses, and the design properties of the material used to fabricate the
impeller blades and hub, shall also be submitted to the Authority for approval. Strain gauge testing
shall be performed using the same testing set-up and operating conditions as the fan
full scale performance test.
V01.3.16.5. Natural frequency readings of the fan blades shall be taken and included in the test report.
Procedures used to determine natural frequency shall be submitted for approval. No blade’s
natural frequency shall occur within the fan rpm from 0 to 300% of the nominal fan operating
speed.
V01.3.16.6. In the event that the tests show that the fan-motor units do not comply with the
requirements as to characteristics and performance, or that the brake kilowatt will exceed
by five percent or more than the brake kilowatt shown in the theoretical data submitted by
the Contractor, the fan-motor units will be rejected unless changes are made therein and
tests repeated until the specific requirements are met.
V01.3.16.7. Upon the completion of the fan-motor units' performance tests, submit two complete copies
of all raw test data.
V01.3.16.8. After the completion of fan-motor units performance tests, submit for each fan-motor unit
size, performance curves and tables of performance data calculated from shop test data, at
each of the test points at each rotational direction.
V01.3.16.9. The tables shall consist of numerical values at each of the test points for the following:
Volume of air delivery in cubic meters per second
Fan static pressure in Pascals
Voltage in volts
V01.3.16.10. Submit fan-motor unit performance curves verifying the theoretical performance curves
previously submitted. Test points shall be indicated on performance curves.
V01.3.17.1. Preproduction unit which has satisfactorily passed all preceding tests and inspections
specified shall be tested in accordance with the induct test procedure of ANSI 12.34 to obtain
sound power level data at eight-octave band centre frequencies from 63 Hertz to 8,000
Hertz.
V01.3.17.2. Fan shall be tested with specified nominal airflow in both forward and reverse directions.
Test data shall be submitted to the Authority for approval in tabular form.
V01.3.18.1. One fan motor unit which has satisfactorily passed all preceding tests and inspections specified shall be
subject to reversal tests. These tests shall require operation at rated operating speed for approximately
3-1/2 hours with the unit oriented in the position that it will be installed, and shall require three
cycles of rotation reversal. A cycle of rotation reversal is defined as reversal from one direction
of motor impeller rotation to the other direction of rotation, and then back to the first direction
of rotation.
V01.3.18.2. The reversal test shall begin with the fan unit operated in the forward direction of airflow
for a period of 30 minutes.
V01.3.18.3. At the end of the first 30-minute period of operation in the forward direction of
airflow, the motor shall be electrically reversed, with a 10-second time delay imposed
between the interruption of power and re-energising of the motor for reversed rotation.
V01.3.18.4. After the motor has been re-energised, the fan shall be operated in the reverse direction of
airflow for a period of 30 minutes.
V01.3.18.5. The test shall be continued, with alternating 30-minute periods of operation in the
forward and reverse directions of airflow, until six rotation reversals have been performed. At
the end of each 30-minute period of operation, the fan-unit motor shall be electrically
reversed, with a 10-second time delay imposed between each change in direction until six
rotation reversals have been performed.
V01.3.18.6. After three cycles of rotation reversal, i.e., six reversals of the direction of motor and
impeller rotation have been performed, the fan-motor unit shall be operated for a period
of 30 minutes.
V01.3.18.7. At the end of the last 30-minute period of operation, the fan shall be de-energised, and
permitted to coast to a standstill.
V01.3.18.8. Resistance of the motor winding insulation shall be measured just prior to the start of the
reversal test, and immediately after the end of the test. In addition, the temperature of the
motor windings and of the motor frame shall be continuously recorded throughout the test.
Certification of successful performance of the reversal test and certified test data shall be
submitted to the Authority for approval.
V01.3.19.1. All fans shall be furnished and installed as specified herein. The manufacturer's rigging
instructions shall be carefully followed. The Contractor shall make certain that the
installation of all supports, gaskets, hardware, etc., are accomplished with precision and
the exercise of extreme care so as to assure safe, accurate and trouble- free fan installation.
V01.3.19.2. The fan installation shall be done in the presence of the Fan Manufacture's Field
Service Representative.
V01.3.19.3. Prior to proceeding with the work described above, the Contractor shall submit for the
Authority's approval eight copies of detailed drawings showing all fan installations
including dimensions, supports, hardware, installation methods, and all other pertinent data.
V01.3.19.4. Fans shall be connected to transition companion flanges with 6 mm thick solid silicone
gasket between.
V01.3.20.1. Upon completion of the installation of the ventilation equipment at the fan room and the
installation and verification of the power and local control wiring, the Contractor shall notify
the Authority in writing at least two weeks prior to the field testing to have the Authority
present to witness the tests. The Contractor shall furnish written instructions for testing of
the fan motor units in the field. This instruction shall be submitted as a part of the
operating and maintenance instruction.
V01.3.20.2. Field tests shall be performed under the technical guidance and supervision of the Fan Manufacture's
Field Service Representative. The Fan Manufacture's Field Service Representative shall provide
the field test instrumentation and perform the tests. The Fan Manufacture's Field Service
Representative shall measure and record the vibration amplitude; power consumption; no-
load, starting and full load voltages; starting and full load currents; and acceleration time.
V01.3.20.3. Time of operational testing shall be two hours per fan; one hour in each flow direction.
All fans in a station shall be operating simultaneously when determining and recording the
electrical measurement. Prior to the operational tests the vibration and electrical
measurements shall be recorded for each fan motor unit at design speeds in each direction.
V01.3.20.4. Testing for the ventilation equipment shall not be undertaken until electric service and local
controls can be provided for testing.
V01.3.20.5. Each fan motor unit shall be checked for obviously rough operation after the fans are
installed. Defective bearings shall be replaced with new bearings and the fan(s) shall be
rechecked. Amplitude and frequency of radial and axial vibrations at the bearings shall be
measured, recorded, and checked for conformity to the Specifications.
V01.3.20.6. Each fan motor unit on which the specified vibration field tests have been successfully
performed shall be tested to confirm that such fans are operational. Each emergency fan
motor unit shall be proven operational in both directions of airflow, including one reversing
of direction of rotation.
V01.3.20.7. When two fans are to start, starting sequence shall be provided with 20 seconds
interval. Both fans shall achieve full speed in 35 seconds. When both fans are to be
reversed, fans shall be de-energized for 30 second. After 30 seconds, the selected fan shall be
energised for reverse rotation with successive fan energised at 20 seconds.
V01.3.20.8. Electricians to energise the ventilation equipment where required and assist the Contractor
during testing shall be provided by the Contractor.
V01.3.20.9. Any defect that develops within the ventilation equipment during the test shall be
corrected by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Authority.
V01.3.20.10. Any defect that develops with the installation work during the test shall be corrected by
the Contractor at no additional cost to the Authority.
V01.3.21. After completion of all field tests and after the final visit by the Fan Manufacture's Field
Service Representative, Contractor shall submit a field test and inspection report. Field test
report shall include copies of raw data, measured results, calculations, and all data
derived from tests to confirm compliance with specified performance, noise, vibration and
equipment efficiencies.
TABLE OF CONTENT
V02.1. General ................................................................................................................................1116
V02.2. Quality control .....................................................................................................................1116
V02.3. Technical and installation requirements ...............................................................................1119
V02.1. General
V02.1.1. This Section specifies the requirements for furnishing pneumatically operated
dampers, nozzles and appurtenances as specified herein. Dampers shall be the product of a
single manufacturer whose name shall appear on the performance curves and other
data submitted and who shall have previously furnished bypass dampers to rail transit
agencies for a period of at least five years.
V02.2.1. Materials and workmanship shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the
following standards and codes to the extent specified herein. The publications listed
below form a part of these specifications to the extent referenced. The publications are
referred to in the text by basic designation only.
A123, Zinc (Hot Galvanised) Coatings on Products Fabricated from Rolled, Pressed and
Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars, and Strip.
A193, Alloy Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High Temperature
Service.
A239, Locating the Thinnest Spot in Zinc (Galvanised) Coating on Iron or Steel
Articles by the Preece Test (Copper Sulfate Dip).
A525, Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Hot Galvanised) by the Hot-Dip Process.
V02.2.1.4. American Welding Society (AWS):
D1.1, Structural Welding Code - Steel.
V02.2.2.1. Before giving the manufacturer Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall submit to the
Authority for review and approval, the names and qualifications of the manufacturer of
tunnel ventilation system damper units. Qualification statement shall include but need
not be limited to the following data:
– Curve plotted with ordinate as pressure drop in Pascals versus face velocity in
meters per second.
– Curve plotted with ordinate as duct pressure in Pascals versus leakage in percentage of
maximum flow.
– Project title.
– Air density.
A complete list of projects on which similar tunnel ventilation dampers for rail transit
projects have been installed or furnished. List shall include:
– Contract number(s)
– A list of all known failures including, their apparent causes, corrective work affected,
and a description of equipment service and operating conditions.
V02.2.2.2. The Contractor shall submit to the Authority a Certificate of Compliance signifying
that equipment to be furnished under this Contract meets the requirements specified
herein.
V02.2.2.3. Within 14 days after successful completion of all factory tests specified herein and of
any additional tests conducted at the Contractor's own option, the Contractor shall
submit the following:
Certified results for all tests conducted. All test data shall be bound in one report.
The test report shall be indexed and cross-referenced in an easily understood manner.
V02.2.2.4. Supply the Authority with spare damper operators, identical to the operators installed
to operate the dampers. The damper operator motors shall be complete and labelled with
the pneumatic operator characteristics.
V02.3.1. Description
V02.3.1.1. Dampers shall be furnished complete with damper mounting frames / joining angles
for each damper module and all components and incidentals as specified herein; with all
structural support elements and hardware required for installation of the damper
modules into composite damper units, and with any additional accessories which may be
needed in order to meet the performance requirements as provided in these
Specifications.
V02.3.1.3. Each damper module shall have integral channel frames with interconnecting linkage
between modules and operators which shall permit all blades in damper assembly to
operate in unison. Modules shall be individually removable from composite assembly.
All damper modules shall be surface mounted against the face of structural steel members,
(columns, mullions, lintels, beams and embedded framing members) which shall be
furnished by the damper manufacturer, and installed by the installing Contractor.
Structural steel members shall have pre-drilled companion flanges matching the size and
spacing of mounting holes in each damper module frame.
V02.3.1.4. Dampers and damper companion flanges may be fabricated in multiple sections where
required. The sections shall be interconnected with bolted splice plates. The sections shall
be of such size, which can be brought into the fan rooms and vent shafts through the
access provided and to facilitate handling, erection and disassembly. Prior to
fabrication, the existing concrete openings for dampers and the equipment access shall be
field verified.
V02.3.1.5. Linkages and bearings of all damper modules shall be arranged in such a manner, that
they are easily accessible upon removal of gasketted cover plates, without removal of
entire damper module.
V02.3.1.6. All dampers furnished shall be suitable for installation in either a vertical plane or a
horizontal plane, as required.
V02.3.1.7. The dampers shall be designed to be readily assembled in the field from modular
panels. Each damper panel shall be of the multiple parallel / opposed blade type, with an
independent channel frame; and shall be factory assembled complete with frames, blades,
shafts, bearings, seals, linkage, and all accessories required to erect the modular panels
into composite damper units which are functional as specified herein. Dampers shall be
furnished complete with all structural support members and hardware required to
complete the installation.
V02.3.1.8. Multiple modular panel dampers may be operated by use of suitable operating mechanism.
V02.3.1.9. Dampers shall be arranged for pneumatic operation to two blade positions: fully-open
and fully-closed. Each damper shall be furnished complete with pneumatic operators
sufficient in number and capacity to actuate all modular panels in a damper unit in
unison under the operating conditions specified herein. Dampers shall be suitable for
continuous operation in either open or closed position.
V02.3.1.10. Dampers shall have a net free face area of not less than 80 percent measured to the
inside of the damper frame clear opening when blades are fully open.
V02.3.1.11. Upon loss of compressed air, dampers shall move to the power-off position (open or
closed) as indicated by the Contractors design.
V02.3.1.12. Dampers shall be so designed that the dampers will be fully operational in accordance
with the performance requirements specified herein after exposure to an airstream
temperature of 250 degrees C for two hour. Dampers and components shall be capable
of withstanding the stresses caused by pressure transient pressures from train piston
action, and by reversal of airflow and thermal shock caused by temperature changes of
from 0 to plus 250 degrees C. Submit manufacturer's certificate of compliance and the
results of previous test if conducted for certification of such requirements.
V02.3.1.13. Each damper module shall be provided with limit switches for remote indication of the
fully openfully closed position of the damper. Switches shall be provided with independent
contacts mounted to positively detect full-open and full-closed positions. Limit switches
for dampers required to operate in high temperature shall be suitable for operating at 250
degrees C for two hour.
V02.3.1.14. For multiple module dampers, and dampers that operate in a group, limit switches
shall be wired in series to provide a common open or closed indication for each
damper unit, or damper group.
V02.3.1.15. Damper and Actuators assembly shall be capable of being fully cycled (open to close to
open, or vice versa) for a minimum of 100,000 cycles before failure occurs. Damper
manufacturer shall submit a certificate along with test data guaranteeing this
performance.
V02.3.2.1. Damper blades shall have an airfoil cross-section and shall be fabricated of Type 304
stainless steel each skin should be a minimum thickness of 1.2 mm. The width of the
blades measured in the direction of airflow shall not be less than 150 mm and shall not be
greater than 300 mm. Damper blades in the open position shall not extend beyond the
damper frame. Damper blades shall have metal to metal overlap in the closed position.
Blade edge sealing strips, regardless of their composition, will not be permitted as a
substitute for a true blade to blade overlap.
V02.3.2.2. Damper blade shafts shall be fabricated of stainless steel Type 304. Blade shafts shall
be full-length construction and shall be not less than 20 mm in diameter or square. . The
design of the damper blade shafts shall incorporate the devices required for locking
the blades onto the shafts. Damper blade shaft axis shall always be horizontal.
V02.3.2.3. Damper blade deflection, with blade supported by shaft, shall not exceed 1/360 of the span
length between centres of shaft bearings with damper in closed position while
withstanding the maximum combined differential pressure of 2500 Pa and maximum
temperature of 250 degrees C.
V02.3.2.4. The damper blade and shaft assemblies shall be supported at each end by means of self-
lubricating sleeve type bearings, suitable for operating at 250 degrees C for two hour.
Bearing mounting shall be external to frame.
V02.3.2.5. Damper linkage shall be external heavy duty industrial type, fabricated of stainless steel
Type 304 not less than 6 mm by 20 mm flat bars. Linkage shall interconnect damper
blade shaft crank arms which shall be fabricated of stainless steel not less than 5 mm
thick. The linkage bearings shall be fabricated of brass or other material suitable for
the specified operating conditions, as approved by the Authority. The linkage brackets
shall be side mounted and mechanically interconnected with the shafts. . Linkage
shall be capable of transmitting a minimum of 150 percent of operator load. All
linkage parts and assemblies shall be accessible for maintenance and repair after final
assembly. A turnbuckle linkage adjustment shall be provided with each linkage to
provide a convenient means of adjusting the length of the connecting rod and thereby the
damper closure.
V02.3.2.6. Damper frames shall be a channel cross-section with not less than an 200 mm or
greater than 300 mm web and not less than 50 mm flanges on the both sides and shall be
fabricated of stainless steel Type 304 with a minimum thickness of 3mm. Reinforcing
bosses, and dovetail grooves for mounting frame seals, shall be integral parts of the
channel configuration. The corners of the frames shall be welded and reinforced by
means of riveted gusset plates. Linkage elements shall be sized so that the maximum
deflection of any element shall not exceed L/360, where "L" is the length.
V02.3.2.7. Pneumatic operated dampers shall be furnished complete with all structural support
elements necessary for the installation of the dampers, including the following: all
intermediate supports, both horizontal and vertical; all clip angles and other framing
members as required at the head, sill, mullion and jambs of each damper assembly; and
all screws, bolts, nuts, washers and other hardware required to complete the
installation. All intermediate supports, framing members, and hardware required for
assembly and installation of the damper modules shall be fabricated of stainless or
cadmium plated steel.
V02.3.2.8. Lifting lugs/ holes/eves shall of suitable strength shall be provided in sufficient number
to facilitate future on-site installation and removal. .
V02.3.2.9. Damper companion flange grid assemblies shall match the damper frame.
V02.3.2.10. Mullion supports shall be designed by the Contractor. The mullions shall be the full
length and width of the dampers. Mullion supports shall be of galvanised steel and
shall have punched or drilled holes, equally spaced for damper module attachments.
Number of holes and space between the holes shall be selected by the Contractor.
Mullion supports shall be installed by the Contractor. The Contractor may recommend
alternative method for mullion attachment to damper companion flanges and align the
equipment with the flange.
Flanges shall have punched or drilled holes equally spaced not more than 150 mm on
centres.
In accessible areas, fasteners shall be hexagonal head bolts with hexagonal nuts,
provided with heavy-duty lock washers.
In inaccessible areas, fasteners shall be hexagonal head tap bolts, provided with heavy-
duty lock washers.
Bolts shall be not less than 12 mm in diameter. Nuts and bolts shall conform to the
requirements of ASTM A 193, Grade B8M or Grade B8MA, equivalent to AISI Type
316, with suitable lock washers.
V02.3.2.11. Damper operator mounting brackets shall be fabricated of not less than 3mm thick
stainless steel Type 304 and shall be bolted to the mounting surface. Mounting
bracket shall be constructed in such a manner that bracket cannot be moved by hand to
cause binding or misalignment of bearing(s) and damper shaft(s).
V02.3.2.12. Contractor shall provide a 6 mm thick fire rated gasket covering the full width of each
flange between damper frames and damper companion frames and between damper
frames and other associated companion flanges. Gasket material shall be suitable for 250
degree C for one hour without emitting toxic or noxious fumes.
V02.3.2.13. Mounting members for Wall Mounted Dampers. All mounting members needed to
install each wall mounted damper in its respective opening shall be furnished and
installed by the Contractor. All mounting members shall be galvanised steel angles all
sides, size 80 mm by 80 mm by 8 mm. The mounting members shall be fastened to the
damper by means of stainless steel fasteners. Each damper shall be brought to the site as
an integral unit, except that mounting members shall be fastened and installed in the
field. The mounting members specified in this paragraph are in addition to the module
and damper frames specified herein.
V02.3.2.14. Provide the Authority with technical support bearings. Quantity of technical support
bearings shall be five percent of each type used on dampers. Store bearings in secure
storage containers with permanent labels identifying number, type, manufacturer, bearing
location on dampers, and the Authority Construction Contract Number.
V02.3.3.1. The damper operators shall be pneumatic type. Electro-Hydraulic operators shall not
be used. The actuators shall be capable of actuating the dampers as specified herein
against differential pressure of 2500 Pa across the dampers. The operators shall be
capable of changing the position of the dampers from fully closed to fully open, or
from fully open to fully closed within a period of not more than 30 seconds. Time
duration to close or to open the damper shall be adjustable in the field. The actuators shall
be selected and their required quantity shall be determined, such that the normal torque
output required for each damper or damper section does not exceed two-thirds of the
rated actuator capacity. This selection criterion provides that each actuator has at least 50
percent excess capacity. However, in no case shall there be less than two pneumatic
actuators provided per damper installation, and each actuator shall be linked
independently to damper sections of equal size. Pneumatic actuators shall be able to
operate continuously under the specified ambient temperature conditions.
V02.3.3.2. Linkage from the damper actuator shall be fabricated of stainless steel Type 304 and
shall be connected to the interconnecting blade linkage with a stainless steel pin, such that
full force of operator is applied to the blade connecting linkage.
V02.3.3.6. Conduit boxes shall have tightly fitting, gasketted covers designed to resist the
entrance of dust and fluids; and shall have threaded conduit openings. All electrical
components, conduit and boxes shall be weatherproof. Conduit boxes shall be mounted to
the motor mounting plates.
V02.3.3.7. The initial charge of lubricants for damper components shall be supplied by the
manufacturer.
V02.3.3.8. Co-ordinate with damper manufacturer the installation of damper pneumatic operators
from operational and service standpoint.
V02.3.4.1. All galvanised parts shall have either a hot-dipped or an electro-deposited zinc
coating. The weight of the coating shall be not less than 750 grams per square meter of
surface. The zinc coating shall be performed after the material is fabricated. The use of
zinc pigmented paint in lieu of galvanising will not be allowed. The galvanising shall
conform to ASTM A 123; and withstand an eight dip Preece Test in accordance with
ASTM A 239.
V02.3.5. Nameplates
V02.3.5.1. Each damper shall be provided with a stainless steel nameplate permanently stamped with
the name and address of the manufacturer, Contractor's model type, serial number and the
Authority's designated damper number.
V02.3.5.2. Each damper pneumatic actuator shall be provided with stainless steel nameplate.
V02.3.6. Screens
V02.3.6.1. Screens mounted on damper module frame shall be one-inch mesh No. 10 U.S.S.
gauge galvanised steel wire. Each screen shall be complete with a frame for rigidity. The
screen shall be reinforced across the shorter dimension with 30 mm by 30mm by 3mm
galvanised steel angles on 600 mm maximum centres.
V02.3.6.2. Screen companion flanges shall be bolted to damper companion flanges with bolts
spaced not more than 300 mm on centre.
V02.3.7.1. The Authority may, at his option, witness any or all of the tests specified herein. The
Contractor shall notify the Authority, in writing, in not less than three weeks in
advance as to the location and dates of the factory tests.
V02.3.7.2. One damper unit shall be subjected to tests. The test shall be conducted in a test
facility located either at the manufacturer's plant, or at a suitably equipped testing
laboratory. The test facility shall be approved by the Authority.
V02.3.7.3. The damper shall be tested in accordance with AMCA 500-D-58 and AMCA 510-04,
the latest edition using a test set-up approved by the Authority as appropriate for the
intended installation of the dampers. Test data shall be recorded on AMCA data
submittal forms, or the equivalent thereof as approved by the Authority. Certified test
data, and certified performance curves for all of the co-ordinates specified in these
Specifications shall be submitted to the Authority for approval. Minimum test section shall
be 1200 mm by 1200 mm.
Maximum leakage in percentage of flow with 2500 Pa pressure differential across the
closed damper.
Maximum pressure drop across damper in fully open position with a uniform face velocity
of 10 m/s.
A detailed analysis for submission by the manufacturer to demonstrate that the various damper
components at their point of critical stress do not exceed the endurance limit stress of the
material. Calculated maximum expected stresses for both the normal design pressure
condition and the test condition, together with design properties of the material used to
fabricate the damper blades and shafts, shall be submitted to the Authority for approval.
V02.3.7.5. Operational Test: The damper, while remaining in the fully closed position, shall be
subject to not less than 30 pressure reversals in one hour while withstanding a differential
pressure of not less than 2500 Pa.
V02.3.8.1. All dampers, connecting bars, linkages and operators shall be installed and adjusted so that:
when a damper is fully open, the damper blades shall be parallel to air flow to provide
minimum friction loss and obstruction to airflow, when a damper is fully closed, the
damper blades shall be perpendicular to the airflow with seals pressing against mating
surfaces along their entire length to provide tight closure and minimum air leakage.
V02.3.8.2. There shall be no flutter, rattling or vibration of damper, connecting bar and linkage
either when the damper is operating or when the damper is in the fully open or fully
closed positions. Each damper shall be installed so as to provide smooth operation,
opening and closing without shock or slamming.
V02.3.8.3. All damper linkage shall be properly installed and connected to its perspective
operator to prevent blade flutter and to insure against connecting bar and linkage
distortion or binding during operation. Undue flexure or bending of connecting bars and
linkage shall be cause for rejection. Such connecting bar and/or linkage shall be replaced
with either a corrected design, higher strength materials, proper size of components or a
combination of the aforesaid, as required.
V02.3.8.4. Damper and Damper Openings. Particular attention is called to the fact that nominal
dimensions are often indicated on the drawings for construction of the dampers. However,
the actual openings where dampers are to be installed may vary from the indicated
dimensions. In providing dampers to close these openings, the Contractor shall verify all
dimensions in the field and shall design and build each frame to fit the respective opening,
without leaving spaces between the frame and structure. All slight unavoidable spaces
between the frame and the structure shall be filled to the satisfaction of the Authority, so
that the damper openings shall be completely airtight. The aforesaid spaces shall be
filled with grout or neat Portland cement or other approved sealing materials, all
properly bonded to the existing surface.
V02.3.9.1 The Contractor shall provide a field service Representative and inspection to the
Authority to ensure that the dampers and damper operators supplied therein are properly
installed and tested.
V02.3.9.2 Field service shall be performed periodically as required during the period of performance
of this contract.
V02.3.9.3 The Authority shall be advised in writing of the name and title of the proposed
Damper Manufacture's Field Service Representative, who upon the Authority's approval
shall have complete authority to represent and to act for the Contractor.
V02.3.9.4 The duties, responsibilities, and qualifications of the Damper Manufacture's Field
Service Employer’s Representative shall be:
Advise installation Contractors on the proper procedures for the installation of the damper
equipment.
To prepare and submit to the Authority a typewritten report on all activities and
findings for each visit within 15 working days of each visit. The final report shall
give results and findings of field tests below. Payment for each visit will not be
authorised until written service reports have been received and accepted by the
Authority.
The Contractor shall furnish written instructions for testing the dampers in
the field as part of the operating and maintenance instructions.
After completion of reversal tests each damper operator shall be de-energised and
checked to confirm that it is driven to its "power off" position within 15 seconds
after being de-energised.
Any defect that develops within the equipment during the test shall be corrected
by the Contractor at no additional cost to The Authority.
Any defect that develops with the installation work during the test shall be
corrected by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Authority.
V02.3.10.1 Access:
No claim shall be entertained for difficulties in access to the site of works, crossing of
drawings ponds, railway tracks, culverts, telephone duct, electric culverts, rocky area,
seepage of water from any source etc.
The contractor shall have to start the work at the available reach. The contractor shall
not be eligible for any compensation on account of the delay caused due to non-
availability of the site to be arranged by the employer except extension to date of
completion.
V02.3.10.2 Scope:
Contractor is required to verify the Nozzle Size and design as per the site
requirement. Final Nozzle analysis is in the scope of this contract. Any
Modification required to achieve the desired performance is under the scope of
this contract.
Lifting lug, Parting flange, flow straightener, Top/bottom sheet, side sheet,
jointing sheet, End flange shall be made up of SS-304 conforming to latest
standards with latest amendment (if any). The body sheet shall be 2.5mm thick
stainless steel (SS304) including all supporting angles.
V02.3.10.4 Welding:
All welding processed by MIG, EIG and spot shall meet the requirements of
international standards. Contractors shall provide copies of relevant standards for
the process used.
The detailed quality assurance plan shall be submitted by the contractor to the
employer for approval and implementation during the execution of the work.
TABLE OF CONTENT
V03.1. General ..........................................................................................................................1131
V03.2. Quality control ...............................................................................................................1131
V03.3. Technical and installation requirement ..........................................................................1132
General
V03.1.1. This Section specifies the requirements for furnishing sufficient noise and vibration
measures on his plant/equipment. Sound attenuators shall be the product of a single
manufacturer who shall have previously furnished such acoustic equipment for a period
of at least five years.
V03.2.1. The Contractor shall submit to the Authority a Certificate of Compliance signifying
that equipment to be furnished under this Contract meets the requirements specified
herein.
V03.2.2. Within 14 days after successful completion of all factory tests specified herein and of
any additional tests conducted at the Contractor's own option, the Contractor shall
submit the following:
Certified results for all tests conducted. All test data shall be bound in one report.
The test report shall be indexed and cross-referenced in an easily understood manner.
V03.2.3. Nameplate shall be attached to each item of acoustic equipment showing Manufacturer's
name and address, serial and model numbers and the normal direction flow.
V03.2.4. The sound attenuators shall be tested on dynamic insertion loss performance in
accordance with BS4718 or ASTM-E477 ‘Duct to reverberation room” method with air
flowing through the sound attenuator at rated capacity, in both forward and reverse flow
direction. The test section shall be at the middle of a long straight duct run to reduce
the effect on random incidence of the sound wave and to obtain a more reliable pressure
loss rating of the air downstream of the sound attenuator.
V03.2.5. Acoustic material for the sound attenuator shall be tested on sound transmission loss
performance and sound absorption coefficients in accordance with ASTM E90-61-66
G70, E413-73 and ASTM C423-66 whichever is appropriate.
V03.2.6. The sound attenuators shall be classified as non-combustible in accordance with BS476
Class O.
V03.3.1.1. The sound attenuators shall be selected to enable noise limits inside and outside to be
achieved.
V03.3.1.2. The sound attenuators selected shall be suitably matched to the system and shall add as
little as possible to system resistance. The geometry of selected attenuators shall not result
in requirements for sharp transformation in adjacent ductwork, shall not interfere with
adjacent services or with reasonable access to services and shall not adversely affect
the aerodynamic performance of the system or encourage regeneration of noise local to
the attenuator.
V03.3.1.3. The sound attenuator shall be rectangular in section with flanges on both ends. Outer casing shall be
made of a minimum 1.6mm thick galvanised steel while the internal partition shall be made of
not less than 0.8mm thick perforated stainless steel (SS-316). Casing shall be properly
considered as a part of the attenuation system and the casing thickness shall be chosen to
include consideration of the acoustic properties required.
V03.3.1.4. The steel sheets for the outer casing and the perforated sheets of the splitters shall be
made from continuous sheets.
V03.3.1.5. The inlets and discharge ends shall be bell mouth shape with the intake bell mouth
made from a minimum of 0.8mm stainless steel (SS-316), properly jointed to the
perforated sheets.
V03.3.1.6. The splitters shall be attached to the casing with reinforcement such that no part of the
splitters shall vibrate or detach from the casing during operation. The perforated sheets
shall be properly stiffened to avoid deformation due to the weight of other splitter
modules.
3
V03.3.1.7. The infill shall be of inorganic mineral of glass fibre of at least 40kg/m and be packed
under at least 10% compression to eliminate voids due to vibration and settling.
Material shall be inert and vermin and moisture proof.
V03.3.1.8. All cut surfaces of the sheet metal and welded spots shall be coated with zinc rich
paint.
V03.3.1.9. All seams of the sound attenuators shall be sealed with a duct sealing compound and
shall be air tight when operating at 1.5kPa static pressure and rated capacity.
V03.3.1.10. Sound attenuators shall not fail structurally when subjected pressure fluctuations of 2
kPa.
V03.3.1.11. The design pressure drop shall not exceed the specified nominal pressure drop and the
insertion loss shall be equal to or greater than specified.
V03.3.1.12. Duct sound attenuators shall be located such that noise break-in ductwork on the quiet
side of the attenuator or duct breakout between the noise source and the attenuator is
adequately controlled. Where this is not practicable, the affected ductwork shall be
acoustically lagged to control noise breakout/break-in.
V03.3.1.13. The sound attenuators of Booster Fans and Tunnel Ventilation fans shall be designed
to withstand an airstream of 250°C for a minimum of two hour and for Trackway
Exhaust Fans250°C for a minimum of one hour and maintain structural integrity and
airtightness. Manufacturers certification of this shall be submitted. Suitable fire rated
material like fire rated paint/calcium silicate Board may be used to meet the criteria of BS
476 pt 24.
V03.3.1.14. The sound attenuators shall be delivered with blocked ends to avoid ingress of rubble
equipment and shall be checked for damage during delivery to site, before installation and
after installation. Where splitters are delivered separately, for site assembly, the
absorbent surfaces shall be adequately protected against damage .
V03.3.2.1. Floor mounted equipment shall be installed on minimum 200mm high concrete
housekeeping pads with a minimum of 150mm further on each side of mountings.
Alternatively, equipment may be supported on inverted beams of roof. Vibration
isolators shall then be mounted on this concrete pad or inverted beams.
V03.3.3.2. The Contractor shall be responsible to ensure that there is no rigid connection in whatever form
between the isolated equipment and the structure, which will otherwise short-circuit the vibration
isolation system and degrade its performance. This includes the necessary co-ordination
with other trades by the Contractor.
V03.3.3.3. All isolators shall operate in the linear portion of their load versus deflection curves.
Loads versus deflection curves shall be furnished be the Manufacturer, and must be linear over a
deflection range of not less than 50% above the design deflection.
V03.3.3.4. All vibration isolator shall have their known undeflected heights or calibration
markings so that, after adjustment and when carrying their design loads, the
deflections under load can be verified. This permits the determination that the load is
within the proper range of the device and that correct degree of vibration isolation is
being achieved according to the design.
V03.3.3.5. The static deflection of the isolators at each support point shall not differ from the
design objective for the equipment as a whole by more than 10%.
V03.3.3.6. The ratio of lateral to vertical stiffness for springs shall not be less than 0.9 nor greater
than 1.5.
V03.3.3.7. All neoprene mountings shall have hardness of 40 to 65 durometer, after minimum
aging of 20 days or corresponding over-aging.
V03.3.3.8. In order to resist corrosion, all vibration isolation mountings and hangers shall be
treated as follows:
V03.3.3.9. All vibration isolators and associated equipment bases shall whenever possible be the
product of a single Manufacturer.
V03.3.3.10. Fans shall be anchored to spring type isolators with 65mm minimum static deflection
with anchor bolts hot-dipped galvanised to BS729.
V03.3.3.11. Limit stop or horizontal thrust restraints shall be provided for all fans.
V03.3.3.12. Vibration control / vibration sensor equipment shall be designed and installed in
accordance with the fan Manufacturer’s recommendation.
Spring type isolators shall be free standing and laterally stable without any housing and
complete with 6mm neoprene acoustic friction pads between the baseplates and the
supports.
All mountings shall have levelling bolts that must be rigidly bolted to the equipment
Spring diameters shall be not less than 80% of the compressed height of the spring at rated
load.
Springs shall a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated
deflection
Equipment with operating weight different from the installed weight shall be
mounted on spring mountings complete with a housing, which shall include vertical limit
stops to prevent spring extension when weight is removed
The installed and operating heights shall be the same
Thrust restraint shall consist of a spring element in series with a neoprene pad. The
spring element shall be contained within a steel frame and designed so that it can be
preset for thrust at the factory and adjusted in the field to allow for a maximum of
6mm movement at start and stop.
The assembly shall be furnished with one rod and angle brackets for attachment to both
the equipment and ductwork or the equipment and the structure. Horizontal restraints
shall be attached at the centre-line of thrust and symmetrically on either side of the unit.
V03.3.4.1. Unless otherwise specified, the selection of type equipment base and vibration isolator
(mounting/hanger) for differing plant/equipment and on differing floor spans & levels
may follow the requirements as indicated in the Selection Guide for Vibration Isolation
Table 48 (chapter 47) of the ASHRAE Application Handbook 2007, and the static
deflection of the vibration isolator selected shall provide a minimum isolation efficiency
of not less than the corresponding values shown in Table 48. However, the Contractor is
responsible to ensure the selected vibration isolation system is suitable for his specific
plant/equipment and the specific building structure on which the plant/equipment is
mounted.
V03.3.4.2. The Contractor shall provide more efficient isolation than those suggested in Table 48 in
case if the adjacent occupied space is a noise critical.
V03.3.5.1. The equipment structural steel or concrete inertia base shall be place in position and
supported temporarily by blocks or shims. The machinery shall then be installed on the
base and when that is complete, the isolator are to be installed without raising the
machine and frame assembly.
V03.3.5.2. After the entire installation is complete and under full operational load, the isolators
shall be adjusted such that the load is transferred from the blocks to the isolators.
When all isolators are properly adjusted, the blocks or shims will become slightly free and
can then be removed.
V03.3.5.3. The springs of vibration isolators shall in general have a loaded working height equal
to 1.0 to 1.5 times the outside diameter of the spring and shall be compressed to
approx. 50% of their unloaded height.
V03.3.5.4. Where any vibration isolation system permits equipment motion in all directions,
provide where necessary additional resilient restraints to flexibly limit the lateral
movement of the equipment to 6mm at start and stop.
V03.3.5.5. Prior to start-up, remove all foreign matter underneath the equipment base and verify that
there is no short-circuiting of the vibration isolation system.
V03.3.5.6. Electrical circuit connections to isolated equipment shall be looped to allow free
motion of isolated equipment.
V03.3.6.1. Flexible connections shall be provided between the vibrating equipment and the ductwork
and shall be made of approved materials such as lead vinyl or similar material of
minimum surface density of 5kg/m² and installed such that airflow is not obstructed. The
material used must be in compliance with local statutory requirements for fire retardant
period.
V03.3.6.2. Unless otherwise specified, all discharge ducts run for a distance of 15m from the
connected vibrating equipment, which has a discharge pressure of 1kPa or above shall be
isolated from the structure by means of spring hangers. Spring deflections shall be a
minimum of 20mm.
V03.3.6.3. In case where fire damper is required, ductwork to be isolated shall be fitted with a
flexible joint on the side of the fire damper where the vibration originates.
TABLE OF CONTENT
V04.1. General ................................................................................................................................1139
V04.2. Quality control .....................................................................................................................1139
V04.3. Technical and installation requirements ...............................................................................1140
V04.1. General
V04.1.1. The ductwork for the tunnel ventilation system shall consist of circular bellmouth, upper
and lower transitions and diffusers at various levels of the fan rooms.
V04.1.2. Ductwork shall withstand 125% of the maximum shut-off pressure difference that can
be developed by fans in either forward and reverse direction.
V04.1.3. Ductwork shall withstand an air temperature of 250°C for two hour without structural
distortion affecting the airflow path.
V04.1.4. The Contractor shall provide and install all necessary ductwork, control, isolating and
balancing dampers, smoke dampers, grilles, and diffusers to form complete air
distribution systems.
V04.1.5. All ductwork shall be constructed and erected to present rigid installation free from sway,
drumming and movement. Ductwork shall be true-to-size and accurately aligned.
V04.1.6. As far as is practicable, longitudinal seams and joints in adjacent ductwork sections
shall be aligned, particularly where permanently visible after installation.
V04.1.7. Perforated rivets shall not be used in the manufacture or erection of ductwork
V04.1.8. The use of self-tapping screws shall be restricted to the completion of side joints in
extremely difficult location only.
V04.1.9. Ductwork supports shall be positioned close to dampers, diffusers and all similar
equipment which must not be subjected to distortion, in addition to those hangers and
supports generally required for ductwork.
V04.1.10. Allowances shall be made in ductwork construction for instrument and controls
connections. Adequate local stiffening shall be incorporated to provide rigid
mountings. All instrument and control element installations shall be detailed,
constructed and installed by the Contractor. In addition, the Contractor shall install all
field control devices whether part of his supply or not.
V04.2.1. All raw edge of ductwork, lock formed seams, rivets and areas where galvanising has
been destroyed shall be cleaned, prepared and painted on all edges and sides with
zinc-rich paint to BS 4652 at works. Transit damage shall be repaired on site prior to
erection.
V04.2.2. Ductwork materials and construction shall generally comply with the Heating and
Ventilating Contractor’s Association (HVCA) specification for sheet metal ductwork–
low, medium and high pressure/velocity systems – DW/142 and DW/142 Addendum A,
except as otherwise specified.
V04.2.3. Ductwork classification shall be High Pressure, with leakage limit to Class D.
V04.2.4. The Employer’s Representative may accept alternative ductwork construction to SMACNA
(Sheet Metal and Air-Conditioning Contractors’ National Association),standard for
low pressure and high pressure duct construction if proposed by the Contractor in
writing and provided always that such alternative are fully in compliance with this
Specification. These alternatives shall not impose any additional contractual and financial
liabilities on the Employer’s Representative, and shall be submitted so as not to cause any
delay to installation.
V04.3.1. “Ductwork shall be generally fabricated from Galvanized Iron sheet of 4mm minimum
thickness.
V04.3.2. Flanges shall be of G I angle. The maximum spacing between flanges is 4m.
V04.3.3. Intermediate stiffeners shall be of 100mm x 100mm x 10mm G.I angle. The maximum
spacing between intermediate stiffeners is 1m.
V04.3.4. Angle stiffening shall be welded to the duct by the toe of the leg normal to the duct so that
the leg parallel with the duct is away from it and a channel shape is formed.
V04.3.5. Ductwork shall be designed and fabricated in modular sections. The maximum
dimensions of these modular sections shall be suitable for access through the designated
access hatches and doors.
V04.3.6. The ductwork sections shall be fabricated in modular form in workshop where all
welding, surface treatment, alignment are to be completed. Installation on site shall
only involve positioning and bolting of the ductwork sections and the final painting.
V04.3.7. Flanges shall be bolted and sealed with 6mm thick silicon-based gasket material
covering the full face and suitable for emergency operation with air flow temperature of
250°C for one hour.
V04.3.8. Each bolt shall be fabricated from stainless steel, not less than 12mm diameter and be
complete with a nut, 2 plain washers and a lock washer. Spacing of bolts on flanges
shall not exceed 200mm.
V04.3.9. The paint shall be durable for a period of ten years at normal operation and shall be
capable of withstanding a temperature of 250°C for one hour without emitting smoke or
toxic fumes.
V04.3.10. The inlet circular bellmouth for fan intake shall have a radius to width ration not less
than 0.15 to minimise pressure loss of intake during normal operation.
V04.3.11. Materials used for ductwork construction shall be free from blisters, pits and
imperfections in coating.
V04.3.12. Details of the types of seam and cross-joints proposed shall be submitted before
manufacture. Selections shall be suitable for the ductwork system classification.
V04.3.13. All seams shall incorporate sealant and be tightly formed. Edge sealant shall not be
used.
V04.3.14. Sealant shall be used between sheet and flange section in cross-joint assembles.
V04.3.15. Flanged joints shall be located at all plant and equipment items, at structural walls and
floor slabs and elsewhere as specified for disconnection purposes.
V04.3.16. Joint corners and junction details shall be mutually compatible with longitudinal seam used.
V04.3.17. Tie rod stiffeners for rectangular and flat oval ducts shall have internal nuts and
external nuts, metal and compressible washers, unless otherwise specified.
V04.3.18. All bends shall be ‘easy’ type (to minimise pressure loss) except where specified
otherwise.
V04.3.19.1. All anchors in the concrete shall be stainless steel and the anchoring system shall be the
product of one manufacturer. Anchors shall be installed in conformance with the
manufacturer’s instruction. Anchors shall have a minimum diameter of 12mm and
spaced at not more than 200mm.
V04.3.19.2. Flange connections with concrete and between ductwork shall be fitted with silicon
based gaskets materials to ensure airtightness. The silicon-based gaskets shall
withstand a temperature of 250°C for one hour without emitting hazardous gases.
V04.3.19.3. Flange connection between metal duct and concrete shall be made with a mating
flange. The Contractor shall check the setting out positions of the cast-in items and
satisfy himself the positions are acceptable.
V04.3.19.4. A proprietary support system may be used. Full details shall be submitted for approval
before ordering.
V04.3.19.6. Vertical ducts shall be supported off floor slab or by purpose-made brackets fixed to
the structure. Details shall be submitted before manufacture.
V04.3.20.1. Access doors shall have adequate warning sign and safety procedures to ensure safety of
personnel.
V04.3.20.2. Access doors shall be provided for interior maintenance of the ductwork or inspection
of the equipment. Doors shall have a clear opening of not less than 600mm x 600mm.
Doors shall at least be provided with Suitable numbers of Hinges and latches. Latches
shall be operable from both side of the door. Doors shall be reinforced with angles and set
in an angle frame. Doors shall be sealed with 6mm thick silicon based gasket
materials that will withstand an airflow temperature of 250°C for two hour.
V04.3.20.3. Access doors shall be provided, at least one for each fan in a convenient location to
allow entry as well as a quickly detachable temporary floor or platform where required, to
enable reasonable access for fan blades adjustment.
V04.3.20.4. Access panels shall be installed to allow visual inspection of operating equipment.
They shall be installed where required for inspection of equipment. Panels shall be 400mm x
400mm minimum size. They shall be constructed equal to access doors
except that only two hinges and latches are required. Latches shall be operable from the outside only.
V04.3.20.5. All access panels shall be leakage tested to DW144 standard and to the test pressure of
the ductwork.
V04.3.21.1. Test ports for air measurements shall be provided in the ductwork adjacent to each fan.
There shall be two test ports at each location positioned 90° apart. Where possible, one
pair of ports shall be located downstream of the equipment and one pair upstream of the
equipment. A test port shall consist of a short 60mm pipe socket welded to the hole in
the ductwork. Sockets shall have a screwed pipe plug.
V04.3.22.1. Hot-dipped galvanised wire guards made of minimum 1.6mm diameter wire shall be
fixed to the inlet and discharge bellmouth of fans and across vertical openings of
silencers and dampers for safety of maintenance personnel in the air plenum. The
guards shall be designed to withstand a weight of 200kg.
V04.3.23.1. Flexible connectors shall be provided between all fan units and the associated
ductwork to reduce transmission of vibration to adjacent elements.
V04.3.23.2. Each side of factory assembled flexible material shall mechanically attached with
75mm wide galvanised steel edging.
V04.3.23.3. Flexible materials shall be lead with vinyl or fibre glass cloth, with fire resistant
neoprene coating on both sides and suitable for continuous operating temperature of
250°C for a minimum of one hour duration.
V04.3.23.4. The width of the flexible portion shall be 200mm as required for installation
conditions and to allow freedom of movement without unnecessary slack.
V04.3.23.5. Flexible materials shall be UL listed and meet all requirement of NFPA standard 90A
and local codes and regulations. Other relevant and applicable British Standard shall
apply.
V04.3.23.7. All air ductwork, associated fittings and components shall be well sealed to avoid
noise from leakage and internally free from new edges and projections.
V04.3.23.8. Flexible connectors shall be installed in accordance with SMACNA duct construction
standard as appropriate.
V04.3.23.9. Flexible connectors shall be protected with material such as baffle plat to act against
the fluctuation air pressures and stresses due to the operation of the ventilation fans.
V04.3.24.1. Even if not shown on the drawings, turning vanes shall be provided in each mixing
chamber or location of 90° turn for both concrete underplatform exhaust shaft and
tunnel ventilation shaft.
V04.3.24.2. Turning vanes shall withstand twice aerodynamic force due to airflow that can be
developed by the fans. They shall be suitable for supporting their own weight.
V04.3.24.3. 250°C for a minimum of two hourBlanking plates and sealing plates shall be provided
for a complete installation.
V04.3.24.4. Turning vanes, supports, stiffeners, flanges, and welded fillers shall be fabricated from
galvanised mild steel, with all bolts, nuts and washers of galvanised or stainless steel.
V04.3.24.5. Vanes shall be of continuous seam welded construction, except for stiffening ribs,
which may be stitch welded.
V04.3.24.6. Surface welds shall be ground smooth and flush with the parent metal.
V04.3.24.7. Vane edges and tips shall be rounded with a minimum radius for smooth airflow. Tips
welds shall be ground to a smooth continuous radius.
V04.3.24.8. All materials shall be suitably treated to prevent corrosion. Cut edges shall be cleaned
and treated with a zinc rich primer and the entire assembly painted as described.
V04.3.25.1. Single deflection bar type grilles shall be provided for the underplatform and overtrack
exhaust system.
V04.3.25.2. Air grilles complete with dampers shall be made of aluminium or galvanised steel,
rated for operation at 250°C for a period of a minimum of one hour.
V04.3.25.3. The dampers shall be adjusted to control airflow to achieve an even air distribution
along the underplatform exhaust shaft.
V04.3.25.4. Dampers shall be of the sliding plate type, with facility to securely lock the blade in
place following system balancing. Alternatively, the dampers shall be of the opposed
blade type with concealed adjustment mechanism that can be securely locked following
system balancing.
V04.3.25.5. All bolts, nuts and washers for fixing shall be fabricated with stainless steel.
V04.3.26.1. All pipes, ferrous supports, gantries, brackets and steelwork in the Contract works
other than those indicated to be left self-finished such as stainless steel, anodised
aluminium etc. shall be painted in accordance with the section of the specification. All
painted surfaces are to receive at least one primer coat and two coats of the finishing
colour unless otherwise specified.
V04.3.26.2. The Contractor shall obtain from the supplier of any paint or similar product detailed
instructions for the use of that product, specific to the conditions found on the Contract.
These shall include details of storage, preparation of steelwork, application method and
conditions, overcoating and any other relevant points.
V04.3.26.3. The Contractor shall comply with the Manufacturer’s instructions for the use of any
product, unless these are in conflict with the requirements of this specification. Areas of
conflict shall be brought to the attention of the Employer’s Representative.
V04.3.26.4. Pipes and ducts, whether concealed or normally visible, must be painted either in the
appropriate colour code or as required by the Employer’s Representative and
appropriate colour code bands.
V04.3.26.5. Ferrous metals shall be primed before delivery to site. After welding, drilling and
fabrication, but before installation, the surfaces shall be prepared, thoroughly wire
brushed to remove all scale and loose rust and painted with one coat of zinc rich
primer. After installation the primer shall be touched up, one under-coat and two
finishing coats of oil paint of a colour selected by the Employer’s Representative shall be
applied.
V04.3.26.6. Galvanised iron surfaces shall be primed using an etch primer suitable for the surface.
Painting and preparation procedures shall be as for other ferrous surfaces.
V04.3.26.7. The colour(s) of paint(s) shall be selected from the range contained in BS 4800 as
instructed.
V04.3.26.8. All distribution services shall be colour coded and provided with symbols for
identification purposes. Identification coding for ductwork, including thermal insulation,
shall be in accordance with HVAC Specification DW/144.
V04.3.26.9. Pipework or ductwork shall be identified by bands at least 25mm wide and colour
triangles of at least 150mm side. The bands or triangles shall be spaced and located to
permit ready identification of the services particularly adjacent to equipment positions and
at service junctions and wall penetrations.
V04.3.26.10. In addition to colour bands or triangles all pipework and ductwork in plant rooms and
services areas whether insulated or not shall be legibly marked with black or white
letters and triangles to show the type of service and the direction of fluid flow.
Tunnel Ventilation TV
TABLE OF CONTENT
V05.1 GENERAL
V05.1.1 The Work of this attachment consists of furnishing, installing and testing of tunnel
ventilation equipment complete with all required accessories, including axial booster fan-
motor units, sound attenuators, hangers, supports, and associated work, hereinafter specified
or otherwise required for a complete and fully operable system.
V05.1.3 Fan: The terms fan, jet fan, tunnel booster fan, and booster fan assembly are
synonymous and are deemed to mean a booster fan complete with sound attenuators and a
directly-connected reversible motor.
V05.1.4 Forward Flow: Airflow generated by the fan in the direction of the fan impeller to the fan
motor.
V05.1.5 Reverse Flow: Airflow generated by the fan in the direction of the fan motor to the fan
impeller.
V05.1.6 Pitch: The angle formed by the chord line of a fan blade root cross-section and a line
parallel to the direction of rotation.
V05.1.7 Manufacturer's Representative: A representative from the firm of manufacturer for each and
every category of equipment furnished under this Section.
V05.2.1 The following Codes, Regulations, Reference Standards and Specifications apply to the
Work of this Section.
V05.2.1.3.3 S12.36 Survey Methods for Determination of Sound Power Levels of Noise Sources
V05.2.1.4.3 A 193 Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel bolting Materials for High-Temperature
Service
V05.2.1.4.4 A 194 Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High-Pressure and High-
Temperature Service
V05.2.1.4.5 A 239 Locating the Thinnest Spot in Zinc (Galvanised) Coating on Iron or Steel
Articles by the Preece Test (Copper Sulfate Dip).
V05.2.1.4.6 A 276 Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Bars and Shapes
V05.2.1.4.7 A 666 Authentic Stainless Steel, Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar for Structural
Applications
V05.2.1.4.8 E 84 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials V05.2.1.4.9
E 94 Radiographic Testing
V05.2.1.4.10 E 155 Reference Radiographs for Inspection of Aluminium and Magnesium Castings
V05.2.1.5 American Welding Society (AWS):
V05.2.1.5.1 D1.1 Structural Welding Code, Steel
V05.2.1.5.2 D1.3 Structural Welding Code, Sheet Steel V05.2.1.6
Federal Specifications (FS):
V05.2.1.6.1 TT-P-645A Primer, Paint, Zinc Chromate, Alkyd Type
V05.2.1.6.3 85 Standard Test Procedure for Airborne Sound Measurements on Rotating Electric
Machinery
V05.2.1.6.4 112 Standard Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators
V05.2.1.7 Military Specifications (Mil. Spec.):
V05.2.1.7.1 DOD-P-21035A Paint, High Zinc-Dust Content, Galvanising Repair (Metric)
V05.2.1.8 National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
V05.2.1.8.1 MG1 Motors and Generators
V05.2.1.8.2 MG1-12.54 Efficiency
V05.2.1.9 Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC):
V05.2.1.9.6 PA-2 Method for Measurement of Dry Paint Thickness with Magnetic Gauge
V05.2.1.10 International Standards Organisation (ISO):
V05.2.2.1 Furnish booster fan assemblies supplied by a single manufacturing firm that is regularly
engaged in the production of booster fans of the type specified herein.
V05.2.2.2 Submit documentation by the manufacturer that booster fans, of the capacity (thrust and
exit jet velocity) not less than that to be furnished under this Section have been
satisfactorily used in transit tunnel projects for at least five years.
V05.2.3 Submittals
V05. 2.3.1 Submit the following to the Employer’s representative for review and obtain a notice of no
objection:
V05.2.3.2.1 Submit dimensioned drawings of tunnel ventilation fans showing sound attenuator
assembly layout, supports and other appurtenances required for installation. Show on shop
drawings, point loads at each support point including summary of dead loads, axial loads
and thrust loads, and complete installation details.
V05.2.3.4 Submit a tabulation showing the thrust, exit jet velocity and sound power level of the
booster fan assembly at the design point blade angle setting and at three additional
settings, in 2 degree increment, above and below the design point. Derive the data from
the actual fan assembly performance tests. Require the fan manufacturer to identify the
possibility of fan stalling if it exists within the fan performance region covered by 15%
above and below the design condition as specified.
V05.2.3.5 Submit motor performance curves that are either derived from actual performance tests
or from analytical data. Submit separate performance curves for the motor rotation in
forward and reverse directions.
V05.2.3.6 Submit shop drawings and the test procedures for the pre-production units as a
package.
V05.2.3.7 Submit narrative test reports for all factory and field tests. Include the raw data as
recorded during each test.
V05.2.3.8.1 Submit certificate of compliance that the design and fabrication of various components
of the tunnel ventilation system meet the requirement of the Contract.
V05.2.3.8.2 Submit certificate of compliance that the booster fan assemblies meet the requirement of
operation at elevated temperature of 250 degree C for two hour.
V05.2.3.9 Include data substantiating that materials comply with the requirements of the various
standards as specified.
V05.3.1 General
V05.3.1.2 In selecting booster fan assemblies, ensure that the operating weight and axial thrust
generated by fan on supports do not exceed the maximum acceptable limit indicated by the
Contractors calculations.
V05.3.1.3 Furnish booster fan assemblies of a single manufacturer and like components
furnished by a single supplier.
V05.3.2.1 Normal Operation - Construct the entire fan-motor-sound attenuator assembly such that it
withstands the environmental changes caused by the passing of subway trains.
V05.3.2.2 Emergency Operation - Construct the entire fan-motor-sound attenuator assembly including
hangers, supports, emergency stop button and cables etc., such that any of the
components does not suffer mechanical, electrical or structural failure when operating at
full capacity in an ambient air temperature of at least 250 degree C for a minimum period of
one hour.
V05.3.3 Fans
V05.3.3.1.1 Furnish fans of the axial-flow type, direct-driven by internally mounted single speed
motors which are capable of delivering air in both the forward and reverse directions
of airflow when the motor rotation is reversed. Permanently mark the forward direction of
airflow in conspicuous location on the exterior of the fan housing.
V05.3.3.2.2 Furnish fans capable of satisfactorily withstanding the effect of all stresses and loads under
starting, operating and reversing conditions.
V05.3.3.2.3 Provide fans capable of developing thrust and exit jet velocity, in either direction of motor
rotation
V05.3.3.2.4 Provide fans capable of reversing airflow in sixty seconds or less, from full speed
forward to full speed reverse or vice versa with a maximum de-energised period of 30
seconds between reversals. The capability of reversing airflow direction at least two times
(one cold and two hot starts) during any one hour of continuous operation with 250 degree
C air flowing through the fan is required.
V05.3.3.2.5 Furnish fan-motor units having efficiency of not less than 60 percent when operating in the
forward direction airflow at the specified nominal thrust and exit jet velocity.
V05.3.3.2.6 Furnish booster fan assembly having vibrations that do not exceed the peak-to-peak
amplitude of 1.6 mil for nominal operating speed of 1800 rpm or less.
V05.3.3.3.1 Fabricate impeller hub and blades of aluminum-alloy casting or other material suitable for
the specified performance and environment.
V05.3.3.3.2 Fasten impeller to the motor shaft by means of positive locking devices that are fully
effective for both directions of airflow, for all blade angle settings and for all conditions of
operation specified.
V05.3.3.3.3 Design and construct impeller to withstand stresses and loads created by over speed testing
to 125 percent of the nominal operating speed.
V05.3.3.3.4 Design and construct impeller and hub such that the pitch of blade scan be manually
adjustable without removing impeller. Provide the blades and hubs with index marks that
show the design operating blade setting and a minimum of three increments of stagger
angle larger and three increments smaller, than the design operating blade setting. Provide
stops on the hub to prevent overload of the motor. As a substitute for the index marks,
each fan may have one metal template to facilitate accurate settings of blade angles.
V05.3.3.3.5 Fabricate fan housing, motor mounts and supports and housing supports of hot rolled steel/
mild steel. Provide fan housing of continuously welded construction and of thickness not
less than No. 8 United States Standard Gage (USSG). Ascertain that welds located in air
stream are ground smooth.
V05.3.3.3.6 Form fan housing to a true-round, concentric, cylindrical shape providing uniform
clearance between the tips of the impeller blades and the housing. Provide adequate
clearance between blade tips and the housing at all points to allow for expansion and
construction over a temperature range from 0 degree C to 250 degree C without developing
interference. Indicate on shop drawings the clearance at 0 degree C to 250 degree C,
as well as at any point of minimum clearance in between.
V05.3.3.3.7 Provide end flanges for the housing of the same thickness as the housing.
Flanges may be rolled integrally or continuously welded to the outer periphery of the fan
housing. Provide flanges of sufficient width having punched or drilled holes to allow
sound attenuators to be rigidly bolted to the housing.
V05.3.3.3.8 Design and construct motor supports to make the motor axis and fan housing axis
concentric. Provide motor mounts and motor supports in sufficient number and of the
design to support the entire weight of the impeller and the motor, and the loads developed
by the fan operation.
V05.3.3.3.9 Provide access doors of adequate size in the fan housing for access to blade locking
devices for field adjustment of blade pitch and for vibration test instrumentation. Fabricate
access doors of steel construction with AISI type 316 stainless steel hardware and provide
with not less than 6 mm thick silicone base gasket to make air-tight construction. Select
gasket material that is suitable for the operating conditions specified.
V05.3.3.3.10 Provide fan housings of sufficient length to totally enclose the fan impeller and motor within
the housing.
V05.3.3.3.11 Make the ends of the fan housing straight and smooth, suitable to receive sound
attenuators at both ends. Provide connection between fan and sound attenuators that
facilitates easy assembly and disassembly of booster fan and sound attenuators in the field.
V05.3.3.3.12 Provide lifting lugs of steel construction, welded on the exterior of fan housing and sound
attenuators. Provide lifting lugs in sufficient number to facilitate future on-site installation
and removal of the fan and sound attenuators.
V05.3.4 Motors
V05.3.4.1.1 Furnish motors for all tunnel ventilation fans supplied by a single manufacturer.
V05.3.4.1.2 Provide motors that confirm to all applicable ANSI, IEEE and NEMA or approved
equivalent ISO standards and are of NEMA Design B or relevant ISO standard, designed
for continuous operation for a minimum period of one hour in an ambient temperature of at
least 250 degree C.
V05.3.4.1.3 Do not furnish motors with a thermal protector integral with the motor.
V05.3.4.1.4 Provide motors of the totally enclosed, high efficiency, air-over all cast iron or high grade
silicone steel frame, induction type. Wire motors for full voltage starting and reversing.
V05.3.4.2.1 Provide motors capable of accelerating the fan impeller from stand still to the rated
rotational speed in not more than 15 seconds, when connected to terminal voltage of 75
percent of the nominal supply voltage.
V05.3.4.2.2 Provide motors capable of starting, reversing and operating continuously, under full load
conditions, for a minimum period of one hour in ambient temperature of at least 250 degree
C in either the forward or the reverse mode of operation.
V05.3.4.2.3 Provide motors capable of reversing in sixty seconds or less, from full speed forward to
full speed reverse and vice versa with a de-energised period of 30 seconds maximum
between reversals. The capability of performing a minimum two reversals during a sixty
minute period with 250 degree C air flowing through the fan is required.
V05.3.4.2.4 Rate motors in accordance with NEMA or Equivalent International Standards for the
locked-rotor input (Kilovolt-amperes per kilowatt) required to meet the indicated
acceleration performance. Provide motors with a minimum of Class H insulation and rated
for Class F temperature rise, when tested at service factor load as a minimum
requirement.
V05.3.4.2.5 Provide motors capable of operating continuously at rated torque at any terminal
voltage between 85 percent and 110 percent of the nominal supply voltage.
V05.3.4.2.1 Provide motor shaft of steel construction, designed to support and drive fan impeller under
all specified operating conditions. Provide each motor with lifting lugs in sufficient
numbers.
V05.3.4.2.2 Equip motors with anti-condensation heaters to prevent condensation of moisture in the
motor windings. Energise heaters when the motor is not operating, and de-energise whenever
the motor is in operation. Terminate heater leads in the common terminal box mounted on
the exterior of the fan housing.
V05.3.4.2.3 Provide motor leads of insulated copper, wired to an oversized weatherproof conduit box
mounted on the exterior of the fan housing. provide conduit box with screw-type or bolt
down pressure terminals and exterior mounting lugs. Protect lead wires from airstream by
enclosing them in an air-tight, high tensile strength, seamless metal rigid conduit.
V05.3.4.2.4 Design and construct motor bearings for maximum radial and thrust loads anticipated
during starting, operating and reversing conditions. Furnish bearings having a minimum
L-10 life rating equal to 40,000 hours as defined by the Anti-Friction Bearing
Manufacturers' Associations (AFBMA), which is an average bearing life of approximately
200,000 hours.
V05.3.4.2.5 Bring lubrication lines from motor bearings to the exterior of the fan housing and
terminate in straight lubrication fittings. Terminate grease release lines, if used, in spring
loaded relief fittings. Provide grease fittings with covers to exclude water and dust. Select
bearing lubricant which is capable of providing the lubrication properties specified by the
bearing manufacturer under conditions of operation for one hour in ambient air at a
temperature of 250 degree C.
V05.3.4.2.6 Fabricate lubrication lines for motor bearings of high strength, seamless stainless steel/
copper tubing without kinks or sharp bends. Secure lubrication lines rigidly, to the housing
to prevent vibration of the lines and the leakage of air.
V05.3.4.2.7 Furnish motor bearing with a vibration monitoring system, complete with velocity pick-
up transducer, monitor and connection cable. Furnish the monitoring system that is to trigger
remote alarms for two levels of vibrations: "Alert" and "Alarm." The alert level is to trigger
an alarm when general wear and minor defects have increased motor vibration to a level
where maintenance is needed. The alarm level is to safeguard the motor against dangerous
vibration caused by damage or sudden out of balance. Provide measuring range that
includes 2 to 20 millimetres per second RMS for alert and 2 to 60 millimetres per second
RMS for alarm. Encase monitor in a dust-proof water-tight enclosure. Wire the monitoring
device to the common terminal box mounted on the exterior of the fan housing.
V05.3.5.1.1 Furnish sound attenuators for tunnel ventilation fans selected by the fan manufacturer, to meet
all operating conditions specified.
V05.3.5.1.2 Provide cylindrical (tubular) sound attenuators one mounted directly on each end of the
fan housing. Match the inside diameter of sound attenuator to the inside diameter of fan.
Provide inner bullet if required, of aerodynamic design. Match the exterior diameter of the
bullet to the diameter of motor and hub.
V05.3.5.2.1 Furnish sound attenuator-fan-sound attenuator assemblies that do not exceed the
acceptable maximum sound power levels for tunnel environment.
V05.3.5.2.2 The sound power rating is composite of the sound generated by the fan-motor unit and
the dynamic insertion losses achieved by sound attenuators. Therefore, require the fan
manufacturer to select sound attenuators to meet the requirements.
V05.3.5.3.1 Select the materials and methods used to fabricate sound attenuators such that they be
operational for minimum period of one hour in ambient air temperature of at least 250
degree C without any mechanical or a structural failure.
V05.3.5.3.2 Fabricate the exterior casing of not less than No. 18 United States Standard Gage
(USSG), hot dipped galvanised steel, internally lined with inorganic mineral wool or glass
fibre acoustic in fill covered with not less than No. 22 USSG stainless steel perforated
sheets.
V05.3.5.3.3 Provide drain hole of 12 mm diameter minimum in the exterior cashing of each sound
attenuator, to drain water that may enter into fan assembly during tunnel washing
operations.
V05.3.5.3.4 Design support system to facilitate easy dismantling and reinstallation of fan or sound
attenuators as required for maintenance.
V05.3.5.3.5 Fabricate fan supports of galvanised steel not less than 10 mm thick. Weld supports to the
fan housing and cross brace to provide rigidity.
V05.3.5.3.6 Design supports suitable for the existing provisions in the field for mounting the
supports and the space constraints.
V05.3.5.3.7 Furnish all bolts, nuts, washers and lock washers of stainless steel AISI Type 316.Furnish bolts
that are consistent with the existing tunnel inserts.
V05.3.5.3.8 Provide lifting lugs or eyes, in sufficient numbers, and permanently weld to fan
housing.
V05.3.5.4 Nameplates
V05.3.5.4.1 Furnish nameplates for each fan assembly. On each nameplate, show the name and address
of the fan manufacturer, the Contractor's name and address, serial number of the fan, the
maximum safe rotational speed of the fan in revolutions per minute and the design
operating conditions of the fan. Rivet or screw nameplates to the fan houses.
V05.3.5.4.2 Furnish two identical nameplates for each motor. On each nameplate, show the name and
address of the motor manufacturer, the motor model number and serial number, motor speed
in revolutions per minute, nominal kilowatt, electrical characteristics (voltage, phase,
frequency); no-load, full-load and locked-rotor currents, NEMA code-letter designation,
NEMA frame size, service factor, rating of space heater and the terminal connection chart
for the motor. Securely fasten one of the two nameplates to the motor housing; rivet or
screw the other to the fan housing adjacent to the fan nameplates.
V05.3.5.4.3 Fabricate all nameplates of stainless steel. Permanently mark the specified data on the
nameplates.
V05.3.8.1 Provide fan housings, attenuator outside casings, supports and all other steel
components either hot dipped or an electro-deposited zinc coating meeting to GS165
standard or equivalent.
V05.3.9.1.1 Provide test facility at the fan manufacturer's place or at a testing laboratory which is
suitable for all tests specified. The motor test may be performed at the place of the
manufacture by the motor manufacturer.
V05.3.9.1.2 Submit all testing standards and procedures for approval by the Authority prior to proceeding
with any of the tests.
V05.3.9.1.3 Notify the Authority in writing, of all shop test dates not less than 30 days prior to the test so
that the Authority may witness the test.
V05.3.9.1.4 Submit for approval by the Authority the results of the pre-production model fan assembly
tests specified. The manufacture of fan assemblies to be procured under this Contract
may commence only after the Authority has approved the shop test results for the pre-
production booster fan assembly.
V05.3.9.2.1 Test each motor in accordance with the procedures specified in ANSI/IEEE publication
112.
V05.3.9.2.2 Record test data for the performance curves continuously at the rated voltages and
frequency of the motor over the speed range from standstill to rated rotational speed.
V05.3.9.2.3 Only those motors for which test reports and performance curves have been approved
by the Authority may be assembled into fan-motor units.
V05.3.9.3.1 Spin Test-Balance each impeller statically and dynamically at the rated operating speed
before spin-testing. Spin test each impeller at 125 percent of design rotational speed for a
period of not less than three minutes. Examine impellers for loose blades and other
damages. Replace defective parts and repeat the spin test before further testing.
V05.3.9.3.2 Vibration test - Check each fan for obviously rough operation. Replace defective bearings
and recheck fan operation. Test each fan for vibration, measured in two radial planes 90
degrees apart (front and rear), and in the axial direction. Compare the measured vibration
levels with the acceptable vibration limits specified. If the measured vibration exceeds the
specified limits, determine the cause(s), correct it and then retest the fan.
V05.3.9.4.1 Prior to commencement of manufacture of booster fans to be procured under this Contract,
test as specified in the following paragraphs one pre-production model sound attenuator-
fan-motor-sound attenuator assembly unit that has successfully completed the preceding
tests.
V05.3.9.4.2 Run-in Test - Operate the pre-production booster fan assembly continuously for 24 hours; 12
hours in each direction of motor rotation.
V05.3.9.4.3 Performance Test - Test the pre-production booster fan assembly for performance in
accordance with the requirement of ACMA 210/ASHRAE 51. For measurement of thrust
developed, test booster fan assembly in accordance with the requirements of ISO/TC 117
WG6. Test the booster fan assembly in forward and reverse directions of airflow to
determine the thrust developed, airflow, exit jet velocity and motor brake kilowatt (or
input power). Change fan-blade angle and repeat test as required until the specified
requirements are satisfied.
V05.3.9
V05.3.9.4.5 Acceptance - The pre-production booster fan assembly which has satisfactorily passed all
specified tests will be accepted by the Authority as part of the Procurement under this
Contract, provided the booster fan assembly, after installation in the field, is operational
in accordance with the specified requirements.
V05.3.10 Installation
V05.3.10.1 Install booster fan assemblies in the space provided in such a manner as to readily
serviceable. Verify existing insets and other installation provisions prior to fabrication of
hangers and supports.
V05.3.11.1.2 Furnish all field test instruments. The Contractor may remove test instruments only after field
testing is completed.
V05.3.11.1.3 Provide labour, materials and appurtenances required to complete the specified field tests.
V05.3.11.1.4 Submit all testing standards and procedures for approval prior to proceeding with any of the
tests.
V05.3.11.2.1 Check fans for obviously rough operation. Replace defective bearings and recheck fan
operation.
V05.3.11.2.2 Measure amplitude and frequency of radial and axial vibration levels, and check for
conformity to the specified acceptable vibration levels. For a booster fan assembly whose
vibration level exceeds the specified limit, balance impeller as required and re measure
vibration level until the specified requirement is met.
V05.3.11.3.2 Operate each fan continuously for one hour in forward direction of airflow, de- energise for 30
seconds and then re-energise to operate in reverse direction of airflow for one hour.
V05.3.11.3.3 Measure and record for each motor individually, the motor starting current, running
current, starting voltage, full load voltage and power factor for motor rotation in each
direction.
V05.3.11.3.4 Measure and record running current and full load voltage in each direction with all fans
in operation.
V05.3.11.4.1 Test each booster fan for the actual "in-tunnel" performance.
V05.3.11.4.2 Measure the exit jet velocity and air volume generated by the booster fan assembly in
each direction of airflow. Based on the measured value of velocity and volume, calculate
the thrust developed by the fan.
V05.3.11.4.3 If the calculated thrust is at least 95% of, or more than the specified value, no further
testing is required.
V05.3.11.4.4 If the calculated thrust is less than 95% of the specified value, adjust the fan blade angle
to increase the airflow; and re measure the exit jet velocity and air volume until the
calculated thrust is at least 95% of the specified value.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
V06.1 Dampers
V06.2.1 The compressors shall be complete with all integral controls and safety devices and shall be
rated at the performance stated in the Equipment Schedule with a tolerance of ± 3%
(I SO1217 or equivalent).
V06.2.2 The compressors shall be suitable for 24-hours operation per day with control from pressure
switches. The compressors shall be complete with control panel featuring manual lead/lag
selector switch, motors, and starters.
V06.2.3 The motor control panel shall be incorporated with automatic daily leas-lag sequence of the
air compressors for optimum efficiency operation. The compressors shall be in full-
capacity standby mode, and arranged so that automatic changeover takes place if the
selected air compressor fails to start within a pre-determined length of time. On initial
start-up and intermediate increase of compressed air demand consumption, both
compressors shall run until the desired compressed air pressure is reached. The operation
of the compressor shall be cut out by high pressure cut-out or overload status.
V06.2.4 The following indicators/selectors switches shall be included in the compressor motor
control panel :-
1. Running hour meter
2. Manual/Auto selection switch
3. Pressure indicator
4. Temperature indicator
5. Duty/standby selection switch with automatic sequence control
V06.2.5 The compressors shall be pulsation-free and the noise level generated from the machines
shall not exceed 75 dB(A) under normal operating condition; measured under field
condition at a distance of 1m with maximum deviation of ± 3 dB(A).
V06.2.6 External air intake pre-filters shall be fitted and details or replacement units, their cost and
useful life shall be provided with the Tender.
V06.2.7 Inlet air to the compressor shall be taken from ambient air.
V06.2.8 A warning sign, 4mm thick plastic plate, with the following wording in English of
character height not less than 16mm to be added in the vicinity of the air compressors;
“This compressor is automatically controlled and may start without warning”.
The Contractor shall submit the detailed format of the above warning sign for approval.
V06.3.1 Each air receiver shall be of horizontal welded steel type complete with inlet and
outlet connection, pressure relief (safety) valve, inspecting opening, tapings for drain
valve, and pressure gauge. The receiver shall confirm to ASME Sec. II or BS5169 and
BS5750 and have a capacity as specified in the Equipment Schedule.
V06.3.2 Each receiver shall bear a 4mm thick plastic plate label on which the following
indication wording in English of characters height not less than 6mm shall be
engraved :-
1. Manufacturer :
2. Model Number :
:
bar
4. Maximum Design Pressure
7. Date of Test:
V06.3.3 The Contractor shall submit the detailed format of the above label for approval.
V06.4.2 The air dryers shall have built-in automatic drain valves so that the unit operates
with continuous drain to a separator , with periodic blow down to drain
condensate.
V06.3.3 The air dryer shall employ the dew point control panel to Indicate / sound the
alarm if present dew point value (adjustable) is too high.
V06.5.1 Coalescing pre-filter shall be assembled on the air intake side of the wet gas inlet
of the refrigerant air dryer. The steel housing of the pre-filter shall comply BS
5500, and the filter medium shall be composed of layers of fine glass fibers
integrally epoxy bonded as a strong sheet to remove particle down to 1 micron
VO6.5.2 The rated differential pressure an operating temperature of the pre-filter shall
be consistent with the intended rating of the compressed air plant.
V06.5.3 The pre-filter shall consist of drain valve and sump to facilitate periodical draining
of the housing either automatically or manually.
V06.6.1 After-filter shall be assembled on downstream side of the air dryer to filer an
remove particulate matter (e.g. dust, dirt) with diameters larger than 0.01
micron, from the treated compressed air supply stream.
V06.6.2 The rated differential pressure an operating temperature of the after-filter shall
be consistent with the intended rating of the compressed air plant.
V0.6.6.3 The after-filter shall consist of drain valve and sump to facilitate periodical
draining of the housing either automatically or manually.
V06.7.1 Drain trap assemblies shall be provided at the base of each vertical branch
main moisture separators air receivers, and at intervals not exceeding 30m of
horizontal pipe run.
V06.7.2 The assembly shall consist of an isolating valve, strainers, compressed air trap
and liquid discharge pipe. The discharge pipe shall be extended to the nearest
gully or drain.
V06.7.3 A pressure balance pipe shall be fitted between the branch main, separator inlet or
air receiver where shown to be necessary.
V06.8.1 Sets hall comprise a moisture separator, with trapped drain, stop valve,
strainer with blow down provision, inlet pressure gauge, pressure reducing valve,
valve, and safety relief valve with drain line to low level. An outlet
pressure gauge shall be provided one meter downstream of the downstream
connection of the by-pass pipe.
V06.8.2 The complete assembly shall have a full bore by-pass pipe with globe valve.
V06.8.3 The pressure reducing valve shall be supplied with filtered compressed air
for operation, through a regulator.
V06.8.4 A valve pressure control pipe shall be installed between the pressure reducing
valve and the low pressure side close to the pressure gauge.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
BMS/1.01.91. General ……………………………………………………………………….1228
BMS/1.01.92. Electro-Magnetic Compatibility……………………………………………1228
BMS/1.01.93. Equipment Mounting…………………………………………………………1228
BMS/1.01.94. Maintainability…………………………………………………………………1228
BMS/1.01.95. Equipment Identification…………………………………………………….1229
BMS/1.01.96. General Safety Requirements………………………………………………1229
INSTALLATION ……………………………………………………………………………1230
BMS/1.01.97. Installation Plan and Program………………………………………………1230
BMS/1.01.98. Method Statement……………………………………………………………1230
BMS/1.01.99. Contractor’s Resident Staff…………………………………………………..1230
BMS/1.01.100. Drawings and Records………………………………………………1231
BMS/1.01.101. General…………………………………………………………………1231
BMS/1.01.102. Circuit Wiring Book…………………………………………………....1231
BMS/1.01.103. Cable Records…………………………………………………………1231
BMS/1.01.104. Earthing…………………………………………………………………1232
BMS/1.01.105. Asset Identification……………………………………………………1232
ELECTRICAL WORKS…………………………………………………………………………..1234
BMS/1.01.106. General……………………………………………………………….…1234
BMS/1.01.107. Coordination and Interfaces…………………………………….…1234
BMS/1.01.108. Cables - General…………………………………………………….…1236
BMS/1.01.109. Control Cables…………………………………………………….……1236
BMS/1.01.110. XLPE Power Cables……………………………………………….…….1237
BMS/1.01.111. Multi-core Control Cables……………………………………….……1237
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS……………………………………………………………………
1253
TESTS ON COMPLETION………………………………………………………………………
1253
BMS/1.01.146. General…………………………………………………………………1253
BMS/1.01.147. Test Logs…………………………………………………………………1253
BMS/1.01.148. Pre-Revenue Operations……………………………………………1254
TRAINING ………………………………………………………………………………1265
BMS/1.01.163. General …………………………………………………………………1265
BMS/1.01.164. Scope Of Training ……………………………………………………. 1266
BMS/1.01.165. Maintenance Training…………………………………………………1267
BMS/1.01.166. Training Format…………………………………………………………1267
APPENDIX B – INPUT/OUTPUT
INTERFACES………………………………………………….1280
This Specification describes the minimum standards of the Building Management System (BMS) for
ECS & TVS system for AGRA Metro System, Underground Corridor.
The Works to be executed under the Contract include the design, development, manufacture,
verification, delivery, installation, testing, commissioning (including integrated testing and
commissioning) and technical support for a complete BMS to fully integrate the control, monitoring,
and supervision of Environmental Control Systems, Low Voltage Power & Distribution, Fire Alarm
System, Hydraulic System (Seepage, Sewage, Bore Well Pumps etc.), and other nominated Building
Services Systems including all PLC Equipment, CPU’s, Modules, Sub Modules, Power Supplies,
Local Control Panels, PC Work Stations, Printers, Local Area Network (LAN), Ethernet Hubs and
Switches, Interface with electrical containment and wiring systems, and other components as required
whether or not specified necessary to deliver the requirements of this Specification. The BMS shall
also interface with the requirements of the Non Power SCADA (NP SCADA), for control,
monitoring, and supervision as required at the Operational Control Centre (OCC).
The Works to be executed under the Contract also include the detailed design, development,
manufacture, verification, delivery to site, installation, testing, commissioning (including integrated
testing and commissioning) and technical support for a complete Integrated Supervisory Control
System (ISCS) to fully integrate the control, monitoring, and supervision of Tunnel Ventilation System
from OCC as well as from station level. The Equipment, CPU’s, Modules, Sub Modules, Power
Supplies, Local Control Panels, Servers, Work Stations, modems, Gateways, RTU/ Redundant Server,
Printers, Local Area Network (LAN), Ethernet Hubs and Switches, Ventilation Control Panel
(VCP), Cable containment and wiring systems, and other components as required whether or not
specified necessary to deliver the requirements of this Specification to fully integrate the control,
monitoring, and supervision of Tunnel Ventilation System from OCC as well as from station level and
for control, monitoring, and supervision as required at the Operational Control Centre (OCC) for
the ECS and other E&M systems . The TVS contractor shall interface with the requirements of
control, monitoring, and supervision as required at the Operational Control Centre (OCC) for the
E&M systems also. Communication channel between station to OCC and stations will be
provided by others.
The BMS & ISCS is to be designed manufactured, supplied, installed, tested and commissioned by the
Contractor and shall meet all performance and functional requirements as defined in the
Specification.
This specification contains a general description of the system concepts and major components, and
sections covering definitions, requirements for interfaces with other contracts, general mechanical
and electrical installation design/performance requirements, and testing requirements.
The emphasis is to explain the requirements of work, interfaces with other contractors for achieving an
efficient & safe working system commensurate to the best international standards and practices.
Every effort has been made to cite the design requirements very clearly, however in this Design &
Construct contract, the contractor shall follow acceptable standards & design procedures akin to the
best available in world Metros where this is not explicitly mentioned.
In this document the term “provide” shall mean “the detailed design covering specifications,
calculations, drawings for installations & maintenance, manufacture and factory testing or
procurement, delivery, off-loading, installation, testing, commissioning, handover to AGRA
METRO, AGRA METRO staff training including supply of O & M manuals & as-built drawings,
interface and co-ordination with other contractors or arising out of concurrent works and warranties”.
Submittals shall be in the form of reports, drawings, calculation sheets & schedules both in hard
copy and on computer diskette. The contractor shall furnish backup materials such as codes /
Standards / software programs free of cost for the Employer’s Representative’s use in
understanding/evaluation of the submittals. The contractor will furnish a list and format of
submittals for each area of work to the Employer’s Representative for consent covering the
requirements given herein.
The design and supply of elements shall be to international specifications and standards, which must be
stated at the time of tendering. Approved local standards shall also be complied wherever
necessary. The designs shall be fully integrated with compatible components including where these
interface with other contractors’ works.
Unless approved otherwise, all equipment items shall be uniform throughout the Contract in order to
minimize maintenance spares and the number of manufacturer interfaces.
Codes and Standards
Notwithstanding any specific reference elsewhere in this document, the Contractor shall comply in
every respect to the requirements of NFPA 130 - Fixed Guide way Transit Systems, Latest Edition
particularly in respect to Life Safety Systems. Any items of non-compliance shall be clearly identified
to AGRA METRO at the time of tender, and any relaxation of any such non-compliance item shall
require the prior approval of AGRA METRO in writing.
Where any ambiguity occurs between the requirements of NFPA 130 - Fixed Guide way Transit
Systems, Latest Edition and these specifications, the more rigid clauses shall apply unless relaxation is
approved in advance by AGRA METRO in writing.
Unless otherwise stated, and only in the absence of suitable international standards, the Building
Management System (BMS), design shall be governed by all applicable local codes, regulations and
standards.
In addition to local requirements, BMS designs shall also comply with the following codes of practice,
standards, specifications and manuals.
Local codes, regulations and standards shall take precedence where these standards or requirements
are more onerous than other international standards.
UPPCL
AGRA Administration
NFPA 130: 2013 - Fixed Guideway Transit Systems: any non-compliance shall be
approved in writing by the AGRA METRO.
Reference/Abbreviation Description
NEMA : National Electrical Manufacturer's Association
ICS-1 : General Standards for Industrial Control and Systems.
ICS-1.1 : Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation and
Maintenance of Solid-State Control.
All codes and standards shall be submitted in English language. The design of any one system shall be to a
single code or specification. The parallel use of different codes for particular items or
components shall not be allowed.
Abbreviation Meaning
A : Amps
AC : Air-Conditioning
ac / AC : Alternating current
AHU : Air Handling Unit
BMS : Building Management System
BS : British Standard
CIBSE : Chartered Institute of Building Services Engineers
DB : Dry Bulb
dB : Decibel (sound pressure level)
dc / DC : Direct current
LFB : AGRA Fire Brigade
AGRA METRO : AGRA Metro Rail Corporation
ECS : Environmental Control System
EN : Euronorm Standard
ESPS : Escalator Sprinkler Protection System
EV : Ventilation Exhaust Shaft
FAP : Fire Alarm Panel
FCP : Fireman’s Control Panel
FOC : Fire Officers' Committee
HV : High voltage
IES : Illumination Engineering Society, UK
IS/BIS : Bureau of Indian Standards
ISO : International Standards Organisation
kVA : Kilo volt-amps
kW : Kilowatts
LDC : Local Digital Controller
LPC : Loss Prevention Council
LV : Low voltage
Abbreviation Meaning
mm : Millimetres
MV : Medium voltage
NC : Noise criterion
TBD : To be decided
V : Volts
WB : Wet Bulb
(av.) “Voltage” means the difference of electric potential measured in volts between any two
conductors or between any part of either conductor and earth as measured and a suitable voltmeter and
is said to be:
"Low” where the voltage does not exceed 250 volts under normal conditions subject, however, to
the percentage variation allowed by the rules;
“Medium” where the voltage does not exceed 650 volts under normal
conditions subject, however,to the percentage variation allowed by the
rules;
“High” where the voltage does not exceed 33,000 volts under normal conditions subject, however, to
the percentage variation allowed by the rules;
“Extra High” where the voltage exceeds 33,000 volts under normal conditions subject, however, to
the percentage variation allowed by the rules;
Equipment, materials and systems shall be designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with the
latest issue of codes and standards.
Electrical design shall be based on BS 7671: 1992 "Requirements for Electrical Installations" or other
internationally recognized equivalent standard that are approved by the Authority examples of
which are given below.
Unless otherwise stated, the electrical system design shall be governed by all applicable local codes,
regulations and standards issued by the local agencies.
Reference/Abbreviation Authority
In addition to local requirements, electrical system designs shall comply with the codes of practice and
standards specified in the Outline Design Criteria. Local codes, regulations and standards shall take
precedence where these standards or requirements are more onerous than other national standards.
The design of any one system shall be to a single code or specification. The parallel use of different
codes for one particular item or component will not be allowed.
Ancillary Rooms - the non-public areas or spaces of the stations which contain operating,
maintenance, Local Control Panels (LCP), or other associated support equipment and functions.
Operation Control Centre -the operations center that controls and co-ordinates the system-wide
movement of passengers and trains and the point from which communication is maintained with
supervisory and operating personnel.
Station Control Room – the local control room at the station for operational control of the station
and to monitor station activities and functions relating to the movement of passengers and trains
along with auxiliary and support systems including the Fire Alarm Panel (FAP), and Ventilation
Control Panel (VCP), for manual override of the TVS Modes.
Fireman’s Control Panel - a vandal proof panel located within the unpaid station concourse area
comprising a mimic diagram of the station (all levels) showing fire compart mentation zones related to
manual call points, fire/smoke alarms, and the Tunnel Ventilation and Smoke Extract Systems
remote annunciators for local operation of the primary ventilation systems by AGRA METRO
authorized or fire service personnel.
The Services to be performed by the Contractor shall include, but not be limited to, the
following:
The list is not intended to be complete and the contractor shall supplement it adequately for obtaining a
satisfactory working Metro system akin to the best standards available worldwide.
A LAN in the station areas will provide a data link for all station equipment. This LAN
will communicate with the OCC via the FOTS. The Designated contractor will only
provide the main communication network and the Local Area Network (LAN) located in
the OCC. The LAN shall be used by the Tunnel Ventilation System as a data communication
link along with other systems in the OCC. The Station LANs will be provided by the TVS
Contractor and will provide a data link between the Tunnel Ventilation System and other
systems located within or near the station
The Contractor shall supply all equipment and facilities necessary to meet the requirements of
this technical specification, including, but not limited to:
All necessary equipment’s at OCC whether specified or not specified like work station,
RTU/Redundant Server, Modems, Gateways , switches and other associated accessories
including cables their containment arrangement necessary to provide for control,
monitoring, and supervision of Tunnel Ventilation System from OCC as well as from
station level and monitoring of ECS ,PS and BS system from OCC.
Work Stations in all the stations, PLCs, VCP, LCPs, Ethernet switches, Printers,
Pressure Differential transducer, Temperature and Humidity Sensors, transducers and
other equipment as defined in the BOQ and required for efficient working of ISCS system.
Control equipment, including accessories / components,
All cable trays, cables and cabling necessary for the ISCS Works;
Enclosures and supporting brackets for housing and fixing equipment;
Earthing of all equipments as defined in the specifications;
All equipment associated with any interfaces required to ensure operation within the
performance requirements;
All equipment necessary to allow the introduction of future services without disruption to
Phase I services;
All special test equipment and tools, including data configuration tools;
Maintenance tools;
All equipment necessary to carry out factory and on site testing and commissioning;
All software, appropriately safety validated, verified and certified, to meet the
requirements of the Specification;
All software and hardware required for data logging;
The BMS contractor will be responsible for sealing with fire rated material of all openings
left due to BMS works.
The System-wide contractor shall provide the main communication network up to the OCC from
stations. The same shall be used by the TVS SCADA system as a data communication link along with
other systems in the OCC.
A LAN in the station areas will provide a data link for all station equipment. This LAN will
communicate with the OCC via the FOTS. The Station LANs for TVS work will be provided under
this contract and will provide a data link between the BMS and other systems located within or near
the station.
Main cable routes, including cable trays, troughs, hangers, trenches, and ducts, shall be coordinated
with the VAC and E & M Contractor.
The design of the BMS shall comply in all respects to the provisions for safety and escape in
accordance with the requirements of NFPA 130 Standard for Fixed Guide way Systems latest edition.
BMS/1.01.20. Standardization
The Contractor shall, in establishing his design, follow the principles provided below in the design
and specification of all plant, equipment and components:
The technical specifications and design standards shall be uniform. Uniform standards for
clear spaces, working clearances, protection of equipment and physical dimensions of
equipment and interfacing with other systems.
Type testing, routine testing and endurance test shall be required under similar conditions.
Evaluation shall be conducted at all stages and performance compared with acceptance
criteria. Testing values shall be commensurate with reference standards.
Test standards and standardized equipment shall be selected or built or framed carefully,
bench marked, designated and explicitly marked.
Equipment and accessories shall be provided with uniform standard spare capacity,
protection.
Piping, cabling etc. shall be suitably color coded for identification and categorization for each
kind of use/type.
The BMS equipment shall be furnished by manufacturers who have manufactured similar control
system equipment for a period of at least five years.
BMS shall be installed, tested, commissioned and adjusted under the direct supervision of the
manufacturer or his authorized agent.
Installation of BMS controls shall be by experienced personnel under the direct supervision of
trained and qualified Employer’s Representatives.
All items necessary to make the BMS installation complete in every respect, safe and ready for
regular operation and use, and for easy maintenance shall be furnished by the Contractor.
All the workmen & supervisory staff shall be qualified and certified license holders or have
competence certificate from national/internationally recognized agency empowered to issue
certificate for carrying out similar work.
The methodology shall be designed to obtain certification of the work through check list, and
standards .The installations shall be checked by a quality assurance team having the representatives
from Employer’s and contractor’s side.
The contractor shall be responsible for including all safety aspects in his design, the proper selection of
equipment, protection schemes etc. correct installation, testing & commissioning.
The contractor shall obtain prior approval for energisation / commissioning from the competent
authority in accordance with statutory regulations in force. The contractor shall list out such statutory
requirements and shall issue a certificate of compliance in above respect before energisation /
commissioning.
The contractor shall furnish the following information for each item of equipment as applicable:
Manufacturer.
Overloading capacity.
Power supplies i.e. Voltage & Frequency at which the equipment operates.
Space requirements
Standards
Insulation class
The contractor shall provide a list of tools and test equipment for the repair of any special apparatus
and proposals for conducting system acceptance testing and to support the extended period of trial
running.
Where applicable, the designs shall be substantiated through computerized simulation of calculations,
Data verification and validation programs using standard simulation programs, internationally
accredited or indigenously developed, supported with quality verification and acceptability and shall
provide input data, results and program description.
The contractor shall furnish free of charge software packages whose use is envisaged. All the software
shall have an in-built data validation program so as to identify/rectify parameters/variables selection or
typographical error with future ability to upgrade.
The contractor shall design to provide and state the corrosion protection systems used and the
design lives of the systems. The contractor shall show that the works have an adequate coordinated
protection system, against all types of corrosions.
The corrosion protection systems used and the “design” lives of the systems be stated. A test is
required to be carried for monitoring the predicted results on corrosion. Suitable test points for the
installed protection system shall be provided.
Prior to final inspection or acceptance, shall provide all necessary manuals, training aids, and other
related materials to adequately train and instruct designated operating and maintenance personnel in
the operation, adjustment, and maintenance of all equipment and systems.
Explain to O&M personnel, in full and to their complete understanding, all procedures necessary to
operate and maintain all equipment and systems on a continuing basis.
Prepare and review the contents of the O&M Manuals with O&M personnel in full detail to explain
all aspects of the Manual and the operation and maintenance of all equipment and systems.
The contractor shall provide sections through the station service routes as may be required by the
Employers representative to show the adequacy of false ceilings etc. to accommodate services and
layout drawings showing location of all major components wherever necessary.
The contractor shall state the number and scales of all the drawings like Combined Services Drawings
(CSD) and of Structural/Electrical Mechanical (SEM) Drawings it intends to produce in support
of the works under this contract. The detailed/schematic drawings to be furnished by the Contractor
may include but not be limited to:
Structural drawings
Fabrication drawings
Schematic drawings
Interlock drawings
Erection drawings
Wiring drawings
As erected/finished drawings
The contractor shall furnish the acceptance criterion for the equipment/services supplied/provided by
the manufacturers/suppliers during execution of the work and furnish a checklist for each of the
equipment /service provision/verification/testing and acceptance in line with the specified requirements
for achieving best quality of job.
The contractor shall prepare technical material and workmanship specification for manufacture or
supply and installation of all PLC Control System for the Tunnel Ventilation System (TVS) works in
the style of the Construction Standards Institute (CSI) of America’s three part format:
Part 1 - General
Part 2 – Materials and Products
Part 3 – Execution
Each specification shall be complete in itself and shall contain as relevant such diverse requirements for:
Service requirements and technical requirements, delivery, storage and handling, interfacing with
other system-wide contractors.
Part – 2 - Materials
The specifications shall include but not be limited to such subjects as:
The complete installation shall be in strict accordance with the national and local electrical codes. All
devices designed for or used in line voltage applications shall be U.L. Listed.
Satisfactory operation without damage at 110% and 85% of rated voltage and at +3 hertz &
- 1.5 Hz variation in line frequency.
Static, transient, and short circuit protection on all inputs and outputs.
Communication lines protected against in-correct wiring, static transients and induced
magnetic interference.
Bus connected devices to be a.c. coupled or equivalent, so that any single device failure will
not disrupt or halt bus communication.
B) All equipment, cables and wiring shall be designed, manufactured and installed so as to secure a
service life as shown below:
Cables 30 Years
C) Switchboards, equipment, and other control components shall be rated for operation in ambient
o
temperatures of 50 C and humidity up to 75% and shall have degree of protection IP-65 /54.
In the design of switchboards and local control panels an allowance of 20-25% spare space capacity
shall be provided for possible future expansion and all panels shall be user friendly, modular and
aesthetic design, termite and vermin proof.
To allow evaluation of vendors and the systems being offered, a detailed technical proposal shall be
provided and formatted strictly in accordance to this outline. Vendor’s standard literature not
complying to this format and content requirement will not be considered or evaluated. Proposal
requirements are as follows:
Proposed system complete with location and block diagram AGRA including central computer type
and memory, peripherals, communication interfaces, all LAN cards, all active hubs and
repeaters, network layout, distributed peer bus connected control/monitor panels with
location, listing of equipment directly connected to a peer bus controller, and secondary
network drivers and connected systems.
Deviation Schedule - For each item of conditional or non-compliance, provide the vendor's
substitute response to the feature excepted or deviant to the specifications.
The following functions/items shall be included in the proposal for system evaluation.
Short cut penetration schemes for direct graphic, point, and command access.
Color-graphic system description with sample system displays, color-graphic penetration and
command schemes, graphic creation means, library of symbols, and curve plot.
Interactive data editing scheme for modification of system data base and parameters
including operators, peripheral assignments, system configuration, text, time schedules, point
monitoring limits, event initiated control, and control application program parameters.
Programming facility including language and canned packages of sub-routines and intrinsic
functions.
Functional description
The BMS shall, as a minimum, incorporate the capability of Energy Management, Equipment’s
Monitoring and Control, which consists of the following elements:
Microprocessor-based PLC Control Processors shall interface directly with sensors, actuators and
environmental control systems (i.e. HVAC units, chillers, pumps, etc.). Functionality to be
implemented at the PLC level include:
Digital Controls.
Energy Management.
Alarm Detection.
Temporary Scheduler.
The Contractor shall submit the following PLC manufacturer certificates with the tender.
Equipment or systems comprising several components shall be controlled through the BMS with
suitable control regimes to achieve desired operation normally automatically but with provision for
manual intervention. The automatic operation shall conform to the operational, functional and
overall system needs as specified in the following descriptions.
The equipment shall enable monitoring through a station control Operator Workstation, operator’s
desk for commands and warning-cum-alarm units. This panel shall be located at the station control
room
The transmission of information between the equipment and the station control panel is entirely the
responsibility of the equipment supplier through suitable cableways. The equipment contractor shall
prepare in clear and logical form documents describing the functions transmitted and the operations
carried out at the stations control room. The control and transmission scheme shall be submitted for the
consent of the Employer or his representatives.
The equipment shall also have arrangements to log and record various parameters on a regular basis
and store the critical results for at least six months. The contractor shall also provide portable
equipment such as Notebook, PCs for extracting information from the logic at the digital control
equipment and then store for any future use for maintenance or planning.
The information transmitted between the equipment and the OCC shall be carried by TVS SCADA
equipment supplied by under the scope of this contract. The Contractor shall draw a table indicating
the various number, type and physical layout of the terminals used for transmitting the statuses or the
measurements to the OCC and provide this information in clear logical form in accordance with the
project programme.
The equipment shall be capable of providing the outputs and using the inputs at the interface
terminals over voltage free contacts. The equipment on the side of the interface receiving the
information shall provide the power supply and the sending side shall provide the voltage free
contacts.
The physical characteristics and data transmission protocol proposed shall conform to an
internationally recognized publicly available standard.
BMS/1.01.35. General
The following design requirements shall be adopted by the Contractor and are in addition to those that may
otherwise be specified in the Employer’s Requirements.
The Contractor shall submit a list of all design review documents for the review of the Employer’s
Representative.
The Contractor shall adopt a structured design process, including, but not limited to:
Conceptual, preliminary and final (definitive) design and reviews with the
Employer’s Representative for the BMS.
Conceptual, preliminary, and final (definitive) design and reviews with the Employer’s
Representative, for the software design, including but not limited to: the software
requirements specification, software architecture, logic flow diagrams, prototypes, and
verification and test approach, computer modelling.
Design coordination interface with Contract for VAC work & E&M works and other
system wide contractors as per the requirement of scope of works for all equipment,
interfaces, interlocks etc.
All PLC software shall conform to the CENELEC standard EN50128. Software validation and
verification shall conform to the IEEE Standards 1012-1998 and 1059-1993.
The Contractor shall demonstrate to the Employer’s Representative the correct application of the
standards specifically detailing the allocation of software integrity levels for all software. The
Contractor shall submit with the Design Plan for the review of the Employer’s Representative a list
identifying all software that will be maintainable and re-configurable by the Employer.
BMS/1.01.38. Environmental
All BMS equipment shall operate correctly under the environmental conditions specified in the
Employer’s Requirements
The requirements for the power supply of the BMS shall be coordinated with the E&M Contractor.
The Contractor shall, in addition to the documentation requirements specified in the Employer's
Requirements, supply, as a minimum, the following hardware and software design documentation:
The submission of the above documentation shall be included in the Submission Programme
specified in Employer’s Requirements.
The central processing equipment shall comprise one high performance real time, digital personal
computer, rated with such application, complete with keyboard and mouse, one colour graphic VDU,
system printer(s) to log all transaction and alarm printer(s). All the equipment shall be suitable for
the power supply voltage of 230VAC +-6% 50Hz +-2%.
The central equipment shall be located where shown on the plans and shall meet the following
minimum criteria:
The Work Station shall be a personal computer (PC) commercial grade Desktop, features Intel
core i7 Processor with 3.0 GHZ or higher, 4 GB RAM or above, 320GB SATA hard disk
(7200 RPM), Integrated Sound & Graphics Media Accelerator, optical scroll mouse ,
multimedia keybaord ,52x CD Read / Write, Dual LAN card, 2 Serial port, 1 parallel port, 4
USB Ports, Windows 7/XP 32 bit Desktop with standard MS Office package & along with
latest antivirus version suitable for operation on 230 volts A/C. 50 minimum of GB DD
SDRAM at 667 MHz, 256 K Cache, Colour Monitor.
The Work Station color monitor shall be 22" LCD display, with Energy Star rating, diagonal no glare
flat LCD screen and has minimum resolution of 1280 pixels horizontal, 1024 lines vertical and
minimum contrast ratio of 700:1.
Further, all accessories shall be included to satisfy the local authorities having jurisdiction over the
system. UL listed cards (originals preferred or photocopies) shall be provided to support the
documentation that such listing is in effect.
Contract will provide suitable latest model of severs at all locations if required to fulfill all
requirements of ISCS system completely.
BMS/1.01.43. Notebook PC
The sub-contractor shall provide a colour note book for use as a portable programming tool. The
colour notebook shall have a high quality colour 14 inch LCD, graphic display which supports 256
colours. The colour note book shall be Intel Pentium Duo Core processor and be complete with 1GB
Dual-channel 667MHz DDR2 SDRAM 80GB 5400 rpm hard disk drive, high speed DVD-R/RW,
and with 82-key sculptured keyboard (101-keyboard compatible). The note book shall come with a
USB mouse for user interacting. The overall weight for the note-book shall not be more than 3
kg. 1280x800 pixels min graphic display which supports 256 colours., high speed DVD-R/RW
To ensure hardware quality, computer clones shall not be acceptable.
BMS/1.01.44. Printers
The sub-contractor shall provide printers as specified for recording alarms, operator transactions
and system reports. To ensure hardware quality, printers shall be internationally branded,
warranted, and technical support, spare parts and consumables should be freely available from the
manufacturers authorized distributors.
The first printer shall be assigned for trend log, summary, totalizer logging, recording alarms and
providing system reports. The second printer shall be a colour printer that support screen graphic
output and can always be configure as an alarm output printer when the alarm log printer is out of
order. Each of these printers shall be inter-changeable, and shall have the following characteristics:
24 pins dot matrix character structure switchable to 29 x 23 dot matrix for letter quality
output with 96 ASCII upper/lower case character set.
Software selectable under, emphasized, double strike, and expanded (double width)
characters capability.
Adjustable line spacing of six or eight lines per inch with compressed mode option for 220
characters/line and bidirectional printing and logic seeking.
All modems, hubs, switches, gateways and other serial equipment to be used in the application of
system networks must be of industrial grade quality to meet the following criteria:
Can tolerate up to 0 to 60 C
The Contractor shall plan for the spatial requirements of the BMS Work Station and associated
peripherals and accessories and provide suitable consoles, tables, chairs, stands etc., in the Station
Control Room (SCR) & OCC, to ensure that a neat, tidy, aesthetically pleasing working space is
achieved.
The Contractor shall liaise with all other Contractors with equipment located in the SCR to ensure
that available space is optimized and that power outlet requirements, cable ways and containment
systems are adequately catered for.
The Contractor shall provide necessary hardware, software, data, etc., so that the control and
monitoring functions for the TVS can be performed.
The Contractor shall develop operating scenarios for the TVS for normal, congested and emergency
situations and shall provide control sequencing to provide for safety of equipment and passengers
during emergency situations especially during evacuation of passengers.
The TVS PLC shall be completed and equipped with provisions for automatic, manual, local and
remote controls so that the fans & motors can be operated from a remote terminal at the Operations
Control Centre (OCC), a local terminal at the Station Control Room (SCR), manually at a Ventilation
Control Panel at the Station Control Room (SCR), manually from the a Local Control Panel at the TVS
Plant Room.
Upon loss of control power, TVS PLC components shall automatically operate as described for
emergency conditions.
Temperature monitoring will be included by the Contractor as provided in each running tunnel as
applicable.
The control system for the TVS to be provided by the Contractor shall comprise of a Local Control
System that shall interface with the other systems to be provided by other Designated Contractors
The TVS and ECS will normally be controlled and monitored from the OCC. At OCC, a
Supervisory Communications and Data Acquisition System (SCADA), will control and monitor the
TVS plant in each station ancillary building such that they are normally unattended locally.
The local control system for the TVS shall be designed to receive control commands from OCC, to
control the TVS equipment to the desired conditions and report equipment status, including operation
alarms, to the OCC via SCADA, Ventilation Control Panels (VCP).
Volt-free contacts provided shall comprise a pair of contacts operated directly by the equipment but
electrically separated such that no potential derived from the equipment appears at the contacts.
Volt-free contacts shall be used to complete external alarm or indication circuits with the supplies
for these circuits being obtained from an external source. For the equipment to be controlled by the
BMS, the BMS will transmit a voltage pulse signal of required voltage to termination block. There
shall be one interface for control open and one for control close operations. The Contractor shall
provide appropriate equipment to sense and latch the voltage pulse signal for performing the
open/close control function. The BMS digital output (DO) signal shall be as stipulated.
For the Life Safety equipment to be monitored by the BMS, the BMS will transmit a positive voltage
pulse signal each for On/Off, Healthy/Fail, Open/Closed etc., as appropriate.
Volt-free contacts shall be readily convertible from NO to NC and vice versa by simple field
adjustment. Contacts shall be rated to adequately make and break and carry continuously not less than
5 A at 250 V AC or 2 A at 110 V DC.
The Local Control System components for the BMS shall comprise:
External interface with the SCADA to facilitate system-wide control & monitoring of the
TVS, ECS, E&M equipment at OCC.
External interface with the fire protection systems for activation of the trackway exhaust
fans for station platform level fires or shut down of respective TVS equipment.
Remote I/O units for interfacing with Electro/Pneumatic Panel for the compressed air system
for the automatic dampers. (If pneumatic damper actuators are opted for by the
Contractor)
The control and monitoring of the TVS equipment at the OCCs shall be via the
RTU/REDUNDANT SERVER's provided under this contract.
The Contractor shall provide the data necessary so that the following functions can be performed by
the SCADA at the OCCs:
To indicate and log alarms such as high temperatures, equipment fault/failure, etc.
To provide Daily Report, Weekly Report, Monthly Report of total energy consumption and
Operating Hours Report of all TVS equipment.
To indicate and log the operating status and alarm conditions of the TVFs, TBFs, UPEFs,
TEFs and their associated dampers, tunnel ventilation system bypass and isolation dampers,
MCCs and emergency stop push button.
To provide remote control for the TVFs, TBFs, TEFs and their associated dampers.
The Contractor shall provide necessary hardware, software, data, etc., for each station so that the
following control and monitoring functions for the TVS can be performed:
To initiate operation of the tunnel ventilation system from the OCC in response to train
congestion operations resulting from a delay or operational problems which prevents the
free flow of trains through the system. When a train stops in a tunnel due to congestion on
the running line and when the tunnel temperature rises above a pre-set value, the relevant
TVS operation mode shall be activated by a command from the SCADA, which is referred
to as the “Demand Signal”. The Demand Signal will be provided by others through the
SCADA.
To initiate operation of the TVS in response to emergency operations which generally result
from a malfunction of the train on track. An emergency may include major disruptions such
as a train on fire requiring passenger evacuation. The TVS control system shall enable the
OCC operator to quickly activate the appropriate operation mode of the TVS plant for
emergency ventilation of the tunnels or trackways, e.g. to direct smoke away from the
evacuation path during fire emergencies.
To initiate operation of the TVS to provide adequate ventilation in the tunnels during traffic
block period (non-revenue period).
To provide back-up for the operation of the TVS in the event of failure of automatic control of the
SCADA, the following additional provisions shall be provided:
Manual activation of the congestion and emergency operation mode from the VCP in the
Station Control Room.
Manual operation of the individual TVFs, TBFs and TEFs from the OCC.
This is located in the TVS Control Rooms of each station to maintain the normal operation of the TVS
at the stations. One or more PLCs shall be provided in each of the TVS Control Rooms at both ends of
each station to control the associated TVS equipment. The Contractor shall provide the necessary
interfacing and redundant communication links between the PLCs at both ends of each station to
perform the interlocking, control, operation and monitoring functions and requirements for the TVS
equipment.
Principal functions of the PLCs shall include but not limited to the following:
To receive commands from the SCADA and perform sequential starting of the equipment
with an adjustable pre-set time delays to avoid excessive surge on the power supply system
during starting of the equipment.
To monitor the status and alarm indications of all TVS equipment and provide automatic
changeover to the standby or idling equipment whilst retaining flashing indications for the
malfunctioned equipment at the Local Controls. The PLCs shall be able to activate or reset
buzzers at the associated Local Control Panel upon alarm condition.
To monitor the status and alarm indications of all TVS and associated equipment and report
any change of status to SCADA and the Programming and Maintenance (PM) terminals.
To perform automatic start-up of the TVS plant in the morning and shut down at night.
To directly control the starting/stopping of the TVS equipment and opening /closing of the
associated dampers.
To output analogue signals in the form of voltage or current (0-10V, 4-20 mA) to the
transducers in the control device panel of the equipment where they are converted into
suitable signals to drive the actuators or other control device such as valves.
To receive analogue signals in the form of voltage or current (0-10V, 4-20 mA) from
field sensors, convert these signals into Engineering units and reporting them to the SCADA.
To log and report alarms of analogue signals which have exceeded pre-set high/low or rate
of change limits.
To receive set-point information from the SCADA and PM terminals during initialisation or
up dating and store these set-point values in the memory for control reference and function.
To receive operation mode commands from the SCADA and operate the fans and dampers in
a pre-set configuration with insertion of time delays and interlocking logic.
To monitor the activation of the push buttons or switches on the VCP, and LCP and execute
priority control.
To automatically restart the TVS equipment when power to TVS plant is restored after a
power failure or interruption, sequentially without causing the MCC circuit breakers to trip.
To provide the interlocking functions required for the TVS and AHU equipment during
operation in the TVS Closed System Mode
To automatically start the standby TVS equipment and their associated equipment and
dampers upon detection of failure of the TVS and ECS equipment.
BMS/1.01.58. General
PLC’s shall be supplied by a manufacturer of international repute with a proven track record of
similar installation applications.
PLC configurations shall be completely modular, DIN rail mounting, and compact in construction to
ensure maximum optimisation of cabinet space without compromising environmental operating
conditions. There shall be a range of expansion I/O modules available for different signal
requirements such that a vertically integratable cost/performance configuration is realized for each
location.
PLC’s shall be supplied and installed for monitoring and controlling equipment that shall consist of:
Input and output interface modules suitable for a mixture of digital, analog and pulse
inputs and outputs.
BMS/1.01.59. Functionality
Cyclical and regular update of its output according to the results of those computations.
BMS/1.01.60.PLC Processor
The PLC processor shall a multi tasking, multi CPU architecture with capability of solving
complex mathematical functions.
The PLC Processor shall have extensive diagnostics, and should have the capability to monitor and
detect faults in Individual channels of I/O modules.
All the Modules of the PLC platform should have the capacity to be inserted and removed under fully
powered up conditions, including the CPU Module. (Hot swappable)
The Power Supply Modules of the PLC platform should be able to source the Interrogation Power
Supply directly from the In Rack Power Supply.
The PLC processor can either have an 100 MBPS Ethernet Processor or have the ability to configure
an Ethernet Interface Module to it, either of which shall conform to all the specifications listed in this
document. The protocol used over Ethernet shall be Modbus over TCP/IP or Ethernet IP.
The PLC should have the capacity to be monitored over an Ethernet network.
The PLC processor shall be able to monitor its resident I/O while also being able to communicate
with a SCADA network over an Ethernet network.
The memory capacity shall be minimum 2 MB for storing the logic execution. Minimum 30% spare
capacity for user memory shall be provided over and above the requirement of the application
software. Memory expansion shall be provided.
The PLC Processor shall have dedicated processing capabilities for deterministic processing of
analog loops
The PLC processor shall have a built-in serial port and Ethernet port or RS 485 Modbus port and
Modbus TCP/IP and the ability to add additional serial ports that can be configured for either RS-232,
RS-423C or RS-422A communication.
The PLC processor shall have the ability to receive and map signals from third party systems but in
particular from the Fire Alarm System over Modbus RS 485 protocol/BACnet IP.
The processor serial port and Ethernet port shall be suitable for connection to any other devices that
can send and receive ASCII characters and communicate using MODBUS protocol characteristics.
The processor should be able support data transfer and remote programming for standard
applications in addition to peer-to-peer communications between other processors and devices, on the
Ethernet network.
It will be possible to connect a single industrial terminal to the port to program the respective PLC
processor with either on-line or off-line capabilities.
The PLC processor will have a configurable memory with state of art hardware. (utilize up to 65% of
its original capacity)
Structured Text
Ladder Logic
Function Block
The processor shall support the Advanced Instruction Set that includes basic and advanced ASCII
string instructions, and advanced math functions.
The processor shall support a system protection environment with passwords and privileges and
support a form of backup communications module.
The PLC system shall be designed fail-safe, in terms of operating logic. A “1” logic signal is
considered to be normal state, and a “0” logic signal is the trip state. Logic output signals are to fail
to a “0” state on power failure, or on component failure.
The PLC System shall be a Fail Safe Control, Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) based with a
Safety Integrity Level of minimum 2 (SIL 2).The system shall not have any time limitations to work
under degraded mode. The same shall be demonstrated in TUV report and safety manual.
The following hardware described will interface to the field mounted sensors and equipment for
control and monitoring.
Digital inputs:
Analog inputs:
Analog Outputs:
Pulse Inputs:
PLC Operating Voltages: The PLC must be able to operate at 100% from the following power sources:
Note: The PLC must operate at the nominal supply frequency of 50 Hz with a 15 % variation.
The PLC shall be programmed with manufacturer proprietary software, IEC 1131.3-compliant,
mixable and reversible List language and Ladder language. The software shall features Windows-
based editing functions and integrated online help.
An original copy of the latest manufacturers proprietary software shall be provided to AGRA
METRO upon completion and handover together with all generated site specific data.
Time delays
Modular, Expandable I/O modules (24 VDC input, transistor or relay output)
Modularity: 8, 16, 32
High-density connectors
Easy-to-wire system
Options shall include a built-in display screen, memory cartridges, a real-time clock and
communication adapters.
The PLC for emergency equipment shall also include a power supply backup system UPS
(uninterruptible power supply) which ensure that the PLC continue to function normally during the
loss of electrical main supply to the PLC. This system shall ensure the continued operation of the PLC
for at least sixty (60) minutes after the loss of electrical supply. Other PLCs shall be powered from
semi-essential power supply.
BMS/1.01.66.
Although the PLC processor specified above will have the capability of communicating directly with a
SCADA system via Modbus over TCP/IP protocol or Ethernet IP, the primary SCADA interface shall
be via the SCADA interface termination panels detailed in this Specification. In addition to the
above, the PLC shall have the capability to be monitored directly using the Ethernet IP, Modbus over
TCP/IP.
The Contractor shall supply a SCADA interface termination panel for each item of mechanical plant
and equipment as detailed in this Specification, including mechanical plant and equipment
incorporating PLC control systems.
A by-pass switch/es shall be provided to completely by-pass the PLC in the event of a total failure of
the PLC and associated equipment to enable the normal operation of the equipment controlled by the
PLC.
Control panel, switchboards and distribution boards wiring shall be clearly identified in accordance
with the Definitive Design Drawings using cable core markers. Cable core markers shall read left to
right or top to bottom.
Wiring shall be enclosed in metal ducts or neatly loomed with nylon ties or spiral binding as required.
Wiring ducts shall be filled to a maximum space factor of 50%.
Where wiring is required to connect to devices mounted on doors it shall be arranged such that
opening and closing of the door is not impeded whilst minimising flexing of the wiring loom. The
loom shall be effectively fixed at both ends of the door opening with insulated saddles or clamps.
AC Control Grey
DC Positive Orange
DC Negative Lilac
Terminals shall be clearly numbered, and shall be rail mounted, adequately sized to suite wiring size
and provided with 20% spare rail space. The bridging of terminals shall be provided by the use of
terminal bridging links as supplied by the terminal manufacturer.
Control wiring shall be terminated using pre-insulated pin or spade type crimp lugs. Conductors
terminating to study type terminals shall be fitted with spade type crimp lugs.
A separate earth bar shall be provided for the termination of all earth wires. Only one wire shall be
connected into each termination point.
2
Minimum conductor size shall be 1.5mm .
Cable glanding plates shall be earthed directly to the control panel earth bar.
Panels shall be fitted with a suitable pocket to contain circuit diagrams AGRA and other relevant
Definitive Design Drawings. An “as installed” set shall be provided with the panel.
A maximum of two control wires shall be terminated on any control device terminal.
HRC fuse links fittings shall be of the bolt in type and shall be installed in fully shrouded fuse holders.
415V fuses shall be high interrupting capacity type complying with the relevant standards.
The ECS equipment shall be monitored and operable from the local ECS panel, ventilation control
panel in the station control room and also some designated commands and the indications from the
OCC through SCADA. Necessary provisions to be made in the station for enable OCC to monitoring
and control. The communication line from station to OCC shall be provided by the designated
contractor.
During normal conditions, trackway exhaust fans shall operate continuously. In addition, control of
these fans shall be possible during congested and emergency conditions for the purpose of aiding
tunnel ventilation systems in trackway temperature control and providing additional smoke removal
capability for the station and tunnel.
The ECS &TVS system should have features of adequate smoke control and extraction. The smoke
control should be suitably designed to control spread of smoke in case of fire.
TVS BMS architecture shall be hardware based system at Processor / Power supply / Communication
redundancy. Both CPUs shall communicate with each other by high speed communication i.e.
minimum of 10 Mbps through fibre optic cable.consist of programmable logic based electronic
processors with redundant configuration at processor, communication and power supply level. Each
processor will perform self-diagnostics in the background and have alarm indicators for hardwire
failure. The processors will be capable of detecting any malfunction in other modules and report
this to the workstation. PLC processors, communication modules and power supply are housed in a
single cabinet along with I/O modules serving each station end TVS equipment.
The processor will have indicator lights for “Running” status, “Online/Standby” status,
“Communication Failure” alarm & Battery status. Each processor will have independent facilities of
power on/off, system reset, and diagnostic indicators.
Each processor will have a resident real time clock with a battery backup. It will be synchronized
with clock signal from the Workstation for various operations. All processors will be able to
communicate to each other without workstation.
The PLCs will be able to continuously operate under the following environment conditions:
Operating temperature: 0 to 60 deg. C
Storage temperature: -25 Deg. C to 85 deg. C Relative
humidity: 5 to 95% (non-Condenser)
Operating Principal
The redundant system shall provide streamlined transfer of I/O control from Master
processor to Standby processor upon the failure of Master processor without using any relay
circuits.
The PLCs shall have hardware based redundancy, and which communicates status
information between the two PLC processors and exchanges the state RAM. Upon a power-
up, whichever processor beats first will be assigned as master/primary. It shall remain
master/primary as long as standby processor finds it healthy. In case standby processor
senses that Master/primary has failed, it will force the changeover irrespective of how
Master/primary sees itself. This shall avoid total reliance on processor’ self-diagnostics for
changeover.
The Master/primary processor shall run the application by scanning user logic and operating
distributed I/Os. At the end of every program scan, the Master/primary processor shall send
input / output data and internal data tables to the standby processor, so that in the event of
changeover, the two processors will have the same data. Both the processor should run in
sync mode, data should be same in both the processor at any moment of time to make the
changeover bump less. Manual programming should not be required for Hot Backup.
Changeover
The automatic changeover time of control from one PLC to the other PLC includes time
required for following events
Failure detection
The standby shall be ready to assume control within one scan in case of failure of
Master/primary. Master/primary & Standby/Secondary states shall be switch-able. Each
Processor can be put into the Master/primary state, but to do this the other must be in
standby Secondary state.
Should a fault occur in the Master/primary processor, control will be transferred to standby
processor in maximum 500 ms. During the changeover, PLC outputs shall be maintained in
their last state until they come under control of the standby/ Secondary processor. Fault
data is sent to workstation for reporting the processor failure. The system shall now
recognize earlier standby processor as Master/primary processor.
The processors communicate with each other and with I/O modules on redundant / ring
communication bus. The communication speed between processor and I/Os shall not be
less than 10 Mbps.
Each TVS PLC outstation has two 24Vdc power supplies arranged in a redundant
configuration. These power supplies are used for powering up the processors and I/O
modules.
Each processor provides a serial port and Ethernet port for local connection to a
programming device. Network connection such as Ethernet are also provided for
communications to the Workstation. Other communication such as control net or Ethernet
shall also be provided to the workstation
One processor of redundant configuration shall be connected to SCR room Switch and the
other processor shall be connected to TER room Switch. The two switches are connected to
each other via a dedicated LAN. The communication link to PC and OCC are Modbus on
TCP/IP or Ethernet IP.
OCC SCADA will interface with both SCR and TER room switch, while workstation will
interface only at SCR room switch.
Network links
The system architecture shall use the following communication routes as applicable:
BMS/1.01.80. Alarm
If a network link fails, the system shall have inbuilt programs within the processors which
will generate fault bits available to workstation and OCC. The communications error rate will
be logged and stored in the processor. If the error rate exceeds the set point, an alarm will be
sent to OCC.
Tunnel Ventilation system provides tunnel ventilation and air movement control over the
tunnel area at the station. Two large diameter, reversible tunnel ventilation fans are installed
at each of the east and west end tunnel ventilation plant rooms. These fans shall operate to
provide forced ventilation in tunnels during the congestion and emergency mode. Supply
nozzles in one end are used to maintain required thrust into the tunnels. Fixed speed
reversible Tunnel Booster Fans are provided at other end station. Draft relief, tunnel
ventilation and nozzle discharge dampers provide airflow in supply or extract mode.
Though the complete plant comprising of Tunnel Ventilation Fans and Tunnel Booster Fans,
Draft release dampers, Tunnel Ventilation dampers, Nozzle dampers are dedicated to
individual tracks, it shall also be possible to use the tunnel ventilation fans as standby to
other fan in that plant room in case of failure of the dedicated fan. However, the concept of
runtime based duty/standby selection/changeover shall not be applicable to these fans.
During extract mode, nozzle dampers of associated track shall remain open to provide partial
airflow through them.
All reversible fans shall be able to accept the direction reversal command without any time
delay. Any cool down period or other delay timers shall be built in the MCC Electrical design
for these fans.
The TVF require to operate in reverse direction can operate only in open loop.
The Tunnel Ventilation system operation can operate in the following modes:
1. Manual Mode
2. Normal Mode
3. Congested Mode
4. Emergency Mode
Manual Mode
During manual mode the system shall be under direct control of an operator at MCC or LCP.
An operator shall operate the system via push buttons provided at each equipment control
section of MCC.
Normal Mode
During normal mode, train movement in and out of tunnel provides ventilation.
This ventilation mode may work in open loop or closed loop. These loops are similar to
100% Fresh Air and Re-circulating mode of the ECS system.
During open loop, draft relief dampers and shaft dampers shall open providing air exchange
with the atmosphere.
During closed loop, draft relief dampers and shaft dampers shall close facilitating air
exchange between the tunnel and the station ECS.
Congested Mode
When OCC decides a particular tunnel to be in congestion mode, an operator shall be able to
command the ventilation system to work either in open loop or closed loop congestion
mode. Decision to run in open or closed loop will depend upon the prevailing mode in
station ECS. However, an operator shall be able to manually cause the system to run in a
control loop different to prevailing control loop at the station. In such cases, station ECS
shall also assume the control loop selected by the operator. The ECS and TVS shall remain in
selected control loop till Operator commands the system control loops to work in auto.
The tunnel ventilation system shall be normally controlled to supply the air inside the tunnels
along the direction of train travel before it stopped. However, the tunnel ventilation system
may run in opposite direction in case one or more equipment have failed making the system
unavailable in the desired mode. An operator with valid password and access levels shall be
able to take such decisions.
Once OCC commands to start the TVS, PLC will perform the required logical operations
as follows:
TVF Fan
Control Loop Train Location TBF Fan Direction
Direction
Rest indicates the equipment at that station end shall not operate. Emergency Mode
The workstation shall gather information related to fire and transmits to OCC for verification.
The workstation shall not not take any preventive measures automatically. When the OCC
shall decide a particular tunnel or station area to be in Emergency mode, an operator shall
be able to command the ventilation system to work either in forward, or reverse direction.
Upon receipt of an emergency command, the station ECS and TVS shall assume the open
loop status irrespective of prevailing mode in station. The ECS and TVS shall remain in open
loop till operator commands the system modes to work in auto.
The decision to run the tunnel ventilation system in forward or reverse shall be based on the
evacuation path and shall be taken by an operator. The TVS with shorter evacuation path
will be controlled to supply the air inside the tunnels. However, tunnel ventilation system
may run in opposite direction in case one or more equipment have failed, making the system
unavailable in desired mode. Such decisions shall however be taken by the Operator with
Valid password and access levels.
Following monitoring and control points are considered for Tunnel Ventilation Fan:
c. Monitoring and Alarms for Emergency Stop Button, Fan local/remote status, Fan trip,
current, vibration sensors
Tunnel Ventilation fans can be run in following directions based on open or close loop
situation:
Once PLC receives a command to operate the fan in forward direction in open loop,
following events shall occur:
a. The PLC shall command the nozzle damper and shaft damper to open, draft relief damper
and return damper to close.
b. The PLC shall wait for a predetermined time for dampers position confirmation by their
limit switches.
c. Once the dampers are confirmed to be in desired state, the PLC shall command the fan
to run in forward mode. Fan isolation damper is hardwired in MCC to ensure that it
opens before the fan runs.
d. If the fan fails to run, the PLC shall disable the fan control circuit and command another
fan to run. An alarm shall be generated at workstation.
e. If both fans fail to run, the PLC shall disable both fan control circuits. An alarm shall be
generated at workstation.
f. If the nozzle damper or shaft damper fail to open, the TVF shall shutdown. Forward
Direction Close Loop
Once the PLC receives a command to operate the fan in forward direction in close loop, the
following events shall occur:
a. The PLC shall command the nozzle damper and return damper to open, draft relief
damper and shaft damper to close.
b. The PLC shall wait for a predetermined time for dampers position confirmation by their
limit switches.
c. Once the dampers are confirmed to be in desired state, the PLC shall command the fan
to run in forward mode. Fan isolation damper is hardwired in MCC to ensure that it
opens before the fan runs.
d. If the fan fails to run, the PLC shall disable the fan control circuit and command another
fan to run. An alarm is generated at workstation.
e. If both fans fail to run, the PLC shall disable both fan control circuits. An alarm is
generated at workstation.
f. If the return damper fails to open, the TVF shall shutdown. Reverse Direction Open Loop
Only
Once a PLC receives a command to operate the fan in reverse direction in open loop, the
following events shall occur:
a. The PLC shall command the nozzle damper, shaft damper and return damper to open,
draft relief damper to close.
b. The PLC shall wait for a predetermined time for dampers position confirmation by their
limit switches.
c. Once the dampers are confirmed to be in desired state, the PLC shall command the fan
to run in reverse mode. Fan isolation dampers are hardwired in MCC to ensure that
they open before the fan runs.
d. If the fan fails to run, the PLC shall disable the fan control circuit and command another
fan to run. An alarm is generated at Workstation.
e. If both fans fail to run, the PLC shall disable both fan control circuits. An alarm
is generated at Workstation.
f. If the nozzle damper or return damper fails to open, the TVF shall not be shutdown.
The following monitoring and control points are considered for Tunnel Vent, Draft Relief,
Shaft and Nozzle Dampers
There are three Track way exhaust fans on each side of station. These fans shall normally
work as part of station ECS system. Accordingly, these shall be switched on/off along with
the AHUs. However, during emergency mode, track way exhaust fan shall operate
from TVS system.
The following monitoring and control points are considered for Track way Exhaust Fan:
c. Monitoring and Alarms for Emergency Stop Button, Fan local/remote status, Fan trip,
current, vibration sensors;
Fan isolation dampers are hardwired in the MCC such that damper opens before a fan can start.
In all such cases, Open/close indications of dampers through limit switches shall be
hardwired in MCC. MCC shall also provide repeat signals to BMS for the status indication of
dampers.
One temperature sensor on each track at each end of tunnel shall be installed by Vendor at
pre-determined distances ( minimum 30 mtrs) from station ends. These reading are sent to
OCC to facilitate the tunnel condition monitoring.
BMS/1.01.87. General
The Contractor shall ensure efficient interface and co-ordination with all other Contractors
concerning mechanical works .
Interfacing between the TVS SCADA system and mechanical equipment will require co-ordination
between the respective contracts as specified. The Contractor shall liaise to ensure the interfacing
between each system meets the requirements of its respective specification.
During the preparation of detail design the Contractor shall liaise with the designated Contractor,
Employer’s Representative, AGRA Fire Services and other Designated Contractors to determine all
requirements for response in event of fire, and then subsequently provide the necessary facilities.
The initial design shall assume that all fans having a capacity in excess of 1 m3/s shall be shut down
by the fire detection system during smoke or fire conditions.
The E & M Contractor shall provide a complete fire-detection & alarm system including provisions
for monitoring and control through a fire panel at station control room and OCC. This system shall
have an interface for operation and control with other equipment such as ventilation / exhaust fans etc
through TVS SCADA.
Interfacing between the electrical system Contractors for providing monitoring and control of
Electrical system required from OCC. The Contractor shall liaise with the Designated Contractor for
the System-wide Works to ensure the interfacing between the mutual systems meets their joint and
individual specification requirements.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
BMS/1.01.91. General
Environmental Design Conditions: The outside air and station design conditions are given in the
Employer’s Requirements.
The TVS includes the TVFs, the TEFs and the TBFs.
This Paragraph defines the minimum Electro-magnetic compatibility (EMC) requirements for all
electronic and electrical equipment supplied under this Contract.
The Contractor shall co-ordinate with Project Contractors and ensure that the frequencies and
bandwidths employed in the TVS/ECS PLC Systems will not fall into the frequencies known to be
major sources of interference.
The Contractor shall ensure that the fundamental frequencies, harmonics and cross products produced
by the TVS/ECS PLC Systems will not interfere with those of other systems in the Project.
The following standards and documents are applicable, in addition to the reference documents and
other standards given in this document
Equipment to be mounted on the floor shall be placed on reinforced concrete equipment pads.
Minimum pad height shall be 100 mm. The Contractor shall co-ordinate as necessary.
In cases where units are ceiling suspended, the support system shall be adequately braced to ensure
stability during unit start up, operation and shut down.
BMS/1.01.94. Maintainability
Items such as knock out panels, double doors, lifting eyes, floor drains and access hatches shall be
provided in the Contract. The Contractor shall co-ordinate as necessary.
Sufficient clear space shall be provided around equipment to facilitate equipment removal and
replacement and to allow for ease in equipment servicing. Provisions shall be made for shaft, tube
and filter pull space, access door swings and removal of miscellaneous components.
Control system schematic diagrams shall be posted in the vicinity of all control panels. Piping
system schematic diagrams shall be posted in each plant room.
BMS/1.01.95. Equipment Identification
Equipment, control devices, valves and piping systems shall be permanently labelled by the
Contractor after installation. The labels shall conform to a system-wide method.
This method shall identify individual equipment items and provide information regarding equipment
type, equipment function, flow direction and other such data as appropriate. Identification shall be
keyed to the control and piping schematics.
Cables shall not be installed either exposed or surface mounted in air plenums that may
carry air at elevated temperatures during fire emergency conditions.
All conductors shall be enclosed in their entirety in armour sheaths, conduits, cable tray,
boxes and cabinets.
INSTALLATION
BMS/1.01.97. Installation Plan and Program
The Contractor shall attend a weekly planning meeting with the Employer’s Representative to
finalise the work detail, commencing 4 weeks prior to the start of Installation on Site.
The Contractor shall submit a Construction and Installation Plan for the review of the Employer’s
Representative 90 days prior to the start of Installation on Site.
The Method Statements, as described in the Employer’s Requirements shall be submitted to the
Employer’s Representative for review at least 30 days prior to the installation activity commencing
On-Site.
The Contractor shall ensure that a qualified Representative is available on-Site for the duration of
the On-Site Works during normal working hours and on-call to arrive on Site within 30 minutes at all
other times.
The Contractor’s Representative shall have sufficient authority to progress the Contractor’s work on
Site.
The Contractor’s Representative shall be competent and qualified to act on behalf of the Contractor, and
provide upon request information that may include:
BMS/1.01.101. General
The Contractor shall provide 3 copies of all drawings in A3 size, bound into circuit books.
The Contractor shall ensure that, at each equipment location, an as-built copy of the Site
documentation is provided. This documentation shall include as a minimum:
The circuit wiring books shall include as a minimum the following information:
Room layout;
Through circuits;
The Contractor shall ensure that the as-built cabling infrastructure is fully documented and accurate at
the time of substantial completion of the Section. The documentation shall include:
Cable types;
Installed dates;
The Contractor shall be responsible for adding to all of the Combined Services Drawings with cable
installation details and the timely supply of these marked up drawings to the Employer’s
Representative for overall co-ordination.
BMS/1.01.104. Earthing
The Contractor shall provide at each equipment room earth bars that shall be connected to the
earthing system provided by Civil Project Contractors as shown in the Interface Specification. Two
separate earthing points shall be provided, one for chassis and one for signal reference. The earth
bars shall be used as common points for all earthing in that location. Please refer to the section on
Earthing for installation compliance.
The Contractor shall submit an asset database for review by the Employer’s Representative. The
database shall contain the complete asset listing for the Tunnel Ventilation System.
Asset details;
Failure history;
Date tested.
All equipment and software, down to the line replaceable unit, shall have a unique identification
number that is capable of being identified electronically and manually.
ELECTRICAL WORKS
BMS/1.01.106. General
The electrical works to be provided include but are not limited to:
Provision of interlocks and protection schemes for the power distribution suiting to the to
desired operation duly coordinated with high voltage side protections and that of the
individual equipment.
Provision of suitable schemes for connecting various equipment supplied for monitoring and
control through SCADA and to the station control room. This includes supply of equipment /
panels at station control room, at the plant room or at the equipment and its connections.
Provision of automatic control of pumps, incoming supply, liquid level controllers or the
equivalent arrangement for various pumping requirements.
Provision of requisite lifting tools/tackles, spares and warranty and pre-commercial run
operations for the equipment supplied.
Provision of safety devices, charts, O&M manuals, checklists etc. as are necessary for safety
of the workmen and as required under statutory regulations.
These works shall be limited to station, tunnel, parking lots and other ancillary building
associated with the project.
The Contractor shall conduct interface and co-ordination with each System-wide Contractor to
determine each Contractor’s requirements for the provision of fixings, openings, room sizes,
installation sequences, etc. in order to prepare:
Equipment – General
Numbers: Each piece of equipment shall be numbered according to the number of the
circuit breaker feeding the piece of equipment. Terminal cabinets shall be numbered
sequentially.
Letters: Each equipment number shall be preceded by a letter designation as appropriate, as
follows:
Control Panel CP
Disconnect Switch Z
Generator G
Motor M
Motor Starter MS
Switchboards A
Switchgear SWGR
Terminal Cabinet TC
Transformer TX
All cables shall be rated to carry the continuous current required by the system design as stated in the
Employer’s Requirements, and to carry the short circuit currents applying with the proposed
scheme design. The ratings applied to any cable shall be determined by the most onerous
installation condition in any cable route.
Cables for protection and control functions associated with the power supply system, and used on
line-side routes, shall be armoured and shall be low-smoke, non-halogenated type where used on
underground sections or in enclosed public areas. All critical control cables shall be duplicated and
run separately in the underground section. SCADA related wiring shall be terminated in supervisory
termination cabinets.
Cable sizes shall be adequate to permit single cable carrying full load current. In the event that a
suitable size is unavailable the Contractor shall propose alternative termination arrangements for the
Employer’s Representative’s consent. To be acceptable the layout must be neat , compact and tidy.
Low smoke and fume (LSF) and zero halogen and Cross linked polyethylene (XLPE) insulated
single wire armoured and LSF sheathed multi-core cables shall have copper conductors, for use at 415
volts or less, shall be 600V/1100 volt grade, manufactured in accordance with an approved
international standard.
Cables for “Emergency” supplies shall be fire survival type and conform to NFPA requirements.
Unless otherwise agreed the fire survival cables shall be tested to IEC-331 for circuit integrity under
fire at 750C for three hours. These shall be protected from physical damage by transit vehicles or
other normal system operations and from fires in the transit system. This shall be accompanied by
suitable embedment or encasement or by routing.
No supporting or binding component shall have material emitting toxic gases or smoke in excess of
prescribed limits in case of fire. The cables used overground may be normal XLPE cables.
XLPE power cables shall be heavy-duty types, 1100 V grade with copper conductor. XLPE insulated,
sheathed, armoured and with sheath of halogen free material suitably compounded to meet FRLS
properties where used over ground in Metro sub-way. The core insulation shall be with cross-linked
polyethylene unfilled insulation compound free from voids, of thickness as specified in IS:7098 (Part
I).
The inner sheath shall be applied over the laid up cores by extrusion with LSOH compound type ST1
of IS: 5831 of uniform thickness less than that specified against rodent and termite attack.
The outer sheath shall be applied by extrusion over the armouring with sheath of halogen free
material meeting FRLS properties mixed with chemicals for protection against rodent and termite
attack.
The control cable shall be heavy-duty type, 1100 V grade FRLS, nil halogen with stranded copper
conductor of size not less than 1.5 sq. mm, (suitably compounded to meet FRLS, ZH properties
where used in Metro Sub-way). The outer sheath shall also be mixed with chemicals for protection
against rodent and termite attack. PVC insulated, sheathed cables can be used in over ground
applications. Employer’s Representative’s consent may be sought in case of any deviation.
The termination and straight joints shall be in kit form that shall be suitable for the type of cables
offered as per this specification. The kit shall include all insulation and sealing materials apart from
conductor fittings and consumable items as well as installation instructions.
The straight through jointing kits shall be suitable not only for conditions of high humidity
encountered in Metro sub-way, but also for underground buried installation with uncontrolled back- fill
and possibility of flooding by water. As in the case of terminating kits, these shall be of proven
design and established make and shall be type-tested as per Relevant Indian or International standards.
Type test certificates shall accompany the offer.
The jointing kits shall match the cable specifications. The fire survival cables shall not permit any
joints in case the joint does not meet the fire survival conditions.
The exact final cable routing and segregation shall be agreed with the Employer’s Representative
before installation commences.
Cables shall be installed with a minimum of 300-mm clearance from any equipment or pipework
including lagging associated with other services. Where this condition is unavoidable or difficult to
maintain, the Employer’s Representative shall be informed prior to the installation being
commenced, otherwise the Contractor may be called upon to divert or adjust the route of any cable so
affected.
The power cables shall, for interference purposes be separated from the signal & communication
cables in the tunnel, stations & under platform voids. Control and other cables shall be routed
separately from traction or power cables. Cables shall be installed so that any one cable can be
removed without disturbance to cables from other circuits in the same route. The contractor shall
determine which cable sheaths shall be earthed at points of termination. All cable joints shall be
identified, and shall have an electrical and mechanical performance not less than that of the cables.
Unarmoured cables shall be protected from physical damages according to location. The cable route
should avoid any possibility of experiencing hot gases at elevated temperatures in case of fire.
All cables shall be firmly and adequately supported from cable supports for their entire length
except where they run through the steel conduit or concrete encased PVC or polyethylene conduit or
are buried direct in the ground.
Cables shall be supported by cleats fixed to continuous section rolled channel suitable for horizontal
and vertical mounting either cast in or secured to the structure using such brackets and adapters as are
available from the manufacturers.
Wire and cable used in operating vital train signal circuits and Power circuits to emergency fans,
lights and so forth, shall conform to the flame propagating criteria of Type Test of Class 1E Electric
Cables, Field Splices, and Connections for Nuclear Power Generating Stations (Institute of Electrical
Electronics Engineers (IEEE) IEEE 383m, page F-9, 1974 Edition, Table 2.5). The fire survival
cables shall be tested as per IEC-331 for integrity under fire conditions for a period of 3 hours at 750⁰
C.
Conductors for emergency lighting, communication, and so forth, shall be protected from physical
damage by transit vehicles or other normal transit system operations and from fires in the transit
system. This shall be accomplished by suitable embodiment or encasement, or by routing the
conductors through areas of low fire potential (light hazard).
Materials manufactured for use as conduits, raceways, ducts and their surface finish materials, when
installed in stations and trainways shall be capable of being subjected to temperatures up to 930F
(500C.) for an hour, and shall conform to the National Electrical Code (NFPA 70). They shall
also conform to the codes of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA), the
American National Standards Institute (ANSI), and Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
Materials manufactured for use as conduits, raceways, ducts and their surface, finish materials when
used for emergency power circuits shall be strong and durable.
All cables shall be in conduit. In tunnels, the conduits shall be either attached to tunnel walls or
directly buried. On elevated structures, conduits shall be attached to, or embedded in structure.
Where the track is at ground level, the conduits shall be in concrete duct banks below grade or
directly buried.
In tunnels and on elevated structures, a cableway shall be provided adjacent to the track. The top of the
cableway (known as the service way) shall consist of removable covers suitable for walkway over.
Maintenance personnel shall use the service way and no facility power cable shall be placed in the
service way.
Duct banks shall be configured as required at the specific location. Manholes, pull boxes, junction
boxes and cable vaults shall be spaced for ease of cable pulling, and shall meet applicable codes and
operational requirements, without exceeding cable-pulling tensions. Underground duct banks shall be
sloped towards manhole or box from which water may be drained or pumped. The design must be
carefully coordinated with underground utilities to assure safe access within the right-of-way.
Bends in conduits within a duct bank shall be minimum 0.9m radius, regardless of size, and in
conformance with manufacturer’s recommendation.
Wayside duct banks, where used beyond tunnel sections shall be installed for pulling cables from the
cableway in the tunnels to the points of terminations in the stations. To facilitate cable pulling,
splicing, and transitioning, pull boxes shall be installed at intervals consistent with system
requirements.
As directed in at-grade sections of the Depot, underground duct banks, prefabricated trenches, or direct burial
cables shall be installed between adjacent tracks or in adjacent right-of-way. To facilitate cable pulling,
splicing and transitioning, manholes or pull boxes shall be installed at appropriate intervals to
accommodate the system requirements.
Cable transition details shall be shown on the drawings for at-grade to aerial structures and for at-
grade to tunnel sections.
Conduit Transitions are needed when changing from one wayside cableway location or configuration to
another and to provide conduit access from the wayside cableway to system wayside facilities, such
as communication, fare collection, signals/signal systems equipment, traction power equipment, track
switches, and tunnel emergency telephone stations.
Where conduit transition, pull or junction boxes, or manholes might collect water, means of drainage
shall be provided.
Each manhole or pull box shall contain cable pulling irons, cable racks, ladder and/or rungs are
required, and accessible ground rod. Aerial structure wireways of metal shall be individually grounded
by means of ground cable(s) welded to the wire way every three meters and at intersections. The
ground cables shall be extended to the nearest manhole or transition box at a station and connected
to the station facility ground system. The manhole shall be designed such that the auxiliary power
conduits can be divided from the system train control and communication conduits entering the
manhole. Where possible, wayside conduits shall enter the manhole at the same elevation as those
conduits on the wayside. Sudden changes in conduit elevations should be avoided in the vicinity of
the cable vault.
A manhole or pull box shall be provided at the end of each facilities contract limit if no provisions
have been made in the adjoining contract.
Manhole and pull box for access to under-platform area shall conform to the architectural
requirements.
Cable vaults shall be used to integrate wayside duct banks with the station conduit system. The size
and shape of these vaults shall be adapted to station configuration and shall include sufficient
working room for a man and cable-pulling equipment.
All electrical facilities conduit pull boxes, manholes, and so forth shall be installed on DMRTS right-
of-way. If this is not possible, the additional required right-of-way shall be identified and co-
ordinated with Employer’s Representative within 4 weeks after the notice to proceed has been
issued.
Concrete-encased wayside duct banks shall have a 6.25 mm or a suitable minimum protective cover on
all sides. Encased PVC and FRE conduits shall be coupled to GRS conduit before the conduit
emerges from an encasement and becomes exposed. Conduits of dissimilar metals shall not be
joined without insulating provisions to prevent galvanic corrosion.
The conduit schedule shall identify all feeder conduits to be installed, using symbols and
annotations. Conduits that are to enclose circuits installed by others shall be clearly indicated.
Installation specification shall require pull wire and permanent tagging of each conduit access. Schedule
Content.
Conduit and feeder schedules shall include the following information:
An indelible display shall identify the cables laid along with the conduits at each conduit junction /
termination etc for identification during any future handling.
Raceway designed shall include all required runs between equipment and panel boards in electrical
rooms, and so forth, and shall be shown on drawings with cross references to other drawings which
detail the conduit routing in ceilings, walls or floor slabs as required. Conduits shall be extended
from these secondary distribution points to associate equipment. Conduit runs which may exceed the
270-degree bend limitation and conduit runs in excess of 30m shall be detailed in the project
drawings. Details shall include junction box locations, bends and potential obstructions, such as
mechanical ducts and piping.
Identification discs for cables installed within buildings or tunnels shall be supplied and attached
with galvanised wire to each cable intervals not greater than 12 metres and at all cable terminations.
All cable ducts including spare ways are to be sealed at each end with a plastic compound or other
approved sealing substance.
Cables used for control circuits and all multi-core cables having more than four cores shall be
provided with cable core identification sleeves at their points of connection.
A display at the cable way / cable trench / cable gallery shall indicate the layout & identification of
each cable. The display shall be indelible and weatherproof.
BMS/1.01.128
Cable drums shall be stored on well-drained hard surfaces to prevent cable drums sinking and to
simplify drum movements.
Cable drums shall be stored on battens placed directly under the flanges. Storage shall be in such a
manner to leave sufficient space for air circulation. Every three months of storage the drums shall be
rotated 90o in the direction of the arrow.
During storage the ends of the cable shall remain properly sealed to prevent ingress of moisture.
Adequate shelter from rain and sun shall be provided. Adequate drainage shall be provided to
prevent the cable drums standing in water.
Cable drums shall not be dropped during transit, and cranes employed during unloading. Cable
drums should be rolled only in the direction of the arrow.
If passing one cable to another drum, the cable drum sizes must be the same.
During removal of the cable from the drum the minimum bending angle of 1 in 15 shall not be
exceeded.
Pulling force when using stockings shall not exceed 9D in Newton (N) where D is the outer diameter
of the cable.
For cables with pulling eyes, the maximum permissible tensile stress shall be 50N/sqmm, for
aluminum conductor cables.
BMS/1.01.130. Tests
All the materials employed in the manufacture of the cable shall be subjected to tests specified in
Indian Standards before manufacture of the cable.
After completion of manufacture and prior to dispatch the cables shall be subjected to type, routine
& acceptance tests as specified in Indian Standards.
The guidelines for testing the cables or the accessories shall match or exceed the following tests as per
relevant Indian or International Standards.
In addition the following special tests shall also be performed on the cables.
Flammability test
Test for circuit integrity under fire conditions at 750 ⁰C for 3 hours.
The type tests shall include the following tests conforming to the latest IEC 502 and VDE 0278
specifications. Type test certificates shall be furnished along with the offer.
Humidity test
Impact test
The Contractor shall maintain a record of test results commencing from the Manufacturer’s tests
conducted at the place of manufacture for comparison with the values obtained at site before and
after installation. The cause for any appreciable change shall be investigated and corrective action
taken as agreed with the Employer’s Representative. This record shall be a submittal at the time of
handing over.
Packing - Cables shall be dispatched in wooden drums of suitable barrel diameter, security battened,
with the take off end fully protected against mechanically damage. The wood used for construction of
the drum shall be properly seasoned, sound and free from defects. Wood preservatives shall be
applied to the entire drum.
Marking - On flange of the drum, necessary information such as manufacturer’s name , type, size,
voltage grade of cable, length of cable in metres, drum No., cable code, ISI certification mark, gross
weight etc. shall be printed. An arrow shall be printed on the drum indicating the direction of
rotation of the drum.
Control cables
5% of the order quantity can be supplied in non-standard lengths of not less than 100
metres.
Cable Trunking : Under floor, skirting, wall trunking and high level ceiling trunking shall be in
accordance with the highest standards, shall be of the steel type with steel covers and shall be hot dip
galvanised or zinc plated finish.
The lengths of trunking, bends tee sections and offsets shall be coupled together by means of fish
plates and the trunking manufacturer’s cadmium plated steel set screws, nuts and shake proof
washers.
At each joint in the trunking continuity shall be maintained by means of copper links secured by
brass nuts, locking washers and bolts.
Cable tray shall be perforated full wrap around type not less than 1.5-mm thickness mild steel hot
dip galvanised finish.
The cable tray shall be of sufficient width to take the cables without crowding and shall allow for
future additions to the proportion of 25% of present requirements. Double stacking of cable shall
not be allowed except where specifically agreed by the Employer’s Representative.
The cable tray shall be fixed to purpose made galvanised steel brackets secured to the structure.
The brackets shall be hot dip galvanised. Acceptance tests for the safe carrying load for each bracket at
typical locations shall be established by the Contractor for the Employer’s consent.
The fixing brackets shall rigidly support the cable tray and shall provide a clear space between the
structure and/or obstructions and the back of the cable tray. Supporting structure, bracket or fixing
material shall not have a sharp edge or abrasive effect on cables.
BMS/1.01.136. Conduit
Steel conduit and fittings shall comply with BS 4568 or approved equivalent specification and shall
be screwed classification.
The class of protection against corrosion shall be as scheduled. Class 2 conduit and fittings shall have
black enamelled finished and Class 4 shall be hot dipped galvanised.
Conduit boxes and covers shall have a minimum degree of protection as follows:
To satisfy requirements for earth fault loop impedance, the layout of conduit, trunking and ducting
and routing of cables shall ensure that the maximum circuit lengths allowable are not exceeded. The
maximum and typical values shall be indicated.
Bending of conduit shall be done without the use of heat using a bending tool that complies with the
British Standard appropriate to the conduit material.
Straight run 8m
Run with one or two bends 6m
Run with three bends 4m
Run with four bends 2.5 m
Where conduit is cast in-situ it shall be securely fixed before concrete is poured. As soon as shuttering
is removed it shall be checked for freedom from blockage and continuity.
At expansion and settlement joints suitable provision shall be made in conduit, trunking and ducting to
allow for movement of the structure. For trunking and ducting purpose-made expansion couplings shall
be used.
Temporary plugs shall be fitted to open ends of conduit and ducting to prevent ingress of water and
solid material.
All single-phase wires and cables shall be colour coded, i.e. Red, Blue and Yellow colours. The
earthing cable shall be Green and Neutral shall be Black.
BMS/1.01.138. General
This section covers the earthing system Criteria requirements for AC power system except for the
traction power system.
Earthing of electrical systems and electrical equipment shall be designed in accordance with the
following codes:
The Contractor shall provide the detailed design, manufacture, delivery and installation, functional
testing and handover of a working earthing and bonding system. The extent and adequacy of the
system must be established and a suitable testing method proposed to the Employer’s Representative
for consent as a sound and adequate procedure.
Earthing shall be carried out in accordance with the highest internationally accepted standards to
allow safety equipment to operate properly and to maintain touch voltages to below 50V in the
event of a short circuit in any part of the system.
Safety of persons. In particular passengers and staff shall be protected from the possibility of
high potential to structural earth potentials and carrying the fault current to the Earth
Correct operation of breakers and tripping devices and limitation of damage to plant,
equipment or system failure
BMS/1.01.140. Earth
The metallic sheaths and the armouring of all LV power cables shall be solidly earthed at both ends
to the main earth system.
The frames and enclosures of all AC switchboards, Control Panels etc., shall be earthed directly to
the main earth system.
The Contractor shall provide and perform all forms of test procedures applicable to the various
systems and shall conduct factory, site installation and acceptance tests. The test procedure &
schedule must be laid down by the Contractor in accordance with the governing standards and
submit in advance to the Employer's representative. The procedure shall cover a trial run of at least 8
hours including critical conditions in addition to the tests mentioned in the specifications.
The commissioning activity shall include a period of test running followed by staff training.
All test results and compliance with acceptance criterion shall be recorded in suitable batches and
preserved for handover to AGRA METRO at the time of Hand Over.
The tests shall be specified to confirm the design life of various equipments, sub-assemblies and
components. The design shall match the specified life. The test procedures shall be submitted for
consent for each equipment.
All cables, circuits, switch gear, UPS, DG set and components shall be fully tested for electrical
integrity, safety and operation, and certified as such before commissioning.
All electrical circuits and equipment are to be fully commissioned after testing.
The Employer's Representative shall be advised at least two weeks prior to any testing or
commissioning and will advise whether he is to be present some or all of the time to witness tests.
Whether the Employer's Representative is present or not copies of test results shall be submitted to him
within two weeks of successful tests being carried out.
The tests shall be specified to confirm the design life of various components / sub-assemblies /
equipments. The design life shall match the specified life. The test procedures shall be submitted for
consent of Employer’s representative for each equipment.
The contractor shall carry out testing of all ECS equipments separately for (I) air conditioning system
(ii) ventilation system and (iii) smoke extraction system to establish proper functioning of individual
equipment as well as the systems individually. The final testing should be carried out with all system
in working as would be under normal conditions and then simulating the emergency conditions to
establish the system-wide ability to manage such conditions. Such testing procedures to be
The compressed air system shall be tested in accordance with the approved testing procedures
document. Each component and assembly shall be type tested and functionally tested before
installation, and the entire system functionally tested for pressures, and correct operation including all
related equipment and interfaces with other equipment.
The earthing protection system shall be tested in accordance with the approved testing procedures and
document by the Main earthing vendor. Each component shall be type tested, each separate earth
position and the entire system tested for correct low impedance.
General Requirements
The Contractor shall put in place a full testing regime to demonstrate that all the requirements of the
Specification are met.
All the tests shall be carried out by the Contractor. The Employer’s Representative reserves the right to
carry out any additional tests he considers necessary to satisfy himself that the System meets the
requirements of the Specification.
The Contractor shall support the Employer’s Representative’s additional tests as necessary. The
Contractor’s support shall include, but not be limited to:
The Contractor shall submit a Testing and Commissioning program for the
Employer’s Representative’s review within 6 months from the Date for Commencement of
the Works.
The Contractor shall provide details of the testing activities as specified in the Specification
in the Testing and Commissioning program
Tests on Completion
BMS/1.01.146. General
During SAT, all interfaces with external systems to the TVS/ECS PLC System shall be
tested.
Tests on completion shall constitute the necessary tests to demonstrate that the System meets the
performance requirements of the Specification.
The plan and methodology for each test shall be developed by the Contractor and reviewed by the
Employer’s Representative no less than 120 days before the start of the test.
All tests including failures occurring during the Tests on Completion shall be recorded in a test log. The
Contractor shall maintain and analyse test logs on a daily basis, and summarise them on a
weekly basis, to provide the following information:
Total accumulated failures of the system per equipment type with details of each failure;
and
Total accumulated repair and restore time for the failures of the system.
Certification shall be provided by the Contractor that the system is safe for passenger service prior to
the commencement of the pre-revenue operations.
A plan for performance and functional tests and demonstrations to be performed during pre- revenue
operations shall be submitted to the Employer’s Representative for review at least 120 days prior to the
commencement of Pre-Revenue Operations.
A performance demonstration plan shall be submitted for review by the Employer’s Representative at
least 120 days prior to commencement of the DLP.
BMS/15.01.9 Testing
7.1.1 The contractor shall perform the stage-wise testing and commissioning activities in
accordance with the requirements The contractor shall carry out testing and
Installation Test
7.1.1 In addition to the requirements as laid down in the GS and the PS , the following particular
provisions shall be met with.
7.2.1 As the initial stage of the FAT and final stage of Contractor’s System Integration Testing,
the total system shall be set up in a manner to simulate normal operating
conditions, switched on, and allowed to operate continuously.
7.2.2 During the test, measurements and observations shall be made to demonstrate that the
equipment fulfils its functional requirement, has adequate stability, and is capable of
operating without frequent attention.
(1) Each subsystem and/or each module shall be tested cyclically at least once
per hour whilst all other parts are functioning normally.
(2) The test shall run for at least 200 hours continuously. It need not be
permanently manned throughout this period provided that a comprehensive
log of operations tested and faults occurring is printed.
(3) Where there is redundancy in the equipment the test period shall be divided
equally between the redundant parts. Automatic changeover is not
permissible. All modules must remain powered up for the duration of the
test.
(4) Test equipment and test software shall be provided to load the equipment to
a greater extent than the worst case predicted for the complete system. On-
line loading and all functions shall be tested under these worst case
conditions. Sufficient hardware (e.g. remote terminals) and/or simulation
devices shall be provided by the Contractor to ensure that the Design
System Loading conditions can be achieved. The level of System
performance proposed to be demonstrated shall be submitted to the
Employer’s Representative for review.
(5) The tests shall be carried out at the prevailing ambient conditions of
temperature and humidity, no special conditioning is required.
7.2.3 If any failures occur, full details shall be recorded for the Employer’s Representative.
The Contractor shall investigate the cause of all failures and provide evidence that
there are no inherent design, or manufacturing faults. The Employer’s
Representative will then decide whether the test may be restarted or shall be
repeated.
7.2.4 The Contractor may propose to the Employer’s Representative that this soak test
period may be broken down into shorter periods, if compatible with the function of
the equipment, and/or less than the whole equipment may be set up or the test may be
eliminated completely. The Contractor may proceed with this reduced soak test
regime upon receipt of a certificate of no objection from the Employer’s
Representative.
7.2.5 The final function performed as part of the soak test shall consist of a
comprehensive series of measurements and observations of the characteristics and
performance of the equipment to demonstrate that no unacceptable deterioration has
occurred as a result of previous tests. The equipment shall be tested while
supplied at normal supply voltages and subsequently with worst combinations of
supply voltages.
7.3.1 The Factory Acceptance Test (FAT) is specified in the GS and the PS. This test may
be broken down into two parts.
7.3.2 Subsystem FAT - To prove the design of each Subsystem operationally prior to the
Subsystem being used in the System FAT.
7.3.3 A Subsystem FAT shall include the inspection, hardware test and software test of
any clearly identifiable Subsystem prior to use as a component in a System test.
7.3.4 System FAT - To check that the totality of the equipment supplied under the
Contract performs in accordance with the Contract requirements.
7.3.5 The equipment shall be complete at the start of the tests and no interchange of
modules or equipment shall be allowed during the FAT.
7.3.6 All parts subject to wear, such as electromechanical peripherals, may be omitted
from the tests if agreed by the Employer’s Representative. The printing and
recording equipment needed for conducting the test shall be run throughout the
test.
7.3.7 No repairs or adjustments shall be carried out during the test period unless agreed
by both parties.
7.3.8 Tests shall be conducted to prove the individual and integrated functioning of the
system hardware and demonstrate performance in the face of various
contingencies.
7.3.9 Integrated system tests shall be conducted to prove the functionality of all
applications software in the context of the complete integrated system, equipment
and software configuration.
(1) The Contractor shall provide all the software necessary to carry out the tests.
a) CPU tests.
e) Peripheral tests.
(3) Tests shall exercise communication ports and shall overload ports so that
queuing of messages occurs. The tests shall use a simulated network, or
where practical, a real network.
7.3.11 Communications
(3) Demonstrate that communication systems do not interfere with each other
(5) Programming, control and configuration of the network. The tests shall use a
simulated network or, where practical, a real network.
(1) During the functional tests, every function specified for the system in the
Design Specification shall be thoroughly tested. Both positive and negative
tests shall be carried out.
(2) Before commencement of the functional tests, all software for which source
code is supplied under the Contract shall be reassembled and/or recompiled
from source. The resulting object code shall be re-linked and used for the
tests.
(3) Similarly, all configurable databases, screen displays and reports shall be
regenerated from source. All of these activities shall use compilers,
assemblers, linkers and generation/start-up utilities identical to any of those
supplied under the Contract.
(1) System performance tests to demonstrate that the integrated system can
achieve the guaranteed levels of response and to determine the limits of the
response envelope.
(2) The performance tests shall demonstrate that the performance and response
times of the equipment are in accordance with the specified requirements.
In addition to the structured tests described above, all factory acceptance tests shall
include a 48 hour period of unstructured testing, during which the Employer’s
Representative and/or Employer shall be at liberty to instruct the Contractor to carry
out such additional tests as may be required to test the reliability and robustness of
the system.
7.3.14.1 PLC
(1) For the purposes of FAT and, in particular, system loading tests, the
Contractor shall provide at least one plc of each type proposed to be installed
on the System, for connection to the system under test via an appropriate
portion of the communications network associated with the system under
test.
(2) The remaining PLCs for the fully extended system may be represented by
suitable simulations. However, all simulations must be substantiated to show
that they provide a realistic simulation of the associated PLCs and the master
server/PLC communication process.
(3) Where there are practical difficulties in obtaining representative PLCs for
system FAT, the Contractor shall submit alternative proposals that satisfy the
objective of proving the correct functionality and performance.
7.3.14.2 If the Subsystem and System FATs are not immediately consecutive it may be
necessary to repeat portions of the Subsystem FAT to confirm that no changes have
taken place before the System FAT.
It is required that the results of the test shall demonstrate System reliability and
availability consistent with the values specified and those guaranteed by the
Contractor. The test shall be carried out at the Contractor's premises. Upon
satisfactory completion of the test, the System will be ready for delivery to site.
The Contractor shall ensure that the design of the software and hardware of the TVS/ECS PLC
Control Systems is supportable throughout the service life of the System to address, as a minimum,
the following:
Operational changes;
Changes in infrastructure.
During the Defects Liability Period maintenance will be conducted by the Employer with the support
of the Contractor.
The Contractor shall ensure that in order to support the Employer during the DLP, personnel are
available with the relevant skills and level of competence.
The Contractor shall immediately inform the Employer upon it becoming apparent that the quality or
supply of materials and components is or is likely to be affected, and without delay submit to the
Employer’s Representative for review its proposals for alternative sources of supply.
During the DLP the Contractor shall support the Authority with sufficient trained and competent personnel.
Such persons shall have their generic competence established and must demonstrate their specific
competence and knowledge in the particular systems, environment and procedures.
The Contractor shall provide evidence of specific competence and knowledge, which shall include:
Receiving or in receipt of sufficient and current exposure to the area of work that the holder
is licensed for
Routine spot checks on licensing may be carried out from time to time by the Employer’s
Representative’s qualified personnel on the proficiency of the Contractor's staff.
As part of the Defects Liability Management Plan, the Contractor shall detail the management and
organisation to be provided during the DLP.
Should the Contractor discover inconsistencies between the maintenance drawings and
documentation and the installed equipment, the Contractor shall correct all such errors within two
weeks.
Support Documentation
Routine and corrective maintenance procedures shall be supplied for all equipment. The format
shall be as follows:
The procedures shall be submitted for review by the Employer’s Representative; the following shall
be included as a minimum:
Frequency of maintenance;
Type of maintenance;
Explanatory diagrams.
BMS/1.01.154. General
The Contractor shall provide spare parts for the Defects Liability Period in accordance with the
requirements of the Employer’s Requirements – Manufacture, Installation and Testing. All spare
parts in which the Contractor has been authorised to provide through a written instruction by the
Employer’s Representative shall be provided 6 weeks before commencement of revenue service.
The Contractor shall submit to the Employer’s Representative a list of spares required for the life of
the System.
The Contractor shall base the spares calculations on the reliability and availability data and the
criticality of the equipment.
The Contractor shall submit to the Employer’s Representative for review the calculations and spares
list.
The list shall be grouped by subsystem, test equipment and special tools as applicable for stocking
identification.
The list shall have detailed description with drawing references and correlation with the
maintenance manuals.
The Contractor shall identify principal and second-source suppliers that can supply the systems and
sub-system spares listed.
The Contractor shall ensure that second-source supplier information is maintained up to date
throughout the service life of the System.
The Contractor shall make the second-source supplier information available to the Employer’s
Representative at the time of submission of the final design.
The Contractor shall identify the lead times for all spare parts. Parts with long lead times shall be
identified as such to the Employer’s Representative in the spares list.
In the event that any item of the supply requires to be routinely changed or calibrated, regardless of
whether it appears in the spares list or not, it shall be identified to the Employer’s Representative
together with the routine change interval.
In the event that any of the spares identified have a particular shelf life or storage requirement, this
shall be made known to the Employer’s Representative with the submission of the spares list,
including the necessary action for disposal or storage.
All spare equipment identified on the spares list, shall conform to Identification and Configuration
Control requirements of the Employer's Requirements.
The Contractor shall ensure that all spares are correctly calibrated, tested and labelled prior to their
delivery. Test certificates for each equipment shall be submitted to the Employer’s Representative.
The Contractor shall provide the necessary tools and test equipment to meet the testing,
commissioning and maintenance requirements of the Contract.
The Contractor shall submit a schedule of all tools and equipment with details of calibration and
supplier.
Training
BMS/1.01.163. General
Training shall be provided for Employer's engineers and staff such that the TVS PLC Control Systems
can be operated and maintained in accordance with the Manufacturer’s requirements.
The Contractor shall submit for review by the Employer’s Representative a training plan 180 days
prior to the first testing and commissioning activity.
The training shall include both normal and abnormal operations. At the discretion of AGRA METRO
training will be provided in the following categories:
Engineering coordinator;
Communications coordinator;
Line managers;
Department managers.
Normal and Abnormal Operation
The Contractor shall train the Employer's engineers and staff in the normal day to day operation of
the BMS for stand-alone and integrated operation and maintenance of all control, monitoring, and
supervision functionality of the Tunnel Ventilation Systems and Low Voltage Power & Distribution,
Fire Alarm System, Hydraulic System (Seepage, Sewage, Bore Well Pumps etc for control,
monitoring, and supervision at the Operational Control Centre (OCC).
Systems overview;
Principles of operation.
Training shall be provided to the Employer's engineers and staff to undertake maintenance of the
System provided following substantial completion of the Works. This training shall include:
Principles of operation;
In conjunction with the 3VAC Contractor the Contractor shall conduct at least 2 courses on the
maintenance aspects of the Tunnel Ventilation System. The courses will be attended by about 20
Employer's staff.
Contract Documentation
This section defines how submissions, including Design Documents and other material submitted for
review by the Employer’s Representative, shall be presented and controlled.
The Contractor shall submit a Submissions Programme in accordance with the Employer's
Requirements. In addition, the Submissions Programme shall:
submittals, including reports, specifications, and calculations, shall also be submitted in electronic form,
wherever feasible.
All ‘As built’ final documentation, including drawings and support documentation, shall be
electronically stored on CD ROM media. The Contractor shall, not less than 90 days prior to the
substantial completion of the last Section of each Corridor, submit a first draft of the documentation
CD to the Employer’s Representative. A final version shall be submitted at the time when the
Contractor applies to the Employer’s Representative for a Substantial Completion Certificate. Any
updates due to design changes during testing or revenue service shall be at the Contractor’s expense.
The Standard CD ROM format shall be as defined in ISO 9660. The Contractor shall demonstrate that
drawings reproduced from the CD-ROM are legible. Legibility will be determined by being able to
distinguish all dimensions, dimension lines, outlines and dashlines without use of supplementary
viewing aids.
The CD ROM format shall be consistent with the CAD system specified by the Authority at the time
of delivery.
The Contractor shall maintain a complete up-to-date, organised file of all past and current
submissions including an index and locating system, which identifies the status of each submission.
The index shall be available for the Employer’s Representative’s review, and shall be used to:
The Contractor shall provide supplemental information with each submission, in sufficient detail to
explain completely the equipment described and their intended manner of use.
Materials deliverables shall be identified by a clear and durable identification plate, which shall
include the following information:
Changes in submissions previously reviewed without objection will not be permitted unless those
changes are resubmitted in the same manner as the original deliverable and reviewed by the
Employer’s Representative.
A1 CSD/SEM co-ordinator designated for CSD/SEM requirement for ECS. Services coordination and structural drawings
structural provisions for electrical & mechanical preparation
b) To Comment upon the drawings
installation
Prepare and co-ordinate CSD/SEM
Drawings
A2 Openings, plinths Provide input and comment as requirements to Construction, equipment delivery and installation
SEM Drawings
A3 Fix and cast Provide information on sleeve and cast-in items. Pipe/cable penetration, embedments
Provide ECS cast-in items
A4 Co-ordinate between sleeve and opening Provide information on sleeve and pipe/cable Prevent interference
A5 Co-ordinate cables containment system and Provide information on containment system and Prevent interference
opening outside ECS plant room opening at ECS plant rooms.
INTERFACE BETWEEN STATION VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING (VAC) CONTRACTOR AND TVS/ECS PLC CONTROL CONTRACTOR
B1 TVS/VAC Equipment control room TVS MCC and cable sizes, ventilation control Design & installation co-ordination
panel sizes and cable requirements. Compressor
INTERFACE BETWEEN STATION CONTROL ROOM CONTRACTOR AND TVS/ECS PLC CONTRACTOR
C1 Space for ECS Control Panel Provide input of the control panel size & Design & installation co-ordination
installation detail
C2 Space for cable Provide input on cable run Design & installation co-ordination
C3 ECS control and monitoring cable R I/O and PLC external terminals in marshalling Control and monitoring for ECS equipments
including termination to RI/O and PLC box
C4 Control and monitoring point list RI/O or PLC Design approval of RI/O or PLC
C5 Control and monitoring philosophy Control and monitoring philosophy Norms for monitoring & control of ECS system.
C6 Terminal board Cabling and termination from OCC/SCR Control and monitoring signal of ECS
equipment to/from OCC
C7 Terminal board Cabling from MCC Monitor ECS power status and consumption and
control of MCC
Instruments and termination to terminal board
INTERFACE BETWEEN ELECTRICAL, LIGHTING, LIGHTNING PROTECTION AND UNTERRUPTED POWER SUPPLY SYTEMS; E&M, VAC
AND TVS/ECS PLC SYSTEM CONTRACTOR
H1 Power Supply TO AHUs, Ventilation fans, ECS Location of equipments and power requirement. Control and monitoring for station ECS equipments.
Control panel, dampers, UPE fans
H2 Power supply to Chiller, Water pumps, Cooling Location of equipment and power requirement. Control and monitoring for station ECS equipments.
H3 Cabling of ECS equipments including MCC starter terminals. Power supply for station ECS equipment.
cable terminations inside MCCs.
H4 Cabling of equipments in Chiller plant MCC starter terminals Power supply for station ECS equipment
room including cable termination inside MCCs.
H5 UPS fused connection units Cabling and cable termination to UPS UPS for ECS control room.
fused connection units
H6 Outgoing LV cable from LV switchboard Incoming MCC terminals LV power supply for ECS equipment.
including cable termination inside MCCs.
H7 LV cables and termination to MCC MCC cable stubs and nuts Cable termination
H8 UPS Power Supply MCC arrangement Computer power supply and MCCs power
switching control
H9 Power supply to ECS Power requirements LV power supply
-Normal
-Essential
-Genset supply
H10 Principal earthing conductor and junction Earthing tape and termination Earthing of ECS electrical equipment
terminals
H11 Clean earth conductor and junction terminals Earthing tape and termination Earthing of ECS control equipment
H12 Power rating and quantity of starter MCC arrangement Design co-ordination / approval of MCC
requirement
ALL
H22 Emergency Signage ALL Life Safety Circuits Monitoring of Fault and Alarm conditions for
ALL Conditions
H23 Diesel Generator Sets Signalling outputs for fault/abnormal equipment Monitoring of Fault, Abnormal, and
or panel conditions or alarms etc. Alarm conditions for ALL Conditions
H24 Linear heat detection system ALL Life Safety Circuits Monitoring of Fault and Alarm conditions for
ALL Conditions
H25 Communication system To provide signal for master clock Synchronization for central timing with master
clock
H26 Power supply system To provide signal of traction power failure Monitoring and controlling of tunnel lighting in case
in tunnel of traction power failure
H27 Hydraulic Systems Signaling outputs for fault/abnormal conditions Monitoring of Fault, Abnormal, and
for pumps, hydrants, flow switches etc. Alarm conditions for ALL Conditions
H28 Lift & Escalator To provide signals for critical parameters from Monitoring & controlling of Fault, Abnormal,
SCR and Alarm conditions for ALL Conditions
END OF APPENDIX A
The following schedule of Input/ Output Interfaces is provided for guidance purposes only. It is the
responsibility of the contractor to interpret the entire requirements of the specification and to
provide Input/ Output interfaces as required which may be described separately throughout this
specification.
1. Pumps
Control room display
for items A,B,C&D
fail warning
Standby pump fail Start standby Two pump D(1)
fail warning warning
Log at PLC
Pumping completed Alternating - - -
pumps
OFF when
tank is
(1+1) Manual bypass
switch local or
remote
ON (OFF)
Pump failure Start standby First pump D(1)
fail warning warning
fail Alarm
Second Standby - Third pump D(1) Alarm
pump fail fail Alarm
fail Alarm
Water level in the Alarm if low D(1)
fire tank warning
Log at PLC
Hours of operation Log at PLC - Not run for D(1)
more than a warning
week
(Alarm)
H. Operation of Start the - - -
fire pump
Jockey hose
(for fire) Hydrant pressure fall - - -
(minor)
Hydrant Pressure
Fall (minor)
2.Emergency lighting
A. DG set Incoming HT supply Bus couplers Starting Warning, D(1)
to ASS 1&2 OFF, start the Supply warning
transformers OFF DG set, load failed
breaker ON DG set
END OF APPENDIX B
The following schedule of OCC Interfaces is provided for guidance purposes only. It is the
responsibility of the contractor to interpret the entire requirements of the specification and to
provide Input/Output interfaces as required which may be described separately throughout this
specification.
LV ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
3. UPS EQUIPMENT
Low Input Voltage Alarm Alarm
Low Input Freq Alarm Alarm
Second Battery Fail Alarm
Second Charger Fail Alarm
Second Inverter Fail Alarm
Not in operation 1 week Alarm
UPS Fail Alarm
5. EMERGENCY LIGHTING
Emergency Lighting (all sub circuits) No voltage Alarm
HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS
Volts Volts
Kilowatts Kilowatts
END OF APPENDIX C
1.1 GENERAL...................................................................................................................................................
1.2 OVERVIEW OF THE TVS SCADA SYSTEM...............................................................................................
1.3 OPERATION CONTROL CENTRE......................................................................................................................
1.4 TRAINING FACILITY............................................................................................................................................
2 SCOPE OF THE WORKS..............................................................................................................................
2.1 GENERAL..............................................................................................................................................................
2.2 SCOPE OF SUPPLY..............................................................................................................................................
2.3 WORKS EXCLUDED FROM THIS CONTRACT...............................................................................................
3 FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS...............................................................................................................
3.1 GENERAL..............................................................................................................................................................
3.2 LOCATION6..........................................................................................................................................................
3.3 EQUIPMENT.........................................................................................................................................................
3.4 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER.......................................................................................................
3.5 SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS.......................................................................................................
3.6 APPLICABLE DESIGN STANDARDS................................................................................................................
4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS...........................................................................................................
4.1 GENERAL.............................................................................................................................................................
4.2 RELIABILITY.........................................................................................................................................................
4.3 AVAILABILITY REQUIREMENTS..........................................................................................................
4.4 MAINTAINABILITY REQUIREMENTS.............................................................................................................
4.5 SYSTEM SAFETY REQUIREMENTS.....................................................................................................................
4.6 LIGHTNING...........................................................................................................................................................
4.7 POWER SUPPLIES................................................................................................................................................
4.8 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER REQUIREMENTS.......................................................................
4.9 OCC CONTROL FACILITIES................................................................................................................................
4.10 WORK STATION FACILITIES............................................................................................................................
4.11 PRINTERS AND PRINTING................................................................................................................................
4.12 HISTORICAL DATA STORAGE AND SOFTWARE BACKUP........................................................................
4.13 UN-INTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLIES...........................................................................................................
4.14 SOFTWARE............................................................................................................................................................
4.15 SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT...............................................................................................................................
4.16 MMI REQUIREMENTS..........................................................................................................................................
4.17 SPEED OF OPERATION.......................................................................................................................................
4.18 TIME SYNCHRONISATION...................................................................................................................................
4.19 ACCURACY...........................................................................................................................................................
4.20 HISTORICAL DATA MANAGEMENT...................................................................................................................
4.21 COMMUNICATION SYSTEM................................................................................................................................
4.22 COMMUNICATIONS WITHIN OCC.....................................................................................................................
5 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS..........................................................................................................................
5.1 ERGONOMIC STUDY...........................................................................................................................................
5.2 SCREEN GRAPHIC DISPLAYS...........................................................................................................................
5.3 OCC STATUS AND CONTROL INTERFACES.....................................................................................................
5.4 FIELD EQUIPMENT TO BE MONITORED........................................................................................................
6 CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION....................................................................................................
6.1 CIVIL WORKS.......................................................................................................................................................
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 General
1.1.1 This Document specifies the particular technical and performance requirements
of the Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) System provided by
TVS contractor at OCC.
1.2.2 In addition, fault and failure warnings and alarms shall be monitored to provide
the OCC staff with information about the capacity of these systems to cope with
the traffic being carried.
1.2.3 The equipment to be monitored and / or controlled from the field by TVS
SCADA in OCC for stations in Underground section:-
1.3.1 The Operation Control Centre (OCC) are the heart of the system as far as dealing
with normal and emergency operation of the AGRA METRO system.
1.3.5 The central SCADA server shall maintain an historical database of all
messages transmitted over the SCADA links and received from the Network
management computers. The Contractor shall provide a means of accessing
and processing that database.
1.3.6 All messages shall be time stamped at origin from a time source linked to the
system master clock and the database listing shall be maintained in
chronological order of the originating time stamps.
1.4.1 The Contractor shall supply training equipment and training course materials for
1.4.2 The initial training shall be undertaken at a suitable site to be provided by the
Contractor
2.1 General
2.1.1 The specific requirements on the scope of the Works for the SCADA shall be as
specified herein.
2.1.2 The Contractor shall design, supply, install test and commission a processor
based state-of-the-art TVS Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition
(SCADA) system for smooth operation, monitoring, control and logging of
important features of the power systems on the underground corridor.
2.1.3 In addition the Contractor shall supply spare parts, training for maintenance
staff and operators, support for the Employer’s maintenance staff and warranty
of the equipment to ensure the continuous functioning of the equipment after
commissioning.
2.1.4 The Contractor shall undertake interface discussions with the contractors whose
equipment is to be monitored by the TVS SCADA to agree the extent and
configuration of both the physical and electrical interfaces to be provided. The
Contractor shall assess the level of data being received from the monitored
equipment to classify each datum as record, warning or alarm indications and
shall process the data to be displayed based on this classification.
2.2.1 The TVS SCADA System shall include, but not be limited to, the following :
(3) VDU's/Workstation's/MMI's;
(6) all software required for the operation of the TVS SCADA ;
2.3.1 The equipment to be monitored and controlled for other systems shall not be
included as part of this contract. The arrangement for control and monitoring of
equipment supplied by others up to the SCR and the integrated display other
then the equipments supplied by TVS Contractor at SCR shall not be included
as part of this contract.
3 FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1 General
3.1.2 The TVS SCADA shall be designed with fault tolerant system architecture
to prevent common mode failure.
3.1.3 The software shall be designed to accommodate the ultimate, fully expanded
capacity, without requiring any change to the hardware or firmware of the
installed system and without affecting the overall operation or performance of
the TVS SCADA
3.2 Location
3.2.1 The TVS SCADA system equipment is to be installed into various areas, viz.
3.2.2 The equipment to which the TVS SCADA interfaces is distributed throughout
the underground corridor of the respective line. The equipment and the
related transducers shall be supplied, installed and maintained by the supplier
of the equipment to be monitored.
3.2.3 The Physical Interface Locations are generally a set of terminals within an
Interface Cabinet provided by others (generally the supplier of the equipment to
be monitored). In some instances the terminals and cabinet may be the actual
control equipment and control cabinet for the equipment being monitored. All
cabling and wiring upto and including the Interfacing Cabinet (IC) shall be
supplied and installed by the supplier of the equipment to be monitored. This
shall also include all protection devices to be provided for the cables & the
transducers.
The main Local Control Panel for the Fire Detection system (including
indications for fire sprinklers and automatic extinguishers) will be located at the
SCR and a repeater shall be provided at one of the main station entrances
designated as the firemen’s entrance. The interface between SCADA and fire
detection & suppresion system shall be in the Interface Cabinet in the Station
Control Room.
3.2.6 Pumps.
3.2.6.1 Pumps incorporated into other larger systems, e.g. A/C chilled water circuits,
will be monitored by the system equipment for the larger system to which the
interface will be made.
3.2.6.2 Stand alone pumps such as tank filling and emptying pumps will have local
logic controls based on level switches and sequencing circuits to cycle pump
duties between main and standby units.
3.2.6.3 The Interface Cabinets for stand-alone pump systems will be adjacent to or
incorporated into the control cabinets for the local logic located within the
pump equipment room.
3.2.7 ECS
3.2.7.1 The Interface Cabinet for the ECS will be installed adjacent to or incorporated
into the ECS logic controller located within the ECS equipment room.
3.2.7.2 The ECS logic controller will also provide indications to and will receive
controls from the combined ECS / TVS panel in the SCR.
3.2.9 TVS.
3.2.9.1 The Interface Cabinet for the TVS will be installed adjacent to or incorporated
into the TVS local sequence controller located within the TVS equipment room
at each end of the station.
3.2.9.2 The local sequence controller will also receive controls and provide indications
to a Local Control panel in the TVS equipment room and also to the combined
TVS / ECS panel in the SCR.
3.2.10.1 The FOTS including Master Clock system will be controlled and monitored
from the FOTS server in the OCC Telecommunication equipment room
(supplied by others). In case of Clock Systems; the information will have to
be retrieved through FOTS or via PLCs at stations and depots or through channel
interfaces.
3.3 Equipment
3.4.1.2 PLCs shall be powered by a supply, which includes a back up to the main
incoming power supply as part of the Power Supply System.
3.4.1.3 Communications between the PLCs interfacing to the field equipment and the
TVS SCADA server in the OCC equipment room shall be over a
duplicated
communications network (based on the FOTS), which shall be provided on the
main communications bearer, supplied under signalling contract. An electrical
3.4.1.3.1 In the event of a communications failure between a station and the central TVS
SCADA server, the station TVS SCADA equipment provided under this
contract, shall continue to function as an autonomous system, maintaining a
local database and receiving and time stamping data from the monitored
equipment. The monitoring and control functions, for the SCR provided by
others (suppliers of equipment to be monitored) shall not be under the scope of
this contract.
3.4.2.1 Within the OCC operations theatre, TVS SCADA displays shall be provided
to allow the following functions for the nominated OCC personnel:
CC - Display real time list of high level equipment fault, fire and intruder
alarms and warnings showing local acknowledgement and maintenance work
status. Access historical list of all high level alarms and warnings showing time
on, time off, time acknowledged etc.
ACC - Display list of high level and detail equipment fault alarms and warnings,
require acknowledgement of alarms, allow inquiry to show detail behind high
level alarms including local acknowledgement status, allow tagging of alarms to
show work in progress / alarm bypass / maintenance call logged etc.. Access
historical list of all high level alarms and warnings showing time on, time
off, time acknowledged etc.
AuxC - Display status of TVS, ECS, LV, Pumps, DG and UPS for each station /
section including local equipment alarms and warnings, require
acknowledgement of alarms. Allow input of commands to alter mode for TVS
equipment in individual or groups of stations as appropriate to the congestion /
fire situation and based on decision support system provided by TVS designer.
Allow downloading of logged running data from within the controllers of the
non-power equipment being monitored, store the downloaded data and allow
analysis of the data to provide long term planning of maintenance.
Display real time list of LV circuits, pumps , etc. status , alarms and
warnings showing local acknowledgement . Access historical list of all high
level alarms and warnings showing time on, time off, time acknowledged etc..
3.4.2.2 It is envisioned that the TVS SCADA displays will take the form of
separate workstations integrated alongside other workstations for other systems
such as the TCS, PA/PIDS, CCTV, Radio and Telephone systems.
3.4.3.1 The equipment at OCC hereafter called as master station equipment shall
include at least two main computers in main & hot standby configuration with
latest state of art having sufficient RAM, clock speed and hard disk storage, high
speed computer communication link, system console, man-machine interfaces
through colour VDUs and key-boards, pointing devices (e.g. mouse or trackball),
front-end processors, modems, data logging printers, watch dogs, hard disks and
other storage devices along with their drives, switchover unit for switching over
from main to standby computer or vice-versa.
3.4.3.2 A central database facility shall be provided to maintain a record of the status of
all system database points. This database shall be updated as a continuous high-
speed activity and shall be able to be accessed by any workstation within the
system. It shall be possible to restrict the access of any workstation to any
combination of points in the database.
3.4.3.3 A historical data storage and software backup system shall be provided that
stores data in an efficient manner that permits rapid searching against
selectable criteria and enables historical information to be reconstructed in the
form of data.
3.4.3.4 Communications between the equipment within the OCC shall be over a
duplicated communications network dedicated to TVS SCADA, which shall
be provided in this contract.
3.4.3.5 PLCs shall be provided as necessary within the Equipment Rooms to interface to
the other equipment located there that requires connection to the TVS SCADA
system.
3.4.4 Training
3.4.4.1 The contractor shall provide comprehensive training to the Employer's staff, including
employer's trainers.
3.5.1 The TVS SCADA system shall incorporate at least the following primary functions:
automatic polling
(4) provide facilities to analyze downloaded data on an historical basis and
The practices followed and the equipment supplied under this Contract shall
conform to the latest issue of local Standards, or where not available,
internationally recognized Standards covering quality assurance, health and
safety, fire safety, electrical safety, ingress protection where necessary,
electromagnetic compatibility, design, manufacture, testing, maintainability of
equipment and operation.
BS7165,
IS: 9521 Metal clad base material for printed circuits for use in electronic
and telecommunication equipment.
IS: 9638 Fixed polyester film dielectric capacitors for direct current. IS:
3.6.5.2 Any deviation from these specification may be proposed by the Contractor if they are
calculated to achieve the specified functions and improve upon the performance
utility and efficiency of the equipment. Any such proposal will be given due
consideration by the Employer’s Representative, provided full particulars of the
deviation with justification thereof are furnished. The Contractor may not incorporate
any deviation from the specifications into his design until he has made the above
proposal and has received no objection from the Employer’s Representative.
3.6.5.3 For all parts and sections of IEC 870 ,current at the time of Contract award the
Contractor shall include within the Design specification, in the form of completed
tabulated lists with explanations, the class or value offered for each and every table
classes or values given in the said parts and sections.
4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
4.1 General
4.1.1 In addition, the specific performance requirements for the TVS SCADA shall be
as specified herein.
4.1.2 The technical system performance requirements for the TVS SCADA are specified
in the following sections.
4.2 Reliability
4.2.1 The inability to perform any required function, the occurrence of unexpected action
or the degradation of performance below the specifications shall be considered as a
failure.
4.2.2 MTBF shall be the average operating time accumulated by the total population of
identical items between failures.
4.2.3 The TVS SCADA equipment supplied under the contract shall comply with the
reliability figures given below :
N P SCADA Equipment MTBF (Hours)
Central Control equipment / Server > 50,000
PLC > 50,000
Workstation > 50,000
4.3.1 In determining the Availability of the TVS SCADA, reliability block diagrams using
field failure rates for commercially available equipment shall be produced. Any
equipment without field failure data shall have its failure rate determined strictly in
accordance with MIL-HBK-217F for its appropriate operating environment.
4.3.3.1 The system shall be designed to achieve at least the following levels of system
availability.
4.3.3.2 The complete TVS SCADA system shall be designed to meet 99.99%
hardware availability.
4.3.3.3 The availability figures for TVS functionality and the TVS decision support
facilities shall be 99.97%.
4.3.3.4 The availability figures for other TVS SCADA subsystems viz. Software
Development, Historical Record searching and Training Simulator shall be
99.7%.
4.3.3.6 Any equipment manufactured by the Contractor shall have its failure rate
determined strictly in accordance with its appropriate operating environment.
4.3.4.1 Redundancy shall be incorporated where failure cannot be tolerated even for
short periods (Zero sec).
4.3.4.2 The system shall therefore be designed around small autonomous items of
equipment but shall be commensurate with an economical overall solution.
4.3.4.3 Failure of any equipment node on the network shall not affect the local
operation nor prevent communication between any other connected equipment
node
4.4.1 The TVS SCADA system shall have an MTTR of 30 minutes. This time shall
not include the time taken for a technician to arrive at the initial reported
failure site.
4.4.2 The service life of the TVS SCADA shall not be less than 15 years. Service
life shall be counted from the commencement date of Defects Liability Period.
4.5.1 The TVS SCADA is classified as a safety related system and a minimum of
CENELEC standards EN 50128 SIL-2 shall apply.
4.5.2 All equipment must comply with and be installed in accordance with
IEC65, IEC364 and to current safety standards applicable in India.
4.5.3 All metal enclosures shall be provided with an earthing terminal and earthing of
all equipment shall be carried out in accordance with the overall earthing policy.
All TVS SCADA system equipment shall operate satisfactorily in the very
high “electrical noise” environment normally associated with Metro systems
due to electrical fields created by traction supplies and strong magnetic
fields. Equipment shall be immune to the effects of conducted and radiated
electrical interference.
4.6 Lightning
4.6.1 The contractor shall ensure that all equipment are fully protected against the
effects of mains surges and direct & indirect lightning strikes. Protection shall
be applied to incoming mains power supplies and to input and output signal
lines, to externally located sensors, transducers, actuating equipment, etc. or to
any other equipment likely to be affected.
4.6.4 The suppression equipment shall be so selected that the let-through voltage
specification does not exceed the absolute maximum voltage specified for the
particular equipment being protected.
4.6.5 Signal lines from external sensors at risk from the effects of lightning shall have
surge suppressers fitted at both ends of each line and shall be installed and
connected in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
4.7.1 The equipment shall derive its required power from the source provided by the
Contractor at stations and OCC.
4.7.2 Connection of the UPS / battery backup shall be automatic in the event of a
power source failure, with no interruption in the supply seen at the equipment.
4.7.3 All alarms generated by the installation including processor alarms, power
supply alarms, and control equipment alarms, shall be sustained until cleared.
Alarm handling shall be implemented through the TVS SCADA system.
4.8.1.1 The Contractor shall establish the I/O requirements and provide the most
economic configuration of programmable logic controller (PLCs) based
upon cost balances between unit modularity and cabling costs for individual
stations.
4.8.1.2 The PLCs shall be intelligent where necessary, fully autonomous in operation
and modular in construction. The PLCs shall be configured to suit the plant
input/output requirements.
4.8.1.3 The PLCs shall be suitable for either wall or floor mounting and shall be
suitably robust for operation in plant room areas, to IEC529 IP65 enclosure
standard. PLCs shall be, as far as possible, of the same make and type at all
4.8.1.4 The PLCs shall be suitable for operating in the environment of all types of
Underground stations, tunnels & occ of AGRA METRO project.
4.8.1.5 The PLCs shall permit reconfiguration by the Employer of all facilities, including:
4.8.1.6 The PLCs shall be able to be interrogated fully and be fully reconfigured
from operator workstations and locally from a portable service terminal. The
Employer’s personnel shall be able to re-configure fully the terminal unit
hardware and software after completion of the training courses provided under
this Contract.
4.8.1.8 PLCs shall operate correctly in conjunction with independent safety systems,
such as hard wired safety circuits for over temperature trips, over pressure trips,
electrical interlocks on packaged plant, etc. N-P SCADA equipment connected
to these safety systems shall not prevent their correct and timely operation.
4.8.1.9 PLCs shall be fully autonomous in operation and shall continue to function
normally in the event of failure of the Control Centre equipment, failure of any
other PLC on the network or failure of the communication system.
4.8.1.10 The individual internal PLC memory shall be sized to hold, in addition to all
the necessary programs, the logged input data and controls output for a period
of normal operation covering a minimum of 24 hours in the event of
communication failure. Operation of PLCs or any other aspect of the N-P
SCADA system shall not be adversely affected as memory utilisation
increases to the maximum, the design value of which shall be stated in the
Design Specification (DS), prepared by the Contractor and approved by the
Employer’s Representative.
4.8.1.11 PLC memory shall be non-volatile, and shall be supported for a minimum period
of 72 hours following power failure.
(2) The PLC shall allow data exchange with Remote I/O and shall
implement the control logics for the station ECS, BS and other
interface systems, including the smoke control system.
(3) The PLC shall maintain the usual operation of interface equipment
during the complete failure of communication with the OCC servers.
(4) The CPU module shall be capable of detecting any malfunction in the
other modules and shall report this to the Operator Workstation
accordingly.
(7) The PLC shall be provided for interfacing with systems through serial
or LAN data interface. The PLC with serial and LAN typed interfacing
channels to communicate with different subsystems is able to support
different types of standard communication protocol, such as Modbus
and Profibus.
(9) The PLC shall have a program scan time of no more than 2 ms/Kword.
(10) The PLC shall accept the following type of inputs and outputs.
Input Output
Analog 4 – 20 mA Analog 4 – 20 mA
Dry contact (NO or NC) Dry contact (NO or NC), 20A, local
(11) If the CPU transmission network fails but power to PLC does not, the
PLC shall continue to monitor all changes of state or value and shall
retain the most recent values for 30 minutes. The PLC shall also
maintain all analog set points and command positions.
4.8.2.1 PLCs shall operate from a secure power supply. Battery voltage (analogue) and
charger status of batteries used to provide the secure supply shall be monitored
by the PLC. On failure of the secure supply, the PLC operation shall degrade
gracefully and shall recover automatically on restoration of the supply. Supply
failure shall be logged at operator workstations at OCC on restoration.
At least two adjustable alarm levels for both positive and negative
excursions of all analogue signals, with adjustable deadband.
Combining of binary inputs Boolean functions to give conditional
outputs.
Communication by serial link to other processor based equipment using
one or more standard, open, synchronous or asynchronous serial
interface protocols.
4.8.2.2 The equipment shall be self-monitoring for fault conditions, and shall generate
an alarm on the appropriate operator workstations in the event of a fault arising.
4.8.2.3 Facilities shall be provided for routine servicing and re-configuring of PLC
software by the Employer. PLC software shall be capable of being reconfigured,
under password control, either locally from the portable-programming device to
be supplied under the Contract, or remotely over the communications links
from operator workstations.
4.8.2.5 Event processing shall have the following order of precedence, but shall be re-
configurable:
Normal alarms.
Binary events.
Clock synchronization.
Analogue events.
4.8.2.7 In order to ensure data integrity, all software files contained within terminal
unit equipment shall be able to be up-loaded to the Operations Control Centre
and Back-up Control Centre for back-up storage as part of a master file.
4.9 OCC Control Facilities
A central master computer system with hot standby at the OCC. The
system shall have full redundancy both at the internal hardware level
and also at the interfacing level such that no single failure should lead to
shut down of the TVS SCADA functioning. Both the main and the
standby systems shall be updated on a real time basis to provide
seamless changeover in case of failure. The system shall be configured
at the OCC on a fully duplicated link network. The hardware of the
system shall be based on the proven design philosophy and shall be
fault tolerant and modular. The software should based on open system
concept and should have portability and inter-operability across multi-
vendor environments.
Bulk data storage facilities for software back-up and historical data.
Printers for printing of screen displays, reports, etc. and listing events.
4.9.2 The equipment shall be self-monitoring for fault conditions, and shall generate
an alarm on the relevant operator’s workstation in the event of a fault arising.
4.9.3 A central database shall be maintained at the OCC of the current status of all the
data points. This shall be in addition to any locally maintained databases
required to support full local operation at the field PLCs in the event of
communication failure. The central database shall be accessible to all
workstations on the system, subject to any access restrictions imposed by the
system supervisor. The central database shall be able to be partitioned so that
access to individual database points can be assigned on a workstation basis.
4.9.4 The various TVS SCADA workstation displays and controls shall be located
within the different control desks in the OCC. Supporting printers shall be
housed in custom fixtures within the OCC theatre. Central processing
equipment shall be located in the equipment rooms associated with the OCC.
Equipment that is not desk-mounted or otherwise free-standing shall be housed
in appropriate DIN standard racking enclosed in cabinets or in a manner
acceptable to the Employer’s Representative.
4.10.1 The primary operator interface shall be workstation with high-resolution LCD
(TFT) colour graphics display(s), control panel and mouse/trackball units, or
touch screens. Workstation shall have a screen diagonal measurement of at
least 20 inch; however, the dimension shall be subject to approval by the
Employer’s Representative based on the screen frame display shots proposed by
the Contractor. Tilt and swivel facilities shall be provided. The displays shall
have the colour palette of at least 256 colours with a minimum resolution of
1024x768 pixels. The number of VDU’s can be one or more but the number of
VDU’s for each workstation shall be sufficient to allow a comprehensive set of
information to be displayed. Operating systems based on a Graphical User (GUI)
format incorporating the widely used WIMPs procedures (windows, icons,
menus, pointing device), where one display can overlay another shall be
provided. WYSIWYG (what-you-see-is-what-you-get) display printing and
print previewing features shall be provided.
4.10.2 A cursor driven by a mouse pointer or equivalent shall be provided which can be
moved to any screen position under operator control. The cursor shall appear
as a flashing indicator or other distinctive icon, which shall be submitted for
review by the Employer’s Representative, through the character at that position
for the operator to identify displayed items.
4.10.4 In addition to the primary operators interface within the OCC theatre, the TVS
SCADA central server in the OCC equipment room shall be supplied with a
secondary maintenance technicians interface workstation.
4.10.5 The CSS terminal shall have access to the main system diagnostic displays
for the actual TVS SCADA equipment and the transmission links over which the
TVS SCADA data travels. The CSS terminal shall be the normal terminal
used for initiating software changes to the system, which may have been
developed in off line mode on any terminal.
4.11.1 At least one full colour page printer, or equivalent, with a page output rate of at
least six pages per minute (10% image able area) and a resolution of at least 300
dots per inch, shall be provided for creating paper copies of Workstation screen
displays, reports, etc.
4.11.2 The Operator shall be able to generate a print out of any display page at any
time. The print out data shall be a snapshot of the displayed plant data at the
instant the print command is executed.
4.11.3 The screen display, report, log, etc. shall be spooled to the printer and the
workstation shall be returned immediately to normal operation. Where the
screen display is part of a multi-page log it shall be possible to select the range
of pages to be printed and to cancel the print job at any time before it is
completed.
4.11.4 Line printers, not impact types, shall be provided for routine logging of plant
data. A line of print shall be able to be read as soon as it is completed.
4.11.5 Paper stocks, (A4 cut sheet for all printers and also continuous feed for line
printers), and printed output shall be stored in hoppers. The contractor shall
finalise the details regarding paper size with the Employer’s Representative.
4.12.1 A bulk data storage system with removable storage media cartridges shall be
provided at the OCC for backing-up all operational and used configurable
software and for historical storage of database records. Storage systems where
the data can be indexed and where random rather than sequential searches are
possible (e.g. optical discs rather than magnetic tapes) shall be provided. Each
cartridge shall have a capacity adequate to hold all operational and user
programmable software and data records for at least four weeks operation. An
alarm shall be raised daily if the accumulated data and software for more than a
defined period (typically one-week) has not been backed up. The bulk data
storage system shall provide a master back up of all configured software and
recorded data for the entire TVS SCADA system. All software files contained
within the field PLCs shall be able to be up-loaded to the OCC for back-
up storage as part of the master file.
Record the history of status points by event, where each change of state
is recorded together with the time tag, rather than simply by regular
time interval.
Record analogue point by recording a header with the point attribute
information relating to alarm limits, scan rate etc., followed by each
sample value, until the point attribute changes when another header
shall be written.
Use software to interpolate the data to reconstruct the required
information, e.g. an events list, trend display, etc.
4.12.3 The historical data storage system shall index the storage media to enable rapid
location of data by date and time and be able to do event searches based on
selectable criteria.
4.13.1 Power for the OCC facilities shall be derived from the Un-interruptible power
supply provided by the other Contractor.
4.13.2 In the event of breaks in the UPS supply, of sub-cycle to multiple cycle duration
or long-term interruptions in the UPS output, the equipment shall continue to
operate correctly, or shut down gracefully and restart automatically on supply
restoration. Suitable tests shall be included in the FAT to verify compliance.
4.14 Software
4.14.3 Where possible, use shall be made of proprietary software packages widely
used within the industry but of the latest generation at the time of installation.
(5) Maintains a system activity log which shall be used for system recovery.
(6) Supports all I/O devices used including high speed network protocol,
TCI/IP , disk arrays, etc.
4.14.6 The TVS SCADA software shall be divided into the following basic functions:
(1) Data base management: Maintenance of the primary database for real
time and historical data, signal processing and calculations. The
structure of the database shall accommodate easy access of data for
use in other proprietary software packages.
(2) Communications management: Support of communications protocols
with comprehensive error detection and error correction facilities.
Support of operating regimes, which optimize performance and
operating costs on communication networks using, either dedicated or
shared communications channels where operating costs can be either
dependent or independent of traffic loading.
(3) Alarm and event reporting: Detection of alarms and events, support of
alarm reporting and acceptance procedures on the Workstations and
generation of printed logs.
(4) Peripheral management: Support of operator procedures on the keyboard
and mouse units, construction of display page formats and printer
page formats.
(5) Supervisory Control. Monitoring at operator workstations of equipment
connected to the terminal units and manual control from the operator
workstations or automatic control by pre-programmed sequences
resident either in terminal units or designated operator workstations.
(6) Fault Diagnosis and Maintenance: Self-diagnosis and fault reporting to
replaceable module level, notification when software back-ups are due
and general housekeeping to maintain optimum operation.
4.14.7 The Contractor shall provide a “Firewall “ in its interface with other users. This
should employ various mechanisms to filter/route data traffic and block un-
authorized access.
4.15.1 Application software shall not be developed without the consent of the
Employer other than as proposed and foreshadowed in the Tender and
accepted in the Contract.
4.15.3 If the development is required to achieve a basic function contained within this
specification this may be taken by the Employer as a fundamental breach of the
contract.
4.15.5 Software design shall be based on a main programme structure with program
modules or blocks to control each facility or function. Additions or
modifications shall be executed readily by adding, deleting or replacing software
modules within the main program structure.
4.15.6 All software source code shall be written in a widely supported high level
language, utilising English language words, and have a simple syntax structure.
All source codes shall have comprehensive comments describing fully the
function of each block and the action of each program step.
4.15.7 Software shall be written and presented in accordance with the current issues
of BS 7165, BS 5515 and the British Computer Society Code of Practice or
other international standard. Technical terms and documentation shall be in
accordance with “Guidelines for documentation of software in industrial
computer systems". Institution of Electrical Engineers, UK or its international
equivalent. All application software shall be written and documented such that
changes to facilities and operating procedures may be implemented readily by
the Employer’s personnel after completion of the training courses.
4.15.9 Once the testing is completed to the satisfaction of the Employer and the
Employer’s Representative and the software amended to incorporate any
changes required, the software shall be subject to a design freeze and all
associated documentation changed from letter issue status to number issue
status. The documentation will then be subject to approval by the Employer
and the Employer’s Representative.
4.15.11 All software media shall be clearly labelled with the program name and issue
status. The information shall also be listed in the O & M manuals.
4.16.1.1 Each monitored point shall have a point descriptor and shall have a number of
attributes that may be modified by the operator.
4.16.1.2 Any attribute of any system point shall be able to be modified using
reconfiguration pages by an operator with sufficient access rights from any
workstation.
4.16.1.3 The point descriptors shall contain at least the following information:
Point identifier.
Alarm type.
Conversion constants.
Engineering units.
Alarm limits.
Scaling
Deadbands.
Scan rate.
4.16.1.5 Points shall be able to be assigned for historical storage. Configurable filtering
4.16.1.6 Raw analogue input data shall be converted and stored in the database in
engineering units. Manipulation of measured values, for linearisation, etc. shall
be possible using a calculation facility.
4.16.1.7 Status points shall be configurable as either discrepancy types, with a normal
state such that a deviation from this state shall generate an alarm, or as standard
types with no normal state or as four-state points, where two ordinary status
inputs are combined. Filtering shall be able to be applied to four-state points
to prevent spurious transitional states being registered.
4.16.1.8 Provision shall be made to allow the operator to inhibit the acquisition of PLC
data at a point level or PLC level.
4.16.2.1 All operator displays shall be based on a common screen layout. The screen
shall be divided into the following display zones:
Display identifier.
Page Number
Title Line
Alarm banner.
4.16.2.2 Workstations shall have sufficient storage capacity for at least two hundred
different display pages.
4.16.2.3 The following general display page groups shall be provided in addition to any
other groups required:
Alarm display.
Parameters display.
Selected-log-entry display.
4.16.2.4 These display groups shall be divided into display pages. Each group shall be
accessed by a dedicated function key (or equivalent). Dedicated keys shall be
used for paging forward and back through each group. Individual target areas
(menu points) shall be configurable on to each display unit which, when
operated, shall bring up a predefined display from any group.
4.16.2.5 The Master index shall list all the displays authorised for access by the current
operator at the particular workstation, by display group and display identifier.
Any display in the Master Index shall be accessible through the use of menu
points associated with the display title. The workstation shall output either the
desired display or another index display. It shall be possible to have at least 16
levels of nested displays.
4.16.2.6 The Log Index display shall be accessed via a dedicated function key. This
display shall list all of the logs that the system produces and the frequency with
which they are generated. This display shall be used to generate a log on
demand or to schedule or inhibit automatic periodic output.
4.16.2.7 The Alarm display shall be provided in accordance with the Alarm Clauses below.
4.16.2.8 The Points off Normal display shall list all variables that have been inhibited
from normal acquisition or calculation, including being inhibited by the
operator.
4.16.2.9 The Tag display shall list those points that have been tagged by the operator
together with the tag type, description, etc.
4.16.2.10 The System Status display shall show the status and of all hardware components
in the TVS SCADA system including the terminal units and secure power
supplies. The system status (or parts of the system status) shall be displayed as
the workstation Graphic Display described below.
4.16.2.11 The Communications Statistics display shall tabulate the number of successful
and unsuccessful communications between each node on the system,
identifying the communications route.
4.16.2.12 The Parameters display shall provide a complete point descriptor for each
status, measured and derived point in the system.
4.16.2.13 The Scratch Pad display shall be used by the Operator to record comments and
messages pertinent to events during his shift or to general operating policy. He
shall be able to write anywhere on the one page display, overwriting or deleting
messages as desired.
4.16.2.14 The Trend Assignment display shall be provided for the assignment of any
analogue point in the system.
4.16.2.15 The Select-Log-Entry display shall enable the ACC or AuxC to display
appropriate selected entries from any of the system logs (events, alarms,
etc), with the option of including historical data, against operator-definable
selection criteria. An indication of the percentage of the log(s) searched shall be
displayed, together with facilities to halt or cancel the search.
4.16.3.1 VDU-based graphic displays shall be used to provide the operator with
information that can be easily and intuitively understood, about current
network data and the TVS SCADA system status. For maximum clarity of
presentation, consistent use of colour shall be used for all displays. In particular,
a colour change shall be used to identify different point statuses and plant data
in an alarm state.
4.16.3.3 Full use shall be made of graphical displays showing plant diagrams overlaid
with current plant data to provide the operator with rapidly understood
information for monitoring current plant status. A hierarchical system of access
to increasing detail shall be used, for example:
4.16.4.1 Tabular presentation of system data shall be based upon spreadsheets. These
shall also be used to generate periodic logging formats for printing. Tabular
displays shall include current equipment status reports.
4.16.4.2 The system shall also provide pre-formatted tabular, spread sheet and bar chart
displays of individual and related groups of signals, based upon current,
historical and calculated data.
4.16.4.3 Displays of plant running times over user selectable time periods for all
monitored plant shall be provided.
4.16.4.4 All points shall have an attribute that can be set to indicate the normal state of
the point. If set, the point descriptor shall be listed on the Off Normal display
page in reverse chronological order when the point is not in the normal state.
Other conditions that shall cause points to be listed here shall include points in
test, under manual control, alarm inhibited, etc. Points shall be removed from
the list when they resume normal status. Points entering and leaving off-normal
status shall be logged in the event list.
4.16.4.5 The operator shall be able to tag database points. Points that are tagged shall
be identified by a special symbol or code adjacent to the point display symbol.
4.16.4.6 A tag summary display shall be provided listing current tags for the complete
system or selected groups.
4.16.4.7 It shall be possible to remove tags from points from this display. At least ten tag
types shall be able to be defined by the operator, including definition of the tag
symbol, descriptor, effect of tag (e.g. inhibit control), etc.
variable axis scale. Each plot and associated axis shall be distinguished by
colour and shall have the point descriptor written adjacent to the graph.
Options to display the graph as either data points only, data points linked by
straight lines or linked by a smoothed interpolated graph shall be operator
selectable. The data shall also be able to be displayed in a tabular format
and as an ASCII character computer file suitable for insertion into a spreadsheet
or similar.
Chart origin.
Measured-variable scale.
Time scale.
Pen definition.
4.16.4.10 Timescales for trends of historical data shall be the actual time period the data
was obtained and any filtering parameters that were applied. It shall be possible
to re-scale the time axis and the measured-variable axis to enable any historical
data to be overlaid on to any other trended data. Facilities for scrolling the
trend display along the time axis shall be provided.
4.16.4.11 Operator information displays shall be provided which shall comprise: operating
instructions, general information, and equipment information and management
instructions.
4.16.5.1 A display building facility shall be provided to create, delete and modify
display pages for all the types of display described.
4.16.5.3 Both static and dynamic symbols shall be obtained from a library of symbols
with each symbol referred to by a unique identifier. Symbols shall be able to be
deleted from or created and added to the library. All workstations shall use the
same library of symbols, or a locally retained copy that is periodically updated
from the central library, when building displays. It shall be possible to construct
displays on-line without interrupting normal N-P SCADA operations.
4.16.6 Alarms
4.16.6.1 An alarm shall be generated when an analogue, binary or derived value enters a
pre defined alarm condition. To prevent spurious alarms, adjustable deadbands
on analogue alarm limits and user-definable filtering on binary alarms shall be
provided.
4.16.6.2 One line on the display page shall be reserved for the display of alarm messages
(the alarm banner). Alarms shall be classified into priority groups, for example:
When an alarm is received it shall appear flashing on the alarm banner of the
appropriate workstation as a text message, with an audible warning and flashing of the
button of the display group relating to the alarm and copy the text message into a
separate alarm text page which shall list the alarms in reverse chronological order.
When the display group button is operated, a predefined but configurable display page
shall be displayed on the workstation. Acceptance of the alarm by the operator shall
cancel the flashing display to steady, silence the alarm. The alarm banner shall
be overwritten by the next alarm message. System providing priority group
identification by colour change is preferred. The alarm text pages shall be
selectable at any time.
4.16.6.3 In addition to plant alarms, all TVS SCADA system alarms such as PLC unit
failure, communication failure etc., shall generate alarm messages.
4.16.6.4 Alarm messages shall contain date and time - time tagged with time in hours,
minutes and seconds, and milliseconds for high resolution alarms, point
identifier, signal value, alarm message text and priority group.
4.16.6.5 An unacknowledged alarm and an alarm acknowledged but with the condition
not reset shall be distinguished by colour and by various groups of characters
flashing. Reset alarms shall be steady.
4.16.6.6 All alarm attributes shall be authorised operator adjustable while online.
4.16.6.7 Alarms for analogue database points, both monitored and calculated, shall have
two independently pre-set but adjustable alarm limits for both high level and
low level excursions outside the normal operating range and for rate of change,
together with a pre-set but adjustable deadband on each threshold.
4.16.6.8 Analogue alarm messages shall also display both the current value and the limit
being violated.
4.16.6.9 When the analogue point value returns to the normal operating range, a return-
to-normal message to this effect shall be generated. The message shall indicate
the point returning to normal but without displaying the value. The audible
alarm warning shall sound for an independently pre-set but adjustable period.
4.16.6.10 When the value of a status alarm returns to normal, a return-to-normal message to
this effect shall be generated. The message shall indicate the point returning to
normal and its present state. The audible alarm warning shall sound for an
independently pre-set but adjustable period.
4.16.6.12 Alarm filtering shall be provided to avoid unnecessary and uncalled for alarms.
(1) Time delay - pre-set but adjustable time delay on-entry to the Alarm
State before the alarm is raised.
(2) Alarm blocking - facility to inhibit alarms, at a particular workstation or
4.16.6.13 A date line shall be inserted in the alarm list to divide up the alarms into days.
4.16.6.14 The Contractor shall provide sufficient non-volatile memory to hold all alarms
occurring over a 4 week period and shall provide, as part of the software, an
operator prompt to archive alarm details and an in-built alarm to advise the
operator when the non-volatile alarm store reaches 90% of its capacity.
4.16.7.1 A central logging system shall be provided to record the following events:
Events shall be listed in true reverse chronological order with the latest event at the top
of page-1, while at least the most recent 500events shall be available for immediate
display. It shall be possible for the operator to select 'page reverse
chronological order' where the pages are in reverse chronological order but the
alarms on the pages are in chronological order. A further 1,000 events shall be
available for delayed display. The date, time of occurrence and an event
descriptor shall be displayed for each event. Additionally, the operator ID shall
be recorded for each operator-initiated event.
Terminal unit clocks with the Master clock at the OCC , so that events can be
accurately time tagged by the Terminal units. Tests shall be carried out as part
of the Factory Acceptance Tests to confirm compliance with this requirement
and particularly to verify correct sequencing of large quantities of high-speed
alarms detected over several sites. The TVS SCADA system master clock shall
be synchronised to the AGRA METRO master clock system, by using the
interface provided at the OCC.
4.16.7.3 Facilities shall be provided for generating printed reports. The reports shall be
operator configurable and shall enable any of the information in any of the
display groups to be printed out, either on demand or on a scheduled basis.
4.16.7.4 Flexibility of report content and layout shall be provided by the capability to
build up reports from the pages of one or more display groups based upon
current, historical or calculated data.
4.16.7.5 Reports shall include pre-formatted routine logs of plant data, scheduled by
date, day, month, defined period, etc. or on demand.
4.16.7.6 Printed schedules shall also be able to be generated when requested for routine
maintenance of the monitored equipment. The schedules shall be based upon
the manufacturers' service data and the elapsed running time/operations data
for the equipment. The Contractor shall liase with the Contractor supplying the
respective equipment to obtain the relevant data for inputting into the TVS
SCADA system to derive the Schedules.
4.16.8.3 Calculated values shall be stored in the database as a point and shall be
equivalent to point data retrieved from terminal units.
4.16.8.4 The capability for the operator to enter data manually shall be provided, by
forcing a point status or analogue value or by other means, for use in
calculations, printing on logs, and presentation on workstation displays. Forced
points shall display the current value being used by the system. The operator
shall be able to suspend calculation of any calculated value in the system.
4.16.8.5 Measured, calculated, and manually entered data shall be clearly distinguished
in displays, logs, etc.
4.16.8.6 Both Boolean logic and numerical calculation facilities shall be provided. The
number of calculated points available shall be at least equal to the number of
field-derived points.
4.16.8.7 The operator shall be able to enter a new value for any system variable from any
display on which it is shown. Input values shall be confirmed as consistent and
reasonable. Input errors shall be identified to the operator with guidance given
on rectifying the error. Changes to system variables shall be recorded on the
event log.
4.16.8.8 Manually overriding a calculated or measured variable shall suspend the normal
updating process for that variable until the operator removes the manual
override.
4.16.9.1 To access the system, the operator shall log-on using a security access code that
shall be masked on the display when being entered. Codes shall be assigned to
individual operators based upon the following suggested access levels:
4.16.9.2 It shall be possible to suppress any or all of the access security features at each
level but only from the highest level.
4.16.9.3 If no terminal activity is detected for a user-defined period, access shall time
out.
4.16.9.4 Log-in and log-out of all users shall be recorded by date, time and user ID on the
event list, as shall any configuration changes to the system.
4.17.1 The system shall be considered for test purposes to have a Normal operating
state and an Avalanche operating state. These are considered for test purposes to
be representative of typical states however it shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor to undertake his own estimation of the activity on the system and to
provide sufficient capacity to cater for normal and heavily loaded cases.
4.17.3.3 Maximum time to update an analogue input from it passing out of its ‘jitter’
range at PLC to completion of display at a workstation. Normal Operation in 5s.
Under avalanche conditions, Operation in 10s.
4.17.3.5 Maximum time to initiate a 'select' command and receive the check back
acknowledgement from the PLC at the Control Room workstation. Normal
Operation in 1s. Under avalanche conditions, Operation in 3s.
4.17.3.7 Worst case time includes the simultaneous execution of batch reports. These
reports shall carried out as a background task and shall not affect the operation
of the system in any respect.
4.17.3.8 Maximum time from any keystroke to a reaction by the system (e.g. VDU echo).
Normal Operation in < 0.3s. Under avalanche conditions, Operation in < 0.5s.
4.17.3.9 Maximum time from last keystroke in a transaction to some form of display to
user to indicate that the system is responding. Normal Operation in <0.5s.
Under avalanche conditions, Operation in 1s.
4.17.3.10 Maximum time from last keystroke to complete display of most complex base
picture. Normal Operation in 1s. Under avalanche conditions, Operation in 2s.
4.17.3.11 Maximum time from last keystroke to complete display of a VDU picture with
a minimum of 10 live points. Normal Operation in 1.s. Under avalanche
conditions, Operation in 2s.
4.17.3.13 Maximum time for a server which is in standby mode to reach full operational
mode. Normal Operation in 1s. Worst Case Operation in 3s.
4.17.3.14 Maximum time for a master server which is totally shut down to reach full
operational mode. Normal Operation in 2 min. Worst Case Operation in 5 min
4.17.3.15 The maximum time from request for a report to be printed, where it only
involves look-ups from the database for a maximum of 1000 printed records,
even during polling and alarm conditions shall be 10 min.
4.17.3.16 The maximum time to refresh any input status shall be stated in the DS by the
Contractor and approved by the Employer’s Representative, however the
maximum interval for updating of any input status shall not be more than 3
minutes
4.17.3.17 Printing or trending functions shall not degrade the performance of the N-P
SCADA system as outlined above.
4.17.4.1 The TVS SCADA system shall meet the performance criteria in three broad
categories viz. Response, Loading & Capacity and Accuracy & resolution
4.17.4.2 The CPU at any server shall not be busy for more than the following proportion
of time measured over any 5 min period. Normal Loading 35%. Worst Case
Loading 70%.
4.17.4.3 The disc capacity at any server shall not be filled to more than the following
proportion of capacity. Normal Loading 35%. Worst Case Loading 50%.
4.18.1 TVS SCADA shall have an internal clock synchronised to the Master Clock
System provided as part of FOTS for the time and date information. The
internal clock shall allow free running in case of loss of signal from the
Master Clock. On restoration of the Master Clock, the internal clock of the TVS
SCADA shall synchronise back to the Master Clock system.
4.18.2 Maximum time difference between the clocks in any two devices at the same
location shall be 10 milli-seconds.
4.18.3 Maximum time difference between the clock at any PLC and that at any server
shall be 10 milli-seconds.
4.19 Accuracy
4.19.1 Maximum error of analogue signals from the input to the Analogue to Digital
Converter (ADC) at the PLC to value stored or displayed at master server shall
be 0.1%.
4.19.2 The event time tag shall have a resolution of ten mili-seconds.
same facilities as provided for current data, except that the time period shall be
user definable. Displays generated from historical data from different time
periods shall be able to be overlaid on one another and overlaid on displays of
current data.
4.20.2 Historical data shall be able to be manipulated as if it were current data, namely
be usable in calculations and on tabular, trend, graphic, spread sheet and bar
chart displays. Data stored on multiple bulk storage media cartridges shall be
able to be analysed, with the system providing prompts for cartridge changes.
4.20.3 The Control Centre operator shall be able to define the signals assigned to the
historical database. It shall be possible for the operator to set up calculations
based upon historical data e.g. averages, maximum values, minimum values,
totals etc., over a defined time period.
4.20.4 The ability to display formatted current data alongside independently formatted
historical data shall be provided.
4.21.1.1 Communications between the OCC TVS SCADA main server and the PLCs to
be provided The Contractor shall supply and install as part of this system
suitable interfaces to the termination points provided at each station.
4.21.1.3 The communication cables shall be able to share troughs and tray / trunking
with cables for other communications services.
4.21.1.4 Communication software in each PLC or workstation node on the network shall
enable peer-to-peer operation, such that failure of any node shall not affect
other nodes on the network.
4.21.1.5 The transmission data rate shall be determined by the Contractor based on the
required response times (see clause 4.17 above).
4.21.1.7 The healthy operation of all PLCs shall be verified at intervals not exceeding
30 seconds. PLC or communication link failure shall be displayed on the
appropriate workstations as a system alarm.
4.21.2.1 Local TVS SCADA communications links from the PLC ‘s within stations
shall be provided as part of the TVS SCADA system. All cabling from the
PLC’s up to the Interface Cabinet terminals for the equipment being
monitored shall be supplied and installed by the Contractor under this Contract.
4.21.2.2 Local communication systems shall comprise dedicated communication cables
suitable for the environment, run locally within each station and run to all field
equipment Interface Cabinet terminals. Local communication cables shall be
able to share troughs and tray / trunking with cables for other station services.
4.21.2.3 In the event of a failure of the main communications system, local operation
between the PLCs and the equipment to be monitored at each station shall be
maintained. Updating of the central database at the OCC shall take place
immediately on restoration of the communications link.
TVS SCADA system. The Contractor shall supply and install as part of this
system suitable interfaces to the termination points provided at each equipment
server computer or workstation.
4.22.3 The communication cables shall be able to share troughs and tray / trunking
with cables for other communications services.
5 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
5.1.1 It is envisioned that the TVS SCADA displays will take the form of separate
workstations integrated alongside other workstations for other systems such as
the TCS, PA/PIDS, CCTV, Radio and Telephone systems
5.1.2. The results of the Ergonomic Study shall be presented to the Employer’s
Representative for review with the preliminary design of the OCC theatre layout
and list of proposed equipment for each operators position.
In particular the design and positioning of the mimic displays within the OCC shall be
such that the information of interest to each operator is visible from their normal
position. Larger characters shall be used for legends, which require to be read
from further than the first position from the mimic display.
5.1.3. The Ergonomic Study will therefore not be considered as complete unless it is
accompanied by a study of the actual functional information requirements of
each operator’s workstation.
5.2.1 The workstation screen displays at the OCC shall be identical except where
they describe the location of the operator within the overall system.
5.2.3 All screen graphic display layouts shall be submitted to the Employer's
Representative for review initially in the form of drawings followed by
representative screen shots for each display.
5.2.5 The basic functions capable of being undertaken, using the monitored and
historically recorded data from the field equipment, on the TVS SCADA
workstation displays are tabulated below:
Category Functions
1) Status display of units Displaying position symbol of units with shape, colour,
flickering
Category Functions
Monitor and 2) Fault display Displaying position symbol of units with shape, colour,
Supervision flickering
3) Telemetry value display Displaying major telemetry values of voltage, current etc.
Category Functions
Miss-operation
preventive Check
Annual Report
Message summary record Reporting and printing out a message list, supported by
sorting and editing functions based on specific factors,
such as time and facilities.
Category Functions
Measurement and 1) Trend graph display Measuring of the telemetry items (instantaneous or
Statistical integral values) according to the measuring period,
Function displaying on the screen in the form of trend graphs.
Right-of –operation
supervision and setting.
Security protection by log-on password checks
Security protection (operators, System managers, Programmers).
5.2.6 All field equipment interfaces shall be capable of being designed such that it
shall be possible to transfer data both to and from the TVS SCADA over
individual terminals using voltage free contacts and analogue transducers.
5.2.7 Where Binary (ON / OFF two state) signals are to be transmitted then the
equipment on the side of the interface receiving the information shall provide
the power supply and the equipment on the sending side shall provide the
voltage free contacts.
5.2.8 Where Analogue signals are to be transmitted then the equipment on the side
of the interface sending the information, shall provide the power supply.
5.2.9 The parameters to be monitored for the different field equipment systems are
described in the attached Appendices W to Z.
5.2.10 The field equipment suppliers may propose to use a digital serial link instead of
binary and / or analogue signals. In this case they shall propose a protocol,
which complies with a recognised, open, publicly available standard. The
TVS SCADA Contractor shall attempt to make use of any such digital interface
proposal, which matches the capabilities of the equipment he proposes.
5.2.11 The TVS SCADA Contractor shall supply and install all cabling,
surge/lightning protection devices, cable routes, glands, cable supports and
cable markers from his equipment up to the terminals within the Interface
Cubicle supplied by others in the equipment room where the Interface Cabinet
is installed.
5.2.12 The TVS SCADA Contractor shall undertake the lead in defining the actual
data points to be transmitted across the field interface by providing a format
for interface tables to be filled in by the field equipment supplier. The field
equipment supplier shall be responsible for providing the information required
including, but not limited to, nominating the terminal numbering, interface
type (binary, analogue, etc.) data nomenclature and, for digital serial links,
message protocol including headers, error detection and data layout within the
message packets.
5.3.1 Within the OCC, the major status interfaces are with the network management
processors for other systems also supplied by the other Contractor.
5.3.2 The Contractor shall determine the necessary inter processor links and data
transfer protocols. It is preferred that only one type of inter processor link and
data transfer protocol is used within the OCC equipment room. A network-
based solution based on TCP/IP network addressing and protocols is preferred.
5.3.3 The Contractor shall propose a complete list of all the inter processor links and
data transfer protocols within the OCC for review by the Employer’s
Representative as part of the conceptual system design process.
5.4.1 The Contractor shall undertake an interfacing process with the contractors
supplying the field equipment to identify the final number and form of data
items to be monitored and the necessary form of controls to be transmitted to
the field equipment to initiate and confirm transfer of data to the TVS SCADA.
5.4.2 The attached drawing “Control System Block Diagram” shows a typical
arrangement of control and indication links at a filed location.
5.4.3 The items to be transmitted over the TVS SCADA include, but are not
limited to, the entries in the following clauses.
5.4.4.1 The following items for each station shall be monitored and abnormal
conditions shall be alarmed:
5.4.5.1 The following items for each station shall be monitored and abnormal
conditions shall be alarmed:
Operation and status of pump and water levels in seepage sumps and
other tanks.
Alarm in case a pump or a DG set has not run during the last seven days.
5.4.6.1 Sufficient indications of plant state shall be logged and transmitted to the OCC
to permit a full analysis of plant running / fault conditions and also to provide
adequate indication in the OCC that all operational and safety related
equipment are operating in desired manner.
5.4.6.2 The following list identifies some, but not necessarily all items, which shall
be monitored in the OCC or SCR, for which abnormal conditions shall be
alarmed.
(1) The status of the local control switch and starter power isolator switch
shall be monitored to ensure that fans are operable from the SCR.
(2) Station return air fans / trackway exhaust fans, air handling unit fans
and associated dampers.
5.4.6.3 The condition of the following points shall be monitored and measured, and
coded values transmitted.
5.4.6.3.1 See also the contents of Appendix X for the items in particular to be monitored
at OCC.
The TVS Contractor shall develop operating scenarios for normal, congested
and emergency situations and shall provide control sequencing to provide for
safety of equipment and passengers during emergency situations especially
during evacuation of passengers.
The local control system for the TVS shall be designed to receive control mode
commands from OCC, to control the TVS equipment to the desired conditions
and report equipment status, including operation alarms, to the OCC via N-P
SCADA and to the Ventilation Control Panels (VCP) in the local SCR.
Local information transfer within the TVS equipment and with other systems
on the station will be the responsibility of the relevant Contractors and will not
make use of the N-P SCADA system.
The control and monitoring of the TVS equipment at the OCC shall be via the N- P
SCADA. The TVS Contractor will provide the data necessary so that the
following functions can be performed by the Auxiliary System Controller
(AuxC) using the N-P SCADA workstation at the OCC:
To provide operating command modes and set points to the TVS Local
Sequence Controllers.
To indicate and log the operating status and alarm conditions of the
TVFs, TBFs, TEFs and their associated dampers, tunnel ventilation
system bypass and isolation dampers, MCCs and emergency stop push
button.
To provide remote control for the TVFs, TBFs, TEFs and their
associated dampers.
5.4.8.3.2 The TVS Contractor will provide necessary hardware, software, data, etc., for
each station so that the following control and monitoring functions for the TVS
can be performed:
5.4..8.3.3 Local Sequential Controller (LSC) by the TVS Contractor shall be provided in the
TVS equipment room of each station to maintain the normal operation of the
TVS at the station One LSC shall be provided in the TVS room one at each end
of the station to control the TVS equipment. Principal functions of the LSCs
shall include but not limited to the following:
To monitor the status and alarm indications of all TVS equipment and
provide automatic changeover to the standby or idling equipment whilst
retaining flashing indications for the malfunctioned equipment at the
Local Controls. The LSCs shall be able to activate or reset buzzers at
the associated Local Control Panel upon alarm condition.
To monitor the status and alarm indications of all TVS and associated
equipment and report any change of status to TVS SCADA and the
Programming and Maintenance (PM) terminals.
To perform automatic start-up of the TVS plant in the morning and shut
down at night.
To log and report alarms of analogue signals which have exceeded pre-
set high/low or rate of change limits.
6.1.1 The Contractor shall supply and install all materials including but not limited to
brackets, supports and execute all other works needed for supporting and routing
all cabling and wiring relating to TVS SCADA. The Civil Structural
Contractors will make provisions in structures to accommodate the fastenings of
the Contractor. The Contractor shall carry out the necessary interfacing with
the civil structural Contractors in respect of the provisions for passage of cables
and wiring.
6.1.2 Where cables cross the track or are in any part external to cable trough routes,
then they shall be suitably protected. Advantage shall be taken, in consultation
with the Civil Structural Contractors, to incorporate such additional protection
into the basic construction of the concrete structures. To this end, the
Contractor shall establish the necessary liaison within 30 days of award of
contract.
6.1.3 Upon completion of cable installation the Contractor shall make good all
structural surfaces damaged by his installation and shall in addition seal all
openings in accordance with the necessary fire and moisture barrier ratings
appropriate for the structure. As a minimum the sealing shall be smoke and
vermin proof, made of non-degrading materials and shall not damage the cables
or penetrating items either directly or by causing a stress due to expansion and
contraction leading to fatigue failure.
6.2.1 All cables except main power supply cables, entering or leaving equipment rooms
and wayside apparatus boxes shall be terminated in order of their core number
on combined terminal/disconnection or terminal/fuse links. Each wire shall be
capable of being disconnected and isolated without removing the wire itself.
These links shall be easily accessible for inspection and test. Each link or
terminal shall be identified with the designation of the circuit it carries.
6.2.2 All electronic equipment shall comply, as a minimum, with IEC 571 or
equivalent international specification. All components used shall be purchased
from suppliers complying with internationally recognised quality assurance and
reliability certification procedures. The Contractor shall declare in his offer the
specifications to which he proposes to comply.
6.2.3 Printed circuit boards shall be used to mount electronic components. The boards
shall be of sufficient thickness to ensure mechanical rigidity. They shall not be
the sole support for connectors, fascia panels, handles etc. Printed edge
connectors shall not be used.
6.2.5 The design of electrical or electronic circuits and units shall be such as to
compensate for all likely changes in value parameter during the operational life
6.2.6 Where built-in indicators or meters are provided for maintenance and fault
location purposes, then any associated adjustments or controls shall be located
such that they can be manipulated and the result observed simultaneously by
one person. Built-in indicators shall be provided where frequent observation is
required or where portable test equipment is not applicable.
6.2.7 All metal enclosures shall be provided with an earthing terminal. The
Contractor shall ensure that all the equipment is properly and adequately
earthed in accordance with safety standards.
7.1 General
Installation Test
7.2.1 As the initial stage of the FAT and final stage of Contractor’s System
Integration Testing, the total system shall be set up in a manner to
simulate normal operating conditions, switched on, and allowed to
operate continuously.
(2) The test shall run for at least 200 hours continuously. It need
not be permanently manned throughout this period provided
7.2.3 If any failures occur, full details shall be recorded for the
Employer’s Representative. The Contractor shall investigate the cause
of all failures and provide evidence that there are no inherent
design, or manufacturing faults. The Employer’s Representative will
then decide whether the test may be restarted or shall be repeated.
7.2.4 The Contractor may propose to the Employer’s Representative that this
soak test period may be broken down into shorter periods, if
compatible with the function of the equipment, and/or less than the
whole equipment may be set up or the test may be eliminated
completely. The Contractor may proceed with this reduced soak test
regime upon receipt of a certificate of no objection from the
Employer’s Representative.
7.2.5 The final function performed as part of the soak test shall consist of
a comprehensive series of measurements and observations of the
characteristics and performance of the equipment to demonstrate that
no unacceptable deterioration has occurred as a result of previous tests.
The equipment shall be tested while supplied at normal supply
voltages and subsequently with worst combinations of supply
voltages.
7.3.1 The Factory Acceptance Test (FAT) is specified in the GS and the PS.
This test may be broken down into two parts.
7.3.3 A Subsystem FAT shall include the inspection, hardware test and
software test of any clearly identifiable Subsystem prior to use as a
component in a System test.
7.3.4 System FAT - To check that the totality of the equipment supplied
under the Contract performs in accordance with the Contract
requirements.
7.3.5 The equipment shall be complete at the start of the tests and no
interchange of modules or equipment shall be allowed during the FAT.
7.3.7 No repairs or adjustments shall be carried out during the test period
unless agreed by both parties.
a) CPU tests.
e) Peripheral tests.
7.3.11 Communications
(1) During the functional tests, every function specified for the
system in the Design Specification shall be thoroughly tested.
Both positive and negative tests shall be carried out.
(2) The remaining PLCs for the fully extended system may be
represented by suitable simulations. However, all simulations
must be substantiated to show that they provide a realistic
simulation of the associated PLCs and the master server/PLC
communication process.
7.3.14.2 If the Subsystem and System FATs are not immediately consecutive
it may be necessary to repeat portions of the Subsystem FAT to
confirm that no changes have taken place before the System FAT.
7.3.14.3 It is required that the results of the test shall demonstrate System
reliability and availability consistent with the values specified and
those guaranteed by the Contractor. The test shall be carried out at
the Contractor's premises. Upon satisfactory completion of the test, the
System will be ready for delivery to site.
TYPE
Sr.
DESCRIPTION SIGNAL TYPE
No AI AO DI DO
TYPE
Sr.
DESCRIPTION SIGNAL TYPE
No AI AO DI DO
Supply/Return Damper
40 Trackway Damper Open/Close Command 230 VAC 1
41 Trackway Damper Open Position VFC 1
42 Trackway Damper Close Position VFC 1
43 Trackway Damper Local/Remote Switch Status VFC 1
Nozzle Damper
40 Trackway Damper Open/Close Command 230 VAC 1
41 Trackway Damper Open Position VFC 1
42 Trackway Damper Close Position VFC 1
43 Trackway Damper Local/Remote Switch Status VFC 1
TYPE
Sr.
No DESCRIPTION SIGNAL TYPE
AI AO DI DO
TYPE
Sr.
DESCRIPTION SIGNAL TYPE
No AI AO DI DO
Air Compressor 1
1 AIR COMPRESSURE RUNNING FEED BACK VFC 1
2 AIR COMPRESSURE TRIP VFC 1
Air Compressor 2
AIR COMPRESSURE RUNNING FEED BACK VFC 1
AIR COMPRESSURE TRIP VFC 1
Air Compressor
1 Air Compressor Fault VFC 1
TYPE
Sr.
DESCRIPTION SIGNAL TYPE
No AI AO DI DO
TYP
E
Sr.
DESCRIPTION SIGNAL TYPE
No AI AO DI DO
Nozzle Damper
40 Trackway Damper Open/Close Command 230 VAC 1
41 Trackway Damper Open Position VFC 1
42 Trackway Damper Close Position VFC 1
43 Trackway Damper Local/Remote Switch Status VFC 1
Tunnel Temperature Monitoring
1 UP Line Space Temperature 4-20 mA 1
2 DN Line Space Temperature 4-20 mA 1
Trackway Exhaust Fan No 1
1 TEF ON/OFF Command 230 VAC 1
2 Forward Air Flow status VFC 1
3 Run status VFC 1
4 Local/Remote Switch Status VFC 1
5 Emergency Stop Button Position VFC 1
6 Motor Trip VFC 1
7 Winding Thermal over load Alarm VFC 1
8 Fan Speedswitch Alarm VFC 1
9 Motor Current 4-20 mA 1
10 FID CLOSE Position VFC 1
12 FID Open Position VFC 1
Group Bypass Command 230 VAC 1
TYP
E
Sr.
DESCRIPTION SIGNAL TYPE
No AI AO DI DO
ASS 1 typical
Sr. SIGNAL TYPE
No. DESCRIPTION TYPE AI AO DI DO
MDB-100 Incoming Circuit Breaker
1 Incoming Breaker Local/Remote Status VFC 1
2 Incoming Breaker Trip Alarm VFC 1
3 Incoming Breaker Close Status VFC 1
4 Incoming Breaker Open Status VFC 1
5 Incoming Breaker Open/ CLOSE Command 230VAC 1
6 Incoming Breaker Close Command 1
7 Incoming Feeder Line Voltage 4-20 mA 1
8 Incoming Feeder Line Current 4-20 mA 1
9 Incoming Feeder Protection Relay Operation Status VFC 1
10 Incoming Feeder Volt Ampere (VA) 4-20 mA 1
11 Incoming Feeder Frequency (Hz) 4-20 mA 1
12 Incoming Feeder Power Factor (PF) 4-20 mA 1
13 Incoming Feeder Kilo Watt Hour (KWhr) 4-20 mA 1
14 Incoming Feeder Volt Ampere Reactive (VAR) 4-20 mA 1
15 Tie Breaker Close Status - ASS1 TO ASS2 VFC 1
16 Tie Breaker Open Status - ASS1 TO ASS2 VFC 1
15 Tie Breaker Close Status - ASS1 TO ASS3 VFC 1
16 Tie Breaker Open Status - ASS1 TO ASS3 VFC 1
17 Bus-coupler Breaker Close Status VFC 1
18 Bus-coupler Breaker Open Status VFC 1
Pumps/Escalator DB-150 Outgoing C.B.
1 Outgoing Breaker Local/Remote Status VFC 1
2 Outgoing Breaker Trip Alarm VFC 1
3 Outgoing Breaker Close Status VFC 1
4 Outgoing Breaker Open Status VFC 1
5 Outgoing Breaker Open/ CLOSE Command 24VDC 1
6 Outgoing Feeder Line Voltage 4-20 mA 1
7 Outgoing Feeder Line Current 4-20 mA 1
8 Outgoing Feeder Protection Relay Operation Status VFC 1
Spare Feeder
1 Outgoing Breaker Local/Remote Status VFC 1
2 Outgoing Breaker Trip Alarm VFC 1
3 Outgoing Breaker Close Status VFC 1
4 Outgoing Breaker Open Status VFC 1
5 Outgoing Breaker Open/ CLOSE Command 24VDC 1
6 Outgoing Feeder Line Voltage 4-20 mA 1
7 Outgoing Feeder Line Current 4-20 mA 1
8 Outgoing Feeder Protection Relay Operation Status VFC 1
Spare Feeder
1 Outgoing Breaker Local/Remote Status VFC 1
2 Outgoing Breaker Trip Alarm VFC 1
3 Outgoing Breaker Close Status VFC 1
4 Outgoing Breaker Open Status VFC 1
5 Outgoing Breaker Open/ CLOSE Command 24VDC 1
6 Outgoing Feeder Line Voltage 4-20 mA 1
7 Outgoing Feeder Line Current 4-20 mA 1
8 Outgoing Feeder Protection Relay Operation Status VFC 1
Spare Feeder
1 Outgoing Breaker Local/Remote Status VFC 1
2 Outgoing Breaker Trip Alarm VFC 1
3 Outgoing Breaker Close Status VFC 1
4 Outgoing Breaker Open Status VFC 1
5 Outgoing Breaker Open/ CLOSE Command 24VDC 1
6 Outgoing Feeder Line Voltage 4-20 mA 1
7 Outgoing Feeder Line Current 4-20 mA 1
8 Outgoing Feeder Protection Relay Operation Status VFC 1
Spare Feeder
1 Outgoing Breaker Local/Remote Status VFC 1
2 Outgoing Breaker Trip Alarm VFC 1
3 Outgoing Breaker Close Status VFC 1
4 Outgoing Breaker Open Status VFC 1
5 Outgoing Breaker Open/ CLOSE Command 24VDC 1
UPS System
Spare Feeder
Spare Feeder
Spare Feeder
Spare Feeder
UPS System
TYP
E
S. DESCRIPTION SIGNAL
No TYPE AI AO D DO
I
Staircase Pressurization Fan, SPF-02
6 Trip VFC 1
TYPE
S. DESCRIPTION SIGNAL TYPE A AO D DO
No
I I
DB-140 Incoming Circuit Breaker
6 Trip VFC 1
TYPE
S. DESCRIPTION SIGNAL TYPE A AO D DO
No
I I
3 Motor Running Feedback VFC 1
6 Trip VFC 1
6 Trip VFC 1
6 Trip VFC 1
S. TYP
DESCRIPT SIGNAL E
No ION TYPE
. A AO D DO
I I
DB-230 Incoming Circuit Breaker
6 Trip VFC 1
6 Trip VFC 1
TYP
S. DESCRIPT SIGNAL E
No ION TYPE
. A AO D DO
I I
2 Air Flow status VFC 1
S. TYP
DESCRIPTION SIGNAL E
No TYPE
. A AO D DO
I I
2 Motor # 01 Air Flow status VFC 1
S. TYP
DESCRIPT SIGNAL E
No ION TYPE
. A AO D DO
I I
DB-130 Incoming Circuit Breaker
6 Trip VFC 1
6 Trip VFC 1
S. TYP
DESCRIPT SIGNAL E
No ION TYPE
. A AO D DO
I I
2 Air Flow status VFC 1
S. TYP
DESCRIPT SIGNAL E
No ION TYPE
. A AO D DO
I I
2 Motor # 01 Air Flow status VFC 1
5 Trip VFC 1
S. TYPE
SIGNAL
No TYPE A AO D DO
. I I
MDB-170/270 Incoming 1 Circuit Breaker
S. TYP
SIGNAL E
No TYPE
. A AO D DO
I I
2 Outgoing Breaker Trip Alarm VFC 1
S. TYP
SIGNAL E
No TYPE
. A AO D DO
I I
Condensing Water Pump-01 Outgoing CB
S. TYP
SIGNAL E
No TYPE
. A AO D DO
I I
8 Outgoing Feeder Protection Relay Operation VFC 1
Status
S. TYP
SIGNAL E
No TYPE
. A AO D DO
I I
Spare Outgoing Circuit Breaker
6 Trip VFC 1
6 Trip VFC 1
6 Trip VFC 1
S. TYP
SIGNAL E
No TYPE
. A AO D DO
I I
2 Flow Status VFC 1
6 Trip VFC 1
6 Trip VFC 1
6 Trip VFC 1
6 Trip VFC 1
6 Trip VFC 1
S. TYP
SIGNAL E
No TYPE
. A AO D DO
I I
7 Motor Current 4-20mA 1
Temperature Monitoring
Chiller, CH-01
Chiller, CH-02
S. TYP
SIGNAL E
No TYPE
. A AO D DO
I I
6 Chiller Refrigerant Pressure Low/High Alarm Datalink
Chiller, CH-03
S. TYP
SIGNAL E
No TYPE
. A AO D DO
I I
DG Set-2
S. SIGNA
DESCRIPT TYP
No. ION L E
TYPE A A D D
I O I O
1 Outgoing Breaker Local/Remote Status VFC 1
6 Power 4-20 mA 1
6 Power 4-20 mA 1
6 Power VFC 1
6 Power
S. SIGNA
DESCRIPT TYP
No. ION L E
TYPE A A D D
I O I O
5 Motor Current 4-20 mA 1
6 Power VFC 1
6 Power VFC 1
S. SIGNA
DESCRIPT TYP
No. ION L E
TYPE A A D D
I O I O
MOTORISED OPRATED VALVE
2 Conductivity 4-20 mA 1
BS NORTH PLC
Seepage Pump-01
Seepage Pump-02
Seepage Pump-03
Sewage Pump-01
Sewage Pump-02
SUMP Pump
BS SOUTH PLC
Seepage Pump-04
Seepage Pump-05
Seepage Pump-06
Sewage Pump-03
Sewage Pump-04
SUMP Pump
AHU Capacity
As per BOQ
Casing
1. Fan Section
Access Door Access door to be provided in fan section & mixing box.
Damper
Type Non Fire Rated Parallel Blade (Refer the Data Sheet For Damper)
Outlet One at the discharge of each fan Motor Operated Damper (MOD)
Drain
Fan Section
Fan
Fan Section
Fan
Drive
Motor
Coil Section
Coil
Filter Section
Filter
Reference Code / Standard ARI 550/590(latest), ASME sec VIII Div 1, ANSI B 31.5
Refrigerant R – 410A/R-32
1. Compressor
2. Chiller
5. Soft starter
Unit Protection of the unit. This prevents unauthorized access, yet provides free air
flow. (Factory-mounted)
Compressor
Anti Friction Type Cylindrical & Ball Bearings for Axial & Radial loads as per
Bearings
service life as per AGRA METRO specifications.
No of Refrigerant Circuits 2
Condenser
Air cooled, either Unimetal construction or epoxy coated ( post coated dipped
Type condenser coil at factory) cooper tubes with aluminium fins to avoid galvanic
corrosion
Chiller
Water
Tube
Control Panel
Panel
System Protection
Notes:
1. Chillers shall be as per AGRA METRO specifications. Any deviations to the specifications should be
pointed out at tendering stage.
2. Chiller Motor starter shall be Soft starter without transient type.
3. Above data is not by way of limitation. Whatever is required for making the unit complete to meet the
intent of specifications shall be deemed to have been included in the scope of work.
4. Flexible Connections at chiller shall be provided.
5. Over current, phase reversal, single phasing protections and KW meter shall be provided.
6. Refrigerant sensor shall be installed.
7. Performance rating.
8. The unit shall be selected for the lowest operating power consumption and noise level. Computer selected
capacity rating and power consumption with operating points clearly indicated, shall be submitted with the
tender as per technical data specified in the tender on full and partial load and shall be verified at the time of
testing and commissioning of the installation. The gear losses should be included in the IKW/TR figures
indicated by the bidders. As energy conservation is today’s theme, it is expected from each bidder to offer
highly energy efficient machines. Necessary credit of preference will be given on this account. Power
consumption shall be computed from measurements of incoming voltage and input current.
9. Capacity and power consumption shall be computed from the measurements of incoming voltage, input
current, temperature (inlet & outlet) and water flow rate. Necessary provision shall be kept for providing
flow meter and transducers required for computing capacity.
10. The supplier has to confirm that the IKW/TR data for the chilling unit submitted by him has been selected
at the specified operating parameters and at constant condenser entering water temperature.
11. Also the machine shall be rated for actual capacity at specified conditions.
12. Only ARI / Eurovent certified chilling machine shall be acceptable and the computer performance sheet.
duly certified as per ARI / Eurovent shall be submitted along with the technical submittal.
Reference Code / Standard ARI 550/590(latest), ASME sec VIII Div 1, ANSI B 31.5
Refrigerant R – 134a
1. Compressor
2. Chiller
5. Soft Starter
Compressor
Anti Friction Type Cylindrical & Ball Bearings for Axial & Radial loads as per
Bearings
service life as per specifications.
Capacity Control Step less capacity control thru slide valve from 100% to 20% of full load.
Condenser
Water
Shell
Material Steel
Tube
Chiller
Type Flooded
Water
Shell
Material Steel
Tube
Control Panel
Control Panel
Refrigerant Pressure
Evaporator and Condenser Pressure Status
kg/cm2
Panel
System Protection
Notes:
13. Chillers shall be as per specifications. Any deviations to the specifications should be pointed out at
tendering stage.
14. Condenser & cooler shall be provided with marine boxes made of steel or cast iron for ease of cleaning.
15. Chiller Motor starter shall be VFD drive without transient type.
16. Above data is not by way of limitation. Whatever is required for making the unit complete to meet the
intent of specifications shall be deemed to have been included in the scope of work.
17. Flexible Connections at chiller and condenser shall be provided.
18. Chiller shall be equipped with antifouling device.
19. Over current, phase reversal, single phasing protections and KW meter shall be provided.
20. Refrigerant sensor shall be installed.
21. Performance rating.
22. The unit shall be selected for the lowest operating power consumption and noise level. Computer selected
capacity rating and power consumption with operating points clearly indicated, shall be submitted with the
tender as per technical data specified in the tender on full and partial load and shall be verified at the time of
testing and commissioning of the installation. The gear losses should be included in the IKW/TR figures
indicated by the bidders. As energy conservation is today’s theme, it is expected from each bidder to offer
highly energy efficient machines. Necessary credit of preference will be given on this account. Power
consumption shall be computed from measurements of incoming voltage and input current.
23. Capacity and power consumption shall be computed from the measurements of incoming voltage, input
current, temperature (inlet & outlet) and water flow rate. Necessary provision shall be kept for providing
flow meter and transducers required for computing capacity.
24. The supplier has to confirm that the IKW/TR data for the chilling unit submitted by him has been selected
at the specified operating parameters and at constant condenser entering water temperature.
25. Also the machine shall be rated for actual capacity at specified conditions.
26. Only ARI / Eurovent certified chilling machine shall be acceptable and the computer performance sheet
duly certified as per ARI / Eurovent shall be submitted along with the technical submittal.
27. The IKW/TR and NPLV values at the specified operating parameters and at a constant condenser entering
water temperature, rated in accordance with ARI-550-590/98, shall be submitted with the tender. The
values committed shall be verified at the time of installation shall be indicated at the time of submission
offer and shall be supervised by the supplier as recommended by the chilling unit manufacturer.
List of Equipment’s:
Control:
No DI DO AI AO SW
Common CW supply
7 1 TE-632AM-1+WZ 1000-5
header temperature
Note.
1. The above DI/ DO/ AI/ AO/ SW are for guide lines purpose bidders to include additional item
requirement for operation of chiller plant manager to suite the requirement and fully integrate the
equipments in the Chiller Plant room without any additional cost to METRO.
Induced Draft, Counter Flow/Cross Flow Type with Vertical Discharge, CTI
Type
CERTIFIED
Fluid Water
Fiber Reinforced Plastic (FRP) with a Sturdy Structural Hot Dipped Galvanized
Construction Material
Frame.
Connections
Regular Arrangement Suitable For Level Switch Controller And Ball Valve
Make Up
With Quick Fill Arrangement
Fan
Shaft EN-8
Heavy Duty, Self-Aligned Grease Packed bearing with moisture proof seals and
Bearing
integral slinger collars.
Motor
TEFC ̶ Induction Motor (IP– 55), EFF-1 Class or equivalent IEC standard with
Type
Service Factor of 1.15, With Weather Protection
Mounting Legs And Ladder With Hand Rails Minimum 300 mm Wide, Duly
Accessories
Treated For Corrosion, Inspection window
Paint on base frame and ladder Hot dipped Galvanized (Minimum 750 GSM)
Impeller
Material Bronze
Casing Material Cast Iron ASTM AI59 43000/ Cast Iron Gr. 200
Shaft
Connection
Direction Of Rotation Anti Clock Wise / Clock Wise From Driving End
Motor
Notes
1 Pumps shall be provided with common base frame, inertia base, spring vibration isolation pads, suction &
discharge pressure gauges with isolation valves, test and / or air vent cocks, gland drain & other accessories
as required.
2 Pumps starters shall be star delta air break type.
3 Pump head given is approximate and vendor shall do their own calculations and offer the pumps
accordingly.
4. Pump motor shall be EFF-1 or equivalent IEC standard, non-overloading over the entire operating range..
5. The pumps shall be provided with suitable coupler sleeves. The coupling shall be shielded by a dual rated
ANSIB 15.1 Section 8 and OSHA 1910.219 complaint coupling guard and contain viewing windows for
inspection of the coupling.
6. Each pump shall be factory hydrostatically tested per hydraulic institute standards.
7. The pumps shall be manufactured, assembled and tested in an ISO 9001 approved facility.
8. Each pump set shall be provided with variable frequency drive suitably interfaced with other system
components for manual/auto operation.
9. The pump logic controller suitable for controlling three pumps in parallel shall be provided.
10. Pump motor shall be non-overloading over the entire operating range.
ISO : 9906
Impeller
Material Bronze
Shaft
Connection
Direction Of Rotation Anti Clock Wise / Clock Wise From Driving End
Motor
Notes
1. Pumps shall be provided with common base frame, vibration isolation pads, suction & discharge
pressure gauges with isolation valves, test and / or air vent cocks, gland drain & other accessories as
required.
2. Pumps starters shall be star delta air break type.
3. Pump head given is approximate and vendor shall do their own calculations and offer the pumps
accordingly.
4. Pump motor shall be EFF-1 or equivalent IEC standard, non-overloaded up to the run out conditions
riding over complete curve.
Impeller
Material Bronze
Shaft
Connection
Direction Of Rotation Anti Clock Wise / Clock Wise From Driving End
Motor
Notes
5. Pumps shall be provided with common base frame, inertia base, spring vibration isolation pads, suction &
discharge pressure gauges with isolation valves, test and / or air vent cocks, gland drain & other accessories
as required.
6. Pumps starters shall be star delta air break type.
7. Pump head given is approximate and vendor shall do their own calculations and offer the pumps
accordingly.
8. Pump motor shall be EFF-1 or equivalent IEC standard, non-overloading up to cut off conditions riding over
complete curve.
Reference codes / Standards Duct Construction BS 476 PART 24, ISO 6944.
Guide Vanes At All the Bends To Be Made From The Same Material As The Duct
Traverse Joint
Bracing
0 – 450 None
Duct Accessories
Should With Stand 1.5 Times the Operating Pressure With Out Deformation Or
Joint Strength
Failure
Anchor Fastener Of Required Rating Not Less Than 2.5 Times the Load of the
Support From Wall / Ceiling
Duct Shall be used With Min Of 150 mm Length
Flanges And Supports Treated For Corrosion And Painted With Zinc Rich Paint
Paint
Of Approved Quality
Flexible Connection circular Fire Proof Material To Be Screwed Or Clip Band With Adjustable Screw Or
Spigots Toggle Fitting
Flexible Connection Rectangular Fire Proof Material To Be Flanged And Bolted With Backing Flat Or Bolted To
Ducts Mating Flange With Backing Flat
Fire Rated To Comply With BS – 476 Part 24 And ISO – 6944 Non
Duct Material
Combustible And Non Toxic As per BS – 476 Part 4 And 11
Reference Standard BS 476 Part 22 And 24, ISO – 6944 (1985), ASTME – 136 And 119
Duct Accessories
Reference codes / Standards Duct Construction BS 476 PART 24, ISO 6944/ DW 142/SMACNA
Guide Vanes At All the Bends To Be Made From The Same Material As The Duct
Traverse Joint
Bracing
0 – 450 None
Should With Stand 1.5 Times the Operating Pressure With Out Deformation Or
Joint Strength
Failure
Duct Accessories
Anchor Fastener Of Required Rating Not Less Than 2.5 times the load of the
Support From Wall / Ceiling
Duct Shall be used with min. of 150 mm Length
Flanges And Supports Treated For Corrosion And Painted With Zinc Rich Paint
Paint
Of Approved Quality
Flexible Connection circular Fire Proof Material To Be Screwed Or Clip Band With Adjustable Screw Or
Spigots Toggle Fitting
Flexible Connection Rectangular Fire Proof Material To Be Flanged And Bolted With Backing Flat Or Bolted To
Leakage Max 5% Of The Rated Air Flow Across Damper In Open Position
Blade
Pressure Drop 38 Pascal @ 10 Mtr. / sec. air velocity or as per manufacturer standard
Bearing
Note:
1. Dampers shall be factory tested for fully closed position and holding against a differential
pressure of 1000 Pa and air leakage through damper shall not exceed 0.1m³/sec/sq meter of net
Leakage Max 5% Of The Rated Air Flow Across Damper In Open Position
Blade
Reference Code / Standard ASTM B 308, UL 555, BS 476 Part 20, UL Listed
Leakage Max 5% Of The Rated Air Flow Across Damper In Open Position
Blade
Reference Code / Standard ASTM B 308, UL 555S, UL 555, BS 476 Part 20.
Leakage Max 5% Of The Rated Air Flow Across Damper In Open Position
Blade
Pressure Drop 38 Pascal @ 10 Mtr. / sec. Air Velocity (as per size)
Actuator
Motor
Notes.
1. Sleeve thickness of dampers shall be same as the frame thickness – 1.6 mm.
2. Damper frame shall have 50 mm flange.
Notes
1) Length of Attenuator shall be selected by vendor to give required insertion loss to meet the performance
criteria.
2) Insertion loss shall be checked by vendor to ensure that noise level does not exceed the specified limits at
nearest property line, inside the tunnel & Railway Platform.
3) Attenuators shall be as per specifications enclosed.
4) Vendor shall furnish data sheets of Attenuators.
Pipes
Flanges
Pipes Passing Thru Any Building Structure Will Pass Thru Pipe Sleeve. Thickness Of Pipe Sleeve will not Be less
Than The Thickness Of Passing Pipe Itself.
Pipe Entering Any Equipment Will Be Protected By The Rubber Grommet or Any Such Material
Design Velocity
Pipe
Up to 12 mm 1200 mm Spacing
20 mm – 25 mm 1800 mm Spacing
For Insulated Pipe Accessories / Drain Valves The Connections Will Be Long Enough Such That The Required
Insulation Can Be Carried Out On The Main Pipe
Insulation Will Be Done In Two Halves For Easy Removal With Effecting Adjacent Insulation
Actuators Two position or Open/Closed type shall accept 24 or 120VAC power supply.
Material
Butterfly Valves
Material
Check Valve
Construction Material
Balancing Valve
Features
Construction Material
Disc
Upper SS – 410
Lower SS – 410
Stem SS – 410
Control Valves
Construction
Body
Valve Operation With Room / Return Air Thermostat And Motor Actuator
For Chilled Water Flow Control Of The AHU At Supply / Return Water
Valve Application
Temperature As Per Chiller Data (Station wise).
Working Temperature 0 ºC to 95 ºC
Material Brass
Isolation Valve T-Handle Port Ball Valve for Flow, Return & Bypass
Range 0-50 oC
Movement SS-316
Accessories Snubber : 0.5 inch NPT (M) x 0.5 inch (F), SS-316
Tag No. Tag no. to be marked on dial with black letter. SS tag to be firmly attached.
Thermometer should be immersed in the oil well, oil well should be immersed into the water.
Movement SS-316
Accessories Snubber : 0.5 inch NPT (M) x 0.5 inch (F), SS-316
Tag No. Tag no. to be marked on dial with black letter. SS tag to be firmly attached.
Bars
Front Aluminum
Rear Aluminum
Damper
Paint Material Duly Treated for corrosion And Anti Corrosive Paint
Blower
Water
Inlet Temperature 8° C
Coil
No of Rows Four
Motor
Flow Unidirectional
Noise 70 dB (Maximum)
FAN
Material Aluminum
Motor
Notes.
1. Lifting eyes/ Flanges shall be provided for the lifting of fans.
2. Should be provided for spring isolators & to install fan as per manufacturer standard.
3. Flanges on the fans have sufficient strength to lift the fans.
4. Fans shall be provided with flexible connections (fire rated in case of fire rated) with spring
washers on both sides.
DATA SHEET FOR INSULATION MATERIAL
Reference Code / Standard BS – 476 P4, ASTME – 136, ISO – 1182, IS – 11239, BS – 4735, BS – 5422
32 Kg/m3 for glass wool and 64 Kg/m3 , 120 Kg/m3 , 160 Kg/m3 for rock wool
Material Density
(Minimum)
Thermal Conductivity 0.020 – 0.038 Kcal / Hr M 0C, BS – 4370 Part 2, DIN – 52613
Non combustible as per code BS – 476 P4, ASTM E 136, IMO A799 and DIN –
Combustion
4102, ISO – 1182
Toxic / Smoke Density Non toxic and non smoke producing as per code DIN – 4102, ISO – 5924
0.8 mm Aluminum As Per ASHRAE Standard for ducts in ECS plant rooms and
Cladding
for pipes at all locations
Insulation Thick
Supply Air duct 25 mm for Air- Conditioned areas and 50 mm inside plant rooms
Return Air duct 25 mm for Air- Conditioned areas and 50 mm inside plant rooms
High Temperature
Two Hour @ 250 °C
Operation
Acoustic Fill Fiber Glass With DETR Class ‘O’ Flame Spread
Casings To Be Formed With Either stand Up Or Lock Formed Seams With Mastic Sealant
Notes
Inlet Conditions
Pressure Atmospheric
Discharge Conditions
Pressure (Bar G) 13
Note
1) The compressors shall be mounted over horizontal Air Tank. Compressed air shall be stored in compressed Air tank prior to
entering the refrigerated dryer.
2) All components of compressor shall be installed in a sound proof enclosure to reduce the noise.
3) Pre-filter shall be provided over the enclosure for maintaining cleanliness.
4) Complete unit shall be suitable for floor mounting.
5) Other accessories like pre-filters, post filters, moisture separators etc shall be provided.
6) The complete package shall be as per specifications enclosed with the tender.
7) The motor control panel shall be incorporated with automatic daily lead lag sequence of the air compressors for optimum
efficiency operation. The compressors shall be in full-capacity standby mode, and arranged so that automatic changeover takes
place if the selected air compressor fails to start within a pre-determined length of time. On initial start-up and intermediate
increase of compressed air demand, both compressors shall operate till the correct compressed air pressure is reached. The
operation of the compressor shall be controlled through high pressure cut out or over load.
The following indicators/selection switches shall be included in the compressor motor control panel.
The compressors shall be pulsation free and the noise level generated from the machine shall not correct 75 dBA under normal
operating condition measured under field condition at a distance of 1 Meter.
External air intake pre-filters shall be fitted and details of replacement units. Their cost and useful life shall be provided with the
tender.
Inlet air to the compressor shall be taken from a dry cool location.
A warning sign 4mm thick plastic plate, with the following wording in English of character height not less than 16mm to be
added in the vicinity of the air compressors.
The Contractor shall submit the detailed format of the above warning sign for approval.
High Temperature
1 Hour @ 250 °C
Noise Attenuator
Operation
Acoustic Fill Fiber Glass With DETR Class ‘O’ Flame Spread
Casings To Be Formed With Either stand Up Or Lock Formed Seams With Mastic Sealant
Notes
The Fire Rating Of Damper Shall Have The Same Fire Rating As The
Fire Rating
Ductwork Or Wall In Which It Is Installed
Damper Free Area Not Less Than 80 % Measured To Specified Damper Size
Frame Construction Stainless Steel- 304 (50 mm flanges on both side, 3 mm thick)
Notes
1) Dampers shall be as per specifications enclosed.
2) Dampers shall be designed for operation up to air temperature of 250 deg. C. for two hour Dampers
and its components shall be capable of withstanding stresses caused by Temperature changes up to 250 deg. C. Limit
switches shall also be suitable for temperature up to 250 deg. C
Acoustic Fill Mineral wool or Fiber Glass With Class ‘O’ Flame Spread
Casings To Be Formed With Either stand Up Or Lock Formed Seams With Mastic Sealant
Notes
2) Length of noise attenuator to be determined by the Contractor based on the equipment offered and
the following:
Tunnel noise criteria is 80 dB(A) during operation of tunnel ventilation equipment.
Platform noise criteria is 75 dB(A) during operation of tunnel ventilation equipment.
Tunnel Ventilation Fan Room Noise criteria is 85 dB(A) during operation of tunnel ventilation
equipment.
External noise criteria is 55 dB(A)at nearest property line during operation of tunnel ventilation
equipment.
3) The fans shall be as per specifications enclosed. All accessories mentioned in specifications shall be
included in the tender.
DATA SHEET FOR FIRE RATED DUCT MATERIAL AND DUCT WORK
Flame and Fire Spread DETR Building Regulations – Fire safety class O
Fire duct work Manufactured to HVAC standard – DW/ 144 NFPA 90A
The fire rated ductwork shall have the same fire rating as the fire
Function
compartment through which it passes
Duct Work Installed in accordance with DW/ 144 NFPA 90A (2002)
Must retain at least 75% of its overall cross sectional area (BS – 476
Stability and Integrity
Part 24 (1987) for one hour)
Leak Test HVAC specification DW/144 SMACNA air duct leakage manual
Rivets SS-304
Anchor fastener of required rating not less than 2.5 times the load of
Support from Wall/ Ceiling
the duct shall be used with min of 150 mm length
Paint Flanges and supports treated for corrosion and painted with zinc rich
Flexible connection rectangular Fire proof material to be flanged and bolted with backing flat or
ducts bolted to mating flange with backing flat
DLP Staff
Following Staff shall be deputed during DLP Period. If required, the same shall be augmented
without any extra financial cost implication.